Cuba in The World The World in Cuba

The volume approaches Cuba as a nation that hosts a convergence of extraor-
Cuba in the World, the World

dinary global developments and, in turn, projects itself onto the world’s major
cultural, political and economic processes. From different perspectives, ranging
from architecture and music to politics and economics, the twenty-one essays
in Cuba
presented here embrace the multifaceted interactions between Cuba and foreign Essays on Cuban History, Politics and Culture
imperial strategies during the 19th century, the troublesome formation of nation-
al political cultures in the first half of the 20th century, and the multiple global
aspects of some of Cuba’s choices from the Cold War to the first decade of the
present century.
a cura di
ALESSANDRA LORINI
DUCCIO BASOSI
FUP
FIRENZE
UNIVERSITY
PRESS
strumenti
per la didattica e la ricerca
– 91 –
nuove americhe
Consiglio Scientifico
alessandra lorini (Università di Firenze, Coordinatore)

antonio annino (Università di Firenze)
Martha Canfield (Università di Firenze)
ada Ferrer (New York University)
eric Foner (Columbia University)
massimiliano Guderzo (Università di Firenze)
rick halpern (University of Toronto)
consuelo naranjo orovio (CSIC, Madrid)
ronald pruessen (University of Toronto)
Federico romero (Università di Firenze)
Margara Russotto (University of Mass. at Amherst)
Cuba in the World,
the World in Cuba
essays on cuban history, politics and culture
edited by
alessandra lorini
duccio Basosi
with a preface by
ronald pruessen
rick halpern
max Guderzo
Firenze university press

2009
cuba in the World , the World in cuba : essays on cu-
ban history , politics and culture / a cura di alessandra
lorini e duccio Basosi. – Firenze : Firenze university
press, 2009.
(strumenti per la didattica e la ricerca ; 91)
http://digital.casalini.it/9788884539625
isBn 978-88-8453-971-7 (print)

isBn 978-88-8453-962-5 (online)
progetto grafico di alberto pizarro Fernández
© 2009 Firenze university press

università degli studi di Firenze
Firenze university press
Borgo albizi, 28, 50122 Firenze, italy
http://www.fupress.com/
Printed in Italy
Contents
Preface 9
R. Pruessen, R. Halpern, M. Guderzo
Introduction. Cuba in the World. The World in Cuba 13
A. Lorini, D. Basosi
Part I. The Making of the Cuban Republic:
from Slavery to a Raceless Nation 21
1. cuba in the age of the haitian revolution 23
A. Ferrer
2. cuba and Fernando po in the second half of the 19th century 39
I. Fattacciu
3. identitades raciales, nacionalismo, jerarquías sociales:
los líderes “de color” en cuba (1902-1912) 51
L. Giolitto
Part II. Science and Technology in Cuba:
from Colony to Revolution 65
4. las tecnologías de información y comunicación
en cuba (1850-1902): la telegrafía 67
M.I. Blaquier Ascaño
5. Physics in Cuba: a Lag between Technological and Scientific Development 81
A. Baracca
Part III. Conflicting Political Cultures:
from the First US Occupation to Revolution 95
6. cultura política popular, “choteo” y nacionalismo en tiempos
de la primera intervención norteamericana en cuba 97
M. Iglesias Utset
7. Revering and Contesting Machado in the Shadow of the Platt
amendment: cuban nationalism and anti-imperialism in the 1920s 109
A. Lorini
alessandra lorini e duccio Basosi (a cura di), Cuba in the World, the World in
Cuba. Essays on Cuban History, Politics and Culture, isBn 978-88-8453-971-7 (print),
isBn 978-88-8453-962-5 (online), © 2009 Firenze university press
6 Cuba in the World, the World in Cuba
8. los anarquistas españoles y la formación de la clase trabajadora

cubana: la educación racionalista 125
A. Sánchez Cobos
9. Reflections on the Cuban Student Movement: 1952-1961 139
M. Lima
Part IV. Transforming Urban Space:
La Habana as a Case Study 153
10. transformaciones urbanas y cambios sociales: el caso de la habana 155
G. Paolucci
11. la habana: formación y evolución del patrimonio urbano 171
R. Paloscia
12. la habana del este: territorio y arquitectura
en la segunda mitad del siglo XX 185
L. Spitoni
Part V. Examples of the Transnational Dimension of Cuban
Culture: a Poet, a Painter, Some Musicians 199
13. dulce maría loynaz, entre cuba y españa 201
C. García
14. Julio Girona: a cuban painter at home and abroad 213
I. Girona
15. recovering from the “Buena Vista syndrome”. cuban music on Film 225
V. Perna
Part VI. Cuba and the International Scene
of the Cold War: the African Case 239
16. la presencia cubana en África (1963-1989) 241
P. Arco Pino
17. investigating cuban internationalism:
the First angolan intervention, 1975 249
C. Sobers
18. cuba and angola in the 1970s: War, revolution and nation-Building 261
M.S. Rognoni
Part VII. The Contemporary Scene:
Cuban Strategies for the 21st Century 277
19. in the shadow of the Washington consensus: cuba’s rapprochement
with latin america in a World Going unipolar, 1985-1996 279
D. Basosi
20. cuba: political success and economic Failure? 291
D. Gualerzi
21. A Barrel of Oil for a Doctor: Resilient Cuba 299
F.M. Critelli
List of Contributors 309
a nuestro querido pablo arco pino
por la alegría, la ternura y las reflexiones
que siempre compartió
R. Pruessen
R. Halpern
M. Guderzo
Preface
this volume provides an introduction to an innovative collaborative

project launched in 2007 by scholars at the university of Florence and
the university of toronto. there are immediate rewards here – in the 21
chapters that explore wide-ranging features of cuban history, politics, and
culture. there are also signposts that point to future insights and illumina-
tions that will be made possible by the utilization of a symmetrical Cuba
in the World/The World in Cuba approach to the study of the island’s rela-
tionship to global dynamics in the modern era. On one hand, ongoing col-
laboration of this nature is certain to yield studies that continue to enrich
understandings of specific Cuban experiences. On the other hand, there
will also be increasing attention to what those cuban experiences can tell
us about developments elsewhere in latin america and the caribbean, in
north america, and beyond – in short, about world history.
at the heart of the Florence-toronto collaboration – in this volume and in
the ongoing joint initiative – is the conviction that the traditional dividing lines
between “domestic” and “international” affairs can be artificial and mislead-
ing. in a “globalization” era, of course, we have become familiar with the way
the movements of people, goods, and ideas tie separate communities together
(for both good and ill). With a respectful bow toward previous theorizations
regarding “transnationalism”, “transculturation”, and “diasporas”, the Cuba
in the World/The World in Cuba project seeks to elaborate yet further on the in-
tertwining of “internal” and “external” forces within national and internation-
al arenas – by using a single country’s distinctive history as the fulcrum for a
steadily unfolding round of back and forth analytical explorations.
it should be emphasized that such explorations will take deeper as well
as more recent histories into account. although a concept like “globaliza-
tion” often tends to be associated with the later twentieth century, the exis-
tence of something that might be identified as “transnational space” – and the
manifold transnational dynamics that are evident within that space – is as old
as the worlds that would have been known to people in the ancient empires
of egypt, china, and rome. cuba’s history is deep as well, of course, and in
many ways commences in that earlier era of globalization that saw spain and
other Old World empires colonize in the Caribbean Basin and South America
at the end of the fifteenth century. this volume demonstrates the collabora-
tors’ intention to consider the longue durée of the zigzag that characterizes the
world’s influence on cuba and cuba’s influence on the world.
the use of phrases like “back and forth” and “zigzag” is quite purposeful
as far as the Cuba in the World/The World in Cuba project is concerned. a sig-
nificant component of our approach to transnational dynamics, that is, is the
placing of emphasis and the focus of scholarly enquiry upon process – and
on ongoing process, in particular. the impact of notionally “external” factors
on cuba – e.g., european appetites for sugar, european and african engage-
ment in slavery, cold War clashes – was never a “one time” phenomenon.
us-soviet clashes affected cuba for decades while the relevance of sugar
and slavery to cuban history, for instance, requires a centuries-long timeline.
moreover, inherent in the existence of expansive chronologies is the notion
of evolving patterns and dynamics. the cold War’s impact on cuba was not
the same in the early 1960s, the mid 1970s, and the 1990s: these periods were
related, but not at all in the same way or involving the same dynamics. sugar
and slavery even more obviously suggest how the imprint of “outside” in-
fluences can change over time: simply consider the very different, but no less
important role of “race” in post-emancipation cuba.
Cuba in the World/The World in Cuba also places particular emphasis on the
way transnational, globalized processes require focused attention on two-way
flows and reciprocal influences. an important assumption here, to amplify
a previous point, is that cuba was not simply a body on an operating table,
inert and surrounded by “outside” surgeons of one kind or another. cuba’s
responses to “external” influences had considerable relevance to the way the
outside world evolved over time as well: consider, for example, the impact
of various forms of cuban resistance on spain’s demise as a great imperial
power, on the cold War in africa, on us domestic politics. What is involved
here – and this is one of the key concepts at the heart of Cuba in the World/The
World in Cuba thinking – is something that might be envisioned as a cybernetic
process. although the term is often now used in discussions of human/com-
puter dynamics, its earlier and more broadly relevant meaning highlights the
perpetual give-and-take interaction between an actor and a surrounding en-
vironment – with the assumption very much being that each round in the in-
teraction affects both “sides” of the engagement in important ways.
One example should make this clear – with more to become evident in
the chapters that follow: a Cuba in the World/The World in Cuba approach
encourages appreciation for the complex, two-way process by which both
this single country and the global arena surrounding it moved through
Preface 11
a long historical cycle in which colonialism and traditional imperialism

gave way to varying hybrids of independence and neo-colonialism. the
cuban side of the story is certainly somewhat more familiar – in terms of
the obvious impact of spanish or us behaviors. even here, however, more
focused sensitivity concerning an abstract notion of “world” influences
on cuba could increase attentiveness to the way us pressures in the years
since the 1959 revolution have been augmented by the evolving roles of
the Soviet Union, Canada, Mexico, Venezuela, and China.
While subject to the influence of many, however, cuba never has com-
pletely lacked power. time and again – albeit not constantly – it has dem-
onstrated the capacity to absorb and hybridize outsiders and outside
forces; the strength to resist and repel; and the ability to project cultural,
ideological, social, and even military force of its own into the global arena.
examples of all of these facets of cuba’s international experiences will be
found in the chapters that follow.
not surprisingly, to be sure, the long-term, cybernetic processes at the
core of the Cuba in the World/The World in Cuba project generate complex re-
sults. such complexity more closely approximates the nature of real, lived
experience – and thereby demonstrates the value of the approach. With an
eye still only on the colonialism/neo-imperialism theme suggested above,
for example, appreciation for the two-way nature of interaction suggests
how neither “side” could ever have legitimately contemplated the relation-
ship in triumphalist terms. powerful states sometimes have had their way
with cuba, to be sure, but they have never enjoyed as much control as they
would have liked (or imagined) and they regularly paid a heavy price for
their efforts. cuba, on the other hand, has also borne heavy burdens – very
much up the present day – for the real measures of autonomy it has some-
times surprisingly been able to achieve. Both sides of the ledger – for both
cuba and its global interlocutors – deserve contemplation.
a final word about the Cuba in the World/The World in Cuba project: those
of us participating in the Florence conference that launched the collabora-
tive effort might have taken some inspiration from meeting almost in the
shadow of Brunelleschi’s magnificent duomo. perhaps we were imagining
the striking pleasures of the view that could be enjoyed from the pinnacle of
that stunning dome. here was a perch, after all, from which one’s attention
could be pulled back and forth from the very near to the very far. in the end,
though, there could always emerge an awareness of the fact that it was pre-
cisely that combination which contributed to the wonder of the experience.
toronto and Florence, June 2009

A. Lorini
D. Basosi
Introduction
Cuba in the World. The World in Cuba
in the 16th century, cuba was known as la llave del Nuevo Mundo (the
“key to the new World”). in the 19th century, before the Cuba Libre move-
ment helped the country gain its independence with the intervention of the
united states in 1898, it was known as the “pearl of the antilles”, “the rich-
est jewel in the royal crown” and la siempre fidelísima isla (the “ever-faithful
isle”). indeed, the “caribbean sugar bowl” populated by spanish colonists
and african slaves had already developed a complex relationship with its
north american neighbor by then. this only got tighter with the end of
spanish rule, the subsequent us military occupation and the birth of the
fragile republic in 1902 in the shadow of the platt amendment that allowed
the us to intervene on the island at its discretion1. at the beginning of the
20th century, the us-cuba connection was strategic and intimate, taking on
the shape of real neocolonialism that would last until the outbreak of Fidel
castro’s revolution in 1959. cuba would then enter the orbit of the soviet
union, “the other” superpower of the cold War, once again following rath-
er complex dynamics.
a virtual laboratory of imperial strategies on the one hand and revo-
lutions on the other, cuba played a key role in a world divided between
two superpowers. at once physically close and politically distant from the
1
see: louis a. pérez Jr., Cuba and the United States. Ties of Singular Intimacy (athens, Ga:
Georgia university press, 1990); id., The War of 1898: The United States and Cuba in History and
Historiography (chapel hill: north carolina university press, 1998); id., Cuba in the American
Imagination. Metaphor and the Imperial Ethos (chapel hill: north carolina university press,
2008); rafael hernández, Mirar el Niagara. Huellas culturales entre Cuba y los Estados Unidos
(la habana: centro de investigación de la cultura cubana Juan marinello, 2000); alessandra
lorini, L’impero della libertà e l’isola strategica. Gli Stati Uniti e Cuba tra Otto e Novecento (napoli:
liguori, 2008); id., ed., An intimate and Contested Relation: The United States and Cuba in the late
Nineteenth and Early Twentieth Centuries (Firenze: Firenze university press, 2005).
united states, it was also able to carry out important international initia-
tives in relative autonomy from moscow2. For cuba, the end of the soviet
union implied the need to rethink its independence. unlike the former
soviet bloc countries, cuba has continued the socialist revolution, and it
has paid a high price for it. their strong national identity rooted in three
centuries of history is undoubtedly the source of the cuban people’s ca-
pacity for survival. at the heart of this identity is the ideal of a universal
nation “for all and for the good of all”, in the words of José martí, which
survived by transforming itself through the complex anthropological pro-
cess Fernando Ortiz called transculturación3.
this ideal of a global nation was one of the most important issues that
emerged during the workshop “cuba, a strategic island: new perspectives
on history, politics and culture” held at the university of Florence in
november 2007. this multi-disciplinary conference hosted scholars from
various countries to discuss the specific encounters they have had with
cuba along their distinctive paths of research4. the present volume took its
cue from that conference and takes a step further by proposing to approach
cuba as an example of a nation that hosts a convergence of extraordinary
global developments and in turn projects itself onto the world’s major cul-
tural, political and economic processes. such an approach embraces re-
lations between colony and motherland during the 19th century, conflicts
between imperial strategies and the formation of identities and political
cultures and a reading of architectural and artistic documents as well as
strategies and economic policies from the cold War to the first decade of
the present century. Without any pretension to completeness, the seven
parts of this book focus on moments, events and characters that are more
or less well-known and together indicate a new path for “global history”.
From each of these points of view, the cuban experience seems to reveal
the limits of the long-held equation according to which “globalization”
could not exist without capitalism, containers or the internet5. On the one
hand, the recent experience in cuba is that of a socialist country that was
2
Odd Arne Westad, The Global Cold War (cambridge, uK: cambridge university press,
2004), 158-249; piero Gleijeses, Moscow’s Proxy? Cuba and Africa 1975-1988, «Journal of cold
War studies», 2 (2006), 3-51.
3
On Martí, Ortiz, and other Caribbean intellectuals who forged ideals of free nations see: Con-
suelo Naranjo Orovio, Miguel Á. Puig-Samper y Luis Miguel García Mora, eds., La Nación So-
ñada: Cuba, Puerto Rico y Filipinas ante el 98 (Madrid: Doce Calles, 1996). On nineteenth-century
cuban political culture also see: José piqueras arenas, Societad civil y poder en Cuba. Colonia y
poscolonia (madrid: siglo XXi de españa, 2005). the most recent and multifaceted history of
cuba up to the first half of the 20th century is the volume edited by Consuelo Naranjo Orovio,
Historia de Cuba (madrid: consejo superior de investigaciones científicas, 2009).
4
the conference was the first cooperative effort of a group of historians working at the uni-
versity of Florence and the university of toronto to develop an international research group
on cuban studies.
5
For some general thoughts on this subject: Jurgen Osterhammel and Niels Petersson, Global-
ization: A Short History (princeton: princeton university press, 2005).
Introduction 15
left economically isolated after the collapse of all its main eastern european
allies in 1989 and has since built new global networks that range from eco-
nomic to political relations, from cultural to social exchanges. today, tour-
ism brings millions of visitors to the island every year, putting cubans
vis-à-vis with the lifestyles of the rest of the world. the island’s “medical
diplomacy”, which covers some seventy-five countries, brings thousands
of cuban doctors abroad, presenting a veritable “cuban social model” to
large portions of the global South. On the other hand, the Cuban experi-
ence confirms the theoretical fragility of the paradigm that wants to see
globalization only as a recent fact. On the contrary, a quick overview of the
island’s history is sufficient to trace the signals of many previous “global-
izations”: from the mixed composition of the population to the country’s
long-held role in the world sugar market; from political migration and in-
tellectual hybridization during the wars for independence to the global im-
pact of the revolution of 1959.
this book aims at portraying, at least in part, the long duration, the
complexity and the multidimensional nature of cuba’s interactions with
the world. spanning two centuries of history, the essays collected here an-
alyze the continuous interplay between what is cuban and what is glob-
al. “cuba in the world”, then, for the island’s ability to project its own
culture, economy, and politics beyond its borders. But also “the world in
cuba”, for the island’s repeated hybridization with the cultural, politi-
cal and economic stimulation from outside the country. First there is the
centrality of slavery and emancipation. ada Ferrer’s essay focuses on the
impact of the slave revolution in haiti on cuba at the beginning of the
19th century, a time when cuba itself was becoming an increasingly slave-
based society. the contribution by irene Fattacciu reconstructs instead
cuba’s presence in the african spanish colony of Fernando po in the sec-
ond half of the 19th century as an example of the complex interactions
between africa, europe and the americas. in the aftermath of cuban in-
dependence from spain, the legacy of slavery and the racialization of so-
cial conflicts in us terms profoundly affected definitions of racial identity
and nationalism among cuban “leaders of color”, as loredana Giolitto
discusses in her essay.
By analyzing how cuba, still a rich spanish slave colony in the second
half of the 19th century, was a crucial hub for the transatlantic telegraph
system financed by us capital, marta Blaquier ascaño shows how the is-
land was at the center of the commercial networks between europe and
the americas. however, while the telegraph and other technologies were
developed during the colonial period, scientific debate and higher educa-
tion remained backward, because of first colonial and then neo-colonial
dependence until the second half of the 20th century. as highlighted in the
essay by angelo Baracca, the great leap forward in scientific and higher
education only happened as a result of the revolution of 1959.
although the revolution sanctioned the ideal of a free and indepen-

dent nation, presenting itself as the realization of martí’s ideals, forms of
popular resistance and nationalist opposition against us occupation had
already started appearing in the cuba “between two empires” – the pe-
riod of 1899-1902. as demonstrated by marial iglesias utset’s contribution
to this volume, a strong national identity and a symbolic construction of
the nation based on the institutionalization of patriotic memory was built
in those years one that found strong bases in festivals and other popular
traditions. however, tensions also existed among various expressions of
nationalism and images of martí, and between popular and elite culture,
which both radicalized in subsequent years. in the semi-independent cuba
of the platt amendment years (1902-1934), turbulence and political corrup-
tion culminated in the dictatorship of Gerardo machado and the birth of
an opposition against the dictatorship, which was extremely varied both
socially and ideologically, as demonstrated by alessandra lorini. as de-
scribed by amparo sánchez cobos’ contribution, in the cuban labor move-
ment, brutally repressed by machado, a major component was constituted
by the spanish anarchists, who sought to integrate and organize the cuban
working class by raising the level of education, though they failed to reach
the majority of colored workers. the student movement, which had an im-
portant role in the overthrowing of machado and the quasi-revolution of
1933 that led to the repealing of the platt amendment, left a legacy for
the student generation of the 1950s whose role would culminate in the
revolution, as illustrated in the essay by michael lima.
the triumph of the revolution of 1959, the epochal event that attracted
dozens of intellectuals from the us and europe to cuba in the very ear-
ly years to participate in the revolutionary transformation, is analyzed in
the essay by Gabriella paolucci, who explores projects of radical change
with regards to havana’s urban space. the history of havana contains the
meaning of cuba as a crossroads of the world. in his contribution, raffaele
paloscia traces the history of its monuments, its residential geography and
its radical transformation during the first us occupation and the entire first
half of the 20th century. the architecture and the transformations of the ter-
ritory of Habana del Este during the second half of the 20th century are de-
scribed by luca spitoni, with a particular emphasis on the priority given
by the revolution to architectural and urban projects with significant social
content.
cuban cultural expressions embrace traditions that come from near
(the caribbean and the americas) and far (europe, africa, asia). as coral
García shows in her essay, there were “pure” poets like dulce maría
loynaz, born in 1902 at the same time as the cuban republic. loynaz’s pro-
cess to define cuban identity involved asserting the importance of a bour-
geois culture and her strong connection with spain. there were also artists
like Julio Girona, the cuban-born painter who spent most of his life outside
Introduction 17
the island, between new York, mexico and europe, and yet maintained
a visceral connection with cuba by exulting in the revolution of 1959, as
described in this volume by his daughter ilse Girona. there are also cuban
musicians whose music, as well-known as the revolution itself, was rooted
in the process of transculturación that mixed musical genres from different
countries and continents, as demonstrated by Vincenzo Perna in his essay
on the bright and dark sides of the famous film Buena Vista Social Club by
Wim Wenders.
in addition to the spread of cuban cultural forms throughout the world,
the other side of cuban internationalism during the cold War was the
revolution’s commitment to the liberation movements of the third World.
cuba’s intervention in africa is examined from different angles and points
of view in the essays by pablo arco pino, who inserts cuba’s presence in
africa into the latin american tradition of selfless solidarity among poor
countries; candace sobers, who focuses on the reasons for the success of
the first cuban intervention in angola in 1975; and maria stella rognoni,
who analyzes the effects of the cuban intervention in angola on the pro-
cess of nation-building in that country.
the end of the cold War and the collapse of the soviet union has
caused an unprecedented crisis in cuba, which has been called the “spe-
cial period”, also marked by increased strain on the country’s already-
negative relationship with the united states. But as duccio Basosi shows
in his essay, far from merely surviving in a world turned economical-
ly and politically unipolar, cuba has reacted to the changes by seeking
to actively promote cooperation with the countries of latin america.
certainly, the cost to maintain the socialist experiment alive has been, and
still is, very high, leaving the question open as to the future of “21st cen-
tury socialism”, as davide Gualerzi asserts in his contribution to this vol-
ume. however, such alternatives have already begun taking shape amid
the many difficulties: in her essay, Filomena critelli discusses cuban
programs in “community medicine” and “capacity building” (including
the exchanges of Cuban doctors with Venezuelan oil) that, in addition to
demonstrating cuba’s “resilience”, represent an alternative foreign-poli-
cy strategy for the 21st century, based on an innovative concept of human
and national security.
Finally, during the long history of cuba in the world and the world in
cuba, the island’s relationship with the united states, both as meeting and
confrontation, has been crucial. according to some cautious public posi-
tions, the recent election of Barack Hussein Obama to the presidency of
the united states seems to open a door to potential change in that long-
asymmetrical relationship. the normalization of diplomatic relations, the
elimination of a long series of punitive laws and a blockade that dates back
to 1961, and the return of the Guantanamo enclave to cuban sovereignty
seem more plausible today than they have seemed in over half a century.
should this happen and, with such normalization, were cuba able to main-
tain its social achievements, it would represent an important message for
the world of the 21st century.
during the final editing of this volume we received the sad news that
pablo arco pino, one of our contributors, suddenly died. We feel to dedi-
cate this volume to his memory.
Florence, 9 June 2009

Part I
the making of the cuban republic:

from slavery to a raceless nation
On the previous page – Havana Map, 1501-1601 (in G. Cavallo, ed., cristoforo
colombo e l’apertura degli spazi, Roma, Poligrafico dello Stato, 1992).
Part I
The Making of the Cuban Republic:

from Slavery to a Raceless Nation
like many american countries, cuba built its economy on slavery. at the
beginning of the 19th century, the slave revolution in French saint-domingue
strongly affected the cuban economy and the political future of the spanish col-
ony. the collapse of sugar production in the black republic of haiti meant the
consolidation of a plantation economy in cuba, which became the number one
producer of sugar in the world. at the same time, the image of the haitian revo-
lution less than fifty miles from the cuban coast aroused a sense of fear among
cuban whites surrounded by a growing number of slaves. it has been argued
that the powerful shadow of the haitian revolution made cuban whites less
prone to leaving the mother country, concerned as they were that any nationalist
movement could turn Cuba into the “realm of terror” of another black Haiti. On
the other hand, voices of slave victory in haiti stirred among cuban slaves the
feeling that freedom was possible. in this section, ada Ferrer brings fresh insights
to existing historiography1 by showing how cubans had access to detailed news
on haiti and that several contacts existed between the dying slave society of the
French saint-domingue and cuban society in which slavery was becoming more
solid. Ferrer argues that, far from being vague, both the fears and the hopes that
haiti aroused were based on real experiences of creole elites and cuban slaves.
Just as many spanish american colonies had fought for and achieved
independence by 1820 and slavery was abolished in the British caribbean
1
david B. davis, The Problem of Slavery in the Age of revolution, 1770-1823 (ithaca: cornell uni-
versity press, 1975); alfred hunt, Haiti’s Influence on Antebellum America: Slumbering Volcano in
the Caribbean (Baton rouge: louisiana university press, 1988); david p. Geggus, ed., The Impact
of the Haitian Revolution in the Atlantic World (columbus: south carolina university press, 2001);
sybille Fischer, Modernity Disavowed: Haiti and the Cultures of Slavery in the Age of Revolution (dur-
ham, nc: duke university press, 2004). the most recent work on haiti and cuba is by dolores
Gonzáles-ripoll et al., eds., El rumor de Haití en Cuba: temor, raza y rebeldía, 1789-1844 (madrid:
consejo superior de investigaciones científicas, 2004).
in the 1830s, educated cubans had begun to question relationships between

slavery and colonization in various ways by the middle of the century. the
transnational debate over slavery in the us and the ensuing civil war (1861-
65) profoundly affected the ideas of freedom and independence of the
cuban community of exiles in the united states and anticipated the cuban
ten Years’ War against spain (1868-1878)2. One significant example of how
slavery had become the most controversial issue in cuba before 1868 is the
public cuban debate over the spanish project of sending cuban freedmen,
emancipados, to the african colony of Fernando po. this relatively unknown
example, discussed by irene Fattacciu in this section, sheds light on the
competing and contradictory colonial policies that spain imposed upon its
first african possession and its last american one. the case of Fernando
po is also rather telling of cuban creoles attitudes towards freedmen: they
were perceived as dangerous examples of what slaves could follow.
Both the american civil War that ended slavery in the united states and
the ten Years’ War in cuba made the very existence of slavery obsolete. in
cuba it was gradually abolished in the 1880s and the struggle for indepen-
dence became the continuation of the lost ten Years’ War. the community of
cuban exiles inspired and mobilized by José martí’s indisputable capacity
to forge alliances raised funds to support one final war of liberation from
spanish domination. From the united states, martí shaped an ideal of Cuba
Libre as a fatherland “for all and for the good of all”. living two thirds of his
life in Gilded age america during the post-reconstruction era, when blacks
were segregated, disfranchised and lynched, martí argued for a cuban na-
tion built on racial equality. unlike the united states where the white elite
obtained the independence and shaped the institutions of the new country
by maintaining slavery and racial inequality, and unlike haiti where slaves
achieved independence and the white planter class was forced to leave, the
ideal cuban nation would be a raceless and socially egalitarian country.
martí’s raceless argument gave an exceptional formal equality to all citizens
of the new cuban state3. Yet, as loredana Giolitto shows in this section, for-
mal equality coexisted with racial prejudice and discrimination. the líderes
de color of the early republic deployed various strategies to achieve racial
equality that clashed dramatically with the ideal of a raceless nation.
2
see: louis a. pérez, Cuba between Empires, 1878-1902 (pittsburgh: pittsburgh university press,
1983); rebecca J. scott, Slave Emancipation in Cuba: The Transition to Free Labor, 1860-1899 (princeton:
princeton university press, 1985); ada Ferrer, Insurgent Cuba. Race, Nation and Revolution, 1868-
1898 (chapel hill: north carolina university press, 1999); christopher schmidt-nowara, Empire
and Slavery: Spain, Cuba, and Puerto Rico, 1833-1874 (pittsburgh: pittsburgh university press, 1999).
3
see: Gerald e. poyo, “With All and for the Good of All”: The Emergence of popular Nationalism
in the Cuban Communities of the United States, 1848-1898 (durham, nc: duke university press,
1989); enrique lópez mesa, La comunidad cubana de New York: siglo XIX (la habana: centro de
estudios martianos, 2002); louis a. pérez, ed., José Martí in the United States: The Florida Experi-
ence (tucson: arizona state university, 1995).
A. Ferrer
Chapter 1
Cuba in the Age of the Haitian Revolution
at the end of the eighteenth-century, the island of cuba witnessed

a transformation both internal and external. internally, a new system
emerged that would transform everything from the island’s interior forests,
to the racial and demographic make-up of its population, to the character
of its agriculture and economy. externally, the new changes brought the
island into unprecedented commercial engagement with the world. dating
such transformations is always somewhat artificial, but we can name, for
example, the 1789 opening of the slave trade as the opening move. By the
1820s, the process was not yet over but had already converted the island
into the world’s foremost producer of sugar. to understand this moment of
transformation and this particular encounter of cuba with the world at the
end of the eighteenth century, an encounter that would profoundly shape
cuban society in nineteenth and twentieth centuries, we must place those
changes in the context of the sweeping revolutionary transformations that
engulfed the region in the same moment.
then, in the small but prosperous colony of French saint-domingue,
less than fifty miles from the cuban coast, a world built upon slavery, co-
lonialism, and racial hierarchy was turned upside down. Known today as
the haitian revolution, the events that shook saint-domingue converted
europe’s most prosperous colony into an independent nation ruled by for-
mer slaves and their descendants. this new society, born of a process never
contemplated before, stood right in the middle of the caribbean sea, a short
sail from islands ruled by european governors and inhabited, sometimes
overwhelmingly, by enslaved africans1.
1
On the revolution, see David Geggus, Haitian Revolutionary Studies (Bloomington: indiana
university press, 2002); laurent dubois, Avengers of the New World: The Story of the Haitian
Revolution (cambridge, ma: harvard university press, 2004); carolyn Fick, The Making of Hai-
as slavery and colonialism collapsed in the French colony, cuba under-

went transformations almost the mirror-image of haiti’s. in cuba, sugar
planters and colonial authorities saw the devastation of their neighboring
colony and looked at their own society with fresh eyes. publicly and private-
ly, they professed fear and terror that the scenes of the haitian revolution
would be repeated in their own territory. But, for the most part, the men
with the power to decide the future course of the spanish colony resolved
to live dangerously. Working with the colonial state, cuban planters rushed
in to fill the void left by saint-domingue’s collapse. they imported an ev-
er-growing number of africans and amassed greater and greater wealth in
sugar. “the hour of our happiness has arrived” predicted one planter, look-
ing ahead to the boom that would turn cuba into the world’s single largest
producer of sugar2. the planters’ vision, however, had a catch: they sought
to follow in the footsteps of saint-domingue and to reproduce a prosperity
built on sugar, slavery, and colonialism, but to stop emphatically short of
the upheaval caused by those same institutions in saint-domingue. they
sought, in other words, to emulate saint-domingue, but to contain haiti.
in cuba, however, the example of haiti was hard to contain. the dis-
tance between the two islands was short and well-travelled. early in the
revolution, slave owners from the French colony arrived by the thousands,
carting slaves, seeking refuge, and telling stories of black vengeance and
physical desolation. throughout the conflict, French forces defeated by
former slaves evacuated through cuba, as local residents watched with
great interest. in the decades that followed haitian independence, cubans
heard repeated rumors about imminent haitian invasions into cuban terri-
tory. cuban plantations increasingly resembled those in pre-revolutionary
saint-domingue. slaves were subjected to increasingly brutal labor and
disciplinary regimes and sometimes responded by envisioning risings like
the ones of their counterparts in haiti.
in cuba, then, the haitian revolution produced a potentially powerful
contradiction: at the same time that it created a heightened consciousness
of slave rebellion and power, it also produced a massive rise in the actual
number of slaves, a new “minority” status for whites, and an economic
boom self-consciously modeled after saint-domingue. here, the example
of black revolution and the rise of black enslavement unfolded in the same
context and at the same time.
this essay takes the simultaneity of these two developments as its start-
ing point, and attempts to tell the multifaceted story of the entrenchment
ti: The Saint-Domingue Revolution from Below (Knoxville: university of tennessee press, 1991);
and, of course, c.l.r. James, The Black Jacobins: Toussaint Louverture and the San Domingo Revo-
lution (london: allison and Busby, 1980).
2
the classic and indispensible study of this transition and transformation, is manuel moreno
Fraginals, El ingenio (la habana: ciencias sociales, 1978).
Part I – The Making of the Cuban Republic 25
of slavery in cuba, which occurred precisely as the world’s foremost slave

society unraveled just off the cuban coasts. Grounded in cuba, the study
tacks back and forth between the two islands, to tell the overlapping sto-
ries of freedom and slavery being made and unmade – simultaneously and
each within view of the other.
to understand the transformation of cuban slavery occurring in the
shadow of the haitian revolution i contend that we need to explore the
social and intellectual history of the idea of haiti in cuba. how was the
violent destruction of slavery by the enslaved themselves understood and
discussed in a society where a similar model of slavery was taking root?
What news of the saint-domingue revolution circulated in cuba? through
what specific points of contact? among whom? With what language and
images? and with what resonance? asking such questions allows us to
better understand questions about the material and cognitive encounters
and connections between the simultaneous destruction and expansion of
slavery in the nineteenth century.
1. An Unlikely Source, An Impossible Alliance
material daily links between the haitian revolution and cuban soci-
ety produced distinct streams of information or news that traveled from
one colony to the other. in this paper, i will examine three such sources of
haitian news in depth. i chose these three in particular because they high-
light on the one hand how rich and detailed was the information about the
revolution that arrived in cuba and – on the other – the capacity of that in-
formation to reach different social sectors in cuba. Finally, they allow a re-
thinking of the broad categories that scholars have used so far to talk about
the haitian revolution’s impact not only in cuba but in the atlantic World
in general – a set of concerns i will return to at the end of the essay.
the first source of information i will analyze involves the movement of
people between the scenes of the haitian revolution and cuban society.
tens of thousands of French refugees left the turbulence of revolution in
saint-domingue to resettle in cuba. But rather than focus on this migra-
tion, i focus instead on movements in the other direction. people in cuba
actually traveled to the scenes of revolution and brought back first-hand
accounts of revolutionary events in which they themselves were directly
implicated.
When spain declared war on France in February 1793, that war came
quickly to the island of hispaniola, where these two countries shared a
border that had already been a hot zone since the start of the revolution
in saint-domingue. in the spring of 1793, the spanish governor of santo
domingo, Joaquín García, using priests and military officers near the bor-
der, sealed a formal alliance with the black troops from the French side
of the island in order to combat their common enemy, the revolutionary
government of France. these forces came to be called the black auxiliaries;

they retained their own internal organization, but now received arms, pro-
visions, and orders from the spanish military administration. as a result
of this pact, by mid-1793, almost every major slave and former slave lead-
er was fighting for spain against France. relying on the services of these
black auxiliaries, spain came to control a large swath of territory formerly
held by France and, in 1794, even appeared poised to take the capital city
of le cap, surrounded by what had been – and many hoped could be once
more – the richest sugar country in the world.
if this alliance can be broadly identified as one between slave rebels
and the spanish colonial state, for our purposes it is highly significant that
many of the “spanish” who oversaw this alliance on the ground were in
fact men from cuba, who had been dispatched in a massive troop move-
ment from the two largest cities in cuba to the contested boundary be-
tween French saint-domingue and spanish santo domingo. there, these
men from cuba became intimately enmeshed in the revolution that would
turn saint domingue into haiti.
the cuban regiments began arriving in the summer of 1793, under the
command of matías de armona who, exhausted and frustrated at having
to embody the alliance between the spanish monarchy and the slave forc-
es of saint domingue, grew ill and was replaced by another cuban, Juan
lleonart.
in general, the cuban commanders saw the alliance with men like
toussaint louverture and Jean-François as an improper and highly volatile
inversion of customary roles. they complained that former slaves seemed
to flaunt their newfound power and spanish vulnerability. the black forc-
es, complained armona, “give themselves military ranks and titles, they
wear imposing military and regal insignia. they try to act like men with us,
pushing up shoulder to shoulder with us, with a certain air of superiority,
as if we need them and have to please and gratify them”. in the language
and tone of written communication between black leaders and cuban com-
manders, this sense of role inversion shows up clearly. White officers wrote
to former slaves addressing them as friends and exuding deference. new
black officers wrote letters incessantly requesting supplies of all kinds,
stamping their missives with images of trees of liberty topped with crowns
sustained by naked black men3.
the inversion of roles was given material form and official sanction in
military ritual and ceremony. Black leaders toussaint and Biassou were re-
3
the reference to the stamp of the tree of liberty appears in matías de armona to c.G.
Joaquín García, 14 august 1793, in archivo General de simancas, spain (aGs), Guerra mod-
erna (Gm), leg. 6855. armona says the stamp was used on a letter from Biassou, which he
received on the 12th of that month, and which he forwarded to the captain General. For a
discussion of slave royalism and the on-the-ground compatibility of royalist and republican
motifs, see dubois, Avengers, 106-108.
galed in san rafael in February or march 1794, each receiving a gold medal
from the King of spain in honor of their services as his loyal vassals. at
the ceremony, it was the officers of two cuban regiments who awarded
the medals. men from the cuban regiments, who gathered to witness the
concession of this highest honor, played the military music, paraded with
the medal recipients, and joined the two black officers in a lavish two-hour
meal prepared in their honor4. the encounter between the cuban officers
and the rebel slaves represented a clear inversion of roles, and everyone
who witnessed and participated in it seemed to see it as just that.
Just as palpable as this inversion of roles, however, was the struggle
of these same cuban commanders to apprehend and in a sense classify
the novel political, military, and social landscape that lay before them.
confronted with a large army of rebel slaves only nominally under spanish
command, armona and others had trouble figuring out how to approach
and address them. they knew the black rebels were officially auxiliaries,
but they often noted that actually they were “runaway slaves”. the offi-
cers’ reports sometimes seemed to acknowledge that their own system of
classification did not correspond with that of the slave rebels. armona, for
example, routinely recorded such discrepancies. “they – he wrote – re-
ferred to their positions as encampments”, but he called them “palenques”.
he mentioned that they referred to themselves as generals, brigadiers, and
lieutenants. he seemed about to record a difference in the way the spanish
named these same leaders, but then added, sheepishly almost, that he and
his colleagues called them that, too. his discernible discomfort seems to
suggest that the power of the forces led by black rebels was making old
labels (such as “maroons”) inappropriate, and new ones (such as “general”
for a former slave) plausible, but still not so natural as to go unnoticed 5.
here the documents produced out of the routine and material contacts be-
tween slave rebels and white commanders reveal the traces of competing
ways of naming the history represented by this revolution.
the alliance between the slave rebels and the cuban officers reminds us
that the contact between colonial cuba and revolutionary saint-domingue
involved significantly more than haitian news passively making its way to
cuban ports. What we have here is rather something much more sustained
and meaningful. cuban men – some of them direct witnesses to the sugar
revolution that was then transforming havana into a major slave society –
4
Continuación de la noticias de la Ysla de Sto Domingo hasta 25 de Marzo de 94 in folder “relación
de los ocurrido en la Ysla de santo domingo con motivo de la guerra con los franceses, 1795.
d. antonio Barba”, servicio histórico militar, madrid, colección General de documentos,
rollo 65, doc no. 5-4-11-1. the document mentions that General Jean-François had received
the same honor earlier.
5
matías de armona to c.G. Joaquín García, 12 and 14 august 1793, in folder “corresponden-
cia del Brigadier dn. mathías de armona desde 19 de Junio hasta 1 de septiembre de 1793”, in
aGs, Gm, leg. 6855.
traveled to the scenes of the haitian revolution that was then transforming
the world’s most profitable colony into a revolutionary one in the process
of destroying the institution of slavery.
the marquis de casa calvo, for instance, came from one of the wealthiest
sugar families in havana. he himself owned a prosperous, dynamic plan-
tation; his brother, nicolás calvo, was at the forefront of sugar production
and of the implementation of new technologies to advance it. in the midst
of the revolution, the marquis became Governor of Bayajá, a French town
known as Fort dauphin that was taken by the spanish and black auxiliary
forces in January 1794. there, he acquired slaves to ship back to his planta-
tions in cuba; he purchased sugar-making equipment from French planta-
tions being destroyed by his allies, and sent that back to havana as well. he
derided his black allies to officials in havana and madrid, but on the ground
he found himself forced to keep up appearances and, indeed, even went be-
yond the mandate, becoming godfather to Jean-François and flirting with the
latter’s wife during the dances held in the town6. these cuban officers and
soldiers had contact with slave insurgents and leaders, corresponding with
them, sometimes eating and celebrating with them, and eventually – after
toussaint broke with the spanish and allied with the French – suffering mili-
tary defeat at their hands. after taking part in those unprecedented events,
they returned to cuba. From scattered documentary evidence we know they
brought back artifacts from the war itself, for example, estampas of black
revolutionary figures that would turn up in havana seventeen years later,
during an ambitious and mysterious conspiracy led by a free black carpen-
ter known as José Antonio Aponte. Other soldiers and officers returned to
cuba bringing with them slaves purchased or taken from saint-domingue.
all came back with stories and memories they might have felt eager to share
freely in a society they hoped was the antithesis (rather than the precursor)
of the revolutionary upheavals they had just witnessed.
through these cuban officers and soldiers the world of the haitian
revolution met the world of the sugar revolution in cuba, that is, the as-
cendancy of slavery and the slave trade, and of sugar and large scale plan-
tation agriculture. in the heart of the entrenchment of slavery in cuba lived
the raw example and the intimate knowledge of slavery’s destruction, so
menacingly close to cuban coasts.
2. The Circulation of Haitian News in Black Havana
But in the world of burgeoning slavery in cuba, there were other ways
to hear and learn of revolutionary saint-domingue. sometimes it is possible
to discern the specific routes of transmission; other times we can only see
6
see ada Ferrer, The Making and Unmaking of Slavery: Cuba and Haiti in the Age of Revolution,
manuscript in preparation, chapter 3.
the evidence that people in cuba were avidly consuming the news, with-
out being able to discern how they knew. Just two weeks after the start of
the haitian revolution, in early september 1791, authorities in havana grew
alarmed when they learned that people of color in the area were sacrificing
pigs in honor of the slave insurgents. the prospect raises the possibility that
havana was home to some version of a Bois-caiman ceremony, the famous
(if disputed) ritual beginning to the revolution, in which haitian conspira-
tors took blood oaths and sacrificed a black pig as preparation for the war
they were about to commence7. Whether or not such ceremonies were taking
place in havana, as authorities feared, the prospect alone makes it very likely
that just days after the turmoil erupted in saint-domingue, people in cuba –
and specifically people of color – knew about those events and were thinking
and digesting them actively. indeed, in casual street encounters between free
urban blacks and local whites, in confrontations between masters and slaves,
in heated exchanges between black suspects and white interrogators, cuban
people of color regularly referred to the haitian revolution as something
they knew about and perhaps hoped to emulate. they referred by name to
men such as toussaint, dessalines, christophe, and Jean- François. their tes-
timony, on numerous occasions, explicitly refers to the heroic deeds of their
“compañeros” in haiti. slaves recruited others to conspiracy by urging them
to do as their counterparts had done in st. domingue, where blacks were
now “absolute masters of the land”8.
While the regular invocations of haiti by slaves and free people of color
leave no doubt that they learned and used knowledge of revolutionary events,
on their own they do not tell us how and from what sources they acquired
that knowledge. there were, of course, many sources: from the stories told
by escaping refugees, sea captains, and crews, to the official reports by French
officials which spawned rumors and vivid talk among the local populace. But
among the many possible sources, some are potentially surprising.
One such source is the Gaceta de Madrid, the official newspaper of the
spanish government in madrid. For all the government’s efforts to cur-
tail the flow of information, the source with most information on events
in saint domingue circulating in cuba was not a foreign newspaper, but
the official newspaper of its own metropole. according to captain General
someruelos, this posed a significant problem. he lamented that the news-
paper was so readily available: “it is sold to the public, and everyone buys
it, and it circulates well among the blacks”, who, he wrote, read it and ana-
lyzed its contents “with considerable liveliness [viveza]”9.
7
Geggus, Haitian Revolutionary Studies, 207-220.
8
see ada Ferrer, “la société esclavagiste cubaine el la révolution haïtienne”, Annales 2
(2003), 333-356: 346-356.
9
someruelos to sec. de estado, 25 may 1804, in archivo histórico nacional, madrid (ahn),
estado, leg. 6366, exp. 78. a transcription of the letter also appears in someruelos to sec. de
estado, 13 agosto 1809, in archivo General de indias, sevilla (aGi), estado, leg. 12, exp. 50.
What worried the captain General so profoundly was that in the pages
of this gazette, cubans of color, and others, encountered substantial and
animated news of black rebellion in what had been an orderly and pros-
perous sugar colony just miles away. here were stories of the revolutionary
terror in paris, of abolitionist debates in Britain, of war in europe. and in
regular snippets and sometimes in longer pieces taken mostly from French,
British, and us newspapers, the story of the haitian revolution unfold-
ed in incredible and dense detail, from the first article on the attacks of
august 1791 to the repeated installments about black military victories in
1803. indeed, by the end of the conflict, the Gaceta was even publishing
articles and reprinting translated documents that gave significant insight
into the ideas of the black insurgents. it published the words of the emerg-
ing haitian leadership.
the issue of the gazette that had prompted the complaint by the captain
General, in fact, contained two translated proclamations by haitian lead-
ers. in both documents, the black leaders invited refugees who had fled the
colony to return and live peacefully under the new system. But their invita-
tion also entailed a very clear and explicit threat.
the God who protects us, the God of free men, commands us to extend
towards them our victorious [vencedores] arms. But those who, intoxicated
with a foolish pride, […] [those who] think still that they alone form the
essence of human nature, and who pretend to think that they are destined
by heaven to be our owners and our tyrants, [we tell them] never to come
near the island of Santo Domingo, because if they come, they will find only
chains and deportation10.
these words made manifest the power of new black leaders, who for-
bade the return of saint-domingue to its colonial ruler and who were will-
ing to admit only those refugees who deigned to live under a government
of former slaves and in a society without slavery.
Just one week after someruelos penned his attack on the publication
and circulation of this document, a new proclamation appeared in the pag-
es of the gazette. this time it was the haitian declaration of independence,
signed by dessalines on January 1, 1804, and published in the gazette six
months later on June 111. We know that other copies of the haitian declara-
tion of independence had already reached cuba aboard French ships and
that authorities on the island had done their best to have them confiscated,
and then translated and sent to madrid12. But in spite of the attempts to
limit its circulation, in June the declaration was translated, published, and
10
Gaceta de Madrid, 23 de marzo de 1804.
11
Gaceta de Madrid, 1 de Junio de 1804.
12
marqués de someruelos a d. pedro cevallo, 14 marzo 1804, en ahn, estado, leg. 6366,
exp. 70.
circulating, even among black cubans, who someruelos argued were able
to acquire the gazette with little difficulty13. thus, we know that people of
color in cuba were able to read the haitian declaration of independence, a
proclamation of former slaves who had vanquished their masters by force
of arms.
now we can understand more profoundly someruelos’ discomfort up-
on recognizing that these words and these ideas, and these examples of a
new kind of power in haiti, were circulating in his own colony. it was not
only that people of color learned of haitian news-according to the gazette
itself: there was not one black person who did not already know them by
memory. it was also that with repetition and circulation, the example ac-
quired more and more substance. What circulated, however, was not just
vague examples or even rich narratives of retribution and justice. With the
publication and circulation of such declarations, it was also the very intel-
lectual production of the revolution that circulated. emerging black leaders
engaged in a stinging critique of what they saw as the French revolution’s
false universalism and they expanded the meaning and content of emerg-
ing notions of rights and citizenship. that critique was read with appetite
and fascination and urgency by men of color who gathered around havana
to hear and talk of it.
3. Haiti and the Enslaved in Cuba
the question then becomes what people of color in cuba might have
made of declarations like dessalines’s, or of haitian news and the haitian
example more generally. there is, of course, no way to answer this kind
of question with any degree of certainty. But asking it is important. if we
think of the history of slavery globally, we see that its destruction in saint-
domingue as a result of revolution coincided temporally with the entrench-
ment of slavery precisely in places like cuba, southern Brazil, and parts of
the united states south. in cuba, slaves living through and embodying
that entrenchment heard news of revolutionary haiti and appear to have
thought about it in relation to their own enslavement and their own pros-
pects of freedom. in this final section of the paper, then, rather than focus
on routes of transmission for revolutionary news, i experiment with think-
ing about the ways in which enslaved people in cuba consumed and in-
voked the haitian revolution.
to examine how slaves might have understood the haitian revolution,
we have a valuable resource in the thousands of pages of judicial testimony
taken from enslaved men and women in moments of suspected or actual
13
the spanish gazette does not appear to have published the haitian constitution of 1805,
even though it was published by several international gazettes and newspapers. perhaps
someruelos’s complaints did have their desired, if delayed, effect.
conspiracy and rebellion. When conspiracies were revealed or suspected,

and when rebellion erupted, planters and authorities collaborated to find
answers. they brought before them men and women, guilty and innocent,
and asked them question after question. Witnesses answered, and scribes
paraphrased those responses in the third person. the testimonies from any
number of such incidences amounts easily to thousands of pages, some with
surprising insights into cuban slavery precisely at the moment of its expan-
sion and precisely at the moment in which the haitian example circulated.
in these testimonies, enslaved men (and, much more rarely, women)
sometimes invoked the haitian revolution with great regularity, some-
times not at all. When haiti came up, it did so in three ways, all of which
reflected the ways in which slaves in cuba not only knew about the revolu-
tion, but also used it to think about their own enslavement and to engage
the political currents of their time.
First, cuban slaves talked about the haitian revolution in very gen-
eral terms, which highlighted a strong sense of admiration and, often, a
desire to emulate the bold move of their haitian counterparts. this was,
of course, the fear of both planters and authorities. the words of captured
slaves, then, were not entirely comforting. haiti was for their servants
clearly an example to hold up. take the case, for example, of the alleged
slave conspiracy that was uncovered in Güines in 1806. Güines was at the
center of the transformation of slavery in cuba, home to the boom that
converted cuba into the world’s largest producer of sugar in the 1820s.
the leaders of the 1806 conspiracy were three enslaved men. the first was
a saint-domingue-born slave who allegedly boasted to others that he had
participated in the revolution; another was a cuban creole who could read
and write; the third a congolese man, perhaps recently arrived. some of
the enslaved questioned in connection to the plot, confessed to telling oth-
ers that, if they rose up, killed the whites, and took the fort in town, they
would be free like their counterparts in haiti, who had taken back the land
from the whites. the haitians, whom the accused identified as their “com-
pañeros”, were now “absolute masters of the land”. sometimes this kind of
invocation became a sort of dare: if the French slaves could do it, why not
them? they needed, recruiters said, to have “balls”, as the slaves of saint-
domingue had shown14. For these slaves, haiti signified not only the mur-
der of whites or the end of slavery, but a more general victory as well: the
forceful taking of the land and the exercise of total mastery.
the second type of haitian invocation in the slave testimonies is a bio-
graphical one, when slaves talked about specific haitian leaders they ad-
mired. in 1795, the cuban captain-General had claimed that the names of
14
“expediente criminal contra Francisco Fuertes y demas negros […] sobre levantamiento
en el pueblo de Güines”, in archivo nacional de cuba, la habana (anc), asuntos políticos
(herefter ap), leg. 9, exp. 27. For a more detailed discussion, see ada Ferrer, La société.
black revolutionary leaders resounded among the population of color in

havana like the names of well-known conquerors. the testimony of slaves
would seem to prove him right. in numerous conspiracies and rebellions,
slaves testify to having been recruited with promises that they could serve
as captains, as had toussaint or Jean-François in the revolution in saint-
domingue. even when suspects denied any participation in rebellion or
conspiracy, they admitted that they did in fact engage in sustained con-
versations about men like toussaint and Jean-François and expressed ad-
miration for the heroic military and political achievements of these former
slaves turned generals15.
haiti also came up in third form. in many of these alleged conspira-
cies and rebellions, the accused made regular reference to aid coming di-
rectly from haiti. this claim – present not only in cuba but elsewhere in
the atlantic World – was not a vague expression of sympathy or admira-
tion for haiti or haitian leaders, as we have seen in some of the examples
above, but rather a concrete (if generally unfounded) assertion that they
believed that this society which they so much admired stood ready to com-
mit money, arms, and forces for their own liberation. sometimes the al-
leged aid was in the form of a ship waiting off the coast with men and
munitions. sometimes it was in the form of emissaries of haitian leaders
bringing proclamations of freedom for local slaves. such assertions in the
testimony allow us to glimpse a potentially strong sense of solidarity, in
which enslaved people in cuba (or elsewhere) might imagine themselves
to be, on the one hand, emulators of haitian rebels and, on the other, ob-
jects of haitian benevolence and of active haitian foreign policy.
One instance in which claims about Haitian aid gathered consider-
able momentum was during the aponte rebellion, the most widespread
and ambitious conspiracy in cuba in this period16. its leader was a free
black carpenter who recruited slaves and free people showing potential
rebels a book of pictures he had made, which included images of scenes
and people from Saint-Domingue. Others who were implicated appear
to have seen or carried printed pictures of henri christophe, the revolu-
tionary leader who became president (and later king) of the northern part
of haiti in 1807. another conspirator took on the name of Jean-François,
15
«consulta de los autos seguidos por la... ordinaria contra varios negros por sublevación»,
30 April 1812, ANC, AP, leg. 12, exp. 27. On the figure of Jean-François in the Aponte rebellion,
see matt childs, The 1812 Aponte Rebellion and the Struggle against Atlantic Slavery (chapel hill:
university of north carolina press, 2006), 173-189.
16
For recent work on aponte, see works by childs, The Aponte Rebellion; sibylle Fischer,
Modernity Disavowed: Haiti and the Cultures of Slavery in the Age of Revolution (durham: duke
university press, 2004); and stephan palmie, Wizards and Scientists: Explorations in Afro-Cuban
Modernity (durham: duke university press, 2002). the early work of José luciano Franco is
indispensable. see especially Las conspiraciones de 1810 y 1812 (la habana: ciencias sociales,
1977) and Ensayos históricos (la habana: ciencias sociales, 1974).
usually identified in the record as Juan Fransuá. conspirators thus drew

bold and explicit links between their efforts and both the history and
present state of haiti.
But they also went further, asserting that this link was reciprocal: they
emulated haiti, yes, but haiti itself stood behind them, prepared to aid
them in their endeavor. several key witnesses testified that there were 5,000
haitians waiting either in the hills of monserrate (havana) or on boats off
the harbor ready to swoop in and fight for the freedom of cuban slaves
as soon as the rebellion began. even more witnesses asserted that there
were one, two, or several haitian officers in havana with orders from King
henri christophe to negotiate and, if necessary, fight for their freedom17.
seemingly fantastic claims about haitian assistance emerge, in fact, in
many slave conspiracies and rebellions across the americas. some histori-
ans have accepted such claims and incorporated them into narratives about
an unwavering haitian commitment to an expansive new World freedom,
despite a glaring lack of evidence. Others, to the contrary, have dismissed
them as spurious, as products of either overactive imaginations or of loose
or drunken talk. rather than focus on the question of the reality of haitian
assistance, it may be more fruitful to explore when, why, and under what
specific circumstances, cuban (or other) slaves believed haitian assistance
was imminent. the point is to shift our focus away from arriving at a true/
false conclusion and instead to contextualize slave testimony and to try to
glimpse the world of news, references, and rumor to which the enslaved
had access. What might have enslaved and free people of color in 1812
havana had in mind when they spoke of christophe sending delegates or
troops on behalf of their own freedom? might such claims have referred to
anything specific?
in fact, there may have been several possible explanations for the ori-
gins of the slaves’ belief in haitian intervention. First, while there were no
formal political relations between spain (or its colonies) and independent
haiti, just two years before the rebellion, christophe and the Governor
of havana had had sustained communication about the possibility of
exchanging delegates or representatives. the prospect of high-ranking
haitian officials moving freely in havana in plain sight of the city’s en-
slaved and free population of color seemed so patently dangerous that
the Governor abandoned the idea, even in defiance of the royal order that
had authorized it18. it is impossible to know the extent to which this back
17
see, for example, the careo (judicial confrontation) between aponte and ternero, in anc,
ap, leg. 12, exp. 18, 25 march 1812; and that between aponte and chacón in anc, ap, leg.
12, exp. 14, 19 march 1812. there is an interesting variation in this careo, in which one of them
reminds the other to recall that he had even given the names of the two officers “siendo hijos
de la habana que habían ido al Guarico para incorporarse al exército del rey cristoval”.
18
see the 1809 correspondence between christophe, someruelos, and multiple spanish au-
thorities in AGI, Estado, leg. 12, exps. 57, 50, 51, 54. On Christophe sending agents to meet
and forth about potential emissaries of christophe would have circulated

beyond the governor and his immediate circle. But we do know that the
governor’s personal coachman was one of the first men questioned and im-
plicated in the aponte conspiracy in havana, and that the rumor about the
two haitian agents sent by christophe circulated intensively among black
coachmen who testified19. it is interesting to think about a possible connec-
tion here, but we are still a long way from understanding a certain origin
for the assertions about haitian assistance for cuban slaves.
a perhaps more likely possibility is that the slaves’ claims referred in-
stead to one of the conspirators in the aponte plot, Juan Barbier, a freed
slave who appears to have spent time in charleston and in saint-domingue.
in cuba in 1811-1812, Barbier took on the name, persona, and sometimes
the uniform of Jean-François and tried to recruit slaves by presenting him-
self as someone now in havana to fight for their freedom20. there were also
other “French” figures in havana at the time of the conspiracy. men who
had served under the real (now late) Jean-François in saint-domingue in
1791-1795, and who had been exiled from the island, were now returning to
santo domingo and claimed to have stopped in havana en route. during
their several-month sojourn in havana they appear to have had contact with
local people of color, who, according to the testimony of the sojourners, dis-
played great interest in their military uniforms. Between the elusive Barbier
and the former officers of the real but deceased Jean-François, there seem to
have been flesh and blood referents for the vague but persistent testimony
that there were two haitian officers working for freedom in havana.
But the slaves’ testimony does not just refer to haitian agents, it presumes
more generally that inclination, will, and desire of christophe and the haitian
state was to work for their freedom. haiti, in the testimony, was a state that
carried the promise of emancipation to slaves like themselves in other colo-
nies of the region. What might have made witnesses so sure that haiti was
engaged in a policy of international anti-slavery and that they themselves
would be its beneficiaries? it would certainly be possible to read the slaves’
belief in this haitian mission as a powerful appropriation of the memory of
the haitian revolution to serve the interests and desires of cuban slaves at
the moment. i think, however, that it makes more sense to read this belief as
part of the slaves’ sustained interpretation of recent haitian acts and of inter-
esting haitian news then circulating in havana. early in 1811, news began
arriving in havana about new and daring acts by christophe in the north,
who was intercepting slave ships bound for cuba, liberating the africans on
board, bringing them to haitian soil as free men and women, and sending
the crews and empty ships on their way. in 1810-1812, such was the fate of
with spanish authorities in philadelphia, see aGi, estado, leg. 12, no. 54.
19
i discuss these connections more extensively in The Making and Unmaking of Slavery, chapter 6.
20
this claim is repeated many times in the testimony. see especially anc, ap, leg. 13, exp. 1.
at least three ships: the spanish Nueva Gerona; an unnamed portuguese ship
en route with 440 africans from rio de Janeiro to havana, and the Santa
Ana, whose shipment of 205 slaves was liberated and taken by christophe’s
forces to the port of Gonaïves. in addition, havana planters complained to
authorities about the capture of “various slave ships” prior to the intercep-
tion of these three, news of which, they said, was circulating in havana21. if
the news circulated, we can be sure that one of its key points of transmission
would have been the docks, where the arrival of empty slave ships, whose
original human cargo had been taken to haiti, would have found a most
attentive audience. as is well known, many of the figures questioned in as-
sociation with the aponte conspiracy were men who frequented the docks,
as workers or simply as residents of a bustling port city. many further tes-
tified to having heard news of the current conspiracy and of haiti itself at
the docks. it was in fact at the docks were haitian artifacts and images cir-
culated from hand to hand. One of the principal conspirators in the Aponte
rebellion in havana, Francisco Xavier pacheco, confessed shortly before his
execution that when aponte showed him a portrait of King christophe, he
had explained “that england was intercepting the ships that came loaded
with blacks because it no longer wanted slavery, sending them to [haiti] to
be governed by the black king”22.
21
On these three examples, see Junta Consular to Capitán General, 23 February 1811 and
26 June 1811, in Biblioteca nacional José martí, la habana (BnJm), cm morales, tomo 79,
nos. 23 and 26 respectively; and claudio martínez pinillos to real consulado, 24 march
1812, in anc, ap, leg. 106, exp. 21. haitian interception of slave ships is discussed briefly
in José luciano Franco, Comercio clandestino de esclavos, 106-107. the fate of the santa ana,
which was taken to the port of Gonaives, may be linked to the history of the famous village
and ritual center of souvenance, a few miles from that city. in oral and popular history, the
origins of the place are associated with a slave ship whose human cargo was liberated and
taken to that area in roughly this period. personal communication, patrick tardieu, novem-
ber 2006; michel hector and Jean casimir, February 2007. to my knowledge, no one has
worked on the haitian capture of slave ships, and it is thus impossible at this point to know
how widespread or rare the practice was, whether it affected other slave holding powers,
the extent to which such acts were carried out by north or south, or the fate of those africans
aboard the ships captured. Years later, christophe, in correspondence with British aboli-
tionist thomas clarkson, appears to deny involvement in such practices, writing on march
20, 1819, «though it is only with the greatest grief that i can bear to see spanish vessels
engaged in the slave trade within sights of our coasts, it is not my intention to fit out ships
of war against them». this was in reply to clarkson’s recommendation that he consider do-
ing just that. see leslie Griggs and clifford prator, eds., Henry Christophe and Thomas Clarks:
A Correspondence (Berkeley: university of california press, 1952), 115-117 and 128. For this
same period, José luciano Franco (Comercio, 107) briefly discusses an 1819 case in which
Boyer’s naval forces (on the warship Wilberforce) intercept a cuban-bound slave ship, and
free and take its hundreds of captives to port-au-prince.
22
here the testimony seems to echo the interpretation of the events advanced by the real
consulado to the captain-General: that haiti was intercepting slave ships with the protec-
tion of the British. the quote is from the testimony of Francisco Xavier pacheco, in Autos
sobre el incendio de Peñas Altas, in anc, ap, leg. 13, exp. 1, f. 291. Quote is: «y entonces le
enseño aponte el retrato del rey negro de aití nombrado henrique cristóval, instruyen-
dole que se había coronado y reconocido por el rey de Ynglaterra y el rey de españa. Que
it was in this world, that slaves and free people of color talked about
haiti’s commitment to their freedom – a world where men and women
who would have been enslaved alongside them had through the interven-
tion of christophe reached free soil23.
4. Conclusion
if we return to our original question of how the haitian revolution was

apprehended in a cuba that was just making the transition to full-fledged
slavery, we see now how insufficient it is to speak simply about vague
notions of fear and hope. Whatever sense of fear or hope may have been
sparked in cuba by the haitian revolution would have likely drawn on
ample raw material, on detailed narratives, and suggestive stories avail-
able to residents of cuba regarding those events. so, for example, when
alleged slave conspirators in Bayamo in 1805 relayed the name of Jean-
François to spanish authorities, or when, during the aponte conspiracy,
slaves and free people again invoked the shadowy figure in 1812, both tell-
ers and audiences for those stories would have had ample opportunity to
learn of the real Jean-François and his exploits. likewise, the oft-repeated
assertion that creole elites feared that any attempt at political indepen-
dence would awaken the population of color, perhaps makes more sense
when we know that some of that elite had first-hand experience with un-
successful attempts to mobilize and then contain former slaves in support
of elite political goals. cuban men deployed on the saint-domingue-santo
domingo border had been defeated by some of those slave forces in 1794-
1795. cuban residents had opportunities to witness defeated whites evacu-
ate the French colony and then to read the proclamations of their black
victors. the fears or hopes allegedly inspired by the haitian revolution
would have been shaped by these very concrete contacts and experiences.
But what of the enslaved and free people of color specifically? how are
we to understand their relationship to and understanding of the haitian
los Yngleses apresavan los Buques que vienían cargados de negros por que no queria que
hubiera esclavitud, destinando aquellos a santo domingo para que fuesen gobernados por
el rey negro».
23
the ongoing work of sue peabody and Keila Grinberg on the evolution of the free soil
idea prompts us to think of a related vernacular, as opposed to juridical, concept of haiti
as free soil, an association perhaps encouraged by haitian policies such as the interception
of slave ships whose captives were liberated “to” haiti and pétion’s activist definitions of
haitianness (and thereby freedom) extending to black and brown people in other territories
who might come to reside in Haiti. On the legal concept of free soil, see Sue Peabody and
Keila Grinberg, Free Soil: An Atlantic Legal Construct, presented at the conference “rethinking
Boundaries: transforming methods and approaches in atlantic history”, new York univer-
sity, 9-10 February 2007. On the circulation of vernacular, Atlantic concepts of rights, see also
rebecca scott, “public rights and private commerce: a nineteenth-century atlantic creole
itinerary”, forthcoming in Current Anthropology.
revolution? undoubtedly, the example of the haitian revolution gave lo-

cal resistance, conspiracy, and rebellion new momentum. even though no
rebellion came close to assuming the proportions of the haitian example,
and even though in most cases actual rebellion was thwarted, it is clear that
the haitian revolution, and haiti itself, became part of the cognitive world
of the enslaved, who engaged it as possibility and goal and invoked it as
metaphor for freedom or radical change. But for them clearly it was more
than just a symbol, haiti was also a living, active agent, a viable state with
the potential to have an impact on their own lives. they consumed and
thought about the most current information available to them, develop-
ing and sharing interpretations with one another about the meanings of
the haitian revolution in relation to their own world. the traces of this
intellectual process are audible in the voluminous slave testimony. and the
traces of those conversations, as fragmentary and mediated as they are,
leave further traces of slaves’ engagement with haiti as a state whose pres-
ence was in some way felt in their lives, as a state capable, for example,
of freeing captives bound for cuba, as a state whose very existence and
whose actions (based on what they heard in cuba) might in some way con-
tribute to their own liberation. in this light, slave testimony about haiti
emerges less as vague abstraction or groundless hope. it can be seen, rath-
er, as the product of slaves’ sustained intellectual and political engagement
with the tumultuous world of the age of revolution, a world that – based
on their evidence and interpretation – might produce enough openings to
help them generate freedom in their own lifetime.
I. Fattacciu
Chapter 2
Cuba and Fernando Po in the Second Half of
the 19th Century
[the cubans] could have taken this island from the
spaniards if they had tried […] but there was no
organization among them at all, and so little caution
that everybody knew their escape plan1.
When the Tratado del Pardo ratified the transfer of Fernando po from
portugal to spain in 1778, the spanish government had no clear projects for
the island’s future role among its colonies. the first spanish governor there –
carlos chacón – did not take effective possession of the colony until almost
a century later, when he arrived on the island in 1858. as climate and tropi-
cal diseases made colonization difficult, the colonial administration decided
the afro-cuban population would have a better chance of adapting to the
weather and helping to develop the cultivation of cane and cacao there2. in
1862, following a number of bureaucratic and practical problems, 200 black
cuban emancipados arrived on Fernando po aboard the “Ferrol”.
this was the first contact between the two spanish colonies, and it
would not be the last. in 1862 and 1863, the spanish government renewed
its request to cuban authorities for another group of 200 emancipados to be
sent to the island. however, for reasons to be explained below, the project
was never realized. subsequent expeditions from cuba to the african is-
land, in 1866 and 1869, would no longer carry emancipados but instead po-
litical prisoners involved in the battle for independence3.
a study of the relations between Fernando po and cuba in the late 19th
century suggests different reflections regarding the historiography of the
1
John holt, The Diary of John Holt, 1862-1872 (liverpool: Young, 1948), 148-149.
2
Juan José díaz matarranz, De la trata de los negros al cultivo del cacao. Evolución del modelo
colonial español en Guinea ecuatorial de 1778 a 1914 (Barcelona: ceiba, 2005), 111-115.
3
this paper is a work in progress. as full access to cuban newspapers and periodicals has
not yet been possible, the research has been based on sources consulted in spain. apart from
useful references found in secondary literature, the primary sources used here are mainly
official documents (Reales Ordenes, documents from the Archivo General de la Administración,
expedition reports, and the diaries of an english merchant and two cuban political prisoners
in Fernando po).
period of the Cuban struggle for independence. On the one hand, it could
help to reconsider the role of the emancipados in the spanish colonial eco-
nomic system by putting the issue of slavery and its role in cuba not only
in relation to us and spanish interests, but also to other colonial realities
of minor importance and dependent on Cuba. On the other hand, examin-
ing the polemic aroused by the project in cuban public opinion at the time
could contribute to the reconstruction of the different opinions, hopes and
contradictions that linked the issue of and discourse on slavery with cuban
nationalism in the period before 1868. Finally, episodes of emancipados and
political prisoners being transferred to Fernando po by force opened up the
issue of the competing and contradictory colonial policies that spain prac-
ticed towards its first african possession and its last american one.
the few scholars who have dealt with the cuban presence in Fernando
po have been specialists in african studies and have therefore focused more
on the actual experience of cubans on the island than on the reasons for
and organization of the expeditions4. their interests have been founded on
the colonization process in Fernando po, especially the reasons for the delay
in its occupation and the scarce interest of the spanish government in de-
veloping a precise plan to exploit its resources and develop its potential. in
the present study, the main objective is to contribute to an understanding of
the contradictory interaction between the economic interests of the spanish
crown; the spanish need to take control of their possessions in Guinea on
the one hand and maintain political control over cuba on the other; and the
collision between nationalist sentiment and the fear of a racial war in cuba.
it would be impossible to understand the atypical colonization pro-
cess involving the only spanish possession in africa without taking cuba
and its history into consideration. cuba, the jewel in spain’s crown, and
Fernando po have parallel but very different histories, as the growth of the
cuban sugarcane economy was the determining factor in the delayed colo-
nization of the african island5.
cuban sugar was the main trade of what survived of the mid-19th-century
spanish empire, and its production still required the exploitation of slave la-
bor. cuba became the driving force behind a huge growth in the demand for
commodities and slave labor6. For this reason spain became increasingly in-
4
On the subject see: Maria Dolores García Cantús, Fernando Poo: una aventura colonial española
en el África Occidental 1778-1900 (Ph.D. Dissertation, Universidad de Valencia, 2003), 450-460;
mariano luis de castro y antolín, Fernando Poo y los emancipados de La Habana, «estudios afri-
canos», 14-15 (1994); c. Gonzalez echegarray, “cubanos en Fernando poo. un capitulo en las
memorias de John holt”, Cuadernos de Historia Contemporanea, 1 (2003), 205-212.
5
On the “forgotten island” of Fernando Po, see: Mariano Luis De Castro and Maria De la
calle, Origen de la colonización española de Guinea Ecuatorial (1777-1860) (Valladolid: Universi-
dad de Valladolid, 1992).
6
On Cuba, slavery and the latter’s role among Spanish colonies see: Arthur F. Corwin, Spain
and the Abolition of Slavery in Cuba, 1817-1886 (austin: texas university press, 1967); and re-
becca J. scott, Slave Emancipation in Cuba: The Transition to Free Labor, 1860-1899 (princeton:
volved in West africa during the 19th century, since africa was seen as the an-
swer to cuba’s need for labor. most importantly, a base in africa provided an
opportunity to procure slaves directly for cuba without foreign middlemen.
the first intersection of cuban interests with the colonization of Fernando
po concerned the British-spanish negotiation of 1839. as spanish interest in
the island had been minimal until the mid-19th century, British authorities
had installed an anti-slaving base there. Between 1839 and 1841, the British
government, which had evacuated the island in 1834, opened negotiations
to buy the african island, but failed in its attempt. initially it had seemed
that the spanish government was greatly interested in ceding their forgotten
possession. however, it closed negotiations in the face of cuban opposition.
cuban planters opposed the cession because a British settlement in that area
would have posed a difficult obstacle to their illicit slave trade. the united
Kingdom’s offer to buy the african island forced the spanish government to
pay more attention to its possessions in Guinea, and in 1858 a commission
was created to research a strategy for the future of Fernando po. however,
the colonization plans they drew up at the time subordinated the develop-
ment and government of the island to cuban economic interests.
When the spanish government decided to take definitive possession of
Fernando po, the British engagement to fight slavery and the fear of violent
protest among black settlers convinced spain not to introduce slavery to the
island. a royal order of 1859 proclaimed all slaves arriving there to be free,
therefore making Fernando po an anomaly among spanish colonies. after
the failure of the two expeditions of spanish settlers in 1859, cuba’s need
to alleviate the tension provoked by the large presence of emancipados and
Fernando po’s need for a labor force appeared to meet in the recovery of the
old project to use emancipado population to colonize the african island.
the idea of colonizing the african possession with cuban emancipados
had already been part of Spanish plans in the 1840s when L. O’Donnell –
then capitán General de cuba – proposed taking a certain number of afro-
cuban freedmen off the island and sending them to Fernando po “because
their nature or attitude caused troubles on the island”7. it was believed this
initiative could have two important and positive consequences: not only
could it introduce spanish costumes, religion and language to the island –
where english presence had been very strong – in a pacific way, it could al-
so alleviate the tensions provoked by the presence of emancipados in cuban
society. however, these initial intentions would not be realized until the
1860s, and the colonial authorities continued using the island’s Kruman
population for labor and attempting to organize settlements with spanish
princeton university press, 1985).

7
O’Donnell’s letter of 25 June 1845, in Archivo General de la Administración de Madrid
(hereafter aGam), africa-Guinea (aG), box 683.
settlers8. meanwhile, the lack of labor in Fernando po became pressing and

cacao started to prevail over the island’s other crops – sugarcane, coffee
and spices – because it needed much less care than the other seeds.
in cuba, on the other hand, the reform movement had gained strength,
which led spain to initiate a period of tolerance under capitán General
Francisco serrano y domínguez and his successor, domingo dulce, in an at-
tempt to curb independent tendencies. it had become clear that slavery and
the racial issue were the keys to cuban independence. a growing number of
cubans therefore started to advocate the ending of the slave trade and even
the gradual abolition of slavery. it was in this climate that the first expedition
of emancipados was organized and carried out in the early 1860s.
1. The Problem of the Cuban Emancipados in the 19th Century
the problem of the emancipados and their use as a slave-labor or hard-

labor force remained a recurring issue that intersects with the histories of
both cuba and Fernando po. the surplus of slaves that was reached in
cuba during the first half of the 19th century put the island in a contra-
dictory situation: not only did the need for slave labor clash with the fear
of a “negro” insurrection, but it was also controversial with respect to the
growing activism in favor of cuban independence.
spain signed the second treaty to abolish the slave trade in 1835. While
this treaty granted a mutual right of search and authorized the condem-
nation and dismantling of vessels equipped for the slave trade, its most
important consequence was probably the problems it caused for the ad-
ministration of emancipados9.
the treaty signed in 1817 had already declared that slaves liberated by
the British antislavery squadron had to be received on cuban territory and
that the spanish government had to grant a certificate of emancipation to
these recaptured africans. spain, which still covertly approved of the ille-
gal importation of slaves, now had to face the sudden emergence of a class
of freedmen whose status was guaranteed by international agreement.
there were already more than 5,000 of these recaptives, or emancipados, in
cuba in 1834, but the major preoccupation for spanish authorities was the
exponential growth of their number10.
here their status was ruled by an annex, the Reglamento para el buen trato
de los negros emancipados. the most important article in the Reglamento was the
fourth, according to which the spanish government was obliged to assure the
freedom of emancipados, as well as promote their moral and religious education
8
matarranz, De la trata, 111-115.
9
transcription of the Tratado [segundo] entre España y el Reino Unido para la abolición del tráfico de es-
clavos in manuel lucena salmoral, Leyes para esclavos... (madrid: tavera, 2000), 1236-1249, doc. 535.
10
corwin, Spain.
and instruction so they could be in the condition to earn a living. Emancipados

were entrusted to corporations in charge of their “education to freedom” for
a period of five years, during which time they repaid their freedom through
forced work; this period could also be prolonged for another three years11.
the 1861 census reports the presence of 6,650 emancipados on the island,
many of whom were declared free in 1870 (4,492)12. this new class of afro-
cubans was viewed as a more disruptive threat to the maintenance of the
slave order than the pre-existing class of cuban freedmen:
if those who have redeemed themselves from slavery by their honor, or

by their savings which have been the fruit of proper conduct are feared in
the towns because of their excessive numbers compared to the whites, how
much more are they to be feared if we add to them negros […] who lack the-
se qualities? and how much greater would be the danger if the incendiary
spirit of independence is communicated to the slaves, making a common
cause, following the example of those of santo domingo?13.
the evocation of the haitian revolution, often recalled by cuban rep-

resentatives in the cortes and by advocates of slavery in the debate over
abolition, was used as an excuse for the inhuman treatment reserved for
emancipados. in the following decades, emancipados suffered all forms of
abuse. initially, the capitán General m. tacón allowed them to be trans-
ferred to the plantations and incorporated into the slave-labor force, prac-
tically endorsing a cheap and illicit internal trade of “slaves”14; often they
even took the place of dead slaves, whom were declared to the authorities
as dead emancipados instead. By the end of the 1860s, their situation, ratified
by the Reglamento de emancipados in 1855, was worse than that of slaves15.
While one possible solution to the difficult cuban emancipado situation
was another expulsion of the most active and dangerous elements from
the island, cuban interests completely clashed with the needs of Fernando
po. cuba would be the main beneficiary of such an initiative, as is evident
from the fact that Fernando po authorities had already refused to receive
emancipados from the united states in 186116. in this sense, the cuban situ-
ation was peculiar, as it encouraged both emigration and immigration of
black labor. the illicit slave trade was meant to procure the labor force nec-
essary for the sugar economy, while a reverse emigration scheme would
free cuba of its emergent class of emancipados.
11
transcription of the Reglamento para el buen trato de los negros emancipados in salmoral, Leyes,
1248-1249, doc. 535.
12
salmoral, Leyes, 451.
13
Gwendolyn midlo hall, Social Control in Slave Plantation Societies (Baltimore: Johns hopkins
university press, 1970), 131.
14
the price of an emancipado was 1/3 of the price of a slave.
15
corwin, Spain.
16
correspondence in aGam, aG, box 672, n. 3.
2. Transferring Emancipados from Cuba to Fernando Po, 1862
On 7 March 1860, the first Real Orden was sent to cuba asking for 200
emancipados to be sent to Fernando po, a petition that remained unattend-
ed and was repeated in another Orden of 5 april 186117. as stated therein,
“such a small number of workers cannot in any way penalize the develop-
ment of public works on the island, especially if we take into consideration
[…] the evil always caused by colored libertos”18.
not only did the contrasting interests of the two colonies start a debate in
cuba over whether to expel a good number of emancipados, but it also led to an
interesting series of letters/reports in which cuban, spanish and Fernando po
authorities discussed who exactly should be sent to the african island. the dis-
pute delayed the organization of the expedition for two years, and an analysis
of the composition of the group that was eventually sent from cuba reveals the
extent to which these emancipados matched the expectations of either side.
authorities in Fernando po had expressed their opposition to the project
from the beginning. By the end of June 1860, however, the island’s governor, J.
de la Gándara y navarro, sent a report regarding the binding conditions and
advantages determined for the emancipados who were going to migrate there19.
though expressing his skepticism of the expedition’s benefits for the african
island, he wrote that deportees could in fact help to replace the peninsular
military garrison and carry out public works to help advance the colonization
process. in an attempt to prevent cuban authorities from taking the opportu-
nity to expel criminals and dangerous elements, the Ordenes contained several
requirements. One of the first general requirements was that the emancipados
be “intelligent and civilized people […], who speak spanish and profess our
religion; even better if with their wives”20, to contrast British influence. the
most important request, however, concerned their professional skills: the ex-
pedition was required to include at least twelve house servants, ten masons,
ten master carpenters, three blacksmiths, three bakers, two cobblers and two
tailors, while the rest could be composed of unskilled or agricultural laborers21.
if, on the other hand, emancipados had to be recruited as volunteers for the
expedition, as stated in the Ordenes, what were they offered to attract them to
the other side of the ocean? in order to settle on the island, emancipados with the
requested professional skills were promised complete freedom in addition to a
salary – the same given to the previous settlers from spain; they were further-
more promised land to cultivate. the others were told they could have the same
17
transcription of Reales Ordenes in agustin miranda Junco, Leyes Coloniales (madrid: ri-
vadeneyra, 1945), 29 and 31.
18
Ibidem, 31.
19
de la Gándara y navarro, letter of 28 June 1860 in aGam, aG, box 672.
20
Ibidem.
21
Ibidem.
advantages if they decided to stay on the island at the end of their contract22.
the organization of the expedition proceeded slowly, since the cuban
government’s plan was to pressure spanish authorities to transform Fernando
po into a penal colony for undesirable afro-cubans and political dissidents.
capitán General F. serrano y domínguez expressed the same desire in a letter
he sent the spanish government on 6 June 1861, in which he asked for «all those
coloreds who have been sentenced in cuba for brawling, illegal weapons pos-
session, drunkenness and other crimes of this kind» to be sent to Fernando po23.
Four months after the publication of the recruitment announcement, he
communicated that no emancipados had yet asked to participate and that it
would consequently be necessary to recruit them without their consent24. in
spite of the doubts expressed by the governor of Fernando po25, who protested
against the idea of sending black criminals to a developing colony and lament-
ed the unattractive conditions offered to volunteers, the order was renewed
on 26 October 186126. Governor la Gándara had nothing left to do but ask
that the necessary number of participants be recruited “por la elección o por la
suerte” among those who corresponded with the requested requirements. On
14 June 1862, 200 black emancipados were shipped across the ocean aboard the
“Ferrol”, arriving on Fernando po on the 1st of august of that year27.
3. The Experience of Emancipados on Fernando Po and the

Reglamento de emancipados
the group of cubans who arrived on Fernando po met few of the re-
quirements requested by the island’s governor. With regards to the demo-
graphic composition of the group, a report on the expedition drawn up in
1862 includes a list of the 200 emancipados, indicating their age and original
provenance28. the large majority of them were young males from ten to
thirty-six years of age, while the few women included in the expedition
were between eleven and sixteen years old29. But what can the data tell us
about the criteria adopted by cuban authorities to recruit emancipados for
the expedition? Fernando po’s new governor, p. lópez ayllón, wrote that,
although the newly arrived young labor force could prove very useful on
the island, there were just two masons and one blacksmith among them.
22
Ibidem.
23
serrano y domínguez’s letter, 6 June 1861, aGam, aG, box 672.
24
serrano y domínguez’s letter, 26 september 1861 in aGam, aG, box 672.
25
letter of 25 september 1861 in aGam, aG, box 672.
26
transcription of Reales Ordenes in Junco, Leyes Coloniales, 32.
27
Relación nominal y circunstanciada de los doscientos negros emancipados que por R.O. de 21 de
Marzo de 1862 se han trasladado desde esta Isla de Cuba a la de Fernando Poo en el vapor transporte
“Ferrol”, in aGam, aG, box 672.
28
Ibidem.
29
Ibidem.
in virtue of this, the governor asked that another 200 emancipados be sent,
among which he requested the presence of thirty-two masons, sixteen mas-
ter carpenters, six blacksmiths, and a few tile makers and glaziers30.
the scarce professional skills of the emancipados sent from cuba already give
us an idea of how little the requests of Fernando po had been taken into account
in their selection. By looking at the age and provenance of the participants, one
could argue that the majority of them, who were very young, were probably
recently arrived and emancipated slaves (bozales). the small remaining group
of older emancipados, on the other hand, was likely formed by “undesirable”
afro-cubans, a fact that could be confirmed by the indication of cuban towns
in the place of the expedition name. in the documents written by Fernando po
authorities, there are not many other explicit references to the composition of
the expedition, apart from a final note by the governor in charge in 1871, a.
Vivar, regarding the laziness and poor nature of the Cuban emancipados31.
another serious problem posed by the composition of the cuban group
was the scarcity of women. there were only twenty-five of them – a fact that,
together with the general scarcity of women on the island, made it difficult
to celebrate marriages as encouraged by spanish authorities. nevertheless,
as the merchant John holt noted ironically in his diary, barely a month af-
ter their arrival already twenty-one marriages had been celebrated32.
adapting to life in Guinea was difficult from the beginning for the eman-
cipados. While accommodations were arranged for the twenty-one married
couples in 1862, the rest of the cubans had to wait until 1863 when housing
blocks were built on a patch of land west of santa isabel. this was destined
to be a new neighborhood, called “congo”, which was to pass officially to
the cubans in 1867 at the end of their contracts33.
But how did the emancipados react to their transfer to Fernando po and
how did they adapt to their new life? many did not expect to be forced to
work and were especially unwilling to accept that almost half their salary
(fifty reales per month) would only be paid at the end of the contract, af-
ter five years. some tried to protest when informed of the conditions, but
the governor repressed the rebellion immediately, inflicting “punishments
proportioned to their faults” upon the rebels34.
in the governor’s opinion, it seemed the cubans had left the island with
a deceitful idea of their destiny in Fernando po. in order to correct such
misleading ideas, the governor promulgated the Reglamento de emancipados,
upon which the cubans were instructed every sunday35. With the help of
30
lópez ayllón’s letter, 7 august 1862 in aGam, aG, box 672.
31
aGam, aG, box 781, n. 29.
32
John holt wrote in his diary: “today […] spaniards have married a lot of these cubans by
wholesale”, quoted in García Cantús, Fernando Poo, 460.
33
aGam, aG, box 672, n. 1.
34
aGam, aG, box 672.
35
Proyecto de Reglamento para el Régimen de los Emancipados de la isla de Fernando Poo, 28 septem-
the emancipados and the energetic direction of Governor lópez ayllón, in

just a couple of months a church was built, the main square was leveled
and the bogs around santa isabel were reclaimed. the group then went on
to contribute to the development of different granjas in which tobacco, cof-
fee and especially cacao were to be cultivated36.
When their five years under the jurisdiction of the Fernando po govern-
ment came to an end, many emancipados expressed the desire to go back to
cuba. however, none of them could: Fernando po authorities had in fact
used the salary the emancipados were supposed to be paid at the end of their
contract to finance the building up of the “congo”. moreover, it was decided
that the children of emancipados would be under the protection of the gover-
nor until their legal age, and therefore had to stay on the island37. in the end,
the only capital the cubans received from the authorities was the congo
neighborhood, and from the descriptions we have of the situation there, the
exchange was not in their favor. as described in the diary of a cuban politi-
cal prisoner deported to Fernando po in 1869, there were no streets and the
neighborhood was just a square “around which [the cubans] have built their
shacks and live miserably, those who live, since most have died”38.
the congo’s population declined rapidly in the years following 1867,
though we do not know if this was due to a high mortality rate or to the in-
tegration of cubans with the native Bubi population through marriage39. it
is clear, however, that the hopes of Governor la Gándara were unfulfilled
even in this case, since the assimilation process had gone in the opposite
direction of that desired. the scarcity of women and the difficulty adapt-
ing to life on the island had made it either impossible or detrimental for
cubans to maintain their costumes and cultural identity, thereby facilitat-
ing their integration with the island’s Bubi people.
4. Cuban Political Prisoners (1866-1869) and the Failure of Fernando

Po as a Penal Colony
despite the problems aroused by the organization and realization of the

first expedition, the need for skilled workers induced Fernando po’s gover-
nor to demand that another cuban contingent be sent in 1862 and again in
186340. however, domingo dulce, who replaced F. serrano as capitán General
in 1862, refused to organize any new expeditions. the reason he gave was that
ber 1867, aGam, aG, box 672.

36
de castro y antolín, Fernando, 13-14.
37
Proyecto de Reglamento para el Régimen de los Emancipados de la isla de Fernando Poo, 28 septem-
ber 1867, in aGam, aG, box 672.
38
Francisco Javier Balmaseda, Los confinados a Fernando Poo e Impresiones de un viaje a Guinea
(new York: imprenta de la revolución, 1869), 148.
39
de castro y antolín, Fernando, 14-15.
40
aGam, aG, box 672; transcription of Reales Ordenes in Junco, Leyes, 42.
all the emancipados with professional skills were already employed, so only un-
skilled workers answered the new recruitment publication. moreover, he com-
plained in his letter that emancipados received worse treatment in Guinea than
in cuba, and refused to send any more expeditions under such conditions41.
While this refusal marked the failure of the larger project to transfer the
emancipado population to Guinea, it did not mark the end of the colonial proj-
ect to transform Fernando po into a penal colony for dangerous afro-cubans
and political dissidents. subsequent expeditions from cuba to the african is-
land, in 1866 and 1869, would no longer carry emancipados but instead politi-
cal prisoners accused of being involved in the battle for independence.
in 1867, the failure of the Junta de Informaciòn – formed to discuss propos-
als to reform the island – marked the failure of reformism in general and
gave new impetus to the independence movement. moreover, spain sent to
cuba Francisco de lersundi, a reactionary captain-general who prohibited
public meetings and clamped tight political censure over reformist literature.
spanish authorities had already been using different measures of repression
to contrast nationalist efforts: alongside a diffused policy of expropriation,
those considered a threat to the maintenance of social order could be con-
demned to imprisonment in various detention centers around cuba, forced
relocation within cuba (reconcentración) or deportation. Before the radical-
ization of the clash over independence, the main goal of deportation had
been to re-hispanicize cuba through the expulsion of emancipados. then, in
1866 and 1869, the majority of deportees were undesirable creoles – includ-
ing insurrectionists, political undesirables, reformists and dissidents.
some ninety cubans arrived in Guinea in 1866 and another 250 were
deported in 1869. these were the last of the expeditions, since spanish au-
thorities subsequently abandoned the project of using Fernando po as a pe-
nal colony. From the little information we have on the first group, it seems
that, as in 1862, they were mainly black cubans from the lower classes:
most of them were colored: ten of them were accused of being profes-
sional assassins or thieves, though with no charge against them; the gover-
nment considered the others to be layabouts, drunks […] many were totally
innocent, but had enemies among the police officers, and some had commit-
ted the crime of loving honor and having beautiful daughters42.
the deportees were decimated by the poor hygienic conditions and yel-
low fever. those who survived were shipped off to madeira, where their
traces were lost after portuguese authorities refused to receive them43.
the deportees of 1869, on the other hand, belonged to the cuban bour-
41
aGam, aG, box 672.
42
Balmaseda, Los confinados, 142.
43
Juan B. saluvet, Los deportados a Fernando Poo en 1869 (matanzas: aurora del Yumurì, 1892).
geoisie, including such distinguished cubans as carlos castillo, the direc-

tor of the Caja de Ahorros de Cuba, plantation owner José manuel ponce de
león and pedro Barrenqui, the vice-consul in cardenas44. We have more in-
formation on this expedition, since the diaries of two of the prisoners who
arrived that year, Francisco Xavier Balmaseda (a nationalist writer) and Juan
B. saluvet, allow us to reconstruct their experience on Fernando po in detail.
the fact of belonging to the cuban upper class assured these prisoners of
a better destiny than that reserved for participants in previous expeditions.
For many of the island’s merchants their arrival represented an occasion to
make good deals, providing whatever might be necessary for their survival,
but some also felt genuine sympathy and helped the new arrivals to escape45.
spanish authorities did not put much effort into trying to retain the cuban
deportees, who organized several plans to escape, probably because of the
scarcity of food caused by the excess foreign population. the testimony of a
British merchant who lived on Fernando po at the time, John holt, confirms
the benevolence of spanish soldiers towards their escape attempts and the
benignancy of the island’s population towards these forced immigrants.
From his diary, as well as from Balmaseda’s account, we know that these
cuban deportees also had the occasion to take control of Fernando po during
their stay: “We had two-hundred rifles, gunpowder and bullets to surprise the
garrison and take possession of the island in the name of our republic, to name
the colored man who deserves it most as governor and then leave”46. though
holt shows some sympathy towards the cubans, he blames their failure to take
over the island on their laziness and lack of organization, which he wrote was
also what had prevented them from reaching independence for their country47.
Fundamentally, the plan to take control of Fernando po failed because
the cubans preferred to escape it. the majority of prisoners succeeded, or
they managed to obtain a transfer; only some remained there after com-
pleting their sentence.
5. Preliminary Conclusions
as we have seen in the case of the relations between Fernando po and

cuba in the second half of the 19th century, slavery remains a central issue
in the struggle over empire and nationhood. the struggles for and against
slavery, and for and against independence in cuba, took place in a society
shaped by centuries of european colonization and the african slave trade.
the contours of this world can therefore only be understood by taking into
account the complex interactions between africa, europe and the americas.
44
holt, The Diary.
45
Balmaseda, Los confinados; saluvet, Los deportados; holt, The Diary.
46
Balmaseda, Los confinados, 146-147.
47
holt, The Diary.
in particular, the organization and realization of the 1862 expedition illus-

trates the difficulties caused by the growing number of emancipados in cuba
towards the second half of the 19th century. this new class of afro-cubans
represented a powerful threat to the maintenance of the slave order since they
had lived much of their lives outside the strict control of that system, there-
fore cuban authorities tried – illegally – to reduce them again to the condition
of slavery. the issue was even more controversial for cuban elites since the
growth of the afro-cuban and emancipado populations was, for that part of
society in favor of independence, a powerful reminder of the “risk” of a racial
war such as that which had taken place in haiti. slavery and the african slave
trade always figured centrally in the cuban nation-building process, not least
because slaves themselves took up arms to fight for liberation.
the project to make Fernando po a penal colony for political dissidents
or a relief valve for cuban emancipados failed for a number of reasons:
first, for the lack of a clear colonization plan; second, because of colliding
spanish interests, divided between the need for a cuban sugar economy
and the development possibilities of the african colony; and third, because
any initiative taken regarding Fernando po was a consequence of cuba’s
african trade, making it an isolated episode without a coherent plan.
in the case of the 1862 expedition, we know cuba’s need for labor played a
major role in the decision to refuse to send more emancipados, but it would nev-
ertheless be interesting to analyze thoroughly the debate in cuban society at the
time. Who were those in favor and those against its organization? the interests
of cuban elites and those of the spanish colonial administration seem to coin-
cide on this occasion, but one could argue it was likely for opposite reasons. as
mentioned above, spanish authorities were worried not only about the effect
emancipados would have on the maintenance of the slave order but also, and es-
pecially, about “how much greater would be the danger if the incendiary spirit
of independence is communicated to the slaves, making a common cause”48.
as is evident from this quotation, if for the cuban elite in favor of inde-
pendence the worst obstacle to its realization was precisely the fear of a racial
war, colonial authorities, on the other side, feared the possibility of a coalition
between slaves and political dissidents. While it is clear that cuba’s inten-
tion with this expedition was to expel a good number of “undesirable afro-
cubans”, it would be worthwhile to better define the concept of “dangerous”
for colonial authorities, to see if it carried political implications in addition to
those of race and public security. For the implicit and unsolvable contradic-
tion present in the opposing intentions of the three parties involved, the colo-
nization plan for the spanish possession in africa had been destined from the
beginning to disappoint authorities in spain, cuba and Fernando po.
48
midlo hall, Social Control, 132.
L. Giolitto
Chapter 3
Identitades raciales, nacionalismo,
jerarquías sociales: los líderes “de color”
en Cuba (1902-1912) 
El 20 de mayo de 1902 nacía la república cubana, después de más de

treinta años de lucha por la independencia. el proceso de consolidación del
nuevo estado fue acompañado de una renovada presencia de tensiones y
conflictos raciales, que se desarrollaron siguiendo pautas inéditas con res-
pecto a las décadas anteriores.
dos factores principales condicionaron el despliegue de las relaciones
raciales, influenciando las visiones y estrategias de los actores político-so-
ciales y poniendo límites a sus acciones. por un lado, el nuevo estado inde-
pendiente se caracterizó por un contexto excepcional de igualdad formal
y de extensión de la ciudadanía a través del sufragio universal masculino.
este factor determinó la presencia de un electorado “de color” numérica-
mente relevante, que iba a condicionar las dinámicas de la política ins-
titucional y las estrategias de los partidos1. sin embargo, la situación de
igualdad formal tropezó con la persistencia de prejuicios raciales, justifica-
dos y disimulados con discursos que hacían hincapié en el menor nivel de
instrucción de la población de color. estas discriminaciones contribuyeron
a reajustar las jerarquías sociales del nuevo estado, frustrando los anhelos

trabajo realizado en el marco de un contrato de investigación (referencia sB2006-0006) y en
el proyecto hum2006-00908/hist (mec)
1
en este trabajo se utilizan los apelativos “de color” y “negros y mulatos” – en lugar de
“afrocubano” adoptado en la literatura reciente – por su capacidad de reflejar los criterios de
inclusión y de marginación usados en la época. los apelativos “gente de color”, “raza de co-
lor”, “clase de color” y “negros” designaron en el lenguaje político de aquellos años entidades
colectivas y revelan la intención de identificar en una categoría única a la población de origen
africano, superando las distinciones basadas en gradaciones del color. el término “mulato” se
usó para indicar el color de individuos y tuvo un significado ambiguo ya que sustituyó otras
categorías como “señor” y “ciudadano”. la expresión “negros y mulatos” adoptada en este
estudio discrepa pues de la categoría de “negros” que se usó en la época y revela el intento de
conciliar modalidades distintas que designaron individuos y entidades colectivas.
de igualdad de muchos negros y mulatos.

la situación de dependencia económica y política de estados unidos,
en las primeras décadas de vida de la república, es otro factor que condi-
cionó de manera relevante las relaciones raciales. en el siglo XiX estados
unidos había manifestado muchas veces su interés en anexionar la isla2.
en 1898, al finalizar la Guerra de independencia, intervino en el conflicto
apropiándose de la dirección militar. treinta años de lucha contra el co-
lonialismo español fueron sustituidos por la “guerra hispano-americana”
y por más de tres años de ocupación estadounidense3. el estado cubano
creado en 1902 iba a ser formalmente independiente, aunque subordinado
políticamente y económicamente a la potencia norteamericana4. Bajo dicho
dominio se frenaron los intentos, que dieron inicio con las guerras de inde-
pendencia, de derribar las jerarquías raciales y de clase, clara herencia de la
esclavitud. en el nuevo estado surgieron ideas inéditas de nación “blanca”
– mezcla de concepciones de la época colonial y del racismo importado de
estados unidos – que debilitarían los ideales de igualdad elaborados du-
rante las guerras de independencia5. sin embargo los proyectos de “blan-
queamiento”, voluntad de políticos e intelectuales cubanos, tropezaron
2
los proyectos de anexión de cuba estuvieron relacionados con el mantenimiento de la
esclavitud en ambos territorios y fueron soportados mayoritariamente por los estados es-
clavistas del sur de Estados Unidos. Los intentos de anexar la isla fueron múltiples, desde
propuestas de compra dirigidas a españa hasta intentos de ocupación armada. también los
hacendados cubanos, que vieron con el anexionismo la posibilidad de preservar su status y
su patrimonio, apoyaron conspiraciones y ofrecieron sostener económicamente la adquisición
de la isla por Estados Unidos. Ver Alessandra Lorini, L’impero della libertà e l’isola strategica. Gli
Stati Uniti e Cuba tra Otto e Novecento (napoli: liguori, 2008), 35-42, hugh thomas, La colonia
española de Cuba, en Historia de América Latina, tomo V, ed. Leslie Bethell (Barcelona: Crítica,
1991), 163-164.
3
al estallar la guerra en 1895 el gobierno estadounidense apoyó oficialmente a españa y ac-
tuó de cara a contrastar, desde su territorio, las expediciones en favor de la independencia. se-
gún Louis A. Pérez la victoria cubana iba a ser evidente cuando Estados Unidos intervino en
el conflicto y trasformó la Guerra de independencia en guerra hispano-americana, imponien-
do esta última en las agendas y en el lenguaje de la política internacional. Ver Lorini, L’impero,
83-84; louis a. pérez, The War of 1898. The United States and Cuba in History and Historiography
(chapell hill: university of north carolina press, 1998); luís aguilar, Cuba, c. 1860-1934, en
Historia de América Latina, tomo VI, ed. Leslie Bethell (Barcelona: Crítica, 1991), 220-221.
4
una enmienda añadida a la constitución cubana y conocida como “enmienda platt” per-
mitiría al gobierno de estados unidos intervenir militarmente para “preservar la independen-
cia” y proteger “la vida, la propiedad y la libertad individual”. su inclusión en la constitución
cubana dividió en dos la asamblea constituyente: quince delegados se opusieron y dieciséis
la aprobaron, permitiendo crear el nuevo estado si bien despojado de su soberanía. al mismo
tiempo el Tratado de Reciprocidad Comercial firmado en 1902 consolidó la dependencia econó-
mica de Cuba por Estados Unidos. Ver Diario de Sesiones de la Convención Constituyente de la
Isla de Cuba (la habana: 1901), 482-486; aguilar, “cuba”, 225-226; louis a. pérez, Cuba Under
the Platt Amendment, 1902-1934 (pittsburg: university of pittsburgh press, 1986), 52-55; id.,
Cuba Between Empires, 1878-1902 (pittsburgh: university of pittsburgh press, 1983), 323; Jorge
ibarra, Partidos políticos y clases sociales (la habana: ciencias sociales, 1992), 26-27.
5
Ver Loredana Giolitto, Raza y nación en Cuba durante la primera ocupación estadounidense. Un
análisis del periódico Patria, en Josef Opatrný, ed., Nación y cultura nacional en el Caribe hispano
(praga: Karolinum, 2005), 115-122.
con las exigencias de una economía dependiente que dispusiera de mano

de obra barata. en aquel contexto el racismo fue funcional a la marginación
social de negros y mulatos, que seguían siendo indispensables como mano
de obra para caña de azúcar y que habían sido formalmente incluidos en el
nuevo estado.
teniendo en cuenta los límites aquí presentados, este trabajo pretende
analizar las propuestas que algunos líderes “de color” elaboraron, con sus
escritos y acciones, con el fin de contrastar las discriminaciones raciales en
los primeros años de vida del nuevo estado.
1. Los años del silencio
En la república recién constituida muchas personas de color – intelectua-

les, políticos, veteranos de la independencia – se opusieron a las desigual-
dades raciales con escritos, estrategias, proyectos y acciones. sin embargo
sus propósitos tropezarían con la imposibilidad de modificar las jerarquías
sociales sin poner en peligro la supervivencia misma de la independencia.
el vínculo entre desigualdades sociales y discriminaciones raciales y su
indisolubilidad, en el contexto de soberanía limitada de la república cuba-
na, es el nudo fundamental para leer los proyectos y acciones de los líderes
de color, a la luz de las tensiones y contrastes de aquella época. este entor-
no, definido a principios del siglo XiX con el derrumbe de la producción
de azúcar en Haití tras la revolución de los esclavos en 1791, supuso la
expansión de la economía azucarera y de la esclavitud en cuba6. con la
llegada masiva de esclavos muta la relación demográfica entre población
blanca y de color, mientras el tránsito hacía una esclavitud sobre todo rural
embrutecía las condiciones de vida de los esclavos7. la marginación racial
y social sobrevivió a la abolición de la esclavitud, en 1886, y a la derrota
del colonialismo español, en 1898. la transición, lenta y gradual, hacia el
trabajo libre no implicó la distribución de las tierras y mantuvo inaltera-
das las relaciones laborales8. tampoco el proceso de independencia logró
consolidar una idea de nación igualitaria. después de 1898 junto a las pala-
6
maría dolores González-ripoll et al., El rumor de Haití en Cuba, Temor, raza y rebeldía, 1789-
1844 (madrid: csic, 2004).
7
a principios del siglo XiX el incremento de esclavos en cuba determinó un cambio cuanti-
tativo y cualitativo: en 1841 la población blanca había bajado al 41,51% pese a su incremento
numérico, los esclavos aumentaron al 43,32% y los negros y mulatos libres pasaron del 20,14%
en 1792 al 15%. la esclavitud adquirió además una connotación utilitarista que implicó un
fuerte deterioro en la vida de los esclavos y en las relaciones raciales. Ver Loredana Giolitto,
Esclavitud y libertad en Cartagena de Indias. Reflexiones en torno a una manumisión a finales del
período colonial, en Revista Fronteras de la Historia 8 (2003), 67-96; id., “Participar por igual”. Il
dibattito sulla questione razziale a Cuba, 1898-1912 (tesis de doctorado, universidad de Génova,
2005); rebecca scott, La emancipación de los esclavos en Cuba. La transición al trabajo libre 1860-
1899 (la habana: caminos, 2001), 28
8
scott, La emancipación, 317-324.
bras oficiales sobre la igualdad racial, el discurso nacionalista hegemónico

se centraría en la preeminencia de la cultura de origen europeo y de la
población blanca9. tras el fin de la ocupación militar estadounidense en
1902 permanecieron intactas las desigualdades fundamentales de la socie-
dad cubana. la supervivencia del estado independiente estaría vinculada,
por la enmienda platt, al mantenimiento del status quo y de la paz social,
indispensables a estados unidos para controlar la isla e impulsar el mono-
cultivo de azúcar.
en el nuevo estado la marginación social y racial de negros y mulatos
se fue acentuando. si bien incluidos políticamente por su derecho al voto,
tuvieron salarios ínfimos en las plantaciones y fueron excluidos, a todos los
niveles, de la pública administración y de los empleos más remunerados10.
entre 1902 y 1906 sus márgenes de lucha fueron muy estrictos ante la im-
posibilidad de derrocar los pilares del colonialismo indirecto de estados
unidos y de confutar ideologías poderosas que justificaban la situación
existente con discursos sobre el patriotismo y la igualdad racial. el miedo,
plausible, de perder la independencia iba a ser el centro de discursos oficia-
les los cuales, al subrayar la situación de igualdad formal del nuevo estado
y al ocultar la presencia de discriminaciones raciales y sociales, tachaban
de antipatrióticas las reivindicaciones de los negros y mulatos a una igual-
dad efectiva11.
Frente a esa situación, los intelectuales y políticos de color tuvieron ac-
titudes heterogéneas, debido a sus distintas condiciones sociales, políticas
y de estatus, así como a diferentes visiones sobre la cuestión racial y nacio-
nal. Juan Gualberto Gómez y Martín Morúa Delgado, líderes destacados
de la lucha por la independencia y la igualdad racial, decidieron subor-
dinar esta última al problema de la soberanía del nuevo estado12. en los
9
Ver Giolitto, Raza y nación, 115-122.
10
Ver Ibarra, Partidos, 26-7 y 36-54; pérez, Cuba Under the Platt Amendment, 58-65 y 89.
11
la igualdad racial en cuba y su relación con la cuestión nacional es el centro de un debate
historiográfico en el cual destacan dos interpretaciones principales. aline helg considera la
igualdad racial un mito útil a preservar la marginación de las personas de color. Alejandro de
la Fuente prefiere verla como ideología que permitió la inclusión de negros y mulatos, si bien
de manera parcial y subordinada. Ver Aline Helg, Our Rightful Share: The Afro-Cuban Struggle
for Equality, 1886-1912 (chapel hill: university of north carolina press, 1995); alejandro de la
Fuente, A Nation for All: Inequality and Politics in Twentieth-Century Cuba (chapel hill: univer-
sity of north carolina press, 2001).
12
Juan Gualberto Gómez fue el más destacado intelectual de color a finales del siglo XiX y a
principios del XX. nacido libre de padres esclavos, estudió en la habana y en parís. en 1898
fundó el Directorio de las Sociedades de Color y el periódico La Igualdad, orientados a coordi-
nar la lucha por los derechos civiles y contra las discriminaciones raciales. colaboró con el
periódico La Lucha y fue diputado y delegado en la Convención Constituyente. Martin Morúa
delgado, periodista, escritor y sindicalista, vivió en cárdenas y Key West. regresó a cuba en
1892 y fundó la revista La Nueva Era. después de la independencia fue director del periódico
La República y fue el único senador negro en el primer periodo republicano. Ver Diccionario
de la Literatura Cubana, tomos i y ii (la habana: letras cubanas, 1984), 373-374 y 639-641 re-
spectivamente; tomás Fernandez robaina, El negro en Cuba, 1902-1958 (la habana: ciencias
periódicos que dirigieron y en otros escritos de aquellos años son exiguas

las referencias a la cuestión racial, acordes a la conducta del partido liberal
– del que fueron representantes electos en varias ocasiones – y el contexto
más general de silencio sobre esa cuestión. en otros ámbitos, los intelectua-
les de los sectores más altos de la población de color plantearon el proble-
ma racial desde revistas de carácter literario, publicadas por las Sociedades
de instrucción y recreo y las Sociedades de color. con afán de imitar a la alta
sociedad blanca, pero conscientes de ser excluidos, propondrán durante
muchas décadas copiar su estilo de vida y potenciar la educación y cultura,
como medios para superar las discriminaciones13.
La única excepción conocida a la afonía de esos años fue la labor edi-
torial de rafael serra, tabacalero, periodista, organizador de la lucha por
la independencia junto a martí en nueva York y, en los primeros años de
la República, exponente destacado del Partido Moderado14. defensor, a fi-
nales de los setenta, de la instrucción de negros y mulatos en matanzas,
rafael serra afinó su visión de la lucha antirracista durante su exilio en
nueva York. el contacto con la realidad racial de estados unidos y la ex-
periencia de la Liga, la sociedad protectora de la instrucción que organizó
a partir de 1888, orientaron su actividad posterior en cuba. en el periódico
que fundó y dirigió de 1904 a 1906, El Nuevo Criollo, y en un compendio de
escritos publicado en 1907, Para blancos y negros, fueron frecuentes las re-
ferencias a la situación racial de estados unidos, a las persecuciones y lin-
chamientos por un lado y, por otro, al ascenso cultural, social y económico
de muchas personas de color15. también los proyectos educativos del líder
negro Booker t. Washington fueron un punto de referencia importante en
su intento de promover la elevación cultural y económica de las personas
de color en cuba16.
la actividad política de rafael serra al regresar a la isla fue muy exten-
sa; afrontó la cuestión racial dedicando una atención especial a sus implica-
ciones en las discriminaciones de clase y denunciando el riesgo de perder
la independencia, a causa de la fragmentación de la sociedad cubana. la
percepción de una sociedad dividida en dos grupos raciales antagónicos
sociales, 1990), 23-33; helg, Our Rightful, 36-42 y 122.

13
Ver, entre otras, las revistas Minerva y Labor Nueva.
14
tras la Guerra Chiquita rafael serra vivió a Key West y luego a nueva York donde fue el
colaborador principal de José martí y fundador de La Liga, sociedad para el progreso moral,
intelectual y económico de las personas de color. Volvió a Cuba en 1902 y en 1904 fue elegido
diputado por el partido moderado al poder en aquellos años con el presidente tomás es-
trada Palma. Ver Alejandra Bronfman, «‘Buenas promesas y malas costumbres’: Rafael Serra
y montalvo opina sobre la corrupción y la virtud», en Ciudadanos en la Nación, eds. Olga Por-
tuondo and Michael Zeuske (Santiago de Cuba: Oficina del Conservador de la Ciudad, 2002),
25-33; helg, Our Rightful, 133.
15
rafael serra, Para blancos y negros: ensayos políticos, sociales y económicos (la habana: el score,
1907); El Nuevo Criollo, años 1904-1906.
16
Ver Serra, Para blancos, 18-22 y 37-41.
fue elemento recurrente en sus escritos y marcó una discontinuidad no

sólo con respecto al silencio de aquellos años sino también en relación a los
discursos que habían proclamado el fin de las discriminaciones raciales17. a
diferencia de la actitud observada en algunos sectores blancos de estados
Unidos – que promovieron la emancipación de los negros, aún mantenién-
dolos en ámbitos sociales distintos – sierra vio a la población blanca en
cuba determinada solamente a conservar sus privilegios y su dominio:
“existe un elemento que se ha considerado, y se considera, superior […] el
hombre blanco, celoso como debe ser, de su conservación, lucha y luchará,
por sostener su predominio en esta sociedad, puesto que no olvida que es
aquí el ‘descendiente de los aryas [sic!]’”18. por otro lado, identificándose
principalmente con los sectores obreros, vio a la población de color resig-
nada, pobre e incapaz de contrastar las políticas del nuevo estado:
[…] el proyecto de inmigración es atentatorio á [sic!] la vida nuestra, á [sic!]

la vida del obrero cubano […] como terrible espada de damocles se cierne
sobre nuestras cabezas y amenaza con decapitarnos […]. Y esto vista la cues-
tión bajo mi carácter de obrero, que viéndola como hombre negro […] como
negros no nos queda más que resignarnos19.
Según la visión de Serra, los factores que obligaban a la población de

color a una condición subalterna – la injusticia social y el bajo nivel de ins-
trucción y cultura de muchos negros y mulatos – iban a ser también un
peligro para la independencia, pues una población envilecida era más vul-
nerable a la opresión extranjera:
mientras que no se luche para evitar que nuestro pueblo, forzado por la
falta de justicia, de instrucción y de pan, viniese a caer en la esclavitud de
unos pocos amos y tal vez extranjeros, mientras no luchemos y triunfemos
contra la ignorancia y la miseria […] tendremos que llegar a convencernos
que no tenemos país20.
consciente de la imposibilidad de lograr igualdad y justicia en el con-

texto de soberanía limitada del nuevo estado, sierra propuso impulsar la
elevación cultural y la organización autónoma de las personas de color co-
mo procesos posibles para salir de su condición subalterna. la educación
y la cultura, que habían sido siempre centrales en su actividad política,
implicarían, según su visión, el abandono de toda tradición de origen afri-
cano. concebida para reclamar una plena condición de ciudadanos de la
17
“sin preocupaciones”, Patria, 12 de mayo de 1900.
18
“¿de qué nos quejamos? ¿de la culpa que tenemos?”, El Nuevo Criollo, 29 de octubre de
1904.
19
ibíd.
20
“Justicia, instrucción y pan”, El Nuevo Criollo, 1 de octubre de 1904.
nueva república y para rechazar las injurias de quienes seguían declarando

la inferioridad de negros y mulatos, esta propuesta suscitó perplejidad en-
tre sus lectores21. una carta dirigida a El Nuevo Criollo firmada “el negro
Oriental” explicaba la imposibilidad y la injusticia de renegar sus orígenes
y de anular los vínculos con sus antepasados, evidenciando así el aspecto
más doloroso de este proceso de emancipación:
[…] por mucho que nos alejemos por el refinamiento […] no podemos, no,
desligado, de toda deuda con la que si no nos pudo dar cultura, nos ha dado
al menos un tronco de procedencia, como el Cáucaso se lo ha dado á [sic!]
nuestros parientes blancos, y del cual viven orgullosos y recreados22.
la aspiración a una mayor cohesión de las personas de color fue otro te-
ma central en las reflexiones de rafael serra. al lado de su constante exhor-
tación a la unidad de todos los cubanos propuso también fomentar la unión
de las personas de color con el intento de romper el muro de indiferencia
y desprecio que seguía rodeándolas23. su visión de la política cubana había
evidenciado la habilidad de los blancos de “dividirnos, aislarnos, de sem-
brar, en fin, el odio entre los que tenemos, por necesidad imperiosa de nues-
tra propia conservación, el deber de amarnos como verdaderos hermanos”
y la indiferencia de negros y mulatos “hacia todo lo que puede sacarnos del
estado de inferioridad en que vivimos, hacia todo lo que dándonos perso-
nalidad, haga desaparecer los prejuicios que se forman en nuestra contra”24.
Según Serra, los negros y mulatos tenían que organizarse antes que nada
sobre base racial para lograr mayor educación y fomentar su bienestar25.
sin embargo sus proyectos no cobraron fuerza ya que discreparon con su
militancia en el partido moderado y tropezaron con la realidad social de
muchos negros y mulatos. en los años siguientes se reprimiría con violencia
la organización de un partido “de color”. además sólo un sector pequeño
de la población de color logró elevar su educación y su nivel de vida, alcan-
zando una inclusión subordinada en la sociedad cubana.
2. De la lucha a la represión
el equilibrio precario entre cuestión racial y cuestión nacional acabó en

agosto de 1906, tras el levantamiento de militantes del partido liberal contra
21
Ver “¿Ser o no ser?”, El Nuevo Criollo, 22 de octubre de 1904; “al negro Falucho”, El Nuevo
Criollo, 5 de noviembre de 1904.
22
“al negro Falucho”, El Nuevo Criollo, 5 de noviembre de 1904.
23
“nuestro deber”, El Nuevo Criollo, 22 de octubre de 1904; “¿de qué nos quejamos? ¿de la
culpa que tenemos?”, El Nuevo Criollo, 29 de octubre de 1904.
24
“¿de qué nos quejamos? ¿de la culpa que tenemos?”, El Nuevo Criollo, 29 de octubre de
1904.
25
ibíd.
el fraude que había asegurado la elección del líder del partido moderado a la
Presidencia de la República. Frente a la imposibilidad de avalar el gobierno
de estrada palma, estados unidos ocupó la isla por segunda vez hasta 1909,
aplicando medidas que limitarían ulteriormente la soberanía del estado cu-
bano26. desaparecidas las concausas que habían detenido las luchas políticas
y sociales en los años anteriores, se abrieron espacios nuevos para el activis-
mo de las personas de color. su participación masiva en el levantamiento del
ejercito constitucional les permitió recobrar fuerza y organización y legiti-
mar nuevas demandas de igualdad formuladas sobre el patriotismo demos-
trado en las guerras de independencia y en la insurrección de agosto.
las movilizaciones que se propagaron después de la “guerrita de agosto”
trajeron cambios importantes en los actores, perspectivas y organización de
las luchas. los sectores sociales más bajos de la población de color, silenciados
y marginados a principios de la independencia, volvieron a ser protagonistas
en el debate público, recobrando visibilidad y reclamando empleos estatales
proporcionalmente a su presencia en los ejércitos revolucionarios27. el intento
de hacer explícito el vínculo entre discriminaciones raciales y exclusión so-
cial estuvo acompañado además por la búsqueda de nuevas formas de or-
ganización. Ya en diciembre de 1906 un grupo de personas de color reunido
en camagüey discutía sobre la exigencia de organizar un “partido negro”28.
Otros sectores de la población negra y mulata, que siguieron privilegiando
el terreno de la educación y cultura plantearon sin embargo el problema de
asumir mayor autonomía y de salir del ámbito de los partidos tradicionales29.
en los años siguientes los ex veteranos de las guerras de independen-
cia y de la sublevación de agosto fueron autores de escritos e iniciativas
que, evidenciando lo urgente e ineludible de la cuestión racial, incitarían
a las personas de color a contrastar de manera directa las discriminacio-
nes y los discursos que las sustentaban. entre ellos destacó la figura de
ricardo Batrell, ex bracero, soldado en las guerras de independencia y lue-
go comandante en el ejército constitucional, quien expresó las visiones,
expectativas y frustraciones de los sectores sociales más bajos de la pobla-
ción de color30. nacido en un ingenio azucarero en provincia de matanzas
26
estados unidos no apoyó la reelección de estrada palma debido a la magnitud del chantaje
puesto en acto y a la ausencia de un ejército cubano que sostuviera al presidente. Ocuparon
entonces cuba para impedir la llegada al poder del partido liberal. en la segunda ocupación
potenciaron la guardia rural, crearon un ejército cubano y, sobre todo, determinaron una in-
terpretación más restrictiva de la Enmienda Platt. Ver Pérez, Cuba Under the Platt Amendment,
94-7 y 117-122.
27
“¿partido negro?”, La Discusión, 17 de diciembre de 1906.
28
ibíd.
29
“la nota del día”, ibíd, 31 de agosto de 1907.
30
Ricardo Batrell Oviedo, Para la historia. Apuntes autobiográficos de Ricardo Batrell Oviedo (la
habana: seoane y Álvarez, 1912). entre otros líderes que encarnaron ilusiones y fracasos de
los sectores sociales más bajos de la población de color hay que recordar a Quintín Banderas.
General en las guerras de independencia, lideró la sublevación de agosto de 1906 en la cual
en 1880, trabajó como peón en el campo hasta los quince años cuando in-
gresó en el ejército de liberación. al terminar la guerra se alfabetizó de
manera autodidacta y convirtió su pasión por la escritura en instrumento
de denuncia y de lucha contra las discriminaciones raciales y sociales31.
su visión de la cuestión racial abarcó dos aspectos fundamentales: la
asociación entre raza y ciudadanía y el vínculo indisoluble entre discrimi-
naciones raciales y desigualdades sociales. en sus escritos principales – el
Manifiesto al pueblo cubano y a la raza de color redactado en 1907 y la autobio-
grafía publicada en 1912 – la participación en las guerras de independencia
fue el factor primario de elaboración de una identidad racial imprescindi-
blemente vinculada a la de ciudadano cubano32. al igual que muchas per-
sonas de color, la razón principal de su entrada en la guerra había sido la
ilusión de la igualdad racial, prometida por la independencia y personifi-
cada, según él, en la figura de Juan Gualberto Gómez: «Vi el símbolo de mi
raza en esa obra grandiosa: Juan Gualberto Gómez […] la verdadera per-
sonificación, de mi raza entonces, en esa causa»33. de esperanza colectiva
y catalizadora la participación en la independencia se convirtió en punto
de arranque para exigir una inclusión plena de las personas de color en
los discursos y recursos del nuevo estado. en el manifiesto de 1907, tras
enumerar la presencia, el talento y el sacrificio de negros y mulatos en to-
das las batallas cruciales – contrastando así las afirmaciones que iban dis-
minuyendo entonces la magnitud de su participación en la independencia
– denunció la asimetría entre el tributo militar pagado al nuevo estado y la
creciente marginación racial, política y social de las personas de color:
[…] la participación que la raza de color viene teniendo en la cosa pública de

este país desde 1898 […] no es ni medianamente decoroso para una raza que
ha probado su capacidad, heroísmo y suficiencia, al igual que sus hermanos
blancos, en calidad; mucho más en cantidad34.
Según la visión de Batrell la participación en la independencia había

sido el verdadero proceso de legitimación de la ciudadanía para los negros
fue asesinado por una guardia rural. Ver Ada Ferrer, “Rustic Men, Civilized Nation: Race,
culture and contention on the eve of cuban independence”, Hispanic American Historical
Review 4 (1998), 663-686; ada Ferrer, Insurgent Cuba. Race, Nation, and Revolution, 1868-1898
(chapel hill: university of north carolina press, 1999), 173-186; helg, Our Rightful, 120.
31
sobre los escritos e ideas de ricardo Batrell ver Fernando martínez, Ricardo Batrell empuña la
pluma, en Fernando Martínez, Rebecca Scott y Orlando García, Espacios, silencios y los sentidos
de la libertad. Cuba entre 1878 y 1912 (la habana: ciencias sociales, 2002), 295-313; Ferrer, Insur-
gent Cuba, 159-164.
32
Oviedo, Para la historia; “manifiesto al pueblo cubano y a la raza de color”, La Discusión, 11
de agosto de 1907.
33
Oviedo, Para la historia, 3-4.
34
“manifiesto al pueblo cubano y a la raza de color”, La Discusión, 11 de agosto de 1907. so-
bre la entidad numérica de la participación negra y mulata a la independencia ver helg, Our
Rightful, 119; miguel Barnet, Autobiografia di uno schiavo (torino: einaudi, 1998), 169-170.
y mulatos cubanos y la afirmación de su patriotismo como cualidad inse-

parable de su condición racial. sin embargo la realización del nuevo estado
no había implicado para ellos un mayor acceso a sus recursos. el Manifiesto
al pueblo cubano fue entonces un llamamiento obstinado a las responsabi-
lidades recíprocas de blancos y negros. las personas de color habían de-
mostrado patriotismo y abnegación soportando su marginación en silencio
durante la ocupación estadounidense. después de la independencia si-
guieron manteniendo sin embargo la misma actitud pasiva, abdicando así
de sus derechos y frustrando las batallas de sus antecesores:
[…] quien en cierto momento no ejercita las acciones que le competen […] ha
hecho una renuncia de su derecho […] ya no nos merecemos el dictado de
una raza patriótica, sino, por el contrario, el de una raza incapaz de ocupar
la verdadera posición que á [sic!] costa de muchos heroísmos la Historia nos
tiene reconocido35.
por otro lado, la élite política blanca seguía excluyendo a los negros y
mulatos de los cuerpos militares y de los oficios públicos y favorecía la in-
migración desde europa, en detrimento de la población de color. el partido
liberal, en el cual Batrell militó, fue objeto de sus críticas más ásperas.
legitimando su política con los ideales de la independencia, había obte-
nido el apoyo y los votos de muchas personas de color. sin embargo sus
dirigentes no habían adoptado esos criterios y en los cargos que ocuparon
iban priorizando el empleo de trabajadores blancos, revelándose así “pre-
dicadores de democracia por ellos mismos incumplida”36.
a la luz de dicha situación, Batrell declaró la imposibilidad de lograr
relaciones raciales igualitarias al amparo de la política institucional y con la
mediación de sus exiguos exponentes de color:
[…] no hay una sola fracción de los directores políticos del país en quien
podamos esperar el cumplimiento de una democracia […] nuestros gran-
des hombres de la raza de color […] muchas veces tienen que ser cómplices
inconscientes y otras conscientes por ser minoría insignificante allá en su
altura37.
las personas de color tenían pues que acabar con su pasividad y or-
ganizarse autónomamente, identificando un sitio en el cual encontrarse y
coordinar sus acciones desde el respeto de sus filiaciones distintas: “debe-
mos de contribuir al sostenimiento de una casa donde podamos reunirnos
todos con objeto de tratar los asuntos generales. así seriamos respetados
35
“manifiesto al pueblo cubano y a la raza de color”, La Discusión, 11 de agosto de 1907.
36
ibíd.
37
ibíd.
cada cual en la afiliación que nos encontremos”38. sin embargo propondría

también desplazarse a otros estados de américa al no alcanzar una igual-
dad efectiva:
Así esperamos á [sic!] nuestros compatriotas si están dispuestos á [sic!]

no vivir como parias y si marchar con los progresos de la época […]. si así
no resultase […] no sería lejano el día que tengamos que echar la tienda á
[sic!] cuesta, como los antiguos ‘girondinos’ y marchar así á [sic!] cualquier
república americana en donde no exista tanta preocupación39.
el año sucesivo al “manifiesto” de Batrell se fundó en la habana el

partido independiente de color, primer partido con base racial del conti-
nente americano. confiando en la capacidad de atraer los votos de negros
y mulatos, sus líderes evaristo estenoz y pedro ivonet plantearon la exi-
gencia de afrontar la cuestión racial al nivel político más alto y desde una
posición de fuerza40. sus previsiones fueron erróneas ya que la mayoría
de negros y mulatos siguió votando a los partidos tradicionales. además,
tras la abierta hostilidad de los blancos, el gobierno liberal de José miguel
Gómez, elegido en 1909, reprimió duramente ese partido, declarándolo ile-
gal y sofocando luego el levantamiento de sus militantes en 1912. ese acon-
tecimiento, que según la literatura reciente causó la muerte de miles de
negros y mulatos, concluyó una época de ilusiones y enfrentamientos entre
dos proyectos nacionalistas: el uno hacia una sociedad blanca y el otro ha-
cia una sociedad racial y socialmente igualitaria41. muchos estudiosos han
investigado las razones complejas de la fundación, la vida y la represión
del partido independiente de color42. aquí sólo enfocaremos dos aspectos
de su trayectoria. el primero fue la discrepancia entre los objetivos que per-
siguieron sus dirigentes – inclusión política y social en condición de igual-
dad con los blancos – y la estrategia de lucha, que los alejó ulteriormente
de la población blanca y también de muchos sectores de la población de co-
lor. en un contexto de progresiva marginación material y simbólica de las
personas de color esta divergencia implicó además la elaboración de otra
identidad racial. la calidad de negro se haría exclusiva y no dejaría más
38
ibíd.
39
ibíd.
40
evaristo estenoz fue veterano de la guerra de independencia, sindicalista y luego empresa-
rio. Fue además General del ejercito constitucional. pedro ivonet fue veterinario de la Guar-
da Rural en la provincia de Oriente. Ambos murieron asesinados en el levantamiento de 1912.
Ver Helg, Our Rightful, 157.
41
a partir de los testimonios de la época, se estima que murieron de 2000 a 6000 personas en
la sola provincia de Oriente. De hecho los datos hoy disponibles discrepan mucho entre ellos.
Ver Helg, Our Rightful, 225.
42
de la Fuente, A Nation; robaina, El negro en Cuba; rafael Fermoselle, Política y color en Cuba,
La guerrita de 1912 (madrid: colibrí, 1998); helg, Our Rightful; serafin portuondo, Los indepen-
dientes de color. Historia del Partido Independiente de Color (la habana: caminos, 2002).
espacio a otras identificaciones, rompiendo así el lazo que había existido

hasta entonces entre identidad racial e identificación nacional: “[…] o lle-
garemos los hombres de color […] a participar por igual de la República, o
una de las dos: caemos al peso mismo de nuestra obra o renunciamos para
siempre a nuestra condición de cubanos”43.
3. Conclusiones
este trabajo analiza las visiones, identidades y estrategias de algunos

líderes de color cubanos en los primeros años de la república, tomando
en cuenta dos factores principales: sus diferentes condiciones sociales y el
contexto político en el cual actuaron.
la incertidumbre política y la inmovilidad social que siguieron a la ocu-
pación estadounidense hasta 1906 detuvieron los intentos de alcanzar la
igualdad racial prometida por la independencia. constriñeron al silencio a
los sectores sociales más bajos de la población de color y orientaron a otros
negros y mulatos hacia la búsqueda de una inclusión subordinada en la
sociedad blanca. el miedo a perder la independencia condicionó profunda-
mente sus identidades raciales y sus estrategias de lucha. algunos líderes
de color se identificaron con el destino del nuevo estado y apartaron mo-
mentáneamente la lucha por la igualdad racial en favor de la labor por la
independencia. Otros buscaron estrategias de ascenso social a partir de la
asimilación de la cultura “blanca” y de la manifestación de una identidad
racial depurada de todo elemento cultural de origen africano, incompatible
con el discurso nacionalista hegemónico.
en 1906 el cambio de perspectivas políticas y sociales abrió espacios a
las reivindicaciones de los sectores subalternos y a la búsqueda de nue-
vas formas de lucha. la demanda de una igualdad efectiva, legitimada
por su pasado patriótico, caracterizó las acciones de los veteranos negros
y mulatos. algunos de ellos buscaron erosionar las jerarquías sociales sin
descuidar al mismo tiempo su identificación con la nación cubana. Otros
antepusieron la lucha por la igualdad racial a cualquier otra perspectiva.
su intento de contrastar frontalmente los pilares materiales y simbólicos de
las discriminaciones raciales los alejó sin embargo del resto de la sociedad
cubana y finalizó con un epílogo trágico.
43
“en nuestro puesto”, Previsión, noviembre de 1908.
Part II
science and technology in cuba:

from colony to revolution
Fig. 1 – José M. de la Torre, Mapa: Ferrocarriles, Vapores y Estaciones telegráficas del Departamento Occidental [La Habana: 1857, ANC]
On the previous page – Anglo-American Company (in history of the atlantic cable and undersea communications <http://atlantic-cable.
com/CableCos/AngloAmerican/>)
Part II
Science and Technology in Cuba:

from Colony to Revolution
during colonial times, cuba had no autonomous capabilities in techno-

logical and scientific development (even though antonio meucci did carry
out his early experiments with the telephone in havana’s Teatro Tacón in
the 1840s). however, as marta Blaquier’s essay shows, the island’s strategic
position between europe and the united states and the needs of its sug-
arcane industry facilitated the fast spread of some of the most advanced
technologies of the 19th century. interestingly enough, these technologies
were not imported onto the island from the colonial motherland but from
the united states and Britain. us dominance remained the source of cuba’s
imported technologies throughout the first half of the 20th century: radios,
TV sets and, as any visitor to Havana can still attest today, automobiles.
as angelo Baracca shows in his essay, it was only with the Revolución of
1959 that scientific research became an integral part of the country’s au-
tonomous development strategies, starting with the literacy campaign
(1961) and the Reforma de la Educación Superior (1962)1. While facing the con-
straints of the us blockade on collaboration with us institutions and pub-
lications, cuban scientists operated in conjunction with soviet and West
european research centers throughout the cold War era. Between 1964 and
1966, several research institutes were created whose objectives were clearly
related to the island’s social and economic goals, such as the Instituto de
Investigaciones de la Caña de Azúcar, the Instituto de Meteorología, the Centro
Nacional de Investigaciones Científicas and a variety of medical research in-
stitutes. in 1970, the Instituto para el Desarrollo de la Maquinaria designed the
1
On earlier scientific research in Cuba: José López Sánchez, Tomás Romay y el origen de la cien-
cia en Cuba (La Habana: Academia de Ciencias, 1964). On the reforms in the educational field
following the revolution: hugh thomas, Cuba or the Pursuit of Freedom (new York: da capo,
1998), 1131-1137.
“libertadora”, the first sugarcane harvesting machine tailored to the needs

of cuba’s sugar industry. in 1980, with the successful launch of the soviet
Soyuz 38 spaceship, arnaldo tamayo méndez became the first cuban to
travel in outer space. in 1986, the Centro de Ingeniería Genética y Biotecnología
was inaugurated. the end of the soviet union and the island’s subsequent
decision to instate a dual monetary system in the early 1990s was a blow to
cuban science causing as it did a double brain drain both towards foreign
countries and, domestically, toward better-remunerated jobs in the hard-
currency sectors. But economic necessity also drove cuba to diversify its
economy out of its dependence on sugarcane and investment in scientif-
ic capacity thus became a priority2. although subject to controversy over
costs and access, cuba joined the World Wide Web in 1996. Biotechnologies
and pharmaceutics grew to become important island exports, and in 2004,
the Laboratorio de Antígenos Sintéticos at the university of havana discov-
ered a vaccine against meningitis B that was acknowledged globally3.
2
William schulz, “us chemists meet colleagues in cuba”, Chemical and Engineering News, 14
december 1998.
3
dora pérez sáez, “cincuenta hitos de la ciencia revolucionaria”, Juventud Rebelde.Cu on-line,
14 december 2008, www.juventudrebelde.cu/cuba/2008-12-14/cincuenta-hitos-de-la-ciencia-
revolucionaria/.
M.I. Blaquier
Ascaño
Chapter 4
Las tecnologías de información y
comunicación en Cuba (1850-1902):
la telegrafía
el lunes 5 de mayo de 1867 fue un día de fiesta para la habana. a la luz

de un día esplendido de verano, se movían los vapores en la Bahía, enga-
lanados con banderas multicolores, llevando una verdadera muchedumbre
de curiosos. los coches del ferrocarril urbano conducían hacía las cercanías
de la Chorrera, a un inmenso público que prefirió la vía terrestre a la marí-
tima, sin excluir a un considerable número de personas distinguidas invita-
das especialmente para presenciar la operación. el movimiento era general1.
se iniciaba el tendido del primer cable telegráfico submarino del hemisfe-
rio occidental que uniría la habana con cayo hueso, y posteriormente con
punta rassa, dos puntos de la Florida. con el tendido y funcionamiento de
este cable submarino se cerraba un ciclo de desarrollo temprano de la tele-
grafía en cuba que comienza a mitad de siglo y se inicia una nueva etapa
para esta tecnología que tendrá un importante impacto en la realidad eco-
nómica, política y social de la isla.
la red de cables telegráficos submarinos que va a circundar el mundo,
lo unifican y lo hacen uno. en el continente americano, el caribe será marco
propicio para este entramado. cuba, colonia caribeña del imperio español,
tendrá un desarrollo excepcional de las tecnologías de información y comu-
nicación en este siglo. evidencia de ello lo son la introducción y desarrollo
temprano del ferrocarril, de la telegrafía y de la telefonía pocos años después
de su invento y el convertirse en nodo del primer cable submarino telegrá-
fico entre países del hemisferio occidental. la introducción y desarrollo de
estas tecnologías van a ser frenados de múltiples formas por España.
el cable telegráfico submarino será un nuevo instrumento de control
político social interno en manos de la metrópoli y la infraestructura tele-
1
“Gacetín”, Gaceta de la Habana, 7 de mayo de 1867.
gráfica, un objetivo militar a destruir para los mambises en su lucha por la

independencia. a su vez, el cable es para los estados unidos y otras poten-
cias coloniales de la época, un instrumento de dominación neocolonial.
1. La telegrafía
apenas se realizaron en estados unidos los primeros ensayos exitosos

de la telegrafía hechos por morse, ya se proponía su establecimiento en
cuba, esto se va a repetir con el cable telegráfico submarino, antes de ha-
berse conseguido su primer éxito en europa.
el desarrollo de la telegrafía penetra en todas las actividades de la socie-
dad en la segunda mitad del siglo XiX. hacia 1837, se inventó un sistema de
transmisión de señales por pulsos eléctricos, simultáneamente en estados
unidos, por samuel F. morse, y en inglaterra por charles Wheatstone y
William cook, alcanzando fama y éxito. ninguno de ellos tuvo la primacía
del invento, fueron el resultado de años de desarrollo, del esfuerzo de sus
predecesores, y del estado del arte del electromagnetismo. las distancias,
que habían empezado a acortarse sensiblemente con el ferrocarril, parecían
desaparecer, ahora del todo, para la comunicación.
la invención del telégrafo, en paralelo a ambos lados del atlántico,
provocará en la segunda mitad del XiX, un importante flujo en las dos di-
recciones, a través de este océano, de intercambio tecnológico, resultados
económicos y técnicos e ideas de la más diversa índole, todo ello unido a
una encarnizada lucha de intereses económicos y políticos. posteriormente,
con el tendido de los cables telegráficos submarinos el mundo va a alcan-
zar, por primera vez, su unicidad. el imperio británico y el naciente impe-
rialismo norteamericano – expresado abiertamente en la doctrina monroe
– serían las primeras figuras en este escenario, mientras que el colonialismo
español, solo una simple comparsa.
al igual que en el resto del mundo, el desarrollo de estas tecnologías tu-
vo un fuerte impacto en la vida de la isla. este impacto se expresa en las
múltiples esferas de la vida social, la economía, la política, la cultura, y en
general, los modos de hacer y la imaginería de la época. en este trabajo he-
mos concentrado la atención en la introducción y desarrollo en cuba de la
telegrafía pero otras tecnologías de información y comunicación, tales como
la telefonía, en la cual cuba tuvo la primacía mundial con los experimentos
de meucci en 1849, y una temprana introducción en el 1881, la radiotelegra-
fía, introducida en 1905, la radiodifusión, presente en 1922, y la televisión,
introducida muy pronto en el país, en 1950, deben ser tenidas en cuenta, pa-
ra lograr una visión integradora del impacto social de estas tecnologías. Otro
tema dejado esta vez en el ‘tintero’, es el de las características que tuvo el pro-
cesamiento de la información – censal, científica y económica – en la cuba
de este período, como resultado del impacto de esas tecnologías. es nuestro
propósito, el desarrollo futuro de este trabajo en esas dos direcciones.
Part II – Science and Technology in Cuba 69
después de su introducción comercial en estados unidos, el telégrafo elec-

tromagnético se difunde con increíble rapidez. la multiplicidad de compañías
telegráficas existentes en un inicio que operaban en territorio el norteamerica-
no son unificadas por la Western Union Telegraph Company, Western Union de
ahora en lo adelante, formada en 1856. esta compañía monopoliza la indus-
tria telegráfica y se convierte en uno de los más influyentes imperios corpo-
rativos en la historia de estados unidos. posteriormente, en 1873 la Western
Union compró una mayoría de la International Ocean Telegraph Company, una
compañía que tendrá fuerte presencia en cuba, entrando en el negocio de
la telegrafía internacional. en Gran Bretaña, el proceso monopolizador en la
telegrafía se repite, pero va a ser el Gobierno quien lleva a cabo la labor mo-
nopolizadora, nacionalizando, en 1868, las compañías telegráficas existentes
y poniendo esta gestión bajo el control estatal de la British Post Office.
españa, la metrópoli colonial de cuba tiene, en la segunda mitad del siglo
XiX, un menor desarrollo económico que otras naciones de europa – inglaterra,
Francia y alemania – y no supo aprovechar su condición de metrópoli pa-
ra invertir los capitales acumulados en el desarrollo industrial y financiero.
respecto a sus vecinos europeos, va a introducir tardíamente la telegrafía óp-
tica, la telegrafía eléctrica y los cables telegráficos submarinos, a pesar de que,
por su condición geográfica peninsular y naturaleza de metrópoli colonial,
hubiera sido lógico que desarrollase las comunicaciones telegráficas interna-
cionales con sus territorios de ultramar. a ello hay que añadir que una vez
iniciada la introducción de esta tecnología, sucede también con la telefonía,
mantuvo una política de “apertura y cierre” que va a retrasar, aún más, su ple-
no uso tanto en la península como en sus posesiones de ultramar.
2. Introducción y desarrollo de la telegrafía en Cuba
a mitad del siglo XiX, cuba era, distante en el caribe, una importante
colonia de españa, pero muy cercana, geográfica y económicamente, a los
estados unidos, y a los intereses económicos que ya este naciente imperia-
lismo norteamericano tenía en la isla. todo ello, unido al retraso de españa
en la introducción de la telegrafía eléctrica, va a determinar que la transfe-
rencia tecnológica de este invento se realice a partir de los estados unidos
y no provenga, en lo fundamental, del continente europeo, donde estaba
situada la metrópoli colonial. como con el ferrocarril, también con la tele-
grafía, la colonia se anticiparía a la metrópoli, siendo cuba, además, uno de
los primeros países de américa latina, si no el primero, en introducirla.
la interacción comercial entre cuba y estados unidos constituyó un
vehículo de permanente actualización de los adelantos técnicos, hábitos
de vida y maneras de hacer del vecino del norte. las nuevas tecnologías
productivas que se introducían en la industria azucarera, las locomotoras
norteamericanas que corrían por las vías férreas, las características del sis-
tema político estadounidense, entre otras cosas, conformaban una imagen
atractiva de ese país. los muchos emigrantes cubanos que vivían en tampa
y cayo hueso constituían también un canal importante de información.
Además, eran muchos los norteamericanos presentes en la Isla a la búsque-
da de oportunidades mercantiles y alternativas que permitiesen salvar las
restricciones establecidas por la metrópoli.
en 1837 se había establecido la primera línea de ferrocarril que unió
la habana con Bejucal, y los caminos de hierro se desarrollaban de forma
vertiginosa. cuba fue el séptimo país en el mundo en tener un servicio fe-
rroviario, antes que españa y los restantes países de centro, sur américa
y el caribe2. los ferrocarriles cubanos no pasaron, como los de inglaterra y
norteamérica, por las clásicas fases de madera y tracción animal, se intro-
dujeron en nuestro país con carriles de hierro y locomotoras de vapor.
a antonio maría escobedo, administrador del Ferrocarril de la habana
a Guiñes, se debe la primera tentativa de construcción en cuba de una línea
telegráfica eléctrica. en 1840, escobedo pidió autorización a la capitanía
General de la isla para tender un hilo telegráfico entre la habana y Guiñes.
su solicitud fue denegada, aduciendo la autoridad española que “como la
invención del telégrafo de Morse era muy reciente, no se podía garantizar su uso”3.
esta temprana inquietud debería esperar por más de diez años.
después de los primeros intentos en 1848, el norteamericano david
macombery solicita a la Junta de Fomento el permiso para conectar un telégra-
fo eléctrico entre la habana y matanzas4. más afortunado que los anteriores
solicitantes, el ingeniero de telégrafo norteamericano samuel a. Kennedy, so-
licitó y obtuvo en 1851, autorización de la Junta de Fomento para tender una
línea telegráfica entre el teatro de Villanueva y la plaza de Monserrate, en la
ciudad de la habana, siendo ésta la primera línea que, por vía de ensayo, fun-
cionó en Cuba. Finalmente, la Real Orden 277 del 28 de junio de 1852 autoriza
“la instalación de las líneas telegráficas electromagnéticas” en cuba5.
la obra se realizó bajo la dirección técnica de manuel portillo,
comandante y director del cuerpo de ingenieros6 y el trabajo fue reali-
zado por José pagés. la real Junta de Fomento había determinado sacar a
subasta pública la construcción de las líneas y convocó a licitaciones para
el 10 de febrero de 1853. el pliego de proposiciones para la obra se insertó
en la Gaceta de la habana el 2 de febrero de ese año. se presentaron varias
proposiciones, entre ellas la de samuel Kennedy, pero la de pagés resultó la
mejor y ganó la subasta7.
2
Ver Oscar Zanetti y Alejandro García, Caminos para el Azúcar (la habana: ciencias so-
ciales, 1987).
3
Directorio organizador del Cuerpo de Comunicaciones de la Isla de Cuba (la habana: dirección
General de comunicaciones 1902), 10.
4
archivo nacional de cuba, la habana (anc), exp. Junta de Fomento, legajo 129, n. 6366.
5
anc, reales Órdenes, legajo 163, n.77.
6
“comunicación de nombramiento”, anc, exp. Junta de Fomento, legajo 181, n. 8279.
7
anc, exp. Junta de Fomento, legajo 129, n. 6368.
en el año 1853 se inaugura la línea telegráfica entre la habana y Bejucal.

El Sr. José Sánchez Bermúdez fue su primer Administrador e Inspector. La
línea tenía unos 25 km. de longitud y sigue el trazado del primer tramo del
ferrocarril introducido en la isla en 1837. la primera estación telegráfica
que hubo en la ciudad de la habana, denominada “estación cañedo” en
reconocimiento a los esfuerzos de este en la introducción del telégrafo, es-
taba situada en la parte nueva de la habana, donde ocupaba una pequeña
casa de madera junto a la puerta de monserrate de la muralla que todavía
rodeaba la parte antigua de la ciudad, frente a la estatua de isabel ii eri-
gida en el parque central, inmediatamente detrás del gran teatro tacón.
el primer tipo de telégrafo utilizado fue un telégrafo morse de cinta, el
cual siguió utilizándose en la telegrafía cubana hasta la intervención de los
estados unidos en 1898.
hasta el momento, no hemos podido determinar cuál de los dos países,
cuba o chile, tiene la primacía de la introducción de la telegrafía eléctrica
en américa latina, pero si podemos afirmar que fueron los dos primeros
países y lo hicieron contemporáneamente, en los primeros meses de 1853.
en cuba, el motor para la introducción de esta nueva tecnología fue la in-
dustria azucarera; en chile fueron las exigencias de la explotación de las
minas de plata.
Apenas un año después de la autorización, la Real Orden, de fecha 31
de agosto de 18538 va a limitar la instalación de las líneas telegráficas que se
ha venido llevando a cabo. con la telegrafía, españa aplica una política de
´apertura y cierre´ no solo en ultramar, sino también en la península, que
se repetirá con la telefonía, que va a retardar el normal desarrollo de esta
tecnología en el país.
en 1852 se crea una escuela de telegrafía bajo el auspicio del Gobierno.
el primer director de la escuela fue el norteamericano robert simpson9.
una vez introducido este nuevo medio de telecomunicación, la red telegrá-
fica no cesó de extenderse por el interior del país con el objetivo de interco-
municar las principales poblaciones, sobre todo con la capital. en 1862 las
primeras líneas telegráficas llegan a pinar del río, matanzas, santa clara
y camagüey, y más tarde, en 1864 llegan a santiago de cuba, a 750 Km. al
sureste de la habana. en 1865 existían un total de de 1.540 kilómetros de
líneas telegráficas.
el establecimiento de la red esencial de comunicaciones telegráficas del
país va a ser de gran ayuda al poder español para enfrentar las sublevacio-
nes de los cubanos en 1868, de manera general, incrementa la efectividad
del control político en la isla. un ejemplo de ello es el monitoreo por vía
telegráfica de un conato de sublevación de esclavos que se produce en el
8
anc, reales Órdenes, legajo 162, n. 201.
9
comunicación de robert simpson, anc, exp. Junta de Fomento, legajo 181, n. 8279.
cobre10. pero este hecho de tipo político no debe ocultar la importancia

que tenía este progreso para la unificación y mejora económica del país.
precisamente, uno de los aspectos más significativos de la economía cuba-
na antes de 1868 es su zonificación. como apunta ramiro Guerra, la termi-
nación del Ferrocarril central, el funcionamiento eficaz del telégrafo y la
gran penetración al interior de la organización financiera surgida primera-
mente en la habana, harían de la isla un solo mercado y una sola entidad
económica a partir de 187811.
el procedimiento del tendido de las líneas telegráficas fue parecido al
de los ferrocarriles. el telégrafo se va tendiendo a lo largo de las vías fé-
rreas en una suerte de paralelismo o hermandad tecnológica. en el libro
Caminos para el Azúcar12, refiriéndose a las características del trazado de las
líneas de ferrocarril, se señala que este trazado se había verificado de ma-
nera tal que, los pocos entronques logrados, más que favorecer la fluidez
del transporte, ofrecían a los hacendados las opciones entre compañías y
puertos que más convenientes le resultaran a sus intereses. la línea cen-
tral no pasó de sancti spiritus, continuando de allí a santiago de cuba por
entronques locales. al mismo tiempo que se montaba el sistema oficial de
telégrafos, se exigía a las compañías de ferrocarriles que establecieran los
sistemas propios de sus líneas que servirían para la mejor operación y pro-
tección de las mismas. estas líneas servían de comunicación adicional entre
las grandes ciudades y, sobre todo entre estas y ciertos puntos del interior,
que el sistema oficial había dejado al margen. en 1866 muy pocas líneas fe-
rroviarias carecían de telégrafo.
3. La telegrafía y las guerras
durante los diez años que duró la primera guerra de los cubanos por
la independencia, el gobierno colonial impulsó extraordinariamente la ex-
pansión del telégrafo como mecanismo de control político social. sin em-
bargo, la telegrafía fue utilizada también por los insurgentes cubanos. un
ejemplo de ello lo es la anticipación del alzamiento revolucionario el 10 de
octubre de 1868. al conocer el grupo independentista la orden de prisión
dictada por el Gobierno español contra los principales conspiradores – lle-
gada el 6 de octubre a la oficina de Bayamo, a través de su telegrafista,
ismael de céspedes, pariente de carlos manuel de céspedes, uno de los
líderes de este movimiento – deciden anticipar este alzamiento. al ser con-
siderada la red telegráfica terrestre un objetivo militar para los revolucio-
narios cubanos, esta resultaba extremadamente vulnerable. por esta razón,
10
anc, exp. Fondo asuntos políticos, legajo 226, n. 13.
11
ramiro Guerra et al., eds., Historia de la Nación Cubana, tomo IV, Predominio del Ferrocarril. El
Telégrafo (la habana: historia de la nación cubana, 1952).
12
Zanetti y García, Caminos.
el Gobierno colonial estaba interesado en un enlace telegráfico de mayor

fiabilidad entre la capital y el resto del país, especialmente la mitad oriental
de éste, teatro de las principales acciones bélicas de la Guerra de los diez
años, dándose los primeros pasos para el tendido de cables submarinos
que permitiera esta comunicación.
al iniciarse la Guerra de independencia el 24 de febrero de 1895, los in-
surgentes cubanos continúan la destrucción sistemática de las líneas tele-
gráficas. el daño causado a la red, sobre todo en la parte oriental de la isla,
fue enorme. al producirse la intervención americana no existía comunica-
ción telegráfica entre la habana y santiago y las líneas telegráficas de la zo-
na oriental estaban totalmente destruidas. también los caminos quedaron
abandonados e intransitables, a menos que hubiesen sido necesitados por las
tropas españolas. algunos de los ferrocarriles sufrieron pérdidas muy serias.
a todo esto hay que añadir, el corte, en la bahía de cienfuegos, de los cables
submarinos de sur de la isla realizado por la marina de guerra de los estados
unidos cuando estos iniciaron la guerra contra españa en 1898.
el estallido del acorazado uss maine en la bahía de la habana, el 15 de
febrero de 1898, fue el detonante que desencadenó la guerra entre estados
unidos y españa, que finalizaría con la intervención militar de estados
unidos a cuba y frustra los ideales independentistas por los que tanto ha-
bía luchado y sufrido el pueblo cubano. era presidente de estados unidos
en ese momento, el republicano William mcKinley.
mcKinley es el primer presidente norteamericano que convierte la casa
Blanca en un centro de comunicaciones en tiempo de guerra, y el primer can-
didato que usa el teléfono en su campaña presidencial. los telégrafos militares
se encontraban normalmente en el departamento de Guerra en Washington.
mcKinley habilitó una oficina en el segundo piso de la casa Blanca, llamada
por su staff ‘War Room’, donde fueron situados unos 25 telégrafos13, que le
permitían contactar con el ejército y con la marina y seguir los progresos de la
guerra sobre los mapas situados en la pared de dicha oficina.
en 1898, en previsión de las operaciones militares, el cuerpo de
señales del ejército de estados unidos había reunido en un almacén de
savannah, estado de Georgia, el material necesario para el tendido de
500 líneas telegráficas y 5.000 postes14. luego de la intervención militar,
este material fue rápidamente trasladado a la isla, pudiendo el cuerpo
de señales acometer, de manea inmediata, la reparación y extensión de
las líneas telegráficas en el país y de aquellas que el mando militar esta-
dounidense requería, de manera tal, que en el mes de abril de 1899 ya las
líneas estaban funcionando.
13
Walter lafeber, transcripción de Crucible of Empire: the Spanish-American War, documental
pBs por daniel miller (1999), en PBS on-line, www.pbs.org/crucible/frames/_film.html.
14
report of mayor h.F. hadges in Civil Report, period of January 1901-may 1902, libros
raros, universidad de la habana.
desde 1876, las comunicaciones telegráficas entre españa y cuba

tenían dos posibles vías: la del cable submarino que unía la habana
con estados unidos, y de allí con europa, y el cable que unía a españa
con cuba a través de las canarias, el continente americano y las islas de
caribe, cable que no pasaba por territorio americano. sin embargo, en
esta última vía, la comunicación en muchos de los tramos era responsabi-
lidad de compañías extranjeras, en particular, norteamericanas.
estados unidos declara el bloqueo a la isla, impidiendo la entrada de
alimentos y municiones y cortando el servicio postal. el 22 de abril de
1898 apareció la flota norteamericana a la vista de los habitantes de la
ciudad de la habana, moviéndose posteriormente a matanzas, mariel
y cárdenas. pero este bloqueo no era totalmente efectivo, ya que el
Gobierno español en la isla mantenía comunicación con la península a
través del cable telegráfico trasatlántico del sur. cortando estos cables se
impedía la comunicación telegráfica entre, madrid, la habana y la flota
del almirante cervera.
los cables submarinos que conectaban a cuba con españa, sin pasar
por territorio norteamericano, estaban todos en la costa sur, y su trazado
en cuba era Batabanó – cienfuegos – santiago de cuba. entre santiago de
cuba y la bahía de Kingston, en Jamaica, existía otra sección de este cable.
por tierra, pasando por san luis, cienfuegos, trinidad y santiago de cuba,
existía una línea telegráfica que llegaba hasta la bahía de Guantánamo, y
desde allí, se prolongaba la comunicación mediante un cable submarino
hasta haití. Batabanó en el sur, y la habana en el norte, se comunicaban
por líneas telegráficas terrestres. el objetivo principal era aislar a la habana
por el sur, ya que los cables que conectaban la habana por el norte tenían
apoyo en territorio norteamericano y no era necesario cortarlos.
la fuerza naval estadounidense que operaba a principios de mayo en
la costa sur de cuba, estaba compuesta por el crucero Marblehead, la caño-
nera Nashville, el yate convertido Eagle, el guardacostas Windom, y la car-
bonera Saturn, los cuales formaban, en aquel momento, la cuarta división
de la flota norteamericana. el jefe de la división era el comandante de la
marina de estados unidos B.h. mccalla. el 10 de mayo, el comandante
mccalla comunicó a los oficiales al mando de las naves, la disposición
de cortar los cables en la bahía de cienfuegos y a estos efectos se preparó
una expedición para llevar a cabo la operación el siguiente día.
el día 11 de mayo, después de inspeccionar la zona, y mediante el dis-
paro de todas las baterías de cañones del marblehead y del nashville, fue
destruida la casa donde estaban anclados los cables – uno a Batabanó y otro
a santiago de cuba – quedando ambos cables cortados. posteriormente
el marblehead abrió fuego contra las barracas y la estación de señales.
la expedición estaba formada por varios botes y un grupo de hombres
que, después del cañoneo, bajaron a tierra. dada la profundidad exis-
tente, a pesar de los esfuerzos de dragado que realizó la expedición, los
cables cortados no pudieron ser recuperados. durante la guerra, fueron

cortados otros cables telegráficos submarinos existentes en cuba y en el
caribe.
4. La telegrafía y la intervención militar norteamericana a Cuba
la guerra duró apenas 100 días, y al cesar las hostilidades el dominio

colonial español fue sustituido, a partir de enero de 1899, por la ocupa-
ción militar estadounidense y el Gobierno Interventor. Cuba viviría ‘entre
dos imperios’, al decir de louis a. pérez15. durante el período de la inter-
vención militar norteamericana, en paralelo con el desarrollo de los planes
colonialista de estados unidos, se llevaron a cabo, de manera incesante,
labores de modernización, higienización y cambios en las más diversas es-
feras en la vida de la isla16 y el servicio telegráfico no fue una excepción.
el servicio telegráfico, que en 1898 se había integrado con el correo en
una dirección General de comunicaciones, fue separado de esta, situándo-
se bajo el mando del cuerpo de señales del ejército de estados unidos. la
primera medida tomada por el nuevo mando fue la de sustituir los viejos
telégrafos Digney, utilizados en las estaciones telegráficas de la isla, por
aparatos que usaban corriente continua. posteriormente se estableció el uso
de máquinas de escribir, pues hasta entonces, los mensajes se escribían ma-
nuscritos, usando lápiz tinta.
El Capitán Otto A. Nesmith, Jefe del Cuerpo de Señales del
departamento de cuba, en un informe17 sobre el trabajo realizado por
ese Cuerpo, evalúa del siguiente modo los telégrafos que funcionaban
en la isla: “las líneas telegráficas funcionaban mediante aparatos de cinta de
circuito abierto que se abandonó desde los primeros días de la telegrafía en
Estados Unidos”. respecto al mal estado de las líneas cubanas, ese mis-
mo informe es ilustrativo. las comunicaciones telegráficas terminaban
en sancti spritus, de esa ciudad hacia el oriente de la isla, la Guerra de
independencia no había dejado en pié línea alguna.
de manera inmediata, se trajo a cuba el material telegráfico situado en
el almacén de savannah y se acometieron los trabajos de reparación de las
líneas con tal energía que el 1o de abril de 1899 ya estaba terminada la línea
principal entre la habana y santiago de cuba. el secretario de la Guerra
de estados unidos, que estaba de visita de inspección en santiago de cuba,
inauguró la línea reparada enviándole un mensaje al presidente mcKinley.
15
louis a. pérez, Cuba between Empires 1878-1900 (pittsburgh: pittsburgh university press,
1983).
16
para un análisis detallado de esta actividad modernizadora durante la intervención, ver
marial iglesias utset, Las Metáforas del cambio en la vida cotidiana: Cuba 1898-1902 (la habana:
unión, 2003).
17
Report of Captain Otto A, Nesmith, Chief of Signal Officer, Department of Cuba, for the
period of january 1901-may 1902 in Civil Report, libros raros, universidad de la habana.
desde la habana, el Jefe del cuerpo de señales de este ejército, que ins-
peccionaba los trabajos en dicha ciudad, telegrafío también al presidente,
comunicándole del funcionamiento prácticamente completo del sistema
telegráfico. se tendieron nuevas líneas como la de Guantánamo-sagua de
tánamo-Baracoa y la de pinar del río a Guanajay y a san Juan y martínez.
Desde Sancti Spiritus hacía la Zona Oriental todas líneas telegráficas tuvie-
ron que ser tendidas nuevamente.
al inicio de la intervención la academia de telegrafía desapareció. en
sustitución de esta, los interventores habilitaron un local en el edificio de
la Oficina Central para practicar telegrafía con tres aparatos Morse. De los
40 telegrafistas que trabajaban en el centro telegráfico de la habana, solo
continuaron trabajando 9 por dominar el inglés y ser capaces de recibir ‘al
oído’. Esto lo explica el uso por parte de Estados Unidos, del código ‘ame-
ricano’ para las comunicaciones terrestres, mientras que los telegrafistas
criollos utilizaban el código ‘continental’.
en 1901, existían 319 empleados de telégrafo. de estos, 256 eran cubanos
y 63 norteamericanos. en la plantilla de ese año aparece, por primera vez,
la mujer cubana como telegrafista18. en la oficina telegráfica de cárdenas,
trabajaban las hermanas aurora y maría luisa delgado, Blanca pérez en
la oficina de matanzas. una norteamericana, Guillerma martin, era la Jefa
de la Oficina Telegráfica de Remedios. Esta presencia femenina continuará
incrementándose posteriormente.
es indudable que los efectos de la intervención norteamericana sobre
el servicio telegráfico fueron altamente positivos y que muchos de los nor-
teamericanos del cuerpo de señales de estados unidos que participaron,
conjuntamente con los telegrafistas criollos, en las tareas de moderniza-
ción, reconstrucción y desarrollo de las líneas telegráficas, estaban anima-
dos de sanos propósitos de colaboración con el pueblo cubano y ajenos a
los intereses anexionistas.
El 14 de julio de 1901, se forma en La Habana el Directorio Organizador
del cuerpo de comunicaciones, que compuesto por antiguos empleados
en servicio activo o que habían quedado cesantes, debían concebir y or-
ganizar el nuevo Cuerpo de Comunicaciones dentro de la República. En
una asamblea, que tuvo participación masiva de los empleados telegráficos
y de correo, se nombró una comisión Gestora que debía desarrollar una
propuesta inicial de la organización y el presupuesto de ese cuerpo. Fue
elegido presidente de la comisión Gestora rigoberto rodríguez masvidal
y como Secretario Enrique C. Alfonso. Organizativamente se partía de la
necesidad de unir, bajo un cuerpo de comunicaciones, al servicio de co-
rreo y el servicio telegráfico, los cuales habían sido separados durante la
intervención.
18
dirección General de comunicaciones, Memoria Histórica del Correo y el Telégrafo (la ha-
bana: dirección General de comunicaciones, 1902).
El Reglamento Orgánico y el presupuesto elaborados por la Comisión

fueron sometidos, mediante una circular de su presidente, de fecha 12 de
septiembre, al criterio de los hombres más autorizados y notables de cuba,
en la política, la ciencias, la industria, el comercio y la prensa, recibiendo
cálidas adhesiones de los consultados19. el día 9 de enero se entregó es-
te proyecto al General Wood para que fuese tenido en cuenta en la nue-
va organización de los servicios de correos y telégrafos. muchas de las
propuestas formuladas por este proyecto de reglamento y presupuesto
fueron utilizados en la implementación republicana de la dirección de
comunicaciones.
el 20 de mayo de 1902 comienza la vida republicana de cuba, que pasa-
ba, de ser una colonia de españa, a ser una neocolonia de estados unidos.
al cesar la intervención, se produce, en todo el país, la retirada de los mi-
litares norteamericanos de las oficinas telegráficas, siendo sustituidos por
personal cubano. los telegrafistas del centro telegráfico de la habana, cu-
banos y norteamericanos, realizaron una emocionante reunión de despe-
dida, expresión de la confraternidad existente entre ellos en el plano del
trabajo20.
el servicio telegráfico nacional pasó a ser atendido por la dirección de
comunicaciones adscrita a la secretaría de Gobernación, y en general, el
telégrafo se mantuvo precariamente durante décadas y solo, ocasional-
mente, se modernizó el sistema con la introducción de algunos adelantos
técnicos.
el tendido de cables telegráficos submarinos y con ello la estructuración
de la telegrafía como un sistema global, tuvo consecuencias importantes en
el mundo en esta mitad del siglo XiX, y en cuba, en particular. es por ello
que vamos a prestar especial atención al desarrollo de este proceso tecnoló-
gico y a sus consecuencias.
5. La globalización de la telegrafía y su influencia en la sociedad de

la época
con el tendido de los cables telegráficos submarinos y la internaciona-

lización de la telegrafía, esta tecnología alcanza su verdadera dimensión.
En 1849 C.V. Walker, un ingeniero de la South Eastern Railway Co., logró,
utilizando un tramo de cable submarino, establecer comunicación con
la ciudad de londres desde un barco situado en la bahía de Folkestone.
posteriormente, en 1851, se tiende exitosamente, a través de canal de la
mancha, el primer cable submarino entre inglaterra y Francia. esta obra fue
realizada por la Atlantic Telegraph Company con el apoyo tanto del imperio
19
Entre los consultados estuvieron Bartolomé Masó, Enrique José Varona y Martín Morúa
Delgado, este último la consideró como una tarea patriótica.
20
dirección General de comunicaciones, Memoria Histórica del Correo y el Telégrafo.
Británico como del gobierno de estados unidos. el cable tuvo una impor-
tante consecuencia: por primera vez la información bursátil de londres po-
día ser conocida instantáneamente en parís. después de una vida efímera,
el cable dejo de funcionar en septiembre de 1858. posteriormente, al madu-
rar esta tecnología, fueron tendidos muchos otros cables. durante la segun-
da mitad del siglo XiX, Gran Bretaña sería la potencia líder en la creación
de una red mundial de comunicaciones por cable submarino.
uno de los financiadores del cable trasatlántico fue moses taylor,
presidente del National City Bank desde 1856, un hombre clave en la explo-
tación de las materias primas de las áreas colonizadas y subdesarrolladas
del caribe. este financiamiento no fue casual. este cable, y los nuevos que se
tenderán posteriormente, hicieron posible la apropiación de la información
por parte de grupos financieros, permitiendo el control y la difusión de esta
información en función de sus intereses. mediante la especulación en los
mercados se van a crear fortunas y se controlarán y comprarán compañías.
el cable, al igual que la bolsa, va a ser un instrumento de dominación neoco-
lonial, que puso los mercados de materias prima al alcance de la mano del
gran capital financiero. esta es su verdadera esencia como negocio.
la red de cables telegráficos submarinos que va a circundar el mundo,
determinará el surgimiento de agencias internacionales de noticias y modi-
ficará la prensa de la época, impulsará, al igual que lo hizo el ferrocarril en
su momento, el naciente turismo, y despertará la imaginería popular21.
Apenas tendido el primer cable a través del Atlántico, y aún antes, se van
a levantar voces en cuba y en españa, que reclamaban la comunicación tele-
gráfica con la isla de cuba, entre otras medidas necesarias, para fortalecer los
vínculos con la colonia. uno de los primeros proyectos que obtuvo una con-
cesión provisional fue presentado por el ingeniero español a. de marcoartu.
este proyecto, que convertía la península en el centro de una red mundial de
cables, no obtuvo la concesión definitiva. posteriormente se concibió una ruta
alternativa, la llamada ‘ruta transatlántica del Sur’, que tenía el trazado ge-
neral Cádiz-Canarias-Cabo Verde-Brasil-Cuba. Múltiples fueron además los
proyectos de tender un cable submarino entre cuba y estados unidos.
El Capitán Jarnes A. Scrymser ‘aplicó’ a la Legislatura del Estado de la
Florida solicitando los derechos para tender un cable a punta rassa, lo cual
le fue concedido por un período de 20 años. al mismo tiempo, el General
William F. smith hizo la solicitud al Gobierno superior de cuba, del derecho
de amarre de un cable telegráfico en la isla. ambos, representaban los intereses
de la International Ocean Telegraph Company. un acta del congreso de estados
unidos aprobada el 5 de mayo de 1866, daba el derecho exclusivo a esta com-
pañía para operar todo el tráfico telegráfico submarino con cuba por un perío-
do de 14 años, este privilegio pasaría años más tarde a la Western Union.
21
Ver el ejemplo del ‘telégrafo espiritual’ en Antonio Bermúdez, “Notas para la historia del
espiritismo en cuba”, Etnología y Folklore 4 (1967), 5-22.
Por la Real Orden 631 de 19 de junio de 186622 se le concede al mayor

General del ejército de los estados unidos William F. smith representante
de la Compañía Telegráfica Internacional, la concesión del derecho de amarre,
en la costa de cuba, del extremo de un cable submarino que con arreglo a la
concesión otorgada a dicha compañía por el congreso de estados unidos
había de partir de las costas de la Florida. la International Ocean Telegraph
Company, inscrita en estados unidos e inglaterra, y a principios de la déca-
da del 70 una subsidiaria de la Western Union, va a operar en cuba con el
nombre de ‘Compañía Telegráfica Internacional’.
el tendido del cable entre la habana y cayo hueso comenzó el 26 de
julio de 1867. el buque narva, utilizado para esa tarea, llegó el 5 de agosto
a las costas de la habana, anclando el extremo del cable en la costa habane-
ra. el cable fue ordenado a la Indian Rubber, Gutta Percha & Telegraph Works
Company (IRGPTW). el año siguiente esa compañía tendió otro cable de la
misma factura entre esos puntos y se utilizó el mismo barco narva.
el 10 de septiembre 1867, empieza a funcionar el cable submarino, sien-
do este el primero que comunica dos naciones del hemisferio occidental.
la isla queda así unida a las redes telegráficas de otros países, directamen-
te con estados unidos y, mediante las redes de este país, con españa a tra-
vés de Gran Bretaña y Francia. este evento se reseña el 11 de septiembre en
la Gaceta de la habana.
en la prensa habanera aparecen numerosos comentarios satíricos, chis-
tes y caricaturas sobre la relación del cable con el azúcar cubano. Entre
ellos se destaca la caricatura de Víctor Patricio Landaluce, aparecida en la
revista satírica el moro muza, en la cual una hermosa mujer, que represen-
ta a cuba, está unida a los estados unidos por el cable como un dogal a su
cuello. santiago spencer, que publicaba en la habana el Boletín Comercial
contentivo de información estadística sobre distintos productos, funda-
mentalmente el azúcar, firma con la Associated Press un contrato, y pocos
días después, el 23 de septiembre, inaugura en este una nueva columna
denominada ‘Cable’.
una vez tendido el cable entre la habana y cayo hueso, quedaban uni-
dos cuba-new York-londres, y un grupo privilegiado de hombres pudo,
por primera vez en la historia, negociar simultáneamente en los tres mer-
cados más importantes del azúcar: el de la Habana, primer centro exporta-
dor de azúcar a nivel mundial, el de New York, primer centro importador
del continente americano y el de londres, primer centro importador de
europa. esta dinámica económico-informativa posibilitó el surgimiento de
grandes transnacionales haciendo obsoleto el rol de los pequeños interme-
diarios, a los cuales le resultaba imposible competir con estas y evidenció
la necesidad de institucionalizar el comercio mundial del azúcar23.
22
anc, reales Órdenes, legajo 221, n. 763.
23
Ver Manuel Moreno Fraginals, El Ingenio, tomo i (la habana: ciencias sociales, 1978), iii.
los comerciantes británicos se encontraron en posición desventajosa

para negociar en los mercados del azúcar, por ello, en 1869 fundan tres
compañías, la Cuban Submarine Telegraph Company, la Panama and South
Pacific Telegraph Company, y la West India and Panama Telegraph Company,
con el objetivo de enlazar telegráficamente a cuba con europa a través de
las islas del caribe y del atlántico.
en 1870 comienzan los trabajos de interconexión de las islas que ter-
minan en 1873 con el funcionamiento pleno del sistema. el trazado com-
pleto de la ruta era: santiago de cuba-Kingston, Jamaica-colón, panamá,
Kingston-san Juan, puerto rico-san tomas-san Kitts-antigua Guadalupe-
Dominica-Martinica-Santa Lucía-San Vicente–Barbados, San Vincente-
Granada-Trinidad–Belem y desde esta última, a Cayena por una línea
terrestre. el 2 de septiembre de 1870, la Cuba Submarine Telegraph Company,
abre al tráfico la conexión habana-santiago de cuba mediante un cable te-
legráfico submarino a través de Batabanó y cienfuegos. la West India and
Panama Telegraph Company tiende el cables submarino entre santiago de
cuba y holland Bay, Jamaica.
En 1873 se tiende el cable del puerto de Vigo a Carcavelo, cerca de Lisboa,
y en junio de 1874 la Compañía Telegráfica Brasileira Submarina, termina el
tendido de un cable con el trazado Carcavelos-Madeira-Cabo Verde-Recife,
que desde este último se conectaría con las islas del Caribe mediante las
secciones recife-Fortaleza-san luis-Belem y desde esta, por una línea te-
rrestre, se unía con cayena, punto final del cable. para españa este cable
era vital pues permitía la comunicación entre la península y cuba sin nece-
sidad de atravesar el territorio de los estados unidos.
la globalización de la telegrafía revoluciona las prácticas comerciales,
dando una nueva tónica al mercado mundial. la instantaneidad de la co-
municación, el cambio en los ‘tiempos’, exigieron una modificación de los
tradicionales métodos de obtención y procesamiento de la información ne-
cesaria para la toma de decisiones mercantiles y bursátiles. las bolsas de
valores sufrieron de inmediato el impacto de este cambio, y tuvieron que
reorganizarse, porque esta instantaneidad volvió obsoletos sus reglamen-
tos. como apunta moreno Fraginals, “telégrafos y cables submarinos, pre-
pararon las condiciones necesarias para el gran desarrollo de las bolsas de
productos”24.
a finales del siglo XiX otros cables submarinos vendrían a conectar a
cuba con las redes telegráficas mundiales pero, hasta el tendido de los tres
cables telefónicos submarinos entre la habana y Key West en 1921, ningu-
no sería tan importante, ni capaz de provocar un impacto tan grande en la
sociedad, como lo fueron estos primeros cables.
24
ibid.
A. Baracca
Chapter 5
Physics in Cuba: a Lag between
Technological and Scientific Development
One of the most noteworthy achievements of the Cuban Revolution has

been the development of an advanced scientific system. cuba boasts a high
number of physicists, science graduates and doctors – among the highest
in the world with respect to its population. the state of physics can be used
to represent scientific development in general, even though it only forms a
small branch of the field. reports on physics in latin america place cuba
(a country with 11 million inhabitants), together with Chile, Venezuela and
colombia, as one of the countries with an intermediate number of phds in
physics (between 100 and 500), following the three largest and much more
populated countries of Brazil (3000), mexico (2200) and argentina (2000).
moreover, they include the university of havana as one of the outstanding
institutions in the region for the advancement of physics and recognize the
contribution of cuban physicists to such areas as condensed matter and
material physics, solar energy, optoelectronics and medical physics1. What
makes these results particularly remarkable, however, is the fact that they
started from a considerably modest level of scientific development and
higher education that existed in cuba before the 1959 revolution, lower
even than in other spanish colonies. indeed, not only was there no original
scientific research or development throughout the colonial period, when
the country was ruled by a decidedly backward mother country, but neither
was there any during the partial independence of the republican period.
at the same time, cuba saw the early realization of several advanced tech-
nologies at the beginning of the 19th century, even prior to their application in
spain, which is amazing considering the country’s underdevelopment, espe-
1
José luis morán-lópez, “physics in latin america comes of age”, Physics Today 12 (2000),
38-43: 38.
cially in rural areas. such advancements include the application of the steam
engine to the trapiche in 1817 and the 46-km railway connection for the transport
of goods between havana and Güines in 1837. What follows is an attempt to
interpret such early, advanced technological achievements during the 19th cen-
tury and the first half of the 20th against the much slower and delayed develop-
ment in science, based first on the commercial vocation, and strategic position,
of the island, and then on its peculiar role with respect to the united states.
1. Late Scientific Development in Cuban Society
in order to pinpoint the problem, the development of physics and higher

education in cuba before the revolution should be examined in more detail.
the wave of the enlightenment did not reach the spanish colony until the
beginning of the 19th century, a delayed reflection of a movement that was
already underway in the mother country. it had a lasting impact on cuba’s
system of higher education thanks to the teachings of Father José agustín
caballero (1771-1835) and the vigorous initiatives and material support
of Bishop espada y landa (1756-1828). it was in this context that espada’s
Cuban-born protégé, Father Félix Varela (1787-1853), introduced Cuba to the
earliest methods of teaching physics, supported by the first Gabinete de Física
Experimental, a collection of imported scientific apparatuses given to him by
Bishop espada in 18162. Varela is considered one of the founding fathers of
cuba, a freedom fighter who struggled for the abolition of slavery and was
forced to flee the island for his life in 1823.
despite these innovations, an aristotelian mentality and curriculum domi-
nated at the university of havana from its founding in 1728 to its secularization
in 1842. though it would later take the lead in physics education in cuba, its
scientific level remained quite modest until well beyond the end of colonial rule
at the end of the 19th century. it should be noted, however, that some impor-
tant developments did take place in other fields, for instance medicine, in rela-
tion to local problems like tropical diseases (for example, under tomás romay,
1784-1849; carlos Finlay, 1833-1915; and urologist Joaquín maría albarrán y
domínguez, 1860-1912, who was proposed for the nobel prize though he per-
formed his work in France). in 1861, nicolás J. Gutiérrez, a surgeon and pro-
fessor of medicine at the university of havana, founded the Real Academia de
Ciencias Físicas, Médicas y Naturales de La Habana, the first academy of sciences in
the americas (analogous academies were only founded two years later in the
us, thirteen years later in argentina and twenty-three years later in mexico)3.
2
Felix Varela, Instituciones de Filosofía Ecléctica Para Uso de la Juventud, vol. 4 (pinar del rio:
Vitral, 1814); Id., Lecciones de Filosofía, vols. 3 and 4 (la habana: de palmer, 1819 and 1820).
this textbook was updated in four susbequent editions (printed in new York, the last one in
1835) that were well received and used in various latin american countries.
3
pedro m. pruna, “national science in a colonial context. the royal academy of sciences of
habana, 1861-1898”, Isis 3 (1994), 412-26.
By a royal decree approved in 1880, an educational system similar to that

existing in spain at the time was introduced in cuba. it extended studies in
the humanities and sciences and replaced the Bachiller degree with a Licenciado
degree. the science faculty was subdivided into three sections – Ciencias Físico-
Matemáticas, Ciencias Físico-Químicas and Ciencias Naturales – and two new
physics subjects were introduced – Física Superior and Ejercicios Prácticos de
Física. these changes survived until the reform of higher education in 1962.
however, the facilities for teaching physics continued to be precarious at the
university of havana, and the scientific level remained quite low throughout
this period, with no original research or work carried out. such backwardness
is emphasized by the many developments recorded, for instance, in mexico
during the same time, at least in such fields as mechanics, engineering and
probably chemistry, which were connected to the exploitation of mines.
during the us military occupation of cuba (1 January 1899 – 20 may
1902), and the subsequent six decades (may 1902 – January 1959) of the
cuban republic’s limited independence, some important changes were
made to the national education system. thanks to the initiative and influ-
ence of Enrique José Varona (1849-1933), the outlook and organization of
both secondary and higher education was significantly improved. the so-
called Plan Varona (30 June 1900) emphasized active scientific and techno-
logical education, in place of the former emphasis on arts and the humanities
in which context students had been more or less spoon-fed, so to speak, by
mediocre teachers4. the organization of the university of havana generally
followed that of american universities. there was, however, an important
difference. not only could professors hold their posts for life but they were
also, in a way, allowed to act like academic feudal lords. this tended to de-
grade the quality of teaching, which often ended up as obsolete routine. the
school of sciences and the newly-created school of engineers, electricians
and architects were kept within the Facultad de Letras y Ciencias. physics
studies were basically represented by Física Superior and Física General cours-
es, but in practice they were taught in an essentially descriptive fashion, with
little mathematical content, as could be expected from the background of
the appointed teaching staff. For the most part, the original goals Varona set
forth for the university were frustrated after some time by the sad facts of
life in the country as a whole, where hopeless economic underdevelopment,
government corruption and submission to foreign imperial interests led the
nation into a multi-faceted crisis. this unleashed the radicalization of an im-
portant segment of the cuban population during what has been called the
“critical decade” (1923-1933).
4
ramón de armas and eduardo torres-cuevas, “la universidad de la habana y la frus-
tración republicana”, in Historia de la Universidad de La Habana, 1728-1929, vol. 1, eds. ramón
de armas, eduardo torres-cuevas and ana cairo Ballester (la habana: letras cubanas,
1984), 237-365.
largely inspired by the 1918 university reform in argentina, and led by

an outstanding student leader, Julio antonio mella, a reform movement
began in 1923 at the university of havana. among others, its avowed goals
included eradicating the archaic teaching methods then prevalent and the
unacceptable performance of certain teachers due either to incompetence,
corruption or failure to comply with their daily duties. While in the end the
full reform program was not fulfilled, some of the most notoriously incom-
petent members of the teaching staff were removed and replaced by new
personnel deemed better suited for the job, often proposed or backed by
the students themselves. such was the case of manuel Gran (1893-1962). in
march 1923, Gran took over as a substitute assistant professor for the two
courses of Física Superior because the students refused to attend the poor
lectures offered by the assistant professor who was replacing the seriously-
ill senior professor. a self-made man with a cartesian turn of mind, Gran
introduced a truly fresh spirit to the teaching of physics, with a consistent-
ly rigorous approach to the different topics, an appropriate use of math-
ematics and a strong link to problem-solving and practical manipulations.
By 1929, the subject Física Superior had acquired the essentials of the profile
it would maintain until the early 1960s.
in the meantime, it must be recalled that the students of the university
of havana were among those strongly opposed to the bloody tyranny of
president machado, who was overthrown in august 1933. that year, im-
portant changes were introduced to the degrees offered by the school of
science, which were extended from three to four years. While routine lab
work continued to be unsatisfactory, students of physical and mathematical
sciences and physical and chemical sciences were now required to perform
a set of more sophisticated experiments during their final year in order to
obtain their degree5. still, genuine research was not required. an impor-
tant step was taken in 1933 with the introduction of a Física Teórica course,
led by professors enrique Badell (1895-1947) and miguel a. maseda (1902-
1957), both largely self-made physicists. moreover, marcelo alonso, who
had taken graduate-level courses in physics at Yale university, started a
modest laboratory for atomic and nuclear physics6.
mention must also be made of a highly motivating course in general
physics taught by roberto soto del rey (1913-1995) to engineering students
at the University of Oriente from the time of its inauguration in Santiago de
cuba (1949). Furthermore, the teaching of physics at the high school level
was updated, and it soon provided a set of trained professors.
5
universidad de la habana, Memoria-Anuario de los cursos académicos de 1933-1934 y 1934-
1935, 23-24 and 53-55.
6
José Altshuler, “Visión retrospectiva de un momento de la enseñanza de la Física en Cuba”,
paper presented at the Taller Iberoamericano de Enseñanza de la Física Universitaria, havana, 20-
24 January 1997.
2. The Technological Needs of Cuba’s Commercial vocation and

Strategic Position
cuba’s economic role during the colonial age, and under the rule of the
united states, was quite different from that of other caribbean and latin
american colonies. the island was not particularly rich in valuable natural
resources, nor did it abound in ore reserves or develop important transforma-
tion industries, apart from that of sugarcane. instead, the main benefit it had
to offer was its strategic geographical position. moreover, cuba’s commercial
vocation as a crucible of trade between latin america and europe was en-
hanced by the supremacy of the united states over cuba’s trade starting in
the first decades of the 19th century7. under such conditions, the island needed
neither advanced scientific knowledge and higher education nor technologi-
cal developments in industrial production, the way they were required for
instance, at least in some fields, in Mexico. On this basis, one can understand
anomalous cuban developments like the introduction of the steam engine in
the ingenios for sugarcane manufacturing, despite the wide supply of slaves,
and the construction of the railways, or the advancements made in the fight
against tropical diseases. likewise, since cuba was a strategic crucible of trade,
one might suppose that communication and information technologies played
relevant roles that required early and advanced developments. indeed, it is
not surprising that countries other than spain, in particular the united states,
contributed to such advances. this could also explain why cuba anticipated
and even outdid its colonial mother country in these fields, while it lagged be-
hind on the purely scientific side. however, one could also argue that spain’s
scanty interest in scientific development and its attitude of pure (pre-capitalis-
tic) exploitation of its colonies contributed to the decline of this field.
evidently, the situation changed for cuba during the first half of the 20th
century. at the same time, even though the united states was on its way to
becoming the world leader in science and economics, its attitude towards
the island did not change radically. cuba remained substantially a land of
economic exploitation, or of leisure for the wealthiest classes, and its role
was to increase the efficiency of its facilities to such ends, not to be an au-
tonomous player in scientific development.
7
in 1826, the volume of cuba’s trade with the united states exceeded that with spain by
almost three times: ramón de la sagra, Historia Económica-Política y Estadística de la Isla de
Cuba (La Habana: Arazoza y Soler, 1831), 200-5. Fernando Ortiz, an authority on the subject,
emphatically asserted that “in 1850 the trade of this country with the united states exceeds
that with its spanish metropolis, and the united states definitely assumes its natural geo-
graphic condition as purchaser market for the nearby cuban production, but also its privilege
as economic metropolis. already in 1881, the consul General of the united states in havana
writes officially that cuba is an economic dependent of the united states even though it is still
politically ruled by Spain”. See: Fernando Ortiz, Contrapunteo Cubano del Tabaco y del Azúcar
(la habana: consejo nacional de cultura, 1963), 64.
One may suppose, however, that Cuba’s openness and flexibility to-
wards technological innovation is what contributed, in turn, to its creating
a cultural climate and a fecund material basis for its subsequent scientific
take-off and development. it is difficult, in fact, to believe that the remark-
able scientific advances that have taken place since 1959 could have sprung
up from scratch.
3. The Leap in Scientific Development after 19598
the revolutionary effervescence in the cuban universities after 1959

initiated a “romantic” phase in which teachers, students and academic
authorities succeeded, albeit with foreign aid and support, to profoundly
renovate and update scientific and academic activities in a surprisingly
short time. When the university of havana was reopened after the revo-
lutionary phase, there was an increasing awareness of the need to pro-
foundly reform both the curricula and teaching methods, coherent with
the need to develop a modern mentality that would include scientific re-
search, preferably linked to the country’s new perspectives on economic
and cultural development. the first remarkable step was made, in typi-
cal “cuban style”, in the field of information and communication tech-
nology. While endless discussions were taking place, the engineering
school of the university of havana was in fact the first to engage in the
modernization of the curricula. this resulted from a critical situation
that erupted in June 1960 between students and some faculty members
that led to the provisional hiring of a number of capable professionals as
teachers9. in view of the urgent need of new specialists for the ministry
of communications, which at the time was engaged in a true technical
revolution, the teaching of electrical engineering was immediately modi-
fied to deal with the fields of electronics and electrical communications,
followed by a radical modification of mathematics and physics teaching.
a syllabus based on leading u.s. physics textbooks was drawn up, but
it was difficult to find qualified instructors. the task was entrusted to
a few senior high school teachers and some of the brighter engineering
students. after a truly difficult start, the courses were normalized and
incorporated into all the engineering majors.
8
More-detailed analyses of these developments are reported in: Angelo Baracca, Victor Fajer
and Bruno henríquez, “el desarrollo de la física en cuba”, Revista Iberoamericana de Física 1
(2004), 54-61; angelo Baracca, ed., History of the Development of Physics in Cuba (Berlin: max-
Planck-Institute für Wissenschaftsgeschichte, 2005); Angelo Baracca, Victor Fajer and Carlos
rodríguez, “a look at physics in cuba”, Physics Today 9 (2006), 42-48.
9
José altshuler, “la especialización en telecomunicaciones y la reforma de 1960 del plan de
estudios de ingeniería eléctrica en la universidad de la habana”, in Estudios de Historia de
la Ciencia y la Tecnología, ed. Centro de Estudios de Historia y Organización de la Ciencia (La
habana: academia, 1989).
meanwhile, the newly created school of physics (1961) would also have
to cope with the problem of very limited staff available to teach classes. in
this case, too, high school teachers would be hired to cope with the short-
age. But during the whole of 1959 and the first half of 1960, courses contin-
ued to be taught in essentially the same way as in the 1950s. it became quite
clear that a profound reform of the curriculum and teaching methods was
urgently needed to develop a modern mentality aimed primarily at engag-
ing in scientific research. the new revolutionary government assumed the
explicit goal of improving scientific education as a fundamental factor in
the development of a modern and equitable society. the social situation
was characterized by new forms of participation. in 1962, months of intense
work among university professors, outside professionals and students re-
sulted in the Reforma de la Educación Superior en Cuba, which introduced free
registration for all eligible students and a strong emphasis on the develop-
ment of scientific research. many new degrees were established (including
a five-year Licenciatura en Física) that had been absent from the old curricula
and were needed for the country’s economic and cultural development10.
right from its effective start in 1961, the new Escuela de Física of the
university of havana faced overwhelming problems, lacking as it did the
minimal indispensable means for developing a modern physics school.
the training of students was redirected to cover modern conceptions of
physics with a view to engaging in scientific research. those who gradu-
ated in 1959 and 1960 were incorporated as “graduate instructors”, while
final-year students were taken on as “laboratory assistants”. meanwhile,
in the context of the new plans for the country’s industrial development
promoted by ernesto “che” Guevara, an important role was attributed to
electronics, especially microelectronics. at the request of the revolutionary
government, a hundred scholarships were offered by the soviet union for
cubans to study engineering and economics at their universities. in 1961,
only eighty-five young people could be found who complied with the aca-
demic and other requirements. six of them proposed to major in physics,
which was approved by Guevara. in subsequent years, the flow of students
towards the soviet union grew steadily.
the direct support that came from foreign physicists must be situated
in this context, particularly one aspect that is not widely acknowledged, i.e.
that a relevant contribution was made by the presence of several “Western”
scientists in cuba. in 1962, a small number of physicists from the soviet
union began to visit the island, contributing mainly to the organization of
the physics curriculum. in addition, during the 1960s, several individual
physicists, engineers and technicians from various Western countries (the
united Kingdom, israel, France, argentina, italy, mexico and the united
consejo superior de universidades, La Reforma de la Enseñanza Superior en Cuba (la habana:

10
universidad de la habana, 1962).

states) came to cuba on a voluntary basis, for periods ranging from one
to several years, offering to collaborate in the development of the new
school of physics. they taught courses in modern physics, promoted the
creation of new laboratories in acoustics, electronics and solid-state phys-
ics, set up workshops in electronics, mechanics and glass manufacturing
for the creation of scientific instruments, and fostered research. they also
played a decisive role in making the development of experimental phys-
ics a priority. the levialdi scholarship, for example, in memory of italian
physicist andrea levialdi who died in cuba in 1969, was created for post-
graduate training in parma. this initiating a long-lasting collaboration be-
tween the Faculty of physics of the university of havana, the university
of parma and the maspec (special materials) laboratory of the italian
national research council (cnr) in parma, where about twenty cuban
physicists have been trained since 1970. French and italian physicists also
made a very important contribution by organizing summer schools be-
tween 1968 and 1973, for which they held advanced courses and brought
materials and equipment.
a peculiarity of the new cuban situation was the lively debate that de-
veloped, mainly among professors and students who actively supported
teaching and research, over which fields of physics would best meet the
needs of the developing country. this discussion partly reflected high-level
opinions (che Guevara, for example, thought that solid-state electronic de-
vices would play a crucial role in the future and that cuba could offer an
original contribution in the socialist camp). some French and italian physi-
cists who participated in the 1968 havana cultural congress supported the
choice of solid-state physics. in fact, it was decided that research activities
should gradually concentrate more on this and related fields, such as elec-
tronics, optics and optoelectronics, and atomic physics. in 1967, the first
germanium diode “made in cuba” was performed at the Escuela de Física,
marking the official birth of research in solid-state physics. these choices
were conceived with an applicative goal, one that was based, however, on
sound fundamental research. a department of theoretical physics began to
take shape in the Escuela de Física11.
Besides the aforementioned strategic choice, the need for the advance-
ment of other fields was clearly perceived and pursued. plans for the indus-
trial development of the country assigned an important role to electronics
and metallurgy. the Academia Cubana de Ciencias (acc), created in 1962,
played a very important part in promoting scientific development in sever-
al fundamental branches. several new fields appeared. meteorology, geo-
physics, astrophysics and electronics were soon established as work groups
11
Fernando Crespo, Elena Vigil, DinaWaisman, “Sobre los primeros resultados en díodos de
germanio obtenidos por aleación”, paper presented at the Conferencia Química de Oriente, san-
tiago de cuba, February 1968.
or departments in the acc, and were consolidated as institutes during the

1970s. collaboration with, and support from, specialists and the leading
scientific institutions of the soviet union and other socialist countries led to
the creation of important facilities and services, such as the artificial satel-
lite tracking and monitoring system (connected with the moscow cosmos
centre) and the cuban meteorological service (of the utmost importance in
a tropical country), in addition to improvements in communications and
seismic, magnetic and gravimetric detection.
in the early 1970s, after the return in 1967 of the first cuban physicists
who had graduated in the soviet union, a stable curriculum was set up in
the Escuela de Física and teaching laboratories were built and equipped. the
graduation of more than 100 physicists from the Escuela de Física in 1970 and
1971 provided the “critical mass” that made it possible to cover the lack of
physics professors at cuban universities and to devote more people, time
and resources to scientific research and postgraduate education, as well as
to feed other institutions. about fifty physicists received m.sc. degrees in
solid-state physics from the Escuela de Física between 1972 and 1977.
this is not the place for a detailed review of the development of phys-
ics in cuba. however, the growth of microelectronics is worth mention-
ing as an example of advancements in research. in 1969, a crucial change
took place when French physicists introduced the silicon technique in
one of their aforementioned summer-school programs. planar technol-
ogy was quickly developed in relation to the project of building a pilot
plant for the production of semiconductor devices. MOS’s (metal oxide
semiconductors) and other integrated circuit and silicon solar cells were
obtained, while basic studies advanced, and the first pilot plant was es-
tablished. in 1973, the first laser built entirely in cuba was constructed.
By the mid-1970s, cuba had already reached a capacity in microelec-
tronics at an intermediate integration that was high for latin america. it
should be pointed out that, for a long time, publishing scientific papers
had not been a priority for cuban scientists. then in 1975, a large in-
ternational meeting on physics, the fourth “latin american symposium
on solid-state physics”, was organized in cuba for the first time, with
great success and local impact. scientific collaboration with soviet insti-
tutions increased, particularly with moscow university and the “ioffe”
leningrad institute of technical physics. undergraduate training of phys-
icists at soviet universities continued, but postgraduate training and joint
research became the main forms of cooperation. unfortunately, success-
ful advancements in microelectronics were thwarted (in cuba and other
developing countries) by rapid progress in high integration, which only
industrially developed countries could sustain. nevertheless, this devel-
opment could hardly have been foreseen, and the effort had been worth
making. the industrial plant was established, but it could not work at the
planned capacity.
ties with socialist countries were growing, mainly in the acc, and were
becoming crucial for the development of other fields. in nuclear physics in
particular, in addition to receiving support in teaching and training, exper-
imental equipment and techniques were introduced with the collaboration
of the soviet atomic energy commission and the dubna nuclear research
institute. radiotherapy services spread all over the country, starting in
the 1960s with a group of physicists working at the havana institute of
Oncology and, by the end of the 1970s, totaling some thirty medical physi-
cists, a considerable number for a small developing country.
during the second half of the 1970s, the consolidation of the structure
of the state led to the institutionalization of higher education and research,
with the establishment of the ministry of higher education (mes). this
initiated a new phase and provided greater opportunities and resources,
though in some sense it also brought the previous, “romantic” period to a
close.
4. The Formation of an Advanced Scientific System and Resistance

after the Collapse of the Soviet Union
the first two decades of the revolutionary government represented

the boosting phase for further development and the reinforcement of an
advanced and solid scientific system during the 1980s. in particular, this
decade brought on a substantial increase in physics research, due to the
foundation of new research centers and, in already-developed fields, to
greater incentives and further renovation. despite some tension created
by the special efforts to promote specific fields (such as the relative au-
tonomy of nuclear physics research with respect to the whole of cuban
science, connected to the decision to build the first electro-nuclear plant
in the country), the cuban scientific community and government succeed-
ed in maintaining a balanced support for other fields, in particular for ap-
plied projects, as a strategic political choice. Of particular interest is the fact
that the development of such a solid system, the establishment of a “criti-
cal mass” of physicists with university degrees or phds and the stability
reached in this field, have allowed cuba to withstand and overcome the
difficulties that were created by the collapse of the soviet union.
indeed, by 1990, the havana and eastern universities and the higher
institute of nuclear science and technology (isctn) were offering ad-
vanced programs in physics, with an average of fifty graduates per year.
about forty research groups existed in pure and applied physics. the most-
developed areas were solid-state physics, nuclear physics, optics and la-
ser physics, medical physics, biophysics and mathematical and theoretical
physics. physicists were also very active in interdisciplinary groups of me-
teorology, geophysics, astronomy, microelectronics, metallurgy, metrology,
robotics, informatics, neurosciences and molecular biology. most phds were
obtained in solid-state, material and nuclear physics. international events

were regularly organized on the island. cuban physicists also collaborated
with soviet, european and latin american institutions and actively par-
ticipated in international organizations related to physics. moreover, a na-
tional network of higher pedagogical institutes prepared secondary-school
physics teachers and the Special Vocational Pre-University Institutes for
exact sciences provided an excellent source of young people well-trained
to enter scientific and technical careers.
there is no doubt that with the collapse of the soviet union the en-
tire cuban scientific community has suffered a tremendous decrease in
all kinds of resources, both financial and material, and a shortage of in-
ternational exchange and scientific information. nevertheless, in spite of
profound reorganization, the cuban scientific system has resisted in its ba-
sic features, and shows signs of recovery, even in physics. some research
groups have disappeared, others have had to abandon or reduce their ac-
tive research. research centers and universities have frozen their hiring,
while the paralysis of industrial activities brought the growing presence of
physicists in this sector to a halt. this led, in turn, to a drop in student reg-
istration in physics. the equipment in teaching laboratories has aged and
decayed. an estimated two-hundred physicists have left the country, and
an undetermined number have shifted to activities other than science, in
search of better economic conditions. the average age of staff has grown:
about half the present physicists with phds will have reached the age of re-
tirement in 2010. long-term programs have been difficult to develop, and
physics has fallen behind with respect to the priorities of cuban science.
cuban physicists had benefited from access to the most advanced scien-
tific institutions in socialist countries, but now it was the turn of the contacts
previously established and maintained with “Western” scientific milieus
and institutions to become extremely useful. scientific exchange and col-
laboration shifted mainly towards spain, italy, Germany and other latin
American countries. Of these, Mexico and Brazil currently play a leading
role. collaboration with the international centre of theoretical physics in
trieste, italy, has also been very important. and in the year 2000, contacts
with the american physical society were established.
though a thorough reorganization was necessary, this has had benefi-
cial repercussions. For instance, during the 1990s, some impulse was given
to activities in renewable energies and the environment, and computing
capacities have increased, in spite of the shortage of powerful machines
for scientific computing. the growth of computer science and communica-
tions has improved access to updated technical and scientific information.
this progress has induced a shift of several experimental activities towards
simulation and modeling. these contributions have been important, but
they have also modified the equilibrium between theoretical and experi-
mental activity. all the same, various teams have contributed to resolving
the problems of the country, designing and constructing medical and ana-
lytical equipment, performing technical and scientific services for industry,
and generating new products.
the new century began with stimulating signals for the recovery and
advancement of cuban physics. in keeping with the importance given to
medicine in cuba, medical physics is one of the branches with the great-
est prospects, with investments of some $400 million in medical equip-
ment currently being made. at present, there are more than seventy-five
physicists working in clinical environments, thirty-two of them in nuclear
medicine, twenty-eight in radiotherapy and the rest in diagnostic imag-
ing and radiation protection. new equipment for radiotherapy is expected
to be installed, requiring at least another twenty physicists in these areas.
diagnostic imaging will be reinforced with the installation of eight new
magnetic resonance imaging facilities. a m.sc. degree in medical physics
has started its first program with twenty-five students; a higher degree in
radiation oncology is also training specialists in that field; and a degree in
health technology has been created, offering specialization in medical ra-
diophysics, with 100 students registered. more than twenty-four laser sys-
tems for refractive surgery and other high-technology optical instruments
for ophthalmology have been purchased in a plan to provide services to
cuban patients in all areas of the country as well as making them available
in other parts of latin america.
physicists have played a very important role in establishing and devel-
oping meteorological services in cuba. this sector is being strengthened
with important investments in modern equipment, which will result in a
new stimulus for physics. the field of renewable energies, in which physi-
cists have always made important contributions, is also expanding at pres-
ent and there is a plan to install wind power stations in the near future. it
is important to note that physics is only a small division of cuban science
compared to biotechnology and other branches of biomedical research.
nevertheless, cuban physicists are very active and their presence in aca-
demic life and technological development, publications, prizes, scientific
meetings and the popularization of science is considerably high. their fu-
ture success will largely depend on their ability to bring new generations
to physics studies and their applications to the problems linked with the
economic and social development of the country.
Part III
Conflicting Political Cultures:

from the First US Occupation
to revolution
2 3
Fig. 2 – Momento de bajar la estatua de

Isabel II, parque Central, La Habana, 12
de marzo de 1899, el Figaro, 26 de marzo
de 1899, n. 12 (Colleción de M. Iglesias
Utset).
Fig. 3 – Vista del Malecón habanero.
Fig. 4 – “¿Rue estatua debe ser colocada
en nuestro Parque Central?”, el Figaro,
30 de abril de 1899, n. 3 (Colleción de M.
Iglesias Utset).
Fig. 5 – “Mujer moderna”, el Figaro, 15
de enero de 1899, n. 3 (Colleción de M.
Iglesias Utset).
Fig. 6 – Parque Central, 1899 Pedestal Va-
cio (Colleción de M. Iglesias Utset).
On the previous page – Havana Ma-
lecón, early 20th century (in the Journal
of decorative and propaganda arts 22,
1996). 4
5 6
Part III
Conflicting Political Cultures: from the First

US Occupation to Revolution
the us military occupation of cuba (1898-1902), which followed the

defeat of the spanish army, shaped the future of the political system, the
economy and the social life of the cuban republic born in 1902. along with
the platt amendment written into the cuban constitution came political
dependence, imposed as a condition of us military withdrawal1. however,
during the four years of occupation, cuban society underwent a complex
process of interaction and conflict between cuban popular traditions and
north american modernization. excluded from official ceremonies that
marked the power shift from spain to the united states in cuba, large sec-
tors of the cuban population were able to turn the imperial connotation
of these ceremonies upside down. as marial iglesias utset shows in this
section, in a country where the majority of the population was illiterate,
popular forms of mocking authorities and status reversal were rather com-
mon. this study of popular forms of transgression and mockery shows
their strong nationalist connotations and enriches common interpreta-
tions of the first us military intervention in cuba and explains the tensions
and intersections between different forms of cuban nationalist expres-
sion. By blocking cuban self-determination in a variety of ways, the platt
amendment was the major target of cuban nationalism during the early
republic2. From “monumental nationalism” as the conservative representa-
tion of the goals of 19th-century Cuba Libre to open anti-imperialism, cuban
1
louis a. pérez, Cuba under the Platt Amendment, 1902-1934 (pittsburgh: pittsburgh universi-
ty press, 1986); marial iglesias utset, Las metáforas del cambio en la vida cotidiana: Cuba 1898-1902
(la habana: unión, 2003); luis e. aguilar, Cuba 1933. Prologue to Revolution (ithaca: cornell
university press, 1972).
2
see: lillian Guerra, The Myth of José Martí: Conflicting Nationalisms in Early Twentieth-Century
Cuba (chapel hill: north carolina university press, 2005); celina manzini, Un dilemma cu-
bano. Nacionalismo y vanguardia (la habana: casa de las américas, 2001).
political cultures erupted during the machado regime, as alessandra lorini

discusses in this section. among the anti-imperialist groups, spanish anar-
chists in cuba played an important role by developing educational centers
for the working classes, as amparo sánchez cobos explains in this section.
incited by political corruption, economic crisis and machado’s repression
of anarchists, communists and students, a wave of mobilizations through-
out the island led to the withdrawal of us support for the dictator, the end
of the machado regime in 1933 and the repeal of the platt amendment in
1934 by the F.d. roosevelt administration. students in the 1920s and 1930s
formed a revolutionary force whose national ideals, symbols and heritage
became the language of the student movement of the 1950s. as michael
lima argues in his essay, students responded to the revolution of 1959
“motivated by their own historical expectations, ideology and organiza-
tional characteristics”.
M. Iglesias
Utset
Chapter 6
Cultura política popular, “choteo” y
nacionalismo en tiempos de la primera
intervención norteamericana en Cuba
el primero de enero de 1899, cientos de habitantes de la la habana se

congregaron en el litoral de la bahía para ver arriar la bandera española
en la explanada de la fortaleza del morro. a diferencia de lo ocurrido en
otros casos de descolonización, en los que los pabellones de las metrópolis
fueron sustituidos por las flamantes enseñas de los estados nacionales, en
cuba el pabellón de españa dio paso a la bandera de la nueva potencia im-
perial en el área: los estados unidos de américa.
el acto de traspaso de poderes de manos españolas a norteamerica-
nas quedó en la memoria de las generaciones posteriores como símbolo
inequívoco del fracaso de las expectativas nacionalistas. la imagen de la
enseña norteamericana ondeando en el morro de la habana, preservada
en fotografías y grabados, o en versos como los celebérrimos de Bonifacio
Byrne que cada niño cubano memoriza en la escuela, es, hasta hoy, em-
blema de la frustración y la impotencia relacionadas con la degradante
condición neocolonial asignada a cuba a inicios del siglo XX: Al volver de
distante ribera / con el alma enlutada y sombría / afanoso busqué mi bandera /
y otra he visto en lugar de la mía. un examen a fondo de las fuentes de ese
período muestra un curioso fenómeno apenas estudiado: la inversión na-
cionalista y festiva de la connotación imperial de la ceremonia por parte
del pueblo habanero.
cuidadosamente reglamentado por las autoridades de ocupación
norteamericanas, el acto del traspaso de poderes – una solemne parada
militar, salvas de cañón a las doce en punto de la noche y cambio de ban-
deras en el castillo del morro – perseguía el propósito de confirmar el re-
cién adquirido poderío militar norteamericano sobre la isla. el montaje
escénico ratificaba públicamente los acuerdos sancionados por España y
estados unidos en un conciliábulo diplomático a puertas cerradas en parís.
la parte española contribuiría a la representación con un gesto dramático
que ponía punto final a toda una era con la retirada de los supuestos restos
de cristóbal colón, a bordo de un crucero de su flota militar. españa dejaba
el último enclave de lo que fuera su enorme imperio en el Nuevo Mundo
llevándose los que creía despojos mortales de su insigne descubridor.
aunque relegados de la ceremonia oficial, los cubanos se apropiaron
de la celebración con una lectura diferente de su significado. lejos de res-
ignarse a constatar la legitimidad del poder norteamericano, una junta de
“patriotas” formada en La Habana en los últimos días de 1898, lanzó volan-
tes que llamaban a festejar el cese de la soberanía de españa. interpretaban
el izamiento del pabellón norteamericano como el “comienzo de una nueva
época de libertades […] bajo cuya égida la estrella solitaria ha de irradiar
en breve sobre los ciudadanos de la gran nación cubana”. pese a indica-
ciones expresas del gobierno militar yanqui, que acto seguido prohibió los
festejos – a contrapelo de lo dispuesto por la misma Junta patriótica que,
intimidada por la prohibición, un día después llamó a la moderación y a
celebrar “individualmente” y “con regocijo tranquilo” –, el primer día de
enero los habaneros abarrotaron espontáneamente las calles, engalanaron
las casas con banderas cubanas y retratos de líderes independentistas, en
celebraciones y bailes “patrióticos” que se extendieron por varios días1.
esteban montejo, ex esclavo de origen rural que llegó a la capital en
los primeros días de 1899 formando parte de un regimiento del ejército
libertador, evocó que hubo fiesta en los barrios más humildes del mu-
elle, los solares “estaban encendidos” y los toques de rumba de cajón y de
tambores se escuchaban por doquier. hombres y mujeres, niños, jóvenes y
viejos bailaban al son de esa música enloquecedora hasta caer desploma-
dos de cansancio2. una conmemoración seria y majestuosa, para la que,
según la letra de la proclama emitida por el gobierno de ocupación, se con-
taba con el “orden y el debido respeto que la solemnidad de las circun-
stancias exigen”, devino orgía de fiestas y manifestaciones de contenido
nacionalista que las autoridades norteamericanas no pudieron contener. la
ceremonia oficial se tornó fiesta popular. los redobles graves e intimidato-
rios de los tambores de la banda militar del ejército norteamericano en la
explanada del morro se vieron emulados por los alegres y rítmicos toques
de los timbales en los arrabales habaneros cercanos al muelle.
las recepciones populares (de discursos, de espectáculos o de gestos
simbólicos) son siempre apropiaciones creativas que transforman, refor-
mulan y exceden lo que reciben “desde arriba”. en consecuencia, los tex-
tos o espectáculos “oficiales” no tienen de por sí una significación estable
y unívoca, siempre son leídos, interpretados de formas móviles, plurales,
1
“a los habitantes de la isla de cuba”, 24 de diciembre de 1898; “al pueblo de la habana”,
31 de diciembre de 1898; “al pueblo de la habana”, 1 de enero 1899, en archivo nacional de
cuba, la habana (anc).
2
miguel Barnet, Biografía de un cimarrón (la habana: academia, 1966), 193-194.
Part III – Conflicting Political Cultures 99
contradictorias por los destinatarios. en este caso, el sentido original de

la ceremonia se descifró de distintas maneras: en términos “patrióticos”
pero prudentes y conciliadores en las circulares de la junta patriótica; y de
forma exaltadamente nacionalista por el pueblo habanero. la formalidad
y la solemnidad de la conmemoración, y con ella el carácter opresivo de su
significación simbólica inicial, se disolvieron en la alegría y el desparpajo
irreverente de las turbas callejeras, expresados en bailes y canciones, con
décimas o guarachas como la que abría y cerraba una popular obra de te-
atro de ese tiempo:
habaneros a gozar:
cesó la dominación,
y el hispano pabellón
a las doce se ha de arriar.
en su lugar subirá
la bandera americana;
pero pronto dejará
ese puesto a la cubana.
¡Habaneros, a gozar!3
1. Choteo y cultura política popular
la relectura trasgresora de la ceremonia es sólo uno de los tantos ejem-

plos de una manifestación que, por su reiteración, puede considerarse co-
mo uno de los ingredientes más relevantes de la cultura política popular en
cuba. por imponente que fuese la formalidad del tono, incluso los conteni-
dos de los discursos políticos oficiales, rara vez la recepción popular de-
jaba de traducirlos en versiones poco serias, despojadas de su connotación
original.
esta persistente actitud fue objeto de frecuentes análisis y críticas a lo
largo de la primera mitad del siglo XX. en un texto pretendidamente et-
nológico publicado en 1907, pero escrito entre 1899 y 1906, a tenor de la
experiencia de las dos intervenciones norteamericanas, el ultraconservador
y anexionista Francisco Figueras se lamentaba de que los nativos de la isla
adolecían de una “falta de veneración por todo lo que tiende a realzar y a
enaltecer la vida, haciéndola más seria y más dignificada”. el cubano “típi-
co”, un ser de raza mezclada, carnes mórbidas, andar cadencioso, alergia al
trabajo duro y apego desmedido al baile y al juego, padecía además de una
“afición exagerada a la risa, la burla y la jarana, hasta hacerla degenerar en
el vituperable choteo”4.
3
ignacio sarachaga, ¡Arriba con el Himno! Revista política, joco-seria y bailable en un acto, cinco
cuadros y apoteosis final (1900); rine leal, ed., Teatro Bufo. Siglo XIX, tomo ii (la habana: arte y
literatura, 1975), 230.
4
Francisco Figueras, Cuba y su evolución colonial (la habana: avisador comercial, 1907), 253.
Según este autor, con ese componente étnico y tales costumbres sólo un
milagro (o, en su defecto, la regeneración mediante el blanqueamiento y el
contacto estrecho con la raza anglosajona) podía hacer de cuba una verdadera
nación, con ciudadanos civilizados. dos décadas más tarde, en 1928, y aunque
desde una perspectiva nacionalista y notablemente menos racista pero igual
de elitista, Jorge mañach expresaría las mismas prevenciones de la falta de
seriedad crónica del cubano. en su opinión, el choteo, conducta patógena de-
venida en institución nacional y síntoma de lo que se dio en llamar “la deca-
dencia cubana”, era responsable, en buena medida, de los tropiezos sufridos
por el proyecto político de la República5. no obstante, pese a toda la irritación
de los voceros intelectuales de la élite y a campañas anti choteo en la prensa,
este fenómeno pervivió formando parte inseparable de la cultura política pop-
ular en la isla. con chistes irreverentes, rimas, guarachas o congas mordaces,
“el vulgo” expresaba su disenso y se mofaba de políticas y políticos.
estudios más recientes han realzado, en cambio, la autonomía y vitalidad
del repertorio de formas de la cultura popular. Valoran altamente el potencial
revolucionario y anti hegemónico de estos modos culturales de expresión,
que se desenvuelven en los márgenes del ámbito de la política institucional-
izada. el poder corrosivo de la risa quebraba la pompa presuntuosa del culto
religioso o del ceremonial estatal y la rigidez de la etiqueta social. el rechazo
plebeyo a la seriedad helada y pétrea que caracteriza a la cultura oficial y
al tono circunspecto y grave de sus discursos, ha sido abordado por mijail
Bajtín en un texto ya antológico dentro de los estudios de la cultura popular.
En su interpretación, la risa forma parte de una cultura pública callejera que
se opone con gestos cómicos, bromas irrespetuosas, canciones y rimas burl-
escas a la cultura dominante y encuentra su expresión más depurada en las
celebraciones del carnaval, espacio donde el orden y las jerarquías sociales
son desafíadas simbólicamente mediante su inversión temporal6.
estos fenómenos relacionados con la “carnavalización” de la vida política y
la descodificación en términos jocosos de los proyectos más serios, a pesar de
la notoria abundancia de sus manifestaciones en cuba, aun están por estudiar
debidamente. si las colecciones de décimas y canciones que han llegado hasta
hoy, o la riqueza del humor popular atesorada en los libretos de las obras de
teatro vernáculo, en la literatura de cordel y la prensa periódica de consumo
masivo, o en la memoria oral, permiten conformar una idea de la vitalidad de
esta cultura, apenas existen investigaciones que documenten, desde el punto
de vista histórico, la recurrencia de estas expresiones y su relevancia para la
comprensión de los patrones de comportamiento político de los cubanos.
la palabra “choteo”, significa en el español coloquial, acción, ademán o palabras con que se
procura poner en ridículo a alguien o algo, chanza, bromas.
5
Ver Jorge Mañach, Indagación del choteo (la habana: libro cubano, 1955).
6
Ver Mijail Bajtín, La cultura popular en la Edad Media y el Renacimiento. El contexto de F. Rabelais
(madrid: alianza, 2002).
en sociedades como la cubana de las postrimerías del siglo XiX, con un

índice de analfabetismo que sobrepasaba el 66 por ciento de la población, es
vital, para el estudio de la cultura política popular, la extensión del análisis
a estas otras formas de expresión, transmitidas oralmente, como las bromas,
la poesía y las canciones, incluso el baile, inscrito en los movimientos sen-
suales del cuerpo. una décima cantada, un chiste que pasa de boca en boca,
o un argumento político convertido en estribillo, y no sólo repetido sino
bailado a ritmo de conga en manifestaciones callejeras, permiten un tipo de
comunicación diferente, que trasciende los límites más estrechos y elitistas
de la escritura formal. estos modos de expresión, reproducidos en espacios
plebeyos, muy distintos de los foros y las tribunas donde se “fabrica” la
política oficial, o de las formas de sociabilidad burguesa de las elites letra-
das y urbanas, documentan mejor la participación de los miles y miles de
personas carentes de instrucción formal, que en los procesos de formación
de la opinión política constituían la mayoría de la población de la época.
el analfabetismo no excluía per se a la mayoría de las personas humildes
de los espacios de difusión de la palabra escrita. a través de los pregones
de los vendedores callejeros de periódicos, la gente común se informaba de
los titulares de las noticias de más relevancia. más tarde, con la ayuda de
parientes y amigos que leían para ellos en espacios informales, reuniones
familiares, encuentros en el mercado, en la barbería, tertulias en clubes y
sociedades de instrucción, o en los mismos lugares de trabajo como las
lecturas colectivas de las tabaquerías, los iletrados participaban en la dis-
cusión de los tópicos de interés.
muchas de estas noticias terminaban traducidas en guarachas o déci-
mas cantadas a viva voz, impresas en hojas sueltas o en el periódico local.
cobraban vida propia y se incorporaban a nuevos circuitos de difusión.
así se formaban cadenas de transmisión oral y, lo más importante, “co-
munidades de interpretación” que a menudo reelaboraban los mensajes
originales, reinterpretados en función de las disímiles experiencias de los
nuevos destinatarios. el principal obstáculo para este tipo de estudios es el
carácter precario y evanescente – para decirlo de algún modo – de las fu-
entes. rescatar del pasado las pocas evidencias escritas que se han conser-
vado de lo que fue una bullente cultura oral y performativa, reconstruir sus
circuitos de producción, circulación y recepción, hilvanar en una trama co-
herente los retazos sobrevivientes de esas formas populares de expresión
política constituye un verdadero reto.
una “arqueología” emprendida para recuperar esas trazas dispersas
hace aflorar parte del acervo de las culturas orales, si bien fragmentario
y de segunda mano, pero relativamente recobrable por el trabajo de ar-
chivo y de interpretación. en el caso del período de la primera intervención
norteamericana en cuba, las imágenes, procedentes de una historia escrita
con documentos oficiales – y mayormente desde la capital, donde la pres-
encia yanqui era en verdad imponente –, que representan una sociedad
norteamericanizada, sometida a la humillación más grosera bajo la bota del

soldado interventor, deben ser contrastadas con las múltiples evidencias
de la existencia paralela de una vasta cultura nacionalista, desbordante de
creatividad popular.
2. Nacionalismo, guerra y memoria
pese a la ausencia de un estado cubano encargado de promover la incul-

cación del nacionalismo, la época se caracterizó por la participación activa
de una influyente élite de intelectuales, que colaborando con las autori-
dades de ocupación o enfrentándolas, auspició el debate público y la so-
cialización de nociones e imágenes de pertenencia nacional. en cuba, como
en tantas otras partes, las experiencias de las revoluciones anticoloniales
constituyeron la fuente principal nutricia de las representaciones, mitos y
símbolos que se integraron en el imaginario de la identidad nacional. las
guerras independentistas contra la metrópoli proporcionaron el repertorio
simbólico: el Himno de Bayamo, la bandera y el escudo de la República en
Armas fueron asumidos como emblemas de la futura república mucho an-
tes de que los sancionara el estado nacional, advenido en 1902.
durante los años de la intervención, y por lo tanto, con anterioridad a
que una historiografía oficial los erigiese en prohombres nacionales o que
el estado republicano los canonizase en bronce y mármol como héroes, las
figuras de carlos manuel de céspedes, ignacio agramonte, José martí,
máximo Gómez, antonio maceo y calixto García fueron reverenciadas
públicamente como los próceres más relevantes de las guerras de indepen-
dencia. las crónicas de los episodios heroicos y las biografías de patriotas
circulaban por doquier, publicadas en la prensa periódica y en la folletería
circulante, o simplificadas en versiones populares, noveletas, cancioneros
con décimas y manuales escolares. mediante fotografías y grabados con las
imágenes de héroes y jefes mambises, himnos y canciones patrióticas, se di-
vulgó y popularizó toda una narrativa y una iconografía sobre los orígenes
fundacionales de la nación. el escudo con la palma, tenida como árbol na-
cional, la bandera con su estrella solitaria, representaciones pictóricas de la
patria, se reprodujeron y circularon también por millares de ejemplares, no
sólo en dibujos, fotografías, membretes y estampillas, sino impresos en un
sinnúmero de objetos de uso diario.
entonces las guerras dejaron de ser una vivencia real y se tornaron un
enorme lieu de mémoire, según el término acuñado por Pierre Nora7. los años
de la intervención fueron testigos de esta vasta tentativa de recuperación
de vivencias pasadas: sustraídas al tiempo, estereotipadas y conveniente-
mente purgadas. las memorias bélicas se convirtieron en textos, emblemas
7
Ver Pierre Nora, “Entre mémoire et histoire. Le problématique des lieux”, en Les Lieux de
mémoire, ed. pierre nora, tomo i (paris: Gallimard, 1997), 23-43.
e imágenes, actualizadas en ceremonias, reedificadas en monumentos y en

el entramado de las calles, inscritas en la topografía de los lugares.
paradójicamente, el acercamiento obligado, inducido por la ocupación
militar, asemejado a las prácticas políticas y culturales norteamericanas,
favoreció en cuba la rápida apropiación de una serie de dispositivos ped-
agógicos que integraban un nacionalismo “modular”, puesto en práctica
en estados unidos para “fabricar” masivamente ciudadanos norteamerica-
nos imbuidos del “espíritu nacional”, a menudo con inmigrantes recientes.
así, en los nuevos textos escolares postcoloniales las biografías de los “pa-
dres fundadores” céspedes, martí y maceo ocuparon el lugar de las de
Washington, Jefferson y lincoln en los ceremoniales al uso en las escuelas
estadounidenses, como los saludos a la bandera y los cantos de himnos pa-
trióticos. Fueron asimilados como componentes indispensables para la for-
mación de sentimientos de pertenencia entre los cubanos de la generación
emergente, en el nuevo sistema de escuelas públicas recién inauguradas
por el gobierno interventor.
este proceso de “invención de la tradición” no fue patrimonio exclusivo
de las élites nacionalistas. La gente común, en su mayoría analfabeta, tam-
bién tomó parte activa. carentes del “capital simbólico” que proporcionan
la instrucción, el prestigio social o la riqueza, y despojados por ello de la
posibilidad de intervenir directamente con la palabra en los foros de la alta
política, o con la escritura en los debates publicísticos, en las nuevas cir-
cunstancias del periodo “entre imperios” miles de cubanos anónimos par-
ticiparon en la construcción simbólica de la nación con gritos, ademanes y
cantos, durante encuentros callejeros, mítines y desfiles. asociaciones de
veteranos, clubes patrióticos, juntas de maestros, asambleas municipales
y periódicos regionales se convirtieron en sitios de creación de memorias
locales, frecuentemente en conflicto o tensión con las narrativas nacionales
producidas desde arriba y desde la capital del país.
3. Las conmemoraciones solemnes y el relajo patriótico
aquel nacionalismo construido sobre la memoria sumamente traumáti-

ca y dolorosa de la guerra, se acompañó de una ardiente retórica sacrificial,
a menudo expresada en clave marcadamente religiosa. el naciente culto
a los mártires de la patria, reproducido en discursos y ceremonias rever-
entes, fue el hilo central de una suerte de “religión civil” al estilo norteam-
ericano8. dotaba a ciertas áreas de la política de un carácter cuasi sagrado
y, por consiguiente, a las acciones de los hombres que la encarnaban con
una aureola de santidad. la sangre profusa de los mártires, vertida en la
lucha por la independencia, asentaba las bases de fundación de la futura
8
Ver Robert N. Bellah, The Broken Covenant. American Civil Religion in Time of Trial (chicago:
university of chicago press, 1992).
República cubana. Un ejemplo de esa imbricación entre lo político y lo re-

ligioso, entre cientos que pueden hallarse en la prensa y las publicaciones
de la época, es la “Plegaria” publicada en el número especial de la revista
habanera Cuba y América dedicado a conmemorar la inauguración de la
República en 1902:
en tus altos designios, dios, has permitido que cuba llegue a ser libre
[…] los que gimieron y lloraron ríen hoy con alborozo. los que murieron
como mártires, abonando con su sangre preciosa el suelo que anhelaron ver
dichoso, tienen ya templos y mármoles que conserven sus nombres a la me-
moria, y las bendiciones de las generaciones que han de venir. ¡has que tanta
sangre derramada, tanto llanto vertido, fructifiquen, y crezca sano y vigoro-
so este pueblo que ahora comienza a ser libre!9
Quizás no haya mejor ejemplo de esta conjugación de lo político y lo re-

ligioso que la muy temprana sacralización de la figura de José martí, deve-
nido santo patrón tutelar de la política en la Isla antes de que la República
se institucionalizara. los episodios de su biografía, narrados en el estilo
ejemplarizante de las “vidas de santos”, culminan con la apoteosis de su
martirologio en dos ríos. así como el sacrificio y la muerte de cristo redi-
men a la humanidad, la muerte sacrificial del “apóstol” redime simbólica-
mente a la nación de sus pecados coloniales instaurando el nacimiento de
una nueva era, moderna y republicana.
habría que preguntarse cómo el carácter solemne y sagrado que re-
viste ese culto a los mártires fundadores, erigido sobre la santa memoria
de las guerras, tan relevante para la construcción del nacionalismo, se con-
juga con la desacralizadora tradición de la burla y la fiesta característica
de la cultura popular. la respuesta más obvia nos remite nuevamente a
las tensiones entre la agenda política nacionalista de las clases dominant-
es y las apropiaciones populares. en la visión prevaleciente en las fuentes
generadas “desde arriba”, la Patria (siempre con mayúscula) es cosa se-
ria y solemne, que exige de vocación sacrificial, actitudes reverenciales y
nunca objeto de chanza o choteo. el respeto incuestionable a los símbolos
sagrados, el reverente culto a la enseña nacional, la veneración a la madre
patria o a los padres Fundadores, que encarnan la esencia misma del ser
nacional, se acompaña de lealtad a quienes detentan el monopolio de su
interpretación.
desde esa óptica deben ser censuradas y reprimidas como sacrílegas las
formas alternativas del nacionalismo popular, que no siempre comparten
el tono grandilocuente y sacrificial de su contraparte de élite y, sobre to-
do, que trastocan ocasiones y mezclan signos provocando la polución del
sentido “oficial”. testigo durante las navidades de 1899 de una de tantas
9
“plegaria”, Cuba y América, 18 de mayo de 1902.
manifestaciones de nacionalismo a escala local, abundantes en los años de

la ocupación, una dama villareña, maría escobar, escribió escandalizada al
general máximo Gómez:
por aquí la gente me parece que se ha vuelto loca pues confunden lo se-
rio con la diversión. En una fiesta de Nochebuena, entre papeles de colores,
latas y niños, sacan el busto de martí, lo colocan en la plaza y luego lo pase-
an por el pueblo entre chiflidos, vivas y cosas propias de esa noche. Todas
cosas muy serias para hacerlas con tanta ligereza y en días que le quitan la
magestad [sic] al acto.
ud. no escapó de la quema y el día 25 lo sacaron en un busto (que de ud.
no tiene más que el nombre) en coche con los de maceo y de martí por las
calles, custodiados por muchachas vestidas de sirenas, hadas y marineras.
Yo me indigno por la profanación y el ridículo que caemos10.
los contornos entre la cuba de la tradición heroica de las guerras, del

martirologio de martí y maceo, y la cuba alegre y liviana de la fiesta ir-
reverente y el choteo, se desdibujan en el curso de la celebración popular.
lejos de entenderse como profanación, la espontaneidad del homenaje a
maceo, Gómez y martí pone en evidencia el alcance y profundidad de la
popularidad de estas figuras, como se ha dicho ya, mucho antes de que el
estado republicano oficializara su inclusión en el panteón nacional.
en similar consideración habría que mencionar los intentos de regular
los usos desordenados del himno de Bayamo. el himno compuesto por
perucho Figueredo en tiempos de la primera guerra de independencia, to-
cado a diferentes tempos y con variaciones en su letra, se había tornado una
melodía extraordinariamente popular y era un componente invariable de
cada celebración, desde las organizadas para conmemorar el 10 de Octubre
o el 24 de Febrero, los “días de la patria”, hasta cuanta fiesta o jolgorio,
boda o bautizo se celebrara en la época. a inicios de 1900, para poner tér-
mino a los usos profanos de la melodía, ya extraoficialmente tenida como
el himno nacional, fue aprobado un acuerdo del ayuntamiento habanero
que la prohibía en “teatros, cafés, procesiones, manifestaciones, etcétera”
y reservaba su ejecución únicamente para “los actos serios”. En la ciudad
de pinar del río el alcalde municipal fue más lejos al exponer in extenso las
razones de la prohibición:
en todos los pueblos cultos los himnos e insignias son los símbolos más
sagrados del patriotismo, y por esta razón sin duda se le tributan a unos y
otras profunda veneración y grandísimo respeto.
en cuba, las explosiones de sentimiento patriótico, durante tanto tiempo
comprimido y refrenado, han hecho que el himno nacional, popular, como
10
maría escobar, carta a máximo Gómez, 29 de diciembre de 1899, fondo máximo Gómez,
legajo 30, n. 4167, anc.
los de igual clase, se generalizare hasta tal punto de tocarse en toda clase de
fiestas y en toda suerte de espectáculos, algunos de ellos poco serios dando
ocasión y motivo a que se haya empleado recientemente la frase “arriba con
el himno” en son de burla o crítica de semejante abuso.
por estas razones la alcaldía municipal de pinar del río ordena lo siguiente:
1. Desde esta fecha no podrá tocarse públicamente el himno nacional,
o sea el de Bayamo, en ningún lugar del término municipal, a no ser en so-
lemnidades oficiales, ceremonias y funciones patrióticas, retretas públicas y
actos de verdadero carácter político.
2. los directores de orquesta que infringieren esta orden y a los que in-
dujeren a desobedecerla indistintamente, incurrirán en la multa de diez pe-
sos de los estados unidos o su equivalente11.
las tentativas de controlar el uso del himno de Bayamo confinándolo

exclusivamente a los espacios oficiales y proscribiendo sus usos profanos,
fueron severamente criticados en La Nación, diario político nacionalista
editado por el general enrique collazo, que salió en defensa de las apro-
piaciones populares del himno patriótico: “el himno bayamés […] es del
pueblo cubano y a nuestro juicio, este tiene el derecho de tararearlo, sil-
barlo, tocarlo y cantarlo como en voluntad le venga, donde quiera y como
quiera. porque eso es popularizarlo y no profanarlo”12.
evidentemente los acuerdos de los ayuntamientos apenas surtieron
efecto. una crónica publicada en la prensa de una boda celebrada en el
mariel en diciembre de 1900 relata cómo al entrar los novios a la iglesia
pudo escucharse el himno de Bayamo acompañando la ceremonia. una
nota de otro ejemplar del mismo periódico al reseñar la asistencia a una re-
unión del partido nacional en caimito, alude a una numerosa muchedum-
bre que marchaba al lugar del meeting acompañada de una “charanga” que
ejecutaba alegremente las notas del himno nacional13. en realidad, como
muestran estos ejemplos escogidos al azar, la apropiación desordenada e
irreverente del himno patriótico continuó teniendo lugar hasta la aproba-
ción, avanzada ya la república, del decreto núm. 154 del 28 de abril de 1906,
que regulaba la forma y el uso oficial del himno, el escudo, la bandera y los
sellos de la nación14.
11
“el himno Bayamés”, El Telégrafo: Periódico Político, 22 de febrero de 1900.
12
La Nación (la habana), 31 de mayo de 1900.
13
El Occidente, Guanajay, 6 de enero de 1901 y 2 de febrero de 1901.
14
“expediente que contiene copias mecanografiadas sobre disposiciones legales sobre el uso
de la bandera, el escudo y el himno nacional”, Fondo donativos y remisiones, leg. 567, n. 22,
anc. pese a este y otros decretos hacia fines de la década del 50 emilio roig de leuchsenring
lamentaba el uso indiscriminado del himno y la bandera nacionales: “de libre uso la bandera,
por todos y para todo, fue empleada por políticos y politicastros y en fiestas de toda índole
para adornar mesas, locales, edificios, etc. lo mismo servía para presidir un acto verdad-
eramente patriótico que un baile familiar terminado a botellazos o una pelea de gallos. […]
El Himno Nacional se convirtió en música obligada de todo acto al que se quería dar cierta
importancia o se pretendía revestirlo de carácter patriótico. con el himno se compusieron y
de este modo la comprensión de una elite para la cual la manera más

“correcta” de expresar la pertenencia a la nación era cantar de forma res-
petuosa himnos de resonancias europeas en el curso de paradas cívicas,
caracterizadas en lo posible por el orden, el respeto y la disciplina, entra en
contradicciones con una cultura plebeya que encontraba en toda ocasión
festiva el pretexto para el choteo, el “meneo de cintura” y la expansión
descontrolada de la sensualidad en el baile popular.
Obviamente, estas imágenes extremas presentadas como antitéticas en
el discurso de elite de la época, de “ciudadanos” que desfilan con compos-
tura y orden por una parte, y por la otra de “salvajes” cuyos cuerpos se
contorsionan febrilmente al son de un tambor, no son más que estereotipos
que pecan de exageración. en el curso real de las celebraciones nacionalis-
tas, en muchas ciudades y pueblos, desfiles patrióticos y bailes populares,
solemnes himnos revolucionarios y sabrosos danzones, y hasta quizás, pese
a las prohibiciones a que fueron sometidos, algunos “toques de tambor”,
se articularon con éxito dentro del esquema o arquetipo de la celebración
nacionalista de los “días de la patria”.
en los ejemplos aludidos esa separación radical entre las diferentes
comprensiones, seria y solemne, o relajada y alegre, sacra o profana del
simbolismo nacional, se desdibuja en la medida en que dejamos atrás el
ámbito discursivo y nos adentramos en el mundo menos retórico y más
performativo de la vida cotidiana. al abandonar el enfoque binario que
impone fronteras rígidas entre lo de arriba y lo de abajo, lo culto y lo popu-
lar, la élite y la plebe, descubrimos espacios difusos, donde un nacional-
ismo probablemente fabricado y difundido por una élite intelectual, vive
en forma de habitus incorporado, pero con significaciones diferentes, en
las prácticas que estructuran la trama de vida de la gente ordinaria. en
su capacidad de desbordar los confines de las interpretaciones solemnes
y oficiales y de trascender, si bien de forma confusa, las prácticas de la
gente común, reside la vitalidad y el arraigo, y sobre todo, el extraordinario
poder de convocatoria de estas formas de nacionalismo popular, que flore-
cieron por doquier en tiempos de la ocupación militar norteamericana.
en el imaginario de la gente humilde de aquellos años, el José martí
solemne y oficial (con la seriedad helada y pétrea categorizada por Bajtín),
el de los bustos y estatuas en los espacios públicos, convivía amigablemente
con un apóstol familiar, más íntimo, una suerte de santo popular casero,
cuyo retrato, al lado de las fotografías de los parientes muertos y del católi-
co Sagrado Corazón de Jesús, presidía los altares domésticos. Convertida
en emblema de la cubanidad, la figura de martí no solo era invocada en los
discursos solemnes de los aniversarios de su natalicio o muerte, sino en las
ejecutaron toda clase de piezas bailables y música anunciadora de productos comerciales e in-
dustriales”. emilio roig de leuchsenring, “por el respeto y justo uso de la bandera, el escudo
y el himno nacionales”, Fondo donativos y remisiones, leg. 567, n. 22, anc.
sesiones de espiritismo de cordón celebradas en los barrios humildes, can-

tada en décimas y guarachas, impresa en tapas de almanaques, botones de
solapa, broches y alfileres de corbata.
los símbolos de la patria, el himno, la bandera, el panteón de héroes
nacidos del imaginario heroico de las guerras de independencia, terminan
incorporados a la domesticidad e incluso convertidos en cosas de uso co-
tidiano. de esta forma, encarnados en objetos con fines corrientes, los tópi-
cos de las narrativas nacionalistas dejan de ser patrimonio de una minoría
letrada para ser parte de la esfera pública e invadir los resquicios de la vida
diaria. impresos en etiquetas de productos, bordados en ropas, pañuelos
y cintas, grabados en platos, ceniceros, hebillas, botones y broches, esos
“símbolos de la patria” recorren los circuitos del tráfico mercantil y en ese
peregrinaje incorporan significaciones profanas.
lo mismo en su variante sagrada que en sus versiones profanas, las ex-
periencias y memorias de las contiendas independentistas, con sus narra-
ciones épicas, su música y su iconografía patriótica, durante los años del
“entre imperios” se transformaron en el capital simbólico fundamental
para la construcción de la identidad nacional frente a la presencia amenaz-
ante del “otro” encarnado en el gobierno de la ocupación norteamericana.
después de 1902 las elites políticas, ya con el control del estado, in-
tentaron monopolizar los procesos de constitución y reproducción de la
memoria independentista “oficializando” los atributos nacionales, insti-
tucionalizando los rituales patrióticos y el calendario festivo, tratando de
uniformar en un guión único los múltiples y heterogéneos discursos sobre
la nación. el estado tomaría a su cargo la organización de las conmemora-
ciones y homenajes nacionales, sufragaría la construcción de monumentos,
regularía los cambios de nombres de calles y localidades, financiaría la fun-
dación de los museos y memoriales.
no obstante, en el interregno entre el fin de la dominación española y
la creación del estado nacional, la construcción de la identidad nacional y
los procesos de institucionalización de la memoria patriótica tuvieron una
amplia base popular. miles de personas, la mayoría de ellas iletradas, par-
ticiparon activamente en el debate y las luchas por la construcción sim-
bólica de la nación, la representación ciudadana y la institucionalización de
la memoria patriótica. en los espacios profanos de la vida cotidiana, tras la
aparente promiscuidad con que coexistían fiestas patrióticas con danzones
y/o toques de tambor, y solemnes mítines revolucionarios; se entablaron
enconadas luchas en el terreno de la conquista de la hegemonía política,
por la definición de los contornos de la nación y los límites de la ciudada-
nía, que pavimentaron el camino hacia la construcción del nuevo estado
republicano en el siglo XX.
A. Lorini
Chapter 7
Revering and Contesting Machado in the
Shadow of the Platt Amendment: Cuban
Nationalism and Anti-Imperialism in the 1920s
On 10 October 1928, the Cuban magazine La Epoca, a “diario machadista”,

dedicated a special issue to an epochal election: “machado, the national
presidential candidate”. towering amid its illustrated cover is a photo-
graphic cutout of a standing Gerardo machado, his hands in his pockets.
in this picture, the smiling and paternal figure of machado is placed at the
center of an allegorically resurrected cuba, represented as a female figure
wearing a phrygian cap and holding a laurel branch. Behind machado are
symbolic figures representing “labor” and “patriotism” to hail an extraor-
dinary event: a constitutional change that would make the three political
parties converge on one candidate, extending the presidential term from
four to six years and eliminating any form of constitutional opposition.
according to the editor of La Epoca, that special issue was an homage to
“the great man” who would be made president by “national acclamation”.
By alternating a photo gallery of machado’s aides with laudatory articles
on their undertakings, this document offers a good example of the main
components of what can be called “monumental nationalism”. it is the
conservative reinterpretation of the goals of the nineteenth-century “cuba
libre” movement against spanish colonialism, through a rhetorical tribute
to its heroes – generals, doctors and businessmen; at the same time, cuba’s
ambiguous dependence on the united states under the platt amendment
was left in the background and basically kept unchanged1.
1
La Epoca – Edición Extraordinaria Ilustrada, 10 de Octubre de 1928. the us military occupa-
tion of Cuba ended in 1902 with the Platt Amendment – named after the US senator Orville
platt – included in the cuban constitution. the amendment, which preserved the appearance
of cuban independence and granted self-government, blocked, in reality, any possibility of
cuban self-determination by giving the united states the right to intervene in the island’s
internal affairs to preserve cuban independence and protect “life, property, and individual
liberty”. us military interventions occurred in 1906-1909, 1912 and 1917-1922. see: david F.
in this photographic gallery, machado’s men and women are portrayed

working in their modern offices and divided according to their institutional
roles. images of celebrated cuban intellectuals followed those of president
machado receiving various tributes and honors, in addition to celebra-
tory biographical articles by established politicians, generals and doctors.
recurrent photos and articles related to the life and deeds of doctor carlos
miguel de céspedes, the minister of public works in machado’s cabinet, re-
vealed the importance given to what were considered the greatest accom-
plishments of the machado presidency. indeed, céspedes was in charge of
building havana’s capitol – taking the Washington capitol as a model – the
central highway and the havana park and plaza dedicated to the victims
of the Maine2. portrayed as “constructive cubanism”, symbolic acts such
as machado’s ceremonial inaugurations of villages, kindergartens, schools
and hospitals, all named after him, showed a type of populism similar to
that seen in public ceremonies celebrated by european fascist regimes. La
Epoca celebrated former officers of the cuban liberation army who had
by then become successful industrialists, as well as american men like
colonel John W. caldwell, “yesterday’s liberator, and today’s man of iron
will and incomparable actions” and the administrator of a large sugar fac-
tory. economic prosperity meant successful patriotism: the rise of talented
cuban businessmen, like the owners of the largest beer company that pro-
duced “polar” and “trimalta” beer, were defined as symbols of national
pride. similar examples included the “cerveza hatuey” – a beer named
after the native chief burned alive by spanish conquerors in 1512 – and the
Bacardi rum owned by don emilio and don Facundo Bacardi, who were
portrayed as “illustrious figures of cuban republican honor”.
in the cuban republic, the phenomenon of caudillismo feared by José
martí reached unprecedented levels during the machado regime3. as La
Epoca showed, machado became the object of a real personality cult and
continuous tributes that were completely disconnected from his real mer-
its. not only did he receive a laurea ad honorem, but he was also called “the
country’s savior” and “cuba’s First Worker”. as the last cuban president
who could claim to be a veteran of the liberation army, machado’s so-
cial origins were humbler than those of his predecessors. he came from a
healy, The United States in Cuba, 1898-1902: Generals, Politicians, and the Search for Policy (madi-
son: Wisconsin university press, 1963); louis a. pérez, Cuba under the Platt Amendment 1902-
1934 (Pittsburgh: University of Pittsburgh Press, 1986). On the origins of the special relation-
ship between cuba and the us see: alessandra lorini, L’impero della libertà e l’isola strategica.
Gli Stati Uniti e Cuba tra Otto e Novecento (napoli: liguori, 2008).
2
On construction and dedication ceremonies of those magnificent public works see: Emete-
rio s. santovenia, Memorial Book of the Inauguration of the Maine Plaza at Havana (la habana:
Secretáría de Obras Publicas, 1928).
3
José martí, “letter to General maximo Gómez”, in José Martí: Selected Writings, ed. esther
allen (new York: penguin, 2002), 258-259.
family of cattle robbers, became a butcher in santa clara, was recruited by

the rebel forces of the independence war, promoted to commanding offi-
cer and then turned to politics. as a member of the liberal party, machado
enjoyed the benefits of the cuban republic’s corrupt political system dur-
ing the platt amendment era. thanks to his political connections, he be-
came a successful businessman, taking over both an electric company in
santa clara as well as a sugar factory. in the early 1920s, he became the
director of the powerful and us-backed Compañía Cubana de Electricidad.
his presidential campaign received the strong endorsement of the us busi-
ness community. in the midst of the worst economic crisis, machado em-
barked on a huge public-works program, which temporarily relieved mass
unemployment at a time when no sugar cane could be cut. he also success-
fully promoted tourism from the us during the prohibition era. thousands
of americans visited cuba enchanted by its exotic beaches and its legal
drinking, unaware of the growing social conflicts that were being brutally
repressed by machado’s police4.
“machado: the tropical mussolini” was the title of an article published
by cuban student leader Julio antonio mella in 1925, shortly after liberal
party candidate machado had become the president of the cuban republic.
according to mella, machado was “a tyrant and an unscrupulous crook”
who, like the italian fascist generals participating in the march for the con-
quest of rome in 1922, would go liberally “beyond constitutional power”.
unjustly accused and arrested for terrorism, mella went on a hunger strike
in 1925. two years later he was forced to leave cuba and become an exile
in mexico where he was assassinated in 1929, quite likely on machado’s
orders. By that time, the number of cuban journalists, labor organizers and
students who had disappeared and later whose dead bodies were found
after being tortured and killed by the “porra” – machado’s special police
or, better, “death squad” – and the collapse of the cuban economy pro-
voked many protests and strikes that threatened american economic in-
terests and properties in cuba5. us official policy towards cuba, however,
did not change until the machado regime collapsed in 1933 and the us, un-
der F.d. roosevelt’s newly edited “Good neighbor policy” towards latin
america, redefined its political intents and commitments towards cuba.
4
On US tourists in Cuba in the early 1920s see: Louis A. Pérez, On Becoming Cuban: Identity,
nationality and Culture (New York: Harper Collins, 1999), 167-179. On Cuban social move-
ments and repression in that period see: amparo sánchez cobos, Sembrando Ideales. Anar-
quistas españoles en Cuba (1902-1925) (sevilla: csic, 2008), 379-391; hugh thomas, Cuba: The
Pursuit of Freedom (new York: da capo, 1998), 569-614; Francisca lópez civeira, Cuba entre
Reforma y Revolución 1925-1935 (La Habana: Félix Varela, 2007), 31-52.
5
Julio antonio mella, Documentos y articúlos (la habana: ciencias sociales, 1975), 169-70;
thomas, Cuba, 588. machado’s last days in cuba are described in r. hart phillips, Cuba: Island
of Paradox (New York: McDowell, Obolensky, 1959), 38-43 and 46-50; Philip Dur and Chris-
topher Gilcrease, “us diplomacy and the downfall of a cuban dictator: machado in 1933”,
Journal of Latin American Studies 2 (2002), 255-282.
as historian louis a. pérez has convincingly argued, it was the end of

the “platt amendment” era, whose shadow had penetrated every politi-
cal, economic, social and cultural level of the first cuban republic that had
been born in 19026.
the anti-machado movement was made up of various components from
all social classes and used every form of opposition, from democratic criti-
cism to terrorist action. But did machado in fact lean towards fascism? he
publicly admitted to an admiration for mussolini and the way the italian
duce handled his legal opposition and the free press. though never admit-
ting to it publicly, machado, like mussolini, also used the practice of or-
dering the individual assassination of his opponents. Yet machado’s public
image was construed as that of a patriot whose mission was to act as an ex-
ample for all latin american countries to follow. he claimed to be the heir
of José martí and portrayed himself as a man sent by providence with the
mission of regenerating the cuban republic, as he stated in a public speech
in 19267.
1. The Image of Machado as a Pro-Black, Pro-Women and Anti-Platt

Amendment President
machado’s speeches often included an appeal to racial fraternity, based

on the historical image of racial unity during the cuban wars of indepen-
dence8. he also signed a law that turned the 7th of december 1896, the day
famous mulatto general antonio maceo had died, into a national holiday.
in fact, the number of black men in the army and other important political
bodies did increase during his presidency. although the number of blacks
within power structures was still rather insignificant, it was visible enough
to make a contemporary american political analyst assert that the “process
of re-conquering the negro elector […] was not attained until machado’s
regime”9. machado’s public image as a pro-black president was also sanc-
tioned by a formal tribute paid to him by elite societies of blacks in 1928.
presented as a demonstration of gratitude by the entire “colored race” for
6
pérez, Cuba under the Platt Amendment.
7
machado claimed to be an optimist, but not a dreamer. his life exemplified this assertion:
“i was a farmer, then a trader, and later an industrialist. i faced all sorts of difficulties, fought
all sorts of battles, and i can say with satisfaction that i always made progress”. he wanted
cuba to follow the pattern of his life. he claimed to be “a modest soldier who took the task of
completing martí’s ideal of republic for and with all”, as he said in a another speech. see: Por la
Patria libre. Discursos pronunciados por el General Gerardo Machado y Morales… Junio de 1926 (la
Habana: Verdugo, 1926), 16, 27 and 30.
8
On the importance of this historical image in the making of Cuban national identity see:
ada Ferrer, Insurgent Cuba: Race, Nation, and Revolution,1868-1898 (chapel hill: north caro-
lina university press, 1999).
9
Quoted in alejandro de la Fuente, A Nation for All. Race, Inequality and Politics in Twentieth-
Century Cuba (chapel hill: north carolina university press, 2001), 92.
the appointment of several men of color to government positions, the hom-

age was a splendid gesture organized by black politicians such as martín
Morúa Delgado and other eminent black professionals. Yet black politi-
cians and the black professional class were in fact the only beneficiaries
of those policies, and all these men (just men, women were not included)
were members of the most exclusive of these societies: the club atenas.
it was the vice-president of this club who acted as the keynote speaker
at the magnificent banquet held for machado. according to La Epoca, the
tribute was a great success. On 5 September 1928, representatives of 186
black societies from different parts of the island joined the club atenas at
the havana national theater to pay tribute to the president. machado at-
tended with his entire cabinet, several provincial governors, the chief of
the army, the mayor of havana, the president of the house and other gov-
ernment officials. Black musicians performed a classical opera to show the
success of the cuban raza de color in the “conquest of civilization”, as the
keynote speaker put it. From the days of slavery to progressive uplift in
the new cuban republic, the speaker eloquently recast the history of the
raza de color in cuba according to the principles of martí by which a cuban
was more than white, black or mulatto, as the participation of blacks in the
independence wars had shown. however, while black professionals, intel-
lectuals and government employees paid tribute to the president through
the exclusive club atenas, most black cuban workers found it problematic
to survive in an economy that was on the edge of a severe depression and
would affect workers of all colors. after the fall of the machado regime and
the subsequent dramatic social crisis that has been called the “revolution
of 1933”, the memory of the public homage paid to machado in 1928 by
the club atenas and other societies of black professionals was used pub-
licly to show that all “blacks” had supported the machado regime. But
working-class blacks, in general, had joined cross-racial labor unions, and
young black intellectuals had criticized the conservative and pretentious
leadership of societies like the club atenas, given their intimate links with
machado10.
at a ceremonial level, machado’s rhetoric of social harmony included
women as well. in 1925, a freshly elected machado participated in the open-
ing ceremony of the second congress of cuban women and promised that
his government would be committed to supporting a project of law to give
women voting rights and would cooperate with them in the accomplish-
ment of specifically feminine functions like charity work. echoing martí’s
words, he declared finally that his party aimed at “making patria great and
happy, with all and for all”11.
10
de la Fuente, A Nation for All, 200-201. the origins of the tensions among cuban leaders of
color are explored in this volume in the essay by loredana Giolitto.
11
“discurso pronunciado por el General machado president electo de la republica, en la ses-
at the cuban women’s conference of 1925, important conflicts and frac-

tures between conservative and radical feminists emerged concerning fam-
ily, religion and related moral issues. in the following years, these conflicts
reached political ground and women divided into groups for and against
the machado regime. By 1928, the political and often physical repression ex-
erted upon machado’s opponents had revealed the real face of his regime.
insurgent students, intellectuals, peasants and unionized workers were ar-
rested and put into jail without trial. political kidnappings and murders
became rather common. While lawyer Ofelia Domínguez Navarro was the
most active participant in the anti-machado mobilization to free student
leader Julio antonio mella from jail, maria collado was, on the other side,
the most eminent conservative feminist to actively support the machado
regime. the latter strongly believed that machado’s promise to grant wom-
en voting rights and participation in political life, once fulfilled, would
end all forms of corruption and repression in the country. she represented
those cuban feminists who were proud to belong to the upper classes and
enjoyed making their wealth conspicuous12.
this break within the cuban women’s movement occurred at a time when
violent means of repression were practiced daily and the dictator skillfully
used his promise to give women the right to vote as evidence of his demo-
cratic faith13. By 1930, because of this conflict among cuban women, tensions
had also grown within the Women’s inter-american commission chaired by
american feminist doris stevens, who exchanged letters of clarification with
Cuban activist Ofelia Domínguez Navarro. Stevens, taking the victory of
women’s suffrage in the us as an example to be exported to other american
countries, criticized those cuban women who were turning down the op-
portunity of gaining the vote because it was being offered by a government
with which they disagreed. navarro replied flatly that in cuba, it was not
just a question of women’s rights, it was the notion of right in itself that was
at stake: democracy was dying in cuba14. On the other side was conservative
nationalist maria collado, who stayed loyal to the president because of the
promise of women’s suffrage and the abolition of the platt amendment that
sion solenne de aperture del segundo congreso nacional de mujeres […]”, in Memoria del
Segundo Congreso Nacional de Mujeres… Abril 12-18 1925 (la habana: la universal, 1927).
12
Ofelia Domínguez Navarro, 50 anos de una vida (la habana: instituto cubano del libro,
1971), 83-85. in 1920, collado played a leading role in the club Feminino. it was her un-
questioning support of machado that made her break with those feminists involved in the
anti-dictator protests. radicals like navarro, instead, believed in structural changes and the
redistribution of wealth with no distinction made for race, gender and class. see: K. lynn
stoner, From the House to the Streets: The Cuban Woman’s Movement for Legal Reform, 1898-1940
(durham, nc: duke university press, 1991).
13
By 1928, the question of women’s suffrage on machado’s agenda had become a means to
distract public opinion from the authoritarian intent behind his project of constitutional re-
form. see: navarro, 50 años de una vida, 107-108.
14
ibid., 232-237.
he had made in 192515. she was convinced that all women had to stay united
in one movement and keep women’s issues on their agenda without getting
involved in class and racial conflicts, and blamed the break within the fem-
inist movement on those radical and social feminists who joined the anti-
machado protests. according to collado, suffrage was the main instrument
with which to reform society by raising the power of upper-class women,
substantially improving their charity work and therefore helping less privi-
leged women, that is, women of color. it was on this platform that collado
founded the suffrage democratic party, an association that she always kept
on machado’s side, first as a tactical alliance and later as political complicity.
2. Progressive Nationalism and Anti-Imperialism in the Anti-

Machado Movement
in her memoirs, cuban feminist journalist and art critic loló de la

torriente portrayed the 1920s as a crucial decade of cuban history and cul-
ture. the growth of organized social movements of students, workers and
women, all ferociously repressed by machado, unleashed an extraordinary
creativity that shaped all kinds of artistic forms and lifestyles. in torriente’s
view, the island’s vibrant artistic and cultural life was inseparable from po-
litical opposition to corrupt cuban governments and the platt amendment16.
in the 1920s, in fact, many cuban intellectuals began formulating a profound
criticism of the economic and social conditions of their country by using the
category of anti-imperialism in their search for a strong cuban cultural iden-
tity. By the beginning of the decade, several groups in cuban society had
already contested us cultural hegemony: from national businessmen who
asked the government to protect their interests, to workers employed by for-
eign firms fighting for better living conditions, to nationalist progressive in-
tellectuals who despised the growing americanization of cuban culture17.
in his memoirs, black cuban poet nicolás Guillén recalls the early years
of the republic when many people would comment naïvely: “Good heavens,
what would the Americans say!” Then he reflected upon the almost sacral
meaning that the yanqui presence and the platt amendment held for many
cubans. it seemed as if one needed to watch one’s steps to avoid us military
15
a conservative nationalist, collado’s feminine ideal was the mambisa, the loyal wife and
mother of cuban patriots. collado strongly believed that the vote would have given women
the power to eliminate political corruption and therefore rescue a collapsing republic. see:
stoner, From the House to the Streets, 102-105.
16
loló de la torriente, Testimonio desde adentro (la habana: letras cubanas, 1984), 158-163.
17
many social critics and activists looked at the mexican revolution (1910-1917) as the first
latin american upheaval from which a genuinely anti-imperialist political culture emerged.
On the roots of Latin-American anti-Americanism see: Mary Louise Pratt, “Back Yard with
Views”, Anti-Americanism, eds. andrew ross and Kristin ross (new York: new York univer-
sity press, 2004), 32-46.
intervention. Guillén recalled that there were also those who, less naively,
would say “Hah! They’ll intervene? You mean they’re not already here?”18.
anti-imperialist analyses produced by nationalist cuban intellectuals
in the 1920s depicted a positive image of a nation in flux, of an unfulfilled
ideal of independence and freedom to which all institutions needed to ap-
proximate. progressive nationalists of the 1920s defined a common culture
in which racial differences dissolved. they claimed that skin color did not
count, but cultural differences did.
in 1923, historian roig de leuchsenring held a conference that later be-
came the basis for a book entitled Cuba Does Not Owe Its Independence to the
United States. in the same year, charismatic student leader Julio antonio mella
– the one who defined machado as the “tropical mussolini” – published a
pamphlet entitled Cuba: A Country that Has Never Been Free, and social scien-
tist Fernando Ortiz founded the Cuban Association for National Renovation.
Ortiz wrote a “Manifesto to the Cubans” in which he made a strong call for
an active participation of the civil society to counteract cuba’s degraded po-
litical system. Acting as a public intellectual, Ortiz hoped to stimulate “a new
civic spirit able to rekindle, as a purifying fire, the energy of the cuban people
[…] to give cuba a truly free and democratic government that only a vig-
orous national civilization and an honest political life could defend” 19. he
wanted to recast the relationship between the cuban and us governments,
which he believed should be based on mutual respect. However, Ortiz main-
tained that the cuban people at large were too passive and needed to believe
again in the importance of a solidly national culture. in a book entitled The
Cuban Decadence (1924), Ortiz became even more radical in criticizing what
he thought had contributed to the intellectual, moral and economic decay of
cuban society. the economic data spoke for itself: two thirds of the sugar in-
dustry was in north american hands, and mines, railways, telephones and
banks were controlled by US capital too. At a political level, Ortiz stressed
the alarming problem that more than twenty percent of the political candi-
dates who had run in the last elections had criminal records. even police
corps hosted criminals. Ortiz’s conclusion was tragic: “Cuban society is dis-
integrating. cuba is rapidly precipitating into the abyss of barbarism”. he
advocated, accordingly, “a crusade of patriotic renewal and the completion
of the old revolutionary program of cuba libre” as a means to resurrect a
cuban culture based on ethical and moral principles of responsible citizen-
ship. cuban decadence also meant a dramatic collapse of social conditions.
When compared with the early years of the republic, the collapse of cuban
18
nicolás Guillén, “drums in my eyes”, in The Cuba Reader: History, Culture, Politics, eds.
aviva chomsky, Barry carr, pamela m. smorkaloff (durham, nc: duke university press,
2003), 208-210.
19
“manifiesto a los cubanos”, in Documentos para la historia de Cuba, vol. 3, ed. hortensia pich-
ardo (la habana: ciencias sociales, 1973), 140.
culture in the early 1920s – a period of economic internationalization, diffu-

sion of scientific ideas and rapid development of communications – was, in-
deed, critical. there could be no “intellectual aristocracy” in a country where
fifty-three people out of a hundred were illiterate. The data upon which Ortiz
based his analysis was alarming: sixty-eight percent of children did not go
to school, and public schools did not exist in rural areas. compared to 1907,
the percentage of illiterate adolescents at the beginning of the 1920s had in-
creased exponentially among both whites and blacks. While in 1900, sixteen
percent of the cuban population was enrolled in some sort of school – data
that placed cuba at the same level as norway, France and australia – in 1923,
school registration had dropped to a mere nine percent20.
Initially, progressive nationalist social critics like Fernando Ortiz and
emilio roig de leuchsenring had viewed machado as a symbol of “regen-
eration of the cuban republic” and supported his election in 1924. as the
presidential candidate of the liberal party and the last cuban president to
be a veteran of an independence war, machado had promised to end politi-
cal corruption, stimulate economic growth, launch an extensive program of
public works, build new schools and social services and, most importantly,
greatly reduce us control of the cuban economy by encouraging economic
diversification and the growth of cuban companies. Furthermore, he prom-
ised to abolish the platt amendment and re-negotiate a new treaty with the
united states. machado attracted cuban nationalists with his slogan “cuba
to cubans”. By 1928, however, it had become quite clear that machado could
not change the condition of cuba as a dependent neo-colony. the search of
progressive nationalists for a cuban sovereignty converged on a rejection of
the platt amendment and us economic and political control of the island.
according to historians like roig, fresh from a reading of martí’s writings
on the united states that had only recently become available to cuban schol-
ars for the first time, a distinction needed to be made between the honest
will of the american people to free cuba from spanish colonialism, on the
one hand, and the mcKinley administration that had turned that will into
neo-colonial control, on the other. it was shameful, they argued, that cuban
speakers kept saying in public ceremonies that cuba had a debt of grati-
tude to the united states. roig held that, rather than a debt of gratitude, it
was a “permanent debt that we will always have to pay”. By reinterpreting
martí’s warnings in his aforementioned book, he explicitly defined the 1898
us military intervention in cuba as a plan designed to block actual cuban
independence and prevent the development of a truly national sovereignty21.
20
See: Carmen Almodóvar, “The Political Ideas of Fernando Ortiz (1906-1933)”, in Cuban
Counterpoints: The Legacy of Fernando Ortiz, eds. mauricio a. Font and alfonso W. Quiroz (to-
ronto: lexington, 2005), 92-93.
21
roig de leuchsenring, Cuba no debe su independencia a los Estados Unidos (la habana: soci-
etad cubana de estudios historicos y internacionales, 1950).
how was it that cuban nationalist progressive intellectuals reached

this conclusion? it can be argued that a major role was played by a turn-
ing-point event that took place in havana in 1928: the sixth pan-american
conference. this event radicalized their analyses of the relationship be-
tween the us and cuba.
3. Redefining Dependence and Anti-Imperialism: the Havana Pan-

American Conference of 1928
in 1927, machado had traveled to the us to personally invite president

calvin coolidge to open the sixth pan-american conference that was to be
held in havana in January 1928. coolidge’s acceptance would make him the
first us president to travel abroad to inaugurate a pan-american conference.
From mexico, Julio antonio mella saw this as a warning signal that the con-
ference could be an “ambush” on latin american countries and its agenda
dictated by the us state department. he predicted that the question of non-
intervention, which both the dominican and mexican conference delegates
were keen to discuss, would be excluded from debate22. he was right.
the cuban press and illustrated magazines gave wide coverage to the
conference’s preparation and the fact that american countries, including
the us, had chosen havana as its site. this was hailed as a great achieve-
ment of cuban international prestige. the cover of the illustrated magazine
Carteles of 8 January 1928 features a drawn caricature of a smirking president
coolidge – a notorious prohibitionist – lifting a glass of a “forbidden” cock-
tail. the editorial board of Carteles, which included writer alejo carpentier
and historian roig de leuchsenring, welcomed the conference as an excellent
opportunity for the Panamericanismo verdadero to triumph. they thought that
such authentic pan-americanism was quite distinct from the current version
they called “enraged”, which had already proclaimed the failure of the up-
coming conference for not questioning the so-called monroe doctrine as well
as uncle sam’s imperialist cravings. in an article in Carteles, roig wrote that
he expected the conference would discuss and eventually resolve such open
problems as us intervention in nicaragua, haiti and the independence of
puerto rico, and he explored the continuity between the first pan-american
congress celebrated in panama in 1826 and the forthcoming conference in
havana of January 1928. he found an extremely enlightening interpretation
in simon Bolivar’s ideas of pan-hispanoamericanism, upon which José martí
elaborated in 1891 in his most famous essay Our America. Far from signaling
the end of a friendship between anglo-saxon and hispanic americas, roig
argued that this version of hemispheric unity stood for the freedom, sover-
eignty and integrity of each nation23.
22
mella, Documentos y articúlos, 329.
23
roig de leuchsenring, “la transcendental importancia de la conferencia panamericana”,
hopes were indeed high. the magnificent public works accomplished

by minister céspedes, which included the park and plaza surround-
ing the monument to the victims of the Maine, created a marvelous con-
text for the inauguration ceremony that received full coverage in both the
cuban and the american press. that conference, however, buried the idea
of pan-americanism as a pact among equal nations. and this was clear
from the beginning, according to english writer lady Grace drummund-
hay who visited havana during the conference as a correspondent for the
london magazine The Sphere. in an article entitled “pan-americanism – the
significance of the recent congress at havana”, she captured those critical
issues that undermined any existing idea of pan-americanism. First, lady
drummond pointed out that cultural contact between north american and
southern nations was rare. secondly, she keenly remarked americans did
not understand cuban sensibility and easily offended the cuban sense of
respect. For example, she noticed that during the inauguration ceremony of
the havana conference the officers of the us navy accompanying president
Coolidge wore their white “tropical” uniforms. Obviously familiar with
the rituals of the British empire, she found that completely inappropriate
for such a formal and splendid celebratory event. she was also convinced
that cubans clearly perceived their white uniforms as a colonial message.
if cuba were not a colony of the us, then why would the soldiers wear
“colonial” uniforms instead of their full regalia? another source of misun-
derstanding and cause of resentment for latin americans was the united
states’ habit of calling itself “america”, as if by monopolizing the word they
pretended to own the entire continent. adding a British touch to her crit-
icism, she remarked that many latin americans found those whom they
called “Yankees” to be rude, uncultivated and lacking courtesy and refine-
ment. shifting then from cultural to political misunderstandings, lady
drummond disagreed with the enthusiastic reports of president coolidge’s
speech that were circulating in the us press. the emotions and tears that
american correspondents saw on cuban faces during coolidge’s speech,
far from expressions of a permanent feeling of gratitude towards the us for
having given cuba freedom and independence, revealed instead a profound-
ly wounded cuban pride. cubans could accept that the united states had
helped them gain these victories but not that the americans had given them
freedom and independence. she also found coolidge’s speech to be totally
inadequate for dissipating latin american doubts about “Yankee imperial-
ism” and rather unclear about future us policy towards small countries. all
things considered, the conference was a failure in lady drummond’s view
as it simply showed just how much north american interests prevailed: of
sixty-six accredited journalists, forty-four were from the united states, five
and “¿responden las conferencias panamericanas a los ideales de Bolivar?”, Carteles, 8 Janu-
ary 1928, 13 and 22 respectively.
were from mexico and only nine were from europe. Furthermore, the con-
ference did not represent “america as a whole” since canadians and British,
French and danish West indians did not participate. she concluded that us
supremacy was simply too much in evidence. not only did the us delega-
tion represent a country of 120 million people against the less than ninety
million of all latin american countries, but the strength of its economy, its
indisputable political power, its expansionism and the monroe doctrine
all turned the pan-american conference into a us hegemonic instrument.
By referring to “interposition” instead of “intervention”, the whole issue
of non-interference was not even debated. moreover, the us military inter-
vention in nicaragua, which most latin american countries opposed, was
forbidden from being discussed because of a us veto24.
What cuban progressive nationalists like roig abhorred was the po-
sition that Orestes Ferrara, the Cuban ambassador to the US at the time,
held on the issue of non-intervention at the conference: “We cannot join the
non-intervention chorus as in my country the word intervention has been a
word of Glory and a word of triumph: it has meant independence”. With a
series of articles in Carteles, roig contested Ferrara’s speech as instrumental
in erasing the crucial issue of non-intervention from the conference debate25.
he firmly contested Ferrara’s argument that us intervention in cuba had
been a purely humanitarian mission, which implied that the cuban repub-
lic was not the result of the cuba libre struggle but a gift from the united
states. in roig’s view, the us had intervened several times in cuba under
the platt amendment in order to stop healthy forms of popular rebellion
against political corruption and economic dependency, or to keep presi-
dents in power who had not been freely elected by the cuban people.
In 1930, Orestes Ferrara, by then Machado’s Secretary of State, pub-
lished a pamphlet on pan-americanism (El Panamericanismo y la opinion eu-
ropea) that covered the sort of criticism he had received in 1928, without
naming his detractors26.
Ferrara was a very close friend and supporter of machado who had ar-
rived in cuba in 1896 as a young neapolitan law student ready to join the
movement of cuba libre, as many italian republicans and socialists did27.
courageous and brave, Ferrara became the assistant of the commander-in-
24
lady drummund-hay, “pan-americanism – the significance of the recent congress at ha-
vana”, Carteles, 1 april 1928.
25
roig de leuchsenring, “cuba y el principio de la non intervención”, Carteles, 19 Febrero
1928; “un fracas possible y un triumfo efectivo de la conferencia”, Carteles, 26 Febrero 1928;
“resultados y enseñanza de la conferencia”, Carteles, 4 marzo 1928. each article explored a
period of the cuban struggle for independence to show that in cuba the word intervention,
far from being glorious, meant “pain, sadness, evil and rebellion”. (19 Febrero 1928).
26
Orestes Ferrara, El panamericanismo y la opinión europea (paris: le livre libre, 1930).
27
see: alessandra lorini, “atlantic crossings: race, nation, and late nineteenth-century
Cuba Libre between italy and the united states”, in The Place of Europe in American History:
Twentieth-Century Perspectives, ed. Maurizio Vaudagna (Torino: Otto, 2007), 341-369.
chief General maximo Gómez and established connections with the italian
community in new York in order to raise funds for cuba libre. Following
cuban independence, Ferrara collaborated with the us military government,
went back to italy, used his transnational connections to gain political power
in the new cuban republic and built a fortune in the cuban sugar industry.
Besides being one of the most powerful members of the cuban liberal party,
Ferrara was also a sophisticated scholar who could write on machiavelli and
the Borgias, a journalist, a cuban ambassador to the us, and the secretary
of state under machado from 1930 to 1933. a shrewd politician, Ferrara had
both connections with the italian fascist regime28 and important acquaintanc-
es in Washington. a “man for all seasons”, Ferrara’s abilities and sophistica-
tion made him one of the most interesting of president machado’s men.
the booklet published by Ferrara in 1930 on the havana pan-american
conference of 1928 was meant as a public justification of his pro-intervention
position. in it, he reappraised the historical figure of us president monroe
and his principles, denied the existence of a latin block opposed to an
anglo-saxon one in the americas and rejected the word imperialism when
applied to us-latin american relations, as well as the whole idea of cuban
“dependence” and lack of sovereignty. unlike roig, Ferrara thought the con-
ference was a success, and that the presence of president coolidge was its
most relevant note. in Ferrara’s view, both coolidge and machado’s speech-
es emphasized the principles of international cooperation and conceived of
pan-americanism as a defensive weapon for the ideals of Western civiliza-
tion. he also showed his historical erudition by quoting documents from
the 1820s, the time of president James monroe. in particular, in order to put
monroe’s speech and Bolivar’s call for unity to all the americas on the same
level, he cited French and russian pro-monarchy documents. according to
Ferrara, europeans perceived both leaders as part of the american republi-
can and democratic revolution against european monarchies. all european
powers, Ferrara argued, were concerned about the growing power of a re-
publican country like the us and its influence on republican movements in
europe. Ferrara, portraying himself as “an impartial historian”, argued that
the monroe doctrine was a cry of freedom against european tyrannies. he
also wanted to show that far from opposing the application of the monroe
doctrine, many latin american countries had called for its protection dur-
ing the 19th century29. according to Ferrara’s historical interpretation, with
28
see: adys capull and Froilán Gonzáles, Julio Antonio Mella e Tina Modotti contro il fascismo
(Verona: Achab, 2005), 140-142. Real evidence still needs to be found in Orestes Ferrara’s pa-
pers both in havana and in italy.
29
Ferrara mentioned: Mexico in 1825; Nicaragua in 1847; Venezuela in 1848; Argentina in
1850; mexico in 1859; peru in 1860; chile and peru at war with spain in 1866; and cuban rebels
in the ten Years’ War (1868-1898), the final war of independence of 1895-1898 and again with
Venezuela in 1902 and 1903. Interestingly enough, Ferrara never referred to the “Roosevelt
corollary to the monroe doctrine”, an early-20th-century interpretation that justified us inter-
the exception of the “dollar diplomacy” and the policy of the “big stick”, the
united states had not turned the monroe doctrine into the guiding principle
of us inter-american politics. he claimed that far from sharing us interests,
he simply wanted to rehabilitate the historical memory of president monroe
and his principles, and also to defend theodore roosevelt’s intents against
“enemies” who extrapolated words too freely out of context. these unnamed
“enemies” claimed that the us interventions in haiti, santo domingo and
nicaragua were the result of the monroe doctrine. Quite likely, the same un-
named “enemies” were cuban nationalist anti-imperialist intellectuals like
roig de leuchsenring30.
perhaps among Ferrara’s unnamed “enemies” were also several
american women activists who traveled to havana to participate in the
conference and protest us interventions in the caribbean and central
america. among these was alice park who went to havana to protest the
us occupation of nicaragua. she soon realized however that protests were
going to be suppressed, delegates would be carefully chosen and that the
us would dominate the entire agenda. nevertheless, allied with cuban
women activists, their american counterparts did manage to participate
in a session of the conference held in the aula magna of the university,
after having organized a spectacular parade on martí’s day. linking an-
ti-interventionism and women’s rights, cuban women made it clear that
without greater democracy and self-determination for cuba, gaining wom-
en’s rights would be an empty victory. at the same time, without women’s
rights, the struggle for cuban democracy would be crippled31.
4. Conclusion
new questions can be raised over the interactions between different

versions of cuban nationalism and the waves of massive international
mobilization in the late 1920s and early 1930s against both european fas-
cist regimes and us imperialism (for example, the recently studied move-
ment against the execution of Sacco and Vanzetti in 192732). it can also
vention to police latin american countries. El panamericanismo, 287.

30
in september 1928, roig wrote, “sólo sandino representa a nuestra américa”, Social, septi-
embre 1928, 35. By echoing martí’s words, he pointed out that dictatorships and imperialism
were the two evils of “Our America” and sketched out the history of both.
31
i owe this information on cuban and american women at the pan-american conference
to Ellen Du Bois. Opposition to the Machado regime and US intervention in Latin American
countries caused a dramatic split within women’s movements. ellen c. du Bois, “a momen-
tary transnational sisterhood: cuban/us collaboration in the Formation of the inter-ameri-
can commission of Women”, in An Intimate and Contested Relation: The United States and Cuba
in the Late Nineteenth and Early Twentieth Centuries, ed. alessandra lorini (Firenze: Firenze
university press, 2005), 81-95.
32
See Lisa McGirr, “The Passion of Sacco and Vanzetti: A Global History”, Journal of American
History 4 (2007), 1085-1115.
be argued that the story of machado’s regime and us-cuban relations in

the 1920s are more complex and intriguing than what national (cuban
and us) historiographies have separately told so far. mella’s definition
of machado as a “tropical mussolini” could be understood as something
more meaningful than just a satirical epitaph. indeed, it could perhaps
help to place italian fascist attempts to penetrate latin american coun-
tries, where a large number of italian immigrants lived, in the interna-
tional context of changing us-cuban relations.
it is reasonable to view the story of machado’s regime as an example of
how us policies lacked evidence of a cultural knowledge of the roots and
varieties of cuban nationalism and so-called latin “anti-americanism”.
significantly, the word “pan-american” had disappeared from the name
by the time of the montevideo conference of american states in 1934. at
that conference, latin american delegates insisted that the us administra-
tion make the non-intervention principle, denied in havana in 1928, offi-
cial. Franklyn d. roosevelt’s “Good neighbor policy” was the result. But
what kind of cultural knowledge was this policy built upon?
technically, machado asked for “a leave of absence” in 1933 and fled
to miami. Because of the social turmoil in cuba by then, the us state
department had withdrawn its support for the cuban dictator, a non-in-
tervention lesson had been learned, and new policies had been tested. F.d.
roosevelt had also made the Good neighbor policy the basis of us-latin
american relations. it is tenable that the havana pan-american conference
of 1928, which brought about the issue of non-intervention, sanctioned the
end of the platt amendment era and taught a lesson that roosevelt was
quick to learn. in fact, that same year, roosevelt published an article in the
magazine Foreign Affairs in which he criticized the american interventions
in foreign countries of the previous decades:
By what right […] other than the right of main force, does the united
states arrogate unto itself the privilege of intervening alone in the internal
affairs of another sovereign republic? […] Single-handed intervention by us
in the internal affairs of other nations must end33.
according to carleton Beals, an early american critic of the new

neighbor policy towards latin american countries, this was just a reas-
sertion of us imperialism. Writing in 1938 Beals questioned the belief that
the Western hemisphere was a “brotherhood of democracies” in con-
trast to the “evil dictatorships” of europe, since such a belief overlooked
the fact that there were far worse tyrannies in the Western hemisphere
than in europe, even if they were less dangerous for the world at large.
33
Franklin D. Roosevelt, “Our Foreign Policy: A Democratic View”, Foreign Affairs 4 (1928),
584-585.
While roosevelt was promoting this belief, trujillo, the dictator of the
dominican republic, was butchering 12,000 haitians, and nicaragua and
honduras were at war for irrelevant motives. Beals also asserted that the
us, while offering friendship to certain latin american governments,
did not actually care about the people of latin america. in fact, it was
supporting tyrannies of the same brutal sort as those it had decried in
europe. he concluded that:
The only possibility for sound American influence in Latin America is to

stand squarely with the democratic and progressive forces of those countries
[…]. in latin america we are not supporting the forces of democracy and
freedom any more than we are in spain. We are actively supporting Fascist
trends, under the noble cloak of brave words about freedom, democracy
and international justice. those sleek words no longer have meaning in con-
nection with our actual policy. We are merely playing a conventional game
of power politics on the southern continent. Would we play it better if we
weren’t such arrant hypocrites?34
34
Carleton Beals, “A Skeptic Views the Good Neighbor Policy”, in Latin America and the United
States. A Documentary History, eds. Robert H. Holden and Eric Zolov (New York: Oxford Uni-
versity press, 2000), 156-158.
A. Sánchez
Cobos
Chapter 8
Los anarquistas españoles y la formación
de la clase trabajadora cubana:
la educación racionalista*
Fueron muchos los anarquistas españoles que tras la emancipación se

asentaron en cuba. la reorganización de los trabajadores, cuyas socie-
dades de la colonia habían quedado prácticamente desmanteladas como
consecuencia de la última guerra de independencia, estaba entre sus obje-
tivos. Y en ese sentido, la recién estrenada nación les ofrecía un campo de
oportunidades sin parangón.
así, a lo largo de las dos primeras décadas de siglo XX encontramos a mu-
chos españoles liderando las empresas prácticas que los anarquistas pusieron
en marcha en la isla. los vemos constituyendo grupos de afinidad; formando
parte de las redacciones de los periódicos libertarios; como oradores en las tri-
bunas; organizando mítines, conferencias y excursiones de propaganda para
expandir el “ideal” por toda la isla, pero especialmente entre los compañeros
del campo; y, cómo no, los descubrimos también organizando huelgas, boicots
y otras medios de presión laboral. Y es que el proyecto implementado por los
anarquistas en cuba incluía toda una serie de prácticas políticas y culturales
propias y alternativas al sistema republicano que sirvieran de trampolín para
la conquista del poder político y la materialización de la esperada “revolución
social”. Y, mientras llegaba ese momento, servirían igualmente para transfor-
mar y mejorar la sociedad a partir de su particular forma de ver el mundo1.
donde no podía faltar tampoco la mano ácrata era en las empresas edu-
cativas. Y en términos generales, lo que ofrecieron los anarquistas en cuba
respecto a esta cuestión fue un planteamiento educativo alternativo frente al
*
este estudio se encuentra inscrito en el proyecto de investigación hum2006-03651/hist del
ministerio de ciencia e innovación.
1
el proyecto ideado por los anarquistas y el papel jugado por los españoles en cuba después
de la independencia, en amparo sánchez cobos, Sembrando ideales. Anarquistas españoles en
Cuba (1902-1925) (sevilla: csic, 2008).
oficial, vinculado a su proyecto de emancipación social que chocaba directa-

mente con la reciente emancipación de la isla, lo cual no deja de ser significa-
tivo teniendo en cuenta la incipiente nacionalización de la sociedad cubana
y, en ese sentido, el impulso dado por el estado a la educación nacional.
precisamente el análisis de las prácticas educativas que los anarquistas
desarrollaron en cuba será el objeto de este texto. para ello centraremos
nuestra atención en la primera década de República, momento de orga-
nización y máximo crecimiento de las escuelas racionalistas en la isla y
período de especial importancia para la puesta en práctica de todo el en-
tramado político y legislativo que asegurase la conformación de la nueva
nación cubana nacida de la independencia.
1. La educación y los anarquistas españoles en Cuba
mucho escribieron, y se ha escrito después, sobre la importancia que

los anarquistas, y entre ellos los españoles, le dieron a la educación de los
sectores populares2. una cuestión que consideraban prioritaria sobre todo
para asegurar la formación de los nuevos integrantes de la sociedad futura
nacida de la revolución, pero que a su vez, serviría para ayudar a esos sec-
tores a mejorar su “miserable” existencia.
en líneas generales, entre los ácratas existían dos formas principales de en-
tender la educación de los trabajadores y sectores populares. por una parte,
estaban aquellos que, siguiendo a Bakunin, opinaban que estos sectores no
podían recibir una educación alternativa a la oficial mientras estuvieran vivi-
endo en la sociedad capitalista, pues el hombre aparecía completamente me-
diatizado por el medio y las condiciones sociales en las que vivía, de modo
que previamente debía terminarse con esos condicionamientos y crear al ti-
empo un ambiente propicio para otro tipo de formación. la educación para
Bakunin y sus seguidores, por tanto, debía dejarse pendiente para cuando se
materializara la revolución social3. por otra parte, encontramos a los defen-
sores de la instrucción de los sectores populares no sólo antes de la revolución
sino como un complemento indispensable para llegar a ella4. en este caso, rec-
ogían toda una tradición pedagógica nacida con los ilustrados del siglo XVIII
y continuada en los métodos educativos conformados a finales del siglo XiX,
desde Rousseau y Pestalozzi hasta Robert Owen o Saint-Simon. Entre estas
2
un estudio general sobre la cuestión, en clara e. lida, “educación anarquista en la españa
del Ochocientos”, Revista de Occidente 97 (1971), 33-47.
3
mijail Bakunin, La Instrucción Integral (Barcelona: pequeña Biblioteca calamus scripto-
rius, 1979).
4
un buen ejemplo sobre la visión de los ácratas de cuba en ese sentido, en el artículo fir-
mado por Justo derecho, “nuestra educación intelectual”,¡Tierra!, 15 noviembre 1902. más
información sobre las dos formas de entender la educación de los sectores populares entre los
anarquistas, en Juan suriano, Anarquistas. Cultura y política libertaria en Buenos Aires, 1890-1910
(Buenos aires: manantial, 2001), 224-227.
nuevas formas de enseñanza alternativas, la más común entre los anarquistas

en la españa de comienzos del siglo XX fue el método pedagógico y educativo
creado por el maestro catalán, Francisco Ferrer i Guardia, que puso por prim-
era vez en práctica en el año 1901 en la escuela que organizó en Barcelona, pero
que pronto se vio imitado no sólo en el resto de cataluña sino también en otras
provincias de la península e incluso en otros países europeos y de américa5.
Ferrer defendía ante todo la educación laica, que acabara con el mo-
nopolio educativo ejercido hasta entonces por la iglesia, y al mismo tiempo
antiestatal, pues para él tampoco el estado debía utilizar la enseñanza para
reproducir una ideología nacional o política. además, apoyaba su método
en la ciencia y la razón, defendía el igualitarismo y el antiautoritarismo, y
apostaba porque la enseñanza fuera integral, es decir, que conjugara teoría
y práctica. en ese sentido, el currículum observado en las aulas respondía
a esos principios que, a su vez, resultaban muy acordes con el sentir liber-
tario. en principio, el aprendizaje debía estar basado en la experiencia y en
la participación activa del alumno, partiendo siempre de las capacidades
innatas del niño, y huyendo así de los ejercicios memorísticos y repetitivos
tan habituales en otros sistemas de enseñanza y sobre todo en las escuelas
religiosas. en el mismo sentido, defendía la interconexión educación-me-
dio, es decir, la formación en el aula debía ser completada con excursiones
y paseos escolares a museos, a la naturaleza, etc., para aplicar y completar
de forma práctica los conocimientos teóricos. así incluían asignaturas vari-
adas como matemáticas, ciencias de la naturaleza, educación física, música
y trabajos manuales, y le concedían un papel primordial al juego y a los
juguetes como elementos integrantes igualmente en la acción educadora.
al mismo tiempo, se pretendía acabar con las diferencias existentes ha-
bitualmente entre el alumnado, y no sólo de status, sino también de sexo. en
ese sentido, los racionalistas no le concedían ningún valor a los exámenes
que eran considerados una herramienta que sólo servía para catalogar y
diferenciar a los educandos de una misma clase. por otra parte, la relación
entre alumnado y profesor debía ser directa, sin ningún tipo de expresión
de autoridad por parte del docente ni dentro ni fuera del aula. Frente a la
figura autoritaria, los castigos, los premios y la violencia, tan criticados por
los racionalistas, proponían el cariño, el trato afable y el ejemplo difundi-
dos a través de la palabra y el acto del educador6.
5
un interesante estudio sobre las escuelas modernas en españa, en Jordi monés, pere solà
y luís m. lázaro, Ferrer Guardia y la pedagogía libertaria: elementos para un debate (Barcelona:
icaria, 1977). sobre el desarrollo de las escuelas modernas en provincias, véase pere solá, Las
escuelas racionalistas en Cataluña (1909-1939) (Barcelona: tusquets, 1978); luís m. lázaro, Las
escuelas racionalistas en el País Valenciano (1906-1931) (Valencia: Nau, 1992).
6
los anteriores principios fueron recogidos en “agrupación racionalista Ferrer. reglamento
interno”, ¡Tierra!, 9 de marzo de 1912. para ampliar la información sobre el modelo curricular
de Ferrer i Guardia, Buenaventura delgado, La escuela moderna de Ferrer i Guardia (Barcelona:
ceac, 1979), 89-109.
precisamente el hecho de que encontremos notable presencia de anar-

quistas españoles en la mayor de las antillas es una de las razones que ex-
plica – además del propio método en sí – la rapidez de la traslación desde
la península y el impulso dado tras la emancipación de la antigua colonia
al modelo “ferreriano” – aunque ello no quiere decir que no encontremos
entre los ácratas cubanos defensores de este modelo. su función de intro-
ductores y promotores resultó fundamental. así, por ejemplo, el tipógrafo
granadino Francisco González sola llegó a la isla en el año 1906 con la
misión expresa de divulgar sus principios entre los trabajadores de toda
la isla7. Otro de los ácratas que, junto con el anterior, jugó un papel pri-
mordial en la promoción del proyecto racionalista en cuba fue abelardo
saavedra, gaditano de profesión tabaquero, que llegó a comienzos del año
1907 para participar en las excursiones de propaganda que se estaban or-
ganizando con el propósito de propagar el ideal libertario entre los traba-
jadores del campo8. Y otros anarquistas peninsulares reconocidos por los
diplomáticos españoles como principales impulsores de estas empresas
fueron José Guardiola, Sebastián Aguiar Mateo, Vicente Ferrer, Roberto
Carballo y Vicente Lípiz San Miguel, entre otros. Entre los cubanos, sobre-
salieron Isidoro Lois, Ricardo Vera o Tomás Echeverría. También encon-
tramos al colombiano Juan Francisco moncaleano, principal impulsor de
la escuela del cerro, organizada en 19129.
hemos de tener en cuenta que desde el año 1906 se había producido
una nueva intervención de las autoridades norteamericanas en la isla y, se-
guramente, sus políticas favorables a la inmigración española, favorecieron
igualmente la entrada de los anarquistas.
para los ácratas, llevar a la práctica estas empresas parecía posible a
priori pues disponían de espacios idóneos y con el mobiliario indispens-
able donde albergar sus escuelas. por una parte, estaban los centros de
estudios sociales, primeras instituciones constituidas para organizar activ-
idades culturales; y, de la otra, los locales obreros que por lo general solían
estar desiertos prácticamente todo el tiempo, de modo que a ellos podrían
asistir los niños por el día y los padres por la noche10.
una vez que crearon organizaciones racionalistas y escuelas moder-
nas encontramos también entre sus organizadores, y por supuesto entre
sus profesores, a anarquistas españoles. por ejemplo, en el primero de
estos centros educativos, que se organizó a finales del año 1908 a instan-
7
“relación de anarquistas conocidos en cuba”, archivo del ministerio de asuntos exteri-
ores de Madrid (AMAE), Fondo Política Interior Cuba (FPIC), Serie Orden Público (SOP), Leg.
h 2753, 1911-1919.
8
Felipe Zapata, “esquema y notas para una historia de la organización obrera en cuba”,
Justicia Social Cristiana 1, 2, 3 y 4 (1951), 64-65.
9
“Anarquista Moncaleano. Reservado”, AMAE, FPIC, SOP, Subserie Anarquismo, Exp.
P=M=O, Leg. H 2757, siglo XX.
10
“enseñanza libre”, ¡Tierra!, 4 de agosto de 1906.
cias del centro de estudios sociales de regla, colaboró como docente y

director el valenciano miguel martínez saavedra. martínez fue uno de
los profesores de la primera escuela que Ferrer organizó en Barcelona,
después fue director de la escuela moderna del barrio de Gracia, también
en la ciudad condal, trabajó en escuelas ferrerianas en Valencia y fue co-
laborador de la revista racionalista Humanidad Nueva. comisionado por
el propio Ferrer para fomentar su método en la mayor de las antillas, fue
además elegido delegado de la sección cubana de la liga internacional
para la educación racional de la infancia que se organizó en ese mismo
año 1908, precisamente para coordinar la creación de escuelas racionalis-
tas en europa y américa11.
igualmente, en los centros educativos racionalistas que se fundaron fu-
era de la capital podemos rastrear la presencia de ácratas españoles. así, por
ejemplo, el orensano dionisio García martínez trabajó en la escuela mod-
erna que el grupo Soledad Villafranca – nombre de la compañera de Ferrer
– organizó en matanzas. también el tabaquero asturiano Juan tenorio
Fernández, fue profesor en la que el grupo acción directa – fundado, en-
tre otros, por los anarquistas españoles pedro irazoqui, paulino Ferreiro e
Inocencio Franco – constituyó en Manzanillo, provincia de Oriente12.
Otros centros fueron organizados en otras provincias y poblaciones co-
mo pinar del río, manzanillo, cruces, matanzas o sagua la Grande, princi-
palmente entre los años 1909 y 1913, y con un ímpetu notable tras conocerse
la detención y ejecución del pedagogo catalán13. en ese sentido, resultaron
fundamentales las iniciativas de la sección cubana de la liga internacional
para la educación racional de la infancia, el apoyo del semanario ¡Tierra!
de la habana y por supuesto las prácticas propagandísticas y difusoras
llevadas a cabo por los emigrados españoles, con la ayuda por supuesto
de los anarquistas cubanos. para dar impulso a las escuelas ferrerianas cre-
aron algunos grupos específicos entre los que destacaron educación del
porvenir y la agrupación racionalista Ferrer14.
11
luís m. lázaro torrente, Prensa racionalista y educación en España (1901-1932) (Valencia: Uni-
versidad de Valencia, 1995), 91 y 108; “Escuela racionalista”, ¡Tierra!, 28 de noviembre de 1908;
“notas varias”, ¡Tierra!, 21 de marzo de 1913.
12
“Relación de anarquistas conocidos en Cuba”, 9 de septiembre de 1913, AMAE, FPIC, SOP,
leg. h 2753, 1911-19; Tierra y Libertad, 4 de septiembre de 1912.
13
desde que Ferrer puso en práctica su método educativo estuvo en el punto de mira de las
autoridades eclesiásticas españolas que aprovecharon cualquier excusa para denunciar a sus
escuelas y desprestigiar a su promotor. en 1909 le hicieron responsable de los disturbios ocur-
ridos en Barcelona conocidos como la semana trágica, a pesar de que no se encontraba en la
ciudad condal en ese momento. como resultado del proceso que se abrió contra él fue con-
denado a muerte y ejecutado el 13 de octubre de ese mismo año. más información sobre esta
cuestión, en Jordi de cambra Bassols, Anarquismo y positivismo. El caso Ferrer (madrid: centro
de investigaciones sociológicas, 1981).
14
el desarrollo de los centros racionalistas en cuba, en amparo sánchez, “una educación
alternativa. las escuelas racionalistas en cuba, 1902-1925”, en Nación y cultura nacional en el
Caribe Hispano, ed. Josef Opatrný (Praga: Karolinum, 2006), 143-152.
reconstruir la historia del anarquismo en cuba y, en este caso concreto, la

de sus centros educativos, resulta especialmente complicado por la falta de
registros oficiales y otras fuentes directas que nos hablen de sus actividades.
en esta ocasión hemos utilizado los informes que los cónsules y diplomáticos
españoles enviaron al ministerio de Gobernación en madrid y la información
que del tema dieron los propios anarquistas y que difundieron principal-
mente en las páginas de sus periódicos. a través de ellos podemos saber, por
ejemplo, según informaba el cónsul español en la capital cubana en 1913, que
a la escuela situada en el número 82 de la calle Oficios de la ciudad asistían
entre 30 y 40 alumnos – número de alumnos habitual en estos centros-, entre
los cuales se encontraban niños de uno y otro sexo ya que el modelo defen-
dido por Ferrer proponía, entre otras cosas, que la educación debía ser con-
junta. Y como no podía ser de otro modo, a ellos asistían generalmente los
hijos de los promotores y defensores del racionalismo; así, en la escuela de
regla encontramos a las hijas de miguel martínez, y también en la del cerro,
en la habana, estudiaron los tres hijos de los profesores Juan Francisco y
Blanca moncaleano15. algunas de ellas fueron además escuelas de adultos por
la noche, como la de marianao, al oeste de la habana; otras prestaron espe-
cial atención a la instrucción de los trabajadores del campo, entre ellas la de
el corralito, provincia de pinar del río, donde además recibían formación un
grupo de noventa niños que allí vivían; y otras incluso funcionaron como es-
cuelas de verano, como la de la calle Oficios de la capital cubana16.
aunque el método de Ferrer estaba pensado para todos los niños, fueran
de la clase social que fueran – ante todo el pedagogo catalán pretendía crear
un modelo alternativo de carácter universal-, lo más habitual en cuba fue
que acogiera a los hijos de los trabajadores y clases populares. se explican así
en parte los problemas económicos a los que se enfrentaron estos centros –
que fueron una de las principales razones de su fracaso17 – ya que el sistema
de pago propuesto por Ferrer incluía un reparto de las cuotas en base a las
posibilidades familiares de cada niño. se pretendía con esto que aquellas
más pudientes financiaran la educación de los más desfavorecidos.
probablemente el hecho de que carecieran de otras fuentes de finan-
ciación puede explicar igualmente que durante el período estudiado estos
centros quedaran restringidos en su mayor parte a sus promotores18. así lo
reconocía el cónsul de la habana: “no obstante los trabajos de propaganda
15
“carta reservada enviada por el cónsul de españa en la habana al ministro de Gobernación
en madrid el 27 de enero de 1913 sobre anarquismo” y “carta enviada por el cónsul español en
la habana al ministro de Gobernación en madrid el 7 de agosto de 1913 sobre la propaganda
anarquista”. AMAE, FPIC, SOP, Subserie Anarquismo, Exp. P=M=O. Leg. H 2757, siglo XX.
16
más información sobre estas cuestiones, en Kirwin shaffer, Anarchism and Countercultural Poli-
tics in Early Twentieth-Century Cuba (Gainesville, Fl.: university press of Florida, 2005), 179.
17
Ver “Triste realidad”, ¡Tierra!, 4 de mayo de 1912.
18
“el cónsul de españa informa sobre la propaganda anarquista. la habana, 7 de agosto de
1913”, AMAE, FPIC, SOP, Subserie Anarquismo, Exp. P=M=O. Leg. H 2757, siglo XX.
de estos elementos anarquistas, sus avances entre los naturales son muy
limitados. los asociados son casi en su totalidad españoles (catalanes y
aragoneses en su mayoría) existiendo muy pocos cubanos. los elementos
de color no han aceptado tales teorías pues no existe ningún negro ni mula-
to entre aquellos, a pesar de encontrarse el círculo en un barrio compuesto
casi todo de familias de esta raza”19. en este caso, hemos de tener en cuen-
ta que a comienzos de la segunda década republicana, la discriminación
de la población de color en cuba se mantenía y el alzamiento del partido
independiente de color de 1912 es un claro ejemplo de ello20. Y en ese sen-
tido, como veremos a continuación, la falta de un discurso dirigido por
los anarquistas de forma expresa a ese sector de la población seguramente
tampoco contribuyera a atraer a los negros a las escuelas modernas.
en resumen, toda esta labor de difusión del nuevo método docente ex-
plica sin duda que las organizaciones racionalistas y las escuelas modernas
sobrevivieran en cuba entre 1908 y 1913 a pesar de los problemas a los que
se enfrentaron. pero la propaganda sería insuficiente para explicar su arrai-
go sin un modelo apropiado y atractivo para los sectores a los que pretend-
ían llegar. Veamos entonces qué alternativas ofrecieron y cómo articularon
su discurso con ese objetivo.
2. ¿Continuaremos dejando que la ignorancia sea el yugo que

esclavice una parte de la humanidad a otra más pequeña? ¡No!
los ácratas encontraron en la cuba de comienzos de siglo XX un con-

texto político que en algunos aspectos les resultó favorable para llevar a
término sus actividades prácticas pero que en otros momentos jugó en su
contra. la independencia inauguró un ambiente de libertades y derechos
que fueron recogidos en la constitución de 1901 y que, en este caso con-
creto, establecía, en su artículo 31, el derecho a ejercer la enseñanza privada
de cualquier arte, ciencia o profesión, al tiempo que se permitía la fun-
dación y el sostenimiento de cualquier tipo de centro educativo, siempre
que la homologación de sus títulos dependiera del estado que era quien
determinaría además los requisitos necesarios para obtenerlos. así, si por
una parte los anarquistas podrían promocionar su nuevo método libre-
mente; no obstante, al mismo tiempo esta apertura no sólo podía aumentar
la competencia sino que, además, el texto constitucional – como ya había
quedado recogido en la Orden Militar Nº 226 de 6 de diciembre de 1899-,
garantizaba, a su vez, la enseñanza primaria y secundaria, y también la de
19
“el cónsul de españa informa sobre la propaganda anarquista. la habana, 7 de agosto de
1913”, AMAE, Fondo AMAE, FPIC, SOP, Subserie Anarquismo, Exp. P=M=O. Leg. H 2757,
siglo XX.
20
sobre esta cuestión, véase aline helg, Our Rightful Share to Afro-Cuban Struggle for Equality,
1886-1912 (chapel hill: university of north carolina press, 1995).
las Artes y Oficios, que serían obligatorias, gratuitas y estarían a cargo del
estado21, lo cual, sin duda, debió restar asistencia a las escuelas racionalis-
tas de muchos de aquellos hijos de trabajadores que no podían permitirse
destinar una parte de su mísero sueldo al sostenimiento de esos centros.
también, desde el punto de vista del modelo educativo, el método fer-
reriano se vio favorecido y a la vez perjudicado por ese espíritu renovador.
en principio, compartía con las construcciones teóricas que arrancaban de
la ilustración el principio de laicidad, una de las principales característi-
cas que le permitía marcar la diferencia más clara con la educación reli-
giosa preponderante durante la colonia, ofreciéndole por contraposición
amplias posibilidades de cambio. Y, en ese sentido, la reestructuración del
sistema educativo iniciada por las autoridades norteamericanas desde el
mismo año 1898 – que tendría como principales valedores a los intelectu-
ales alexis e. Frye, norteamericano organizador de la enseñanza prima-
ria, y Enrique José Varona, cubano encargado de la enseñanza secundaria
y superior-, abogaba igualmente por la educación laica. pero, además, el
pedagogo catalán se quiso desmarcar asimismo del sistema educativo in-
stitucionalizado con la III República francesa que, a pesar de pretender ser
universal, en realidad acabó reproduciendo la ideología de la clase domi-
nante. de ese modo, ya no sería Francia el modelo sino una enseñanza que
estuviera totalmente desvinculada del estado y al servicio de fines revolu-
cionarios. en este caso, tampoco serviría el sistema educativo inaugurado
en cuba en 1898 que tenía como principal modelo la educación norteam-
ericana, que consistía básicamente en una combinación de instrucción en
las artes liberales y la formación manual, y que, para el caso concreto de
cuba hacía especial hincapié en la agricultura, al tiempo que contribuiría a
consolidar y reforzar el sistema republicano22.
precisamente, en contraposición al nuevo sistema preconizado por las
autoridades de la isla, lo que los ácratas ofrecieron a los trabajadores, y en
general a los sectores populares, fue un nuevo modelo educativo que les
liberara de la opresión y les preparara para el cambio revolucionario. para
ellos la educación debía ser, en primer lugar, liberadora de la ignorancia,
de las ataduras y la opresión a que el sistema, en ese caso el nuevo sistema
político cubano, sometía a los trabajadores, o al menos les enseñaría a so-
brellevarlos de mejor forma mientras la esperada revolución les liberara de-
finitivamente. Y en segundo término sería igualadora, pues haría que todos
adquiriesen el mismo nivel intelectual acabando así con las diferencias que
separaban a explotadores y explotados. tenían además una fe inquebrant-
21
La Orden Militar Nº 226 y la Constitución de la República de Cuba, en Hortensia Pichardo,
Documentos para la Historia de Cuba, tomo ii (la habana: ciencias sociales, 1979), 51-57 y 74-
101, respectivamente.
22
la reestructuración del sistema educativo en cuba tras la independencia, en shaffer, Anar-
chism, 166-170.
able en la razón y en la ciencia que, como las bases de la formación, lograrían

cambiar y mejorar la situación de esos sectores, así como prepararles para
la sociedad futura. Y en ese sentido, partían de la bondad y ductilidad del
carácter del hombre que sería mejorado a través de la educación.
para lograr que su mensaje llegara a sus interpelados, su discurso se ori-
entó en dos direcciones. en primer lugar, se dirigió a la crítica del modelo
oficial, ya fuera a su aspecto político y patriótico, como por supuesto a los
métodos utilizados dentro de las aulas que fomentaban las diferencias en-
tre el alumnado y perpetuaban sistemas de educación atávicos, anquilosa-
dos y dañinos, basados en el temor a la autoridad, de los que sólo se podía
esperar la fabricación de buenos y sumisos obreros, ciudadanos, soldados,
en una palabra, servidores. tampoco escaparon de sus críticas las escuelas
privadas, sobre todo las religiosas, que recibieron las más descarnadas dia-
tribas23. así sus artículos aparecen plagados de alusiones antipatrióticas,
antinacionalistas, antimilitaristas y anticlericales. sobre lo perjudicial del
sistema de enseñanza oficial escribían, por ejemplo:
La enseñanza actual siembra en el corazón del niño una estúpida ad-

miración por todo lo que es nacional, un amor y veneración excesivos a la
patria, y sobre todo un odio a muerte al que no haya nacido en ella24.
Y añadían:
con una instrucción sana, exenta de religiones sectarias, de patriotismos

asesinos y de políticas embusteras, los cerebros de los seres humanos estarán
para un día no lejano preparados para ser los guías que nos conducirán a la
finalidad de la emancipación humana25.
al propio tiempo criticaban al estado por querer monopolizar la cul-

tura y el sistema educativo para perpetuar y asegurar así las diferencias
de clase sobre las que sustentaban el sistema burgués, así como a la iglesia
que con el mismo objetivo manipulaba las conciencias. Y en este caso su
discurso se dirigía en mayor medida a las mujeres, pues para ellos eran
las que con más facilidad caían en las redes de los curas y las que después
transmitían las enseñanzas religiosas a sus hijos. en este caso, los anarquis-
tas proponían un obrerismo antiestatalista frente al reformismo nacional
implementado por el estado.
aunque este tipo de discurso no fue exclusivo de la mayor de las antillas
– aparece de una manera más o menos recurrente en todos los países donde
encontramos anarquistas, tanto de europa como de américa-, sin embargo,
23
Ver, por ejemplo, “Enseñanzas”, ¡Tierra!, 19 de octubre de 1912.
24
“la educación racionalista. escuela de odios. escuela de amor”, ¡Tierra!, 14 de agosto de
1909.
25
“enseñanza libre”, ¡Tierra!, 4 de agosto de 1906.
en la cuba de comienzos del siglo XX adquiere una significación especial

pues se trata de un periodo esencial en la construcción de la nueva nación,
donde encontramos un elemento externo que iba a jugar un papel decisivo
en esos comienzos – aunque, en realidad, su presencia jalonaría la historia
de la isla a partir de entonces-: los gobiernos interventores norteamerica-
nos. en ese sentido, no menos numerosos fueron los artículos publicados en
¡Tierra! donde denunciaban esta situación de “nuevo dominio” y exhortaban
al pueblo a trabajar por su “verdadera independencia”, que no sería respecto
a una potencia exterior, solamente, sino a su emancipación social26.
al mismo tiempo, y como complemento al aparato crítico, los ácratas
dirigieron su pluma y sus voces a demostrar la idoneidad del nuevo mé-
todo pedagógico racionalista. al compromiso de renovación propuesto por
el maestro catalán, unieron su objetivo de transformar la sociedad, paso
previo a la emancipación y a la formación de la sociedad futura. en contra-
posición, por ejemplo, al modelo oficial, pretendían diseñar un concepto
identitario propio y alternativo para los trabajadores y sectores subalternos
de cuba. así, frente a los símbolos patrios cubanos, los anarquistas pro-
movieron símbolos internacionalistas y difundieron un discurso clasista.
por ejemplo, en la escuela racionalista de regla todos los viernes el coro
de niños dirigido por las hijas de miguel martínez cantaba la internacio-
nal en la puerta, que a su vez era coreada por todos los niños del centro27.
También, frente a la exhibición en las escuelas públicas de representaciones
de las personalidades de la política y la cultura cubanas, colocaron en sus
aulas los retratos de Ferrer i Guardia y de otros padres del ideal libertar-
io. asimismo, se declaraban por encima de cuestiones como la nacionali-
dad, la patria o el color de la piel que frecuentemente eran utilizadas para
dividir a la clase trabajadora. Y precisamente sus centros culturales y sus
escuelas se hicieron amplio eco de este mensaje. Ya en el año 1903 se organ-
izaba en Guanabacoa un centro de estudios sociales donde declararon que
“desaparece ese estúpido odio de color o nacionalidad, sustituyéndose por
el amor y la fraternidad, bases de una nueva y próxima organización social
resultante de nuestra completa emancipación”28. como avanzábamos más
arriba, quizás precisamente este tipo de mensaje explica que los ácratas no
desarrollaran asimismo estrategias específicas para atraer a sus centros a la
población de color puesto que podrían fomentar diferencias.
sin embargo, no debe pensarse que las críticas de los anarquistas alcan-
zaron únicamente a la clase “explotadora”, también los trabajadores fueron
blancos de sus reproches. Frecuentemente denunciaban la poca o nula pre-
disposición que los padres con pocos recursos económicos mostraban hacia
la educación, y no sólo la de sus hijos, sino también de ellos mismos y de
26
Ver, por ejemplo, “Consolador contraste”, ¡Tierra!, 7 de marzo de 1903.
27
shaffer, Anarchism, 179.
28
“centro de estudios sociales”, ¡Tierra!, 15 de agosto de 1903.
sus esposas; les recriminaban que no fueran capaces de advertir la impor-

tancia que tenía y sobre todo se quejaban de que no pudieran destinar una
parte de su pequeño jornal para el sostenimiento de esos centros cuando lo
más habitual era que dilapidaran ese dinero en el juego, la bebida y el vicio
en general29. en realidad, este tipo de críticas a los trabajadores desmotiva-
dos fueron muy habituales entre los anarquistas no sólo con respecto a la
educación sino también hacia su actitud para con su vida en general y for-
man parte de su defensa del obrero consciente en un contexto de marcada
inconsciencia para los anarquistas.
el discurso difundido a través de las páginas de sus publicaciones, que
sin duda contribuyó a hacer más atractivo aún el modelo ferreriano, nos
habla igualmente de los vínculos existentes entre el anarquismo español y
el cubano. en este caso, sus artículos reproducen básicamente los mismos
argumentos utilizados en la península aunque, para el caso de cuba, las
referencias a la situación política, social y económica fueron constantes y
cobraron especial significado como referente del pensamiento de los que
se erigieron como portavoces de los sectores populares, al tiempo que of-
recían un contrapunto al discurso oficial30.
los racionalistas incidieron con igual contundencia en la educación de
la mujer, considerada compañera necesaria para conseguir la revolución,
para lo cual su formación era igualmente indispensable, así como pieza fun-
damental en la educación en el hogar. en ese sentido, a los padres y tutores
se les pedía que procuraran no debilitar el interés y cariño que el niño dem-
ostrara hacia la educación racionalista, y se les aconsejaba que observaran
también sus principios para que el esfuerzo del profesor saliera reforzado.
3. La trascendencia del Modelo Ferreriano en Cuba
de ese modo, para los anarquistas el sistema educativo y con él los

formadores de los trabajadores y los sectores subalternos en general, ad-
quirieron una importancia fundamental pues se convertían en uno de los
principales instrumentos para asegurar la consolidación y el crecimiento
de la incipiente clase trabajadora cubana, así como para la preparación de
la sociedad futura. en el caso de los promotores del método racionalista
fueron a su vez propagadores del resto de empresas prácticas puestas en
marcha por los ácratas, de modo que, por lo general, fueron estas activi-
dades en su conjunto las que provocaron que fueran perseguidos por las
autoridades y en la mayoría de los casos expulsados de la isla.
29
un buen ejemplo sobre estas críticas, en “la educación de la niñez”, ¡Tierra!, 4 de febrero
de 1905.
30
sobre esta cuestión puede verse, amparo sánchez, “metáforas cubanas en el pensamiento
anarquista de comienzos del siglo XX”, en El pensamiento caribeño: siglos XIX y XX, ed. Josef
Opatrný (Praga: Karolinum, 2007), 345-352.
de hecho, el ocaso de estos centros aparece ligado, aunque sólo en

parte, a la desaparición de estos hombres de la escena cubana. así, por
ejemplo, Francisco González sola salió expulsado de cuba el 25 de septi-
embre de 1911. igualmente abelardo saavedra ya desde su llegada a la isla
estuvo vigilado por las autoridades debido precisamente a las actividades
de promoción del ideal y fue expulsado por primera vez también en 1911,
no obstante logró volver dos años después y en 1915 fue nuevamente de-
portado con destino a santander. del mismo modo, el canario sebastián
aguiar salió de la isla junto a saavedra en 1911 bajo acusaciones similares,
aunque logró retornar al año siguiente tras demostrar que era ciudadano
cubano naturalizado; por su parte, el vallisoletano Vicente Lípiz y el astu-
riano Juan tenorio Fernández fueron igualmente expulsados con saavedra
y los también españoles Juan tur y pedro Ferrer en 191531.
No obstante, no se puede achacar el final de estos centros únicamente a
las expulsiones de sus promotores, aunque fueran un factor añadido. más bi-
en la inestabilidad y sobre todo las dificultades en la financiación fueron los
principales problemas a que se enfrentaron los centros ferrerianos en cuba,
como en el resto de países. aunque, en este caso, a diferencia por ejemplo
de españa, no tuvieron que vivir la presión directa de las autoridades y me-
nos de la Iglesia pues, como hemos visto, la República había inaugurado un
periodo de apertura y laicización de la sociedad y con ella del sistema de
enseñanza. por lo general, en el contexto estudiado las autoridades fueron
“benevolentes” con las actividades de los anarquistas, salvo algunas excep-
ciones como las mencionadas expulsiones que, por otra parte, estuvieron
asociadas a coyunturas específicas, generalmente a contextos de crecimiento
económico y aumento de la conflictividad social de la que se culpó precisa-
mente a los anarquistas. en este caso, fueron especialmente significativas las
huelgas que se produjeron en el contexto de la primera Guerra mundial, en
las cuales aparecían siempre implicados como promotores los ácratas.
entre otras cosas, esa labor de persecución de los anarquistas, que re-
spondía a la necesidad del gobierno de librarse de los trabajadores más
contestatarios, demuestra la importancia de las actividades de estos ac-
tivistas en el período señalado. Y entre ellas, la difusión del modelo de
Ferrer i Guardia resultó fundamental para ofrecerles una alternativa edu-
cativa a los sectores populares. en ese sentido, en su discurso sobre la
importancia del racionalismo y las escuelas modernas ferrerianas apare-
cen estrechamente vinculadas la labor pedagógica con la propagandís-
tica. preparar a los “desheredados” para recibir los frutos de la sociedad
futura hacía necesarios que antes estos fueran sacados de la ignorancia
e instruidos eficazmente en los medios para conseguirla, y para ello, el
31
la expulsión de los anarquistas españoles de cuba en nuestro artículo, “extranjeros perni-
ciosos. El orden público y la expulsión de anarquistas españoles de Cuba, 1899-1930”, Historia
Social 59 (2007), 171-188.
instrumento más eficaz serían las escuelas donde además de educarlos

se difundieran los principios libertarios. en ese sentido, además de las
críticas al modelo educativo oficial, que hemos visto que recogían aspec-
tos tan variados como el político y patriótico, el religioso o el militarista,
principalmente; los anarquistas planteaban un método educativo alterna-
tivo que no sólo acabara con la transmisión de esos valores sino con otras
costumbres igualmente atávicas y dañinas dentro de las aulas como los
castigos, la memorización, las diferencias entre el alumnado o el temor a
la autoridad, planteando en su lugar nuevos y renovados procedimientos
que fomentaran la educación fundada sobre una base científica y racion-
al, partiendo siempre del desarrollo y personalidad del niño, y estrechan-
do las interrelaciones entre teoría y práctica.
no obstante, su interpretación sobre el método oficial merece una
puntualización. Fieles a sus principios y a su modelo de autogestión ed-
ucativa, en realidad los anarquistas no apreciaron el sentido de la re-
forma propuesta por el nuevo estado cubano; en este caso, sus críticas
sobre la cuestión estaban en consonancia con el resto de su análisis so-
bre la sociedad, limitándose, por tanto, a atacar al sistema burgués. Y
tampoco tuvieron en cuenta los resultados de las políticas oficiales. de
hecho, el plan de escolarización implementado inmediatamente después
de la independencia por la autoridades norteamericanas – el manuel de
Vidal Morales se puso en marcha ya en el año 1901- que fue seguido por
el primer presidente de la República, Estrada Palma, daría sus frutos
en pocos años. así, en el censo de 1907 un 36% de los niños en edad de
escolarización – entre 6 y 14 años- aparecen matriculados, lo cual era el
doble de los que aparecían en el censo de 1899. Y si comparamos esta ci-
fra con otros países aún adquiere más relevancia. Por ejemplo, en España
ese porcentaje no se alcanzaría hasta el año 1930, incluso para el mismo
año 1907 las cifras cubanas de asistencia a las escuelas superaban a las de
estados unidos. también resulta significativo el avance observado en la
escolarización de la población negra y mulata que alcanzó niveles simi-
lares a los de la población blanca32.
de todos modos, independientemente de lo acertado o no de su inter-
pretación, hemos de señalar también que los principios educativos defen-
didos por los ácratas excedieron la mera crítica para proponer la confección
de un modelo alternativo y mejorado gracias a los recursos que ofrecían
los nuevos métodos pedagógicos contemporáneos. en ese sentido, sus pro-
puestas aparecen en clara sintonía con la idea de la crítica constructiva por
la cual la valoración o análisis sobre la idoneidad o, ente este caso, la falta
de idoneidad de un sujeto u objeto para los fines previstos se realiza a fin
32
Censo de la República de Cuba, 1907 (Washington: Government Printing Office, 1908), 148-150.
las cifras de españa y estado unidos, en José antonio piqueras, Sociedad civil y poder en Cuba.
Colonia y poscolonia (madrid: siglo XXi, 2005), 341-342.
de que algo sea creado o genere resultados visibles y no lo contrario. Y ése

era precisamente el espíritu del modelo propuesto por Ferrer i Guardia:
“trabajar para la transformación de la escuela por el estudio del niño, a fin
de probar científicamente que la organización actual de la enseñanza es de-
fectuosa y adoptar mejoras progresivas”33.
A mediados del año 1913 cerraba sus puertas la última de las escuelas
racionalistas. no obstante, su estela sería seguida por los trabajadores
y a comienzos de la década de 1920 los integrantes de la recién creada
Federación Obrera de La Habana pusieron en funcionamiento nuevos cen-
tros ferrerianos en distintas localidades de la isla.
33
Francisco Ferrer, “la renovación de la escuela”, Boletín de la Escuela Moderna 1 (1908), 6.
M. Lima
Chapter 9
Reflections on the Cuban Student Movement:
1952-1961
upon Fidel castro’s arrival in havana following the triumph of the

cuban revolution, one of his first official visits was to the university of
havana to recognize students in their fight for freedom. a ceremony took
place on January 7, 1959 at the Escalinata, the colossal front steps that mark
the entrance to the university. the selected site was no coincidence. it had
tremendous symbolism, representing student rebellion across generations.
the biggest student demonstrations against the machado and Batista dic-
tatorships throughout the 1920s, 1930s and 1950s had congregated in the
Escalinata and then advanced to the streets of havana. at the steps of the
Escalinata the new revolutionary government made a symbolic ceremony
before a large gathering of young people. dr. manuel urrutia lleó, the
president of cuba, and every minister in his cabinet made a public oath be-
fore students to conduct honest government and to rid cuba from tyranny1.
the event revealed the significance of students and young people as pro-
tagonists in the struggle that led to the triumph of the cuban revolution.
Yet, despite its importance, very little academic research exists on cuban
students in the early stages of the revolution. the only book-length study
on the topic was published outside cuba over four decades ago and focuses
mainly on power struggles between the state and students2. While this is an
important aspect, it does not pay attention to how the politics, organization
and characteristics of the student movement in the pre-revolutionary era in-
fluenced their response to the revolutionary government. it also neglects to
explore how the transition of cuban society between 1959 and 1961 shaped
relationships between students on different sides of the political spectrum.
1
“designada la nueva directiva de maestros normales”, Revolución, 7 January 1959.
2
Jaime suchlicki, University Students and Revolution in Cuba, 1920-1968 (coral Gables, Fla.:
university of miami press, 1969).
this article focuses on the student movement from 1952 until 1961. it ar-
gues that students responded to the revolution of 1959, motivated by their
own historical expectations, ideology and organizational characteristics. it is
attentive to the heterogeneous responses of young people to the revolution
as well as their agreements and disagreements with the revolutionary gov-
ernment. One key question this article considers is: how prepared were stu-
dents for a revolution as radical as the one that occurred in cuba after 1959?
1. Ideology
to respond this question it is first necessary to analyze the ideological

affinities between university students and the ideals of the revolution after
1959. the main goal of the student movement, since its inception in 1923
when the Federation of university students (Feu) was established, had
been to carry out a revolution in cuba3. since the close of the 19th century
wars of independence, the goal of revolution4 translated into national frus-
tration, particularly after the platt amendment5 which prohibited cubans
from building a republic that could re-distribute national wealth and un-
dertake agrarian and other needed socio-economic reforms. a country that
had been ravished by a destructive war of independence emerged into a
republic with traditional institutions and parties that were corrupt and in-
effective in addressing the pressing issues unsolved since end of the war
with spain in 1898. students in the 1920s were part of a new generation
impacted by unemployment, a backward educational system, corrupt gov-
ernment, economic depression and other social conflicts. skeptical about
the ability of the old Veterans and Patriot Movement, which represented
the older generation of politicians with traditional ways of doing politics,
they took inspiration from global events and applied it to domestic prob-
lems6. influenced by the cordova movement in argentina as well as the na-
tionalist and populist ideas7 impacting latin america at the time, students
came to define themselves as revolutionaries8. initially they fought for au-
tonomy, but eventually they realized the university could not be reformed
without first radically changing society. together with workers9 and intel-
3
Raúl Roa, En Pie (Santa Clara: Universidad Central de las Villas, 1959), 173-184.
4
José martí, Obras Completas, vol. 2 (la habana: ciencias sociales), 93-96.
5
“cuban treaty signed”, New York Times, 23 april 1903.
6
robert Whitney, State and Revolution in Cuba: Mass Mobilization and Political Change, 1920-
1940 (chapel hill: university of north carolina press, 2001), 36-101.
7
during the 1930s and 1940s populism became a wide spread political phenomenon in latin
america. there were numerous governments and political movements in the hemisphere
that presented themselves as populists because they mobilized large masses of workers. see
robert h. dix, “populism: authoritarian and democratic”, Latin American Research Review 2
(1985), 29-49; Whitney, State, 94-164.
8
Julio antonio mella, Escritos Revolucionarios (mexico: siglo XXi, 1978), 39.
9
the idea of a collation between workers and students was initiated by Julio antonio mella
lectuals, students presided over a nationalist revolution in august of 1933

that overthrew dictator Gerardo machado10. although the revolution end-
ed in failure as the united states removed their diplomatic support for the
students and the progressive wing of the revolution in favor of backing the
army faction led by Fulgencio Batista, students demonstrated throughout
this period their endorsement of a radical, nationalist revolution as a solu-
tion to cuba’s conflicts11.
revolutionary university students in the 1950s emerged on the political
scene inspired by the actions and ideas of the 1930 generation. they exten-
sively read the works of Mella, Rubén Martínez Villena, Pablo de la Torriente
Brau, and Raúl Roa to understand how the 1933 revolution was carried out12.
like their predecessors, they distrusted the political system13 and believed
that cuba needed change beyond constitutional boundaries – that essential
social, economic and political reform in cuba could not be accomplished
through traditional parties and institutions. this rejection sprang from the
inability of traditional parties and institutions in cuba to offer honest gov-
ernment during the Auténtico14 years of the 1940s or pose any type of effective
resistance to the military coup staged by Fulgencio Batista in march 195215.
thus, students developed political thought in opposition to dictator-
ship. the conquest of power by military force was not an isolated case
in cuba; it was part of a widespread wave of emerging dictatorships in
Latin America and the Caribbean. In Nicaragua, Paraguay, Venezuela,
Guatemala and the dominican republic, dictators abruptly irrupted na-
tional politics and frustrated nationalist democratic and reformist govern-
ments. in this crusade, dictators were supported and encouraged by the
united states under the new geopolitical realities of the cold War and its
struggle against the soviet union and the spread of communism in latin
who was influenced by the apra movement in peru. the apra was established in 1919 in
lima, peru and advocated alliances between students and workers. see steve stern, Populism
in Peru: The Emergence of the Masses and the Politics of Social Control (madison, Wis.: university
of Wisconsin press, 1980), 129; mella, Escritos, 39.
10
the 1933 revolution led to the establishment of a nationalist government that lasted for 100
days. El Gobierno de los 100 días as it came to be known was led by students and profession-
als. they decreed significant socio political and economic reforms aimed to restructure the
national wealth. there are numerous works on the subject. see for example: Jorge ibarra, La
mediación del 33: Ocaso del Machadato (la habana: editora política, 1999).
11
russell B. porter, “students Guiding the destinies of cuba”, New York Times, 15 september
1933.
12
Julio García Oliveras, José Antonio Echevarría: Lucha Estudiantil Contra Batista (la habana:
editora política, 1980), 227.
13
“manifiesto del movimiento 26 de Julio y la Federación estudiantil universitaria al pueblo
de cuba” in ¡Presente!: Apuntes para la Historia del Movimiento Estudiantil Cubano (la habana:
editora política, 2000), 211-212.
14
this refers to the authentic revolutionary cuban party. they defined themselves the au-
thentic revolutionaries.
15
“en cuba”, Bohemia, 28 december 1952; r. hart phillips, “cuba recovering after revolu-
tion”, New York Times, 12 march 1952.
america16. along with their counterparts from other parts of latin america
and the caribbean, cuban students shaped their ideas and actions as part
of a continental movement against “the dictatorships that oppressed the
continent”. students even went as far as supporting a union of democrat-
ic nations of the americas in a continental campaign to break diplomatic
relations with the Batista government and with the rest of dictatorships
in the hemisphere that did “not respect the human rights of their people,
and used torture against detainees and political prisoners and violate the
right to political asylum”17. the dictatorial landscape of cuba in the 1950s
helps to explain students’ endorsement of violence: because they did not
see any democratic solution to ridding cuba from the Batista dictatorship,
students supported armed insurrection18. they believed that only real hope
for revolution was “con los hierros en la mano”19.
it is interesting to note that students possessed an ideological outlook
with an eclectic combination of radicalism, democracy, nationalism, anti
imperialism and revolution. they demanded a return to the guarantees of
the 1940 constitution, calling for free elections, the respect all individual
rights including freedom of expression, assembly, press, and the inviolabil-
ity of university autonomy. they believed in the separation of powers with
an independent judicial system20, while at the same time holding radical
ideas of change beyond constitutional and legal boundaries of the repub-
lic21. students favored an educational reform that would encourage more
technical programs of study at the university. a strong nationalist, anti im-
perialist sentiment prevailed in the student movement. as several speeches
of José antonio echevarría22 suggest, students condemned united states
interventionism in the americas, particularly their support for dictator-
ships in nicaragua, Guatemala and the dominican republic23.
students had a troubled relationship with the popular socialist party
and the socialist Youth. amparo chaple, for example, a member of the
socialist Youth was elected student president in the school of Biology and
did not offer her vote for echevarría as the president of the Feu24. socialists
did not approve of students violent methods. the popular socialist party,
16
see david F. schmitz “the lesser of two evils” in Problems in Modern Latin American History:
Sources and Interpretations, eds. John charles chasteen and James a. Wood (Washington, del:
sr Books, 2004), 281-286.
17
Oliveras, José Antonio Echevarría, 160.
18
Julio García Oliveras, Los Estudiantes Cubanos (la habana: abril, 2003), 35.
19
this phrase translates “With weapons in hand”, ibid., 198.
20
“declaración de la Feu desde el exilio” in ¡Presente!: Apuntes, 200-201.
21
José antonio echevarría “letters to the times”, New York Times, 14 november 1954.
22
echevarría was the leader of the student urban underground movement. president of the
Feu and the revolutionary directorate between 1954 and 1957.
23
Oliveras, Los Estudiantes, 37-40.
24
Departamento de Versiones Taquigráficas del Gobierno Revolucionario, “Segunda Vista del
Juicio contra el delator marcos rodríguez”, Bohemia, 3 april, 1964.
for example, characterized the attack on the presidential palace and simi-
lar actions as “putchists” and “bourgeoisie”, and claimed that they only
correct strategy was the popular struggle based on the mobilization of the
proletariats25. the historic tensions and conflicts between members of the
socialist Youth and students at the university became a constant source of
tension during the first months of the revolution26. Overall, a close analysis
of student’s ideology suggest that their responses to the 1959 revolution
(either in support or opposition) were shaped by ideas and expectations
developed during years in the urban underground struggle.
2. Organization
political autonomy characterized the cuban student movement across

generations. in the 1950s, the event that demonstrated the possibility of
carrying out an armed insurrection against the Batista government without
reliance on traditional parties was led by Fidel castro when he and a group
of students and young workers carried an attack on the military headquar-
ters in santiago de cuba and Bayamo on July 26, 195327. Both assaults failed
in their objectives to capture the military garrisons and initiate a popular
rebellion in Oriente as most of the attackers were either captured or killed
by the Batista army. despite the setback the moncada episode was signifi-
cant as it set a precedent for revolutionary undertakings in the future. the
event inspired the university student movement into independent organi-
zation and action against the government28.
Organizational independence made students a credible force in Cuba.
it placed the university at the centre of revolutionary struggle. throughout
the republican period students used the university as the headquarters of
revolutionary struggle against dictatorships and corrupt governments.
students relied on the university as a sanctuary to hide from government
persecution, conceal weapons and conspire against the government. they
transformed university organizations such as the Feu into a means for po-
litical mobilization to organize street demonstrations29. students contended
25
Juventud Socialista, “¡Fuera la Ingerencia Yanqui en Cuba! ¡Cese el Terror del Gobierno de
Batista¡ ¡Unión y Lucha para Derrotar la Tiranía!”, 18 October 1957, in Instituto de Historia de
Cuba, La Habana, Organizaciones Juveniles Fondo I, P-2 1094.
26
alberto muller, La Cruz Sigue en Pie: Biografía y Escritos de Alberto Muller: Ideario de una Nueva
Generación (caracas: directorio revolucionario estudiantil, 1970), 11.
27
partido socialista popular, VIII Asamblea Nacional: Informes, Resoluciones, Programas, Estatu-
tos (la habana: ediciones populares, 1960), 54.
28
upon learning about the moncada assault, university students in havana discussed possible
actions that day (26 July 1953) in support of the attack but it was impossible as the government
surrounded the university of havana. in the next months students in havana organized a
campaign for the liberation of the moncada assaulters and recognized Fidel castro as the one
who began revolutionary struggle against Batista. Oliveras, José Antonio Echevarría, 103-114.
29
the rich calendar of student martyrs and historical dates served as an opportunity for street
that universities should be free from the ideological and economic pres-
sures of the state, and should act as the social consciousness of the nation30.
university autonomy eventually precipitated conflicts with the revolution-
ary government after 1959 as it forged an oppositionist culture that repre-
sented an obstacle to their integration with any government.
3. Reproduction of Pre-Revolutionary Politics: 1959-1961
in the early years of the revolution students from both sides of the politi-
cal spectrum responded to the new socio-political and economic realities by
reproducing their pre revolutionary tactics, mobilization strategies, values
and ideology. their political views on dictatorship, democracy, nationalism,
and communism informed their actions and responses to revolution. they
used the physical spaces of the university as their main headquarters for po-
litical mobilization and a defense of the organizational independence of the
Feu. a resurgence in violence to either assert student support or rejection to
the revolutionary laws characterized relationships between the new revolu-
tionary government and students during the early stages of the revolution.
although the revolutionary government counted on the overwhelming
support of the majority of cuba’s younger generation, student responses to
the revolution were as heterogeneous and diverse as their political ideas.
they were divided among two main groups which responded differently
to the revolution. Both favored the revolution, but one expressed uncondi-
tional support while the other backed the state conditionally31. members of
the revolutionary directorate (dr)32, which had been a crucial group in the
protests. some of the more relevant street demonstrations during this period were: the sym-
bolic burial of the 1940 constitution on 6 april 6 1952; the remembrance of antonio Guiteras,
a revolutionary of the 1930 generation assassinated by Batista on 8 may 8 1952; the celebra-
tion of the fall of machado and the 1933 revolution on 12 august 1952; the remembrance of
the offense against the martyrs of the 1933 revolution on 4 september 4 1952; the anniversary
of the assassination of trejo, a student martyr in the struggle against Batista, on 30 september
1952. On 27 November 1952 students jumped into the field of a baseball game broadcasted
on television to display a sign against Batista. see: special to the new York times “student
Protest One Year after Batista’s Coup”, New York Times, 11 march 1953; herbert l. matthews
“Students in Cuba Opposing Batista”, New York Times, 15 april 1952; special to the new York
Times, “5 Students Shot Over Marring of the Statue”, New York Times, 16 January 1953; special
to the new York times, “2 cuban students shot in march”, New York Times, 14 april 1953. the
street protest became a distinguishing characteristic of the student movement in their struggle
against Batista. see mario G. del cueto, “el aporte del directorio revolucionario en la lucha
contra Batista”, Bohemia, 11 January 1959.
30
luis Boza domínguez, La Situación Universitaria en Cuba (santiago de chile: editorial del
pacifico, 1961), 11.
31
lloyd a. Free, Attitudes of the Cuban People Toward the Castro Regime in the Summer of 1960,
(princeton: institute for international social research, 1960), 14.
32
the dr was the armed wing of the university student movement established by echevarría
in 1956 to carry commando operations against members of the Batista regime. after the failed
attack on the presidential palace in 1957 it relocated its operations to rural and urban areas in
central cuba.
urban and rural resistance against the Batista dictatorship, demanded more
participation in the new revolutionary government. despite their support,
alliance and admiration for Fidel castro and the 26 of July movement, the
dr led a series of “symbolic” protests during the first months of 1959. these
demonstrations by the dr included: refusing to turn their weapons over
to the revolutionary government, taking over temporary control over the
university of havana, and occupying the national capitol. the dr did not
agree with government by decree. instead, they called for the establishment
of a legislative body consisting of representation from different revolution-
ary groups. Whereas these differences were later settled between the dr
and Fidel castro33, actions of this type suggested how the students’ ideas
on democracy and dictatorship shaped their initial actions. they responded
to the new socio-political and economic reality of the nation, by reprising
their pre revolutionary tactics, mobilization strategies, values and ideology.
in this case, the idea of contesting government by decree, taking over the
university and other relevant buildings resembled past republican politics.
Youth political action in early revolutionary cuba revolved around
the educational reform which motivated a mixed response among young
people34. support or opposition for the reform differentiated young revo-
lutionaries from oppositionists. students who were fervent supporters of
the revolution passionately favored the reform but perceived the existing
institutions and laws as obstacles to its prompt execution. these students
reacted autonomously from the state when they started taking over control
of several high schools and universities across havana35. through their
actions, students pressured the revolutionary leadership to immediately
implement the reform clauses that ordered the expulsion of professors and
students accused of having collaborated with the previous Batista regime.
the protagonists of these acts were both students affiliated to these insti-
tutions and young radicals that were outsiders to these educational cen-
ters but took an active involvement in student politics. the instituto de la
Vibora, the Colegio Baldor and the University of Havana were three among
many other cases of school takeovers that occurred between February and
april of 1959, and were extensively reported in the press36. in all cases the
student rationale was a sense of urgency to take justice in their own hands,
to act beyond the established laws of those schools and above the judicial
procedures established in the educational reform. students would take
control of several buildings and faculties in their institutions to access the
files of those professors suspected of collaboration with the Batista dictator-
33
“students Yield their arms: revolutionary directorate said it never planned to Fight
against castro”, New York Times, 11 January 1959; R. Hart Philips “Power Struggle Goes On”,
New York Times, 10 January 1959.
34
“sobre la reforma universitaria”, Revolución, 4 February 1959.
35
“Ocupar Planteles es Contrarrevolucionario”, Revolución, 17 april 1959.
36
“intervienen alumnos de institutos y la normal”, Revolución, 4 april 1959.
ship. then, by force of occupation, they would pressure the school to expel
them. the case of Baldor (the founder and director of the Baldor college)
was typical. Baldor had been accused of persecuting revolutionaries, of
evading taxes for over $10,000, and of publicly humiliating and even ex-
pelling any professors that had criticized him37. a similar occurrence took
place at the university of havana where students took over control of the
dean’s offices numerous times. they argued that current university statues
and legal proceedings were unable to ensure the expulsion of corrupt, in-
ept and professors accused of spying for the Batista regime38.
several factors explained these responses, namely: political behavior ac-
quired and transmitted across generations; continuity in the culture of vio-
lence and radicalism that characterized student militancy in the 1930s, 1940s
and 1950s; the institutional vacuum of the early stages of the revolution that
disoriented young people; and, finally, a desire, by those students tortured
by the Batista regime, to take justice in their own hands. Young revolutionar-
ies therefore acted as protagonists of radical change, as an autonomous mo-
bilizing force that pressured the leadership into the quick implementation of
reforms. contrary to what some scholars have suggested when analyzing the
student movement in the early months of the revolution, young people were
not passively targeted and manipulated by the state. although organized
later under government control, in this early moment, young people took
independent actions. students were not manipulated or indoctrinated by the
state at this time (1959), as revolutionary institutions were still in the pro-
cess of been established (only in 1961 was education in cuba nationalized)39.
thus, students’ actions and mobilization in support for the educational re-
form was a consequence of ideological affinities with the revolution. their
ideological convictions from the pre-revolutionary period supported the
idea of the socio-political transformation of cuban society.
the essence that distinguished the student movement (autonomy and
rebelliousness) led to problems with the radical nature of the revolution.
cuban society, between the fall of 1959 and the spring of 1961, was in the
midst of a radical transition and re-definition of political values, ideology
and goals. unity became the hallmark of the new period as the state eventu-
ally considered organizational autonomy out of synch with the objectives of
the revolution. all forms of opposition were considered “anti-cuban” and
“unpatriotic”40. On the international front, the government’s need to obtain
economic support from the soviet union led to a closer alliance between the
revolutionary government of Fidel castro and the socialists. this in turn
37
“acusado Baldor de Graves irregularidades”, Revolución, 28 march 1959.
38
“Dispuesto el Estudiantado a Ocupar la Universidad”, Revolución, 2 February 1959.
39
“intervienen alumnos de institutos y la normal”, Revolución, 4 april 1959, 13; editorial, “Y
ahora a alfabetizar”, Mella, 27 may 1961, 8.
40
partido socialista popular, VIII Asamblea Nacional, 55, 142 and 157.
brought about a new official discourse that redefined political values and
influenced state relationship with students41. What it meant to be a “revo-
lutionary” changed drastically from an earlier humanist understanding to
a radical and pro-socialist conception. to be a revolutionary in early 1959
meant to support a humanist ideology that equally favored social justice,
individual freedoms and human rights42. early revolutionaries were nation-
alists; they were against all forms of tyranny, supported free elections and
reestablishment of the 1940 constitution suspended during the Fulgencio
Batista regime in march of 1952. they supported all the socio-economic re-
forms of the revolution, but some were anti-communists and opposed re-
lations with the soviet union43. during the radical period, support for the
revolution meant unconditional backing of de the state, regardless of its
pro-socialist position at home or its alliance with the soviet union abroad44.
discrepancies over socialism became a conflictive issue for students.
Oppositionists questioned the revolution’s turn to “communism” and its
alliance with the socialist Bloc. they also protested the integration of the
Feu to the international student union which they claimed was controlled
by the Socialist International. They organized a protest against Soviet Vice-
minister anastas mikokyan’s visit to cuba and sabotaged the hiring of pro-
fessors affiliated to the communist party at the university. together with
other oppositionist groups which still held key positions in the media and
religious schools, they actively instigated other students to rebel against
socialism and government interference in university affairs45.
these conflicts were as much over the control of public spaces as they
were over ideology. every protest initiated within university campuses
was tremendously harmful for the image of the state since the university
was a symbol long associated with martyrdom, heroism and revolution-
ary struggle. the political instinct of students was to use the spaces of the
university as an expression of political discontent, but for the revolution-
ary government support from youth was a serious matter which helped
the emerging state to differentiate itself from the repressive Batista past.
in official speeches and newspaper articles, students and young people
were praised as a vital political force, a potentially crucial ally to legiti-
mize the revolution. to use the spaces of the university for oppositionist
purposes, however, was interpreted by the state as a challenge to the le-
gitimacy from the revolution.
41
edward Gonzalez, Cuba under Castro: The Limits of Charisma (Boston: houghton mifflin,
1974), 118-119.
42
Fidel castro, “¿Qué es el humanismo?”, Revista Artes Graficas, 5 July 1959, 5.
43
us department of state, Foreign service despatch, american consulate, santiago de cuba,
“student Group protest communist action”,14 may 1959, file 737.00/5-1459, 1955-1959 cen-
tral decimal File, rG 59, national archives, Washington, d.c.
44
partido socialista popular, VIII Asamblea Nacional, 55-157.
45
muller, Cruz Sigue en Pie, 11-4.
to control the physical and symbolic spaces of the university from op-
positionists, the revolutionary government established the university
Brigades in October 1959. Their goal was to establish an armed militia
at the university of havana to protect the university facilities, day and
night, from “counterrevolutionary students” and to ensure the “universi-
ty was only for revolutionaries”46. the Brigades guarded every square of
the university and every corner. at night, along with members of the state
security, they hid in bushes to prevent “counterrevolutionary” students
from attempting to gain control of the institution. university Brigades for
example made use of the Escalinata as a “sacred site” from where to orga-
nize their political acts. in the official ceremony that announced the forma-
tion of the Brigades on november 27, 1959, students left from the Escalinata
and walked through the streets of havana in military parades47. as alicia
Gómez Granada, a former member of the Brigades, expressed: “students
descended from the Escalinata which has transformed since the triumph of
the revolution in a symbol of joy. the Escalinata is the cradle of revolution,
from where student rebelliousness gathered and marched so many times
in the past”48. another student leader of the time commented: “For the first
time in many years student walked down from the Escalinata for a purpose
other than to turn the flame and protest against a tyrannical government”.
Oppositionist students also gave the Escalinata a similar meaning. in
January of 1960 they organized a protest that would take it as a starting
point. From that point they would then walk to the streets of havana and
meet in the building of a local TV channel to give their support to a docu-
ment that was going to be read on television expressing university stu-
dent rejection of communism and relations with the soviet union. the
university Brigades impeded oppositionists to use the Escalinata. salvador
capote, one of the Brigade leaders recalls what happened that day:
the student Brigades impeded traitors from using the Escalinata to

walk out of the university. We told them that counterrevolutionaries were
not allowed to use the Escalinata as it had represented historical opposition
against dictatorship49.
For university students, regardless of their ideology, political use of uni-

versity boundaries was a way to give moral support to their ideological
claims and follow on the footsteps of the student movement of the 1950s
which had initiated all their actions at this historic site. in contrast to pre-
vious years, after 1959 the radical nature of the revolution provided the
46
maría luisa lafita de Juan, ed., La Brigada Universitaria José A. Echevarría y el Bon (la ha-
bana: editorial politica, 1983), vii.
47
ibid., 14-18.
48
ibid., 27.
49
ibid., 50-51.
ideological justification that impeded the use of symbolic or any other sites
as an avenue for dissidence against the state. the official discourse sup-
ported the idea that only the most unconditional followers of the revo-
lutionary state had the moral authority to use the Escalinata as a way to
legitimize the revolutionary state itself. the struggle to monopolize physi-
cal space inside the university was equated with power in the revolution-
ary era. eventually, the reproduction of pre-revolutionary student politics
clashed with the new political values and culture that emerged during the
radical period of revolutionary transition toward socialism.
On the topic of autonomy, the University of Havana also became a con-
tested site of conflict and resolution. students debated passionately the
issue of university autonomy, which was perceived as one of their main
achievements following the 1933 revolution50. in the republican era, par-
ticularly in the mid-1950s, the autonomy had served as an instrument to
guarantee that the university became an independent institution with le-
gal protection from police intervention and the headquarters of opposi-
tionist activity directed to fight dictatorial and corrupt governments. to
oppositionists, the theme of autonomy was a legitimate claim based on
the student martyrs who had given their lives for the revolution51. to sup-
porters of the state, however, there was no purpose to autonomy as gov-
ernment and university were supposed to be united and not in dispute52.
the new radical mentality of the transition dictated that autonomy was
an obstacle to government attempts to open the university for the hum-
ble classes and implement a new system based on technical and scientific
education in tune with the professional needs of the nation53. eventually,
the idea of autonomy did not have state support and the vision of a uni-
versity united with the government prevailed. the official interpretation
was that autonomy was only a means for students to use the university
as a space for political organization in order to achieve the ultimate goal
of revolution54. among students, there were mixed interpretations about
autonomy, as some believed that it was a historical achievement neces-
sary to ensure that those in power fulfilled their promises to the people.
4. Conclusions
in conclusion, a study of cuban students throughout the 1950s and

early 1960s reveals how elements of continuity and change shape cuban
history. Without an understanding of student political activism in the pre-
50
Boza domínguez, Situación Universitaria, 18.
51
muller, Cruz Sigue en Pie, 28.
52
53
“sobre la reforma universitaria”, Revolución, 4 February 1959.
54
revolutionary era it is not possible to broadly assess their heterogeneous

responses to the revolution after 1959. the period between 1959 and 1961
revealed the dynamics of transition and how this in turn affected relation-
ships between the state and students. events in cuba and student activism
cannot be explained in a political void as they were a reflection of broader
ideological trends in cuba and abroad. students’ resistance demonstrated
the intersection of the local and the global. their political activism and mil-
itancy was a result of events connected to cuba’s historical evolution but
also part and parcel of hemispheric forces of nationalism, populism, dicta-
torship, communism and revolution. these forces shaped students’ actions
and motivations.
Part IV
transforming urban space:

la habana as a case study
On the previous page – Ricardo Porro’s Escuelas de Artes Plasticas (photo by G. Pao-
lucci, 2007)
Part IV
Transforming Urban Space: La Habana as a

Case Study
this section is completely dedicated to la habana, the cuban capital

whose rich history and culture exemplify how cuba is in the world and the
world is in cuba. By taking distinctive perspectives, an urban sociologist
(Gabriella paolucci), an urbanist (raffaele paloscia) and an architect (luca
spitoni) recast the story of the transformation of the city’s space through
international processes and social revolutions. the architectural mix of the
colonial past, early-to mid-20th-century american styles and varieties of
modern functionalism make havana unique. Before the 1959 revolution,
la habana hosted a fifth of the cuban population, half of the country’s
industrial production, eighty percent of cuban imports and three quar-
ters of the cuban professional class. prohibition brought american tour-
ists to drink and gamble in the often us-run havana bars in the 1920s and
the luxurious hotel nacional opened in the 1930s. after the second World
War, the Florida mafia made new profitable investments in the growing
industry of mass tourism and havana’s restaurants, exotic theaters, ca-
sinos and brothels. pan american airways operated from sixty to eighty
round-trip flights a week between miami and havana at a very low fare
that the us working classes could afford1. then the early years of the
revolution changed everything. as Gabriella paolucci argues in this sec-
tion, la habana drafted new urban plans and designed new architecture
as a strategy to build a new society by exploring the potentialities of new
architectonic functions and languages. la habana’s long process to define
its urban identity, which raffaele paloscia’s essay examines thoroughly by
moving from early colonial times to the first half of the 20th century, went
1
see: ann armbruster, The Life and Times of Miami Beach (new York: random house, 1995);
miguel a. Bretos, Cuba and Florida: Exploration of an Historic Connection, 1539-1991 (miami:
historical association of southern Florida, 1991).
through profound changes from the 1960s to the early 1980s. Finally, luca
spitoni’s mapping of the habana del este during the second half of the 20th
century shows the impact of social and cultural movements on architec-
tural developments.
G. Paolucci
Chapter 10
Transformaciones urbanas y cambios
sociales: el caso de La Habana
1. La visibilidad de la historia en La Habana
¿cómo sería la habana de no haber sido testigo y protagonista de los

cambios que han determinado su historia en la mitad del último siglo? Es
cuanto se pregunta mario coyula haciendo una hipótesis sobre el “futuro
del pasado” de esta ciudad:
¿cómo sería ahora la habana si la revolución de 1959 no hubiera sucedi-

do? probablemente no muy distinta de la que visualizaba el plan piloto de
Sert en 1955-1958: una gran capital de cuatro millones de habitantes, definiti-
vamente desmarcada de las demás ciudades cubanas, organizada en función
del auto privado, con su litoral bloqueado por una pared continua de edifi-
cios en altura (un proceso que ya había comenzado en el tramo del malecón
en El Vedado), y un centro terciarizado y a la vez tugurizado y gentrificado,
donde el extenso y coherente patrimonio edificado que recogía más de cua-
tro siglos habría quedado reducido a unos pocos immuebles singulares. la
isla artificial propuesta en el Plan frente al Malecón de Centro Habana, se
habría construido y llenado con casinos y hoteles1.
en estas páginas trataré de ilustrar algunos de los motivos por los que
la habana, como escribe coyula, se diferencia tanto de cualquier otra gran
ciudad contemporánea. como veremos, las razones de dicha diversidad se
hallan en su historia, especialmente en los años posteriores a la ruptura revo-
lucionaria de 1959. de aquellos eventos la habana es, al mismo tiempo, testi-
go y protagonista, convocada a expresar e incorporar los cambios profundos
1
Mario Coyula, “Vivir La Habana”, La gaceta de Cuba. Arquitectura cubana entre sociedad y la
cultura 6 (2007), 5.
que transformarán radicalmente la sociedad cubana. Y lo realiza de modo

muy original, logrando mantener un pasado denso de memorias y expresan-
do un presente fuertemente proyectado hacia el futuro. dichas cualidades,
según Kevin Lynch, constituyen el fundamento de aquella apertura al tiempo y
de aquel sentido del cambio que la ciudad manifiesta en cada esquina2.
la referencia a Kevin lynch no es casual. se trata de uno de los testigos
más prestigiosos de los cambios del tejido urbano de la habana, la capital de
la primera revolución socialista del tercer mundo. a este prestigioso urbanista
norteamericano, que permanece en la ciudad en varias ocasiones y que cola-
bora con los arquitectos y urbanistas comprometidos en la transformación de
la ciudad, se deben algunas de las páginas más bellas escritas sobre este tema3.
Kevin lynch reputa la habana el modelo ejemplar por su capacidad de
contener, interpretar y manifestar el fluir del tiempo, además de reflejar la
mutación de la cual es testigo y protagonista. en el tejido de la metrópoli
caribeña, lynch halla esa “visibilidad de la historia” que para él consti-
tuye una de las características más significativas de los ambientes urba-
nos que poseen una gran “apertura al tiempo” y un enraizado “sentido del
cambio”. “el objetivo de la construcción del comunismo en un sólo salto
– observa lynch a inicios de los años 70 – está transformando cuba. como
receptáculo de dicha transformación, la ciudad colonial de la habana se
resiste, pero a la vez suministra la acumulación de capital que permite a la
revolución superar las difíciles fases iniciales. el ambiente de la habana
refleja en modo excepcional este repentino vuelco”4.
en el momento en que el estudioso estadounidense realiza sus viajes a
la habana – de los cuales escribirá en What Time is this Place? – la ciudad
aún está sumergida en la “luna de miel de la revolución”5. si bien han
pasado muchos años desde el “triunfo de la revolución”, como suelen
decir en cuba, por las calles de la capital se sigue respirando la atmósfe-
2
Kevin lynch, What Time Is This Place? (cambridge: mit press, 1972).
3
Kevin lynch, ferviente admirador de la revolución cubana, como tantos intelectuales del
mundo, fue invitado por el instituto de planificación Física para impartir conferencias y par-
ticipar en los proyectos innovadores de los primeros años de la revolución. las huellas de la
presencia de Lynch en La Habana son aún muy vivas. Mario Coyula en una entrevista publi-
cada en 2005, recuerda con gran simpatía su presencia en la isla. roberto segre “entrevista al
arquitecto mario coyula”, Ciudad y Territorio. Estudios Territoriales 143 (2005), 209-222.
4
lynch, What Time, 82.
5
simone de Beauvoir, La force des choses (paris: Gallimard, 1963). simone de Beauvoir se refiere
en estos términos a la primerísima fase de la revolución cubana, recordando el viaje que junto
a Jean-paul sartre hiciera en febrero de 1960. en relación al mismo, cfr. el reportaje de sartre
escrito para France Soir, nunca antes publicado en volumen en Francia: Jean-paul sartre, Sartre
on Cuba (new York: Ballantine Books, 1961). sólo en 2008 el reportaje sobre la revolución cubana
ha sido nuevamente publicado en Francia: Jean-Paul Sartre, “Ouragan sur le sucre”, Les temps
modernes 649 (2008). en italia la primera traducción de casi todos los escritos de sartre sobre
el tema, ha sido editada sólo en 2005, para la cual escribí la introducción (Gabriella paolucci,
“introduzione”, en Jean-paul sartre, Visita a Cuba (Bolsena: massari, 2005); ver también Gabriella
paolucci, “sartre’s humanism and the cuban revolution”, Theory & Society 36 (2007), 245-263.
Part IV – Transforming the Urban Space 157
ra de grandes cambios sociales. en las calles, plazas y locales se percibe

una amalgama entre la potente proyección hacia el futuro y el vínculo
igualmente fuerte con el pasado. un pasado inteligible en la espléndida
arquitectura colonial del centro histórico, en los valiosos edificios del mo-
vimiento moderno y en la misma estructura del tejido urbano. un pasado
con el cual se truncó, pero que no se pretende ignorar, sino más bien re-
interpretar y traducir en diferentes lenguajes y textos, a la luz de nuevos
valores que conforman la construcción del presente. las huellas y sedi-
mentos que la historia colonial dejó en la capital de cuba son acogidos y
reintegrados en el proceso de renovación de la ciudad, como testimonio
del “rostro bifronte del colonialismo, que crea belleza y riqueza, pero sólo
la distribuye a una parte restringida de la población”6. la conservación y
tutela de los mismos, no obstante, están sujetos – y en cierto sentido vin-
culados – a una imagen inédita de la ciudad y al nuevo pensamiento ur-
banístico. uno y otro se refleja en la modificación de las funciones y usos
del ambiente urbano. Kevin lynch habla de “reflejo” cuando relata cómo
en La Habana aún se perciba el cambio que determinó la nueva forma ur-
bana al día siguiente de la fuga de Batista, en el amanecer de 1959.
los modos y formas de dicho “reflejo” tienen mucho que decirnos. no
sólo porque nos hablan – con el lenguaje de la arquitectura y de la urbanís-
tica – de cómo la población habanera lee e interpreta el pasado de su ciu-
dad, sino también cómo sabe modelarlo a las exigencias del presente y a los
sueños del futuro. por tanto está en juego no sólo la salvaguardia del patri-
monio arquitectónico de inmenso valor que heredó la ciudad en 1959, sino
también el uso – hoy se diría “reutilización” – dado de dicho patrimonio en
una situación social que vislumbra y planifica funciones urbanas comple-
tamente novedosas respecto al pasado. Y es ahí, además, donde reside la
fascinación de la habana, hoy como ayer.
2. La herencia del pasado
la herencia que la habana recibe de su pasado es muy rica, como su-

braya duany en la Introducción al libro que coyula, segre y scarpaci dedi-
caron a la ciudad: Havana. Two Faces of the Antillean Metropolis:
la habana contiene la sedimentación de numerosos destinos frustrados.

Fue la gran capital colonial de un imperio europeo particularmente arro-
gante; la heredera republicana de una épica guerra de liberación; la sede
estéticamente refinada de una alta burguesía muy culta; y actualmente, es
el escenario de un proceso revolucionario que no ha desembocado comple-
tamente en el celo ideológico. la pasión del pueblo cubano ha destilado los
6
roberto segre, Arquitectura y urbanismo de la revolución cubana (la habana: pueblo y educa-
ción, 1989).
sucesivos ideales confiriendo a su capital el rostro trágico y heroico que po-

see. Quizá la influencia más grande ejercida en esta ciudad se deba a las
teorías arquitectónicas internacionales, que han purificado, una y otra vez,
los cruces en esta isla. probablemente los arquitectos cubanos, tan cosmopo-
litas, ejercieron una influencia dominante. ¿Podemos concluir diciendo que
la potencia de la arquitectura sumerge las consideraciones socio-políticas?
probablemente existe sólo una certeza: que la arquitectura y el urbanismo de
la habana son soberbios en sentido absoluto. […] leer y visitar la habana
embriaga al punto de convertirnos en fanáticos de urbanismo7.
la habana, nacida a orillas de una bahía y rodeada de murallas, man-

tiene las iniciales dimensiones y más o menos una cierta homogeneidad
hasta principios del siglo XiX, cuando comienza una expansión constante
que perdura hasta inicios de los años cincuenta del siglo pasado.
durante la época colonial, la ciudad, poseía el monopolio legal del co-
mercio en el caribe, constituía la plaza fuerte donde se concentraba todo
el tráfico mercantil hacia España. Por un largo período, es el único centro
urbano significativo en toda la zona: después del exterminio indígena,
el 40% de la población de la isla se concentra en la ciudad, si bien con el
prosperar de las plantaciones de caña de azúcar y tabaco, poco a poco se
extiende al resto de la isla una cierta urbanización. la metrópolis caribe-
ña sigue expandiéndose, sobre todo, durante la máxima concentración de
la economía en manos estadounidenses. todo se concentra en la habana:
la cultura, la economía, la tecnología, la industria y el comercio.
la estructura compacta que conserva la habana durante la expansión
decimonónica, con las relativas funciones al interno del tejido urbano,
poco a poco comienza a desaparecer con el inicio de la división en zonas
funcionales de cada actividad. Por una parte, el sector residencial del nú-
cleo histórico de la ciudad se deteriora – los inmuebles abandonados por
la aristocracia y la burguesía son ocupados por el proletariado urbano –;
por la otra, se produce una transformación en la zona, debido a las nue-
vas estructuras bancarias, comerciales y burocráticas. en relación al per-
fil arquitectónico, la aristocracia y la burguesía logran preservar durante
todo el siglo XiX tanto la tradición colonial como una cierta homogenei-
dad entre la arquitectura urbana y la de las zonas periféricas. durante los
primeros decenios del siglo XX, la habana comienza a caracterizarse por
una mezcla de estilos: neo-renacentista, neo-colonial, neo-barroco, etc.
las transformaciones más significativas se realizan en los años cincuen-
ta, cuando la mayoría de las funciones del centro histórico son trasladadas
a la zona contigua – centro habana – que deviene zona comercial, y a los
repartos del Vedado y Miramar. En estos años el Vedado se convierte en el
7
andres duany, “Foreword”, en Havana. Two Faces of the Antillean Metropolis, eds. roberto
segre, mario coyula y John scarpaci (new York: Wiley, 2002), xxiii.
nuevo centro direccional de la ciudad, en punto de atracción turística y de

las actividades culturales. se construyen las torres de varios pisos de lujosos
edificios que hoy todavía delínean el malecón de la habana. crece el turis-
mo en modo exponencial, sobre todo norteamericano, atraído por el mar, el
clima y por la brillante vida nocturna que se concentra alrededor de los ca-
sinos. invadida por una oleada de hoteles de lujo, casas de juego y burdeles,
durante los años cincuenta la capital de Cuba era terminal del eje Las Vegas-
miami-la habana.
Vinculado a estos procesos, los precios de los terrenos aumentan exce-
sivamente y los especuladores hacen enormes fortunas. al mismo tiempo,
las masas de campesinos, que afluyen a la ciudad en busca de medios de
subsistencia, se derraman en las zonas marginales del tejido urbano, donde
se construyen sus propias barracas8.
la habana comienza, de este modo, a asumir “una configuración urba-
na polinuclear”, como observa roberto segre:
Fuera de los polos de atracción, el ambiente urbano se caracterizó por una

baja densidad y una desproporcionada extensión del “hábitat”, distinguiéndo-
se en relación a las diferencias sociales. las residencias burguesas ocuparon la
nueva urbanización hacia el oeste, aumentando la autonomía individual dentro
de la estructura típica de la “ciudad jardín”, a medida que se alejan del centro.
La gran dispersión se equilibraba gracias a una red viaria eficiente, que respon-
día a la difusión del automóvil, a escala similar a la de los estados unidos9.
este período reveste de gran importancia no sólo desde el punto de

vista del desarrollo urbanístico, sino también desde el perfil estilístico. en
efecto, los movimientos internacionales de vanguardia de los años trein-
ta llegan a cuba sólo entre los años cuarenta y cincuenta, cuando en los
barrios más ricos de la ciudad se difunde la arquitectura del movimiento
moderno, que va a enriquecer la ya valiosa herencia arquitectónica de la
Habana. La misma que aún se percibe – no obstante la precariedad en que
se encuentra gran parte del patrimonio histórico de la ciudad – en la mag-
nificencia de los edificios coloniales, en la elegancia de las construcciones
art nouveau, en las estructuras art decó y en el estilo moderno de numerosos
edificios construidos durante los años cuarenta y cincuenta10.
3. La ruptura histórica: nuevas funciones y nuevos lenguajes
la transformación que afecta a la habana a partir del 1959 es rápida y

profunda. en el “receptáculo físico heredado de la historia” se determinan
8
roberto segre, Cuba, l’architettura della rivoluzione (Venezia: Marsilio, 1970), 98.
9
ibíd.
10
roberto segre observa cómo el movimiento moderno comienza a ejercer su influencia en la
isla a partir de los años cuarenta. segre, Arquitectura y urbanismo, 16-17.
mutaciones que transforman radicalmente el rostro de la ciudad, como en-

tonces narrara Kevin lynch, años después del inicio de dicho proceso:
los cambios que sobrevinieron fueron muy rápidos. la clase media es-
capó, dejando despobladas zonas extensas de la ciudad. el bloqueo inte-
rrumpió la normal importación de material y equipos. los alquileres dis-
minuyeron con un decreto ley y sucesivamente las casas fueron cedidas
gratuitamente a los inquilinos. muchos sectores fueron nacionalizados y a
los precios de los terrenos se les estableció un costo muy bajo. de repente,
la especulación inmobiliaria desapareció. el gobierno revolucionario cons-
truyó nuevos edificios de apartamentos para colocar a los habitantes de los
barrios más pobres y para alojar a la gran masa de desempleados urbanos,
pero la operación se reveló costosa. […] cayeron las barreras internas; des-
apareció el control privado del acceso al mar y a las playas. se disolvieron los
filtros económicos que regulaban la admisión a los mejores repartos residen-
ciales. Los clubes privados fueron transformados en restaurantes públicos y
en centros sociales. El lujoso reparto de hoteles y rascacielos del Vedado, que
en un tiempo era reservado a turistas y a la alta burguesía cubana, hoy es el
centro cultural y recreativo de toda la ciudad. En la tarde, las calles del Veda-
do se aglomeran de gente que pasea o hace colas en los cines, restaurantes y
heladerías […] los barrios costeros de miramar, abandonados en gran parte
por la clase media, ahora están ocupados por alrededor de 100.000 estudian-
tes llegados de todo el país con becas. el ex palacio de gobierno es hoy mu-
seo. […] las actividades están cambiando rápidamente dentro del ambiente
físico heredado. ¿será posible realizar esta drástica transformación social sin
perder completamente el carácter y los aspectos positivos del pasado?11
Si quisiéramos sintetizar en una única expresión los cambios complejos y

heterogéneos que ocurren en el tejido de la habana a partir de 1959, podría-
mos referir la rápida tranformación funcional de la ciudad, que toma cuerpo
en los nuevos e inéditos usos de la trama urbana, revelándose “insuficiente”
– para usar una expresión de segre – respecto a las exigencias y a los objeti-
vos del nuevo modelo de ciudad y de sociedad que se está construyendo.
dicho proceso de mutación se mueve fundamentalmente en dos vías. por
un lado asistimos a una reinterpretación de las estructuras heredadas del
pasado, leídas a la luz de una novedosa visión de la ciudad. es el primer mo-
mento de transformación que se materializa en el cambio de funciones de lo
que ya existe: “las primeras iniciativas modifican el contenido conservando
las formas”, escribe segre12. por otra parte, poco a poco se hace camino la
elaboración de un lenguaje inédito, con proyectos de estructuras arquitectó-
nicas y urbanísticas que sobrentienden concepciones del vivir y del espacio
urbano muy diferentes de las heredadas del pasado. la etapa siguiente está
caracterizada por lo que segre llama la “creación de formas representativas
11
lynch, What Time, 39-40.
12
segre, Cuba, 74.
de nuevos contenidos”13. en este proceso encaminado hacia la elaboración

de modelos innovativos, ya sea en el plano del contenido que en las formas
arquitectónicas y urbanas, ocupa un lugar preponderante el uso de tecno-
logías constructivas económicas y veloces: a partir de finales de los años se-
senta, la prefabricación se convierte en la clave para resolver los problemas
cuantitativos y cualitativos de las nuevas exigencias.
en tema de transformación de los usos y funciones de edificios y de
enteras zonas urbanas, podría señalarse una amplia gama de ejemplos que
muestran cómo el antiguo entrelazado de la ciudad se adapta, en función
de las nuevas perspectivas, sin que esto comporte demolición alguna, ex-
ceptuando la eliminación de las habitaciones insalubres de la población
más pobre y de los barrios de barracas surgidos en los alrededores de la
habana. los edificios antiguos del casco histórico y las bellas construccio-
nes del movimiento moderno de los nuevos repartos residenciales de los
años cincuenta, abandonados por las clases perjudicadas por la revolución,
se convierten en patrimonio público y son usados – entre otras cosas para
atenuar la grave situación de la vivienda que atenaza la ciudad – como
escuelas, centros culturales o sedes del nuevo gobierno14, y como centros
para la campaña de alfabetización, con la cual se logra, en pocos meses,
disminuir considerablemente la tasa de analfabetismo presente en la isla.
los cuarteles se convierten en escuelas, los clubes privados en centros so-
ciales, las villas de las familias burguesas son distribuidas a núcleos familia-
res sin casa o utilizadas como habitaciones para los estudiantes procedentes
de la parte oriental del país. reflexionando sobre este fenómeno que cambia
profundamente la composición social de la ciudad y el rostro de sus barrios
más elegantes como los de Miramar y el Vedado, Mario Coyula escribe:
la repentina emigración hacia los estados unidos de la alta y media bur-

guesía a inicios de los años sesenta, dejó muchos edificios vacíos, provocan-
do una extraña mezcolanza social en los barrios elegantes de la ciudad. en
este proceso se constató un aspecto negativo: aumentaron la negligencia y el
abuso, porque a los nuevos habitantes faltaban los medios para ocuparse de
la conservación de los edificios, lo que conllevó a modificaciones y restaura-
ciones completamente inapropiadas y fuera de lugar por parte de los nuevos
inquilinos. además, la emigración del campo trajo a la ciudad modelos rura-
les de vida, cosa que fue particularmente evidente en la habana, ciudad que
se caracteriza más que otras del resto de la isla, por una trama arquitectónica
y urbanística típicamente de urbe15.
13
ibíd.
14
thomas cuenta que el 8 de enero, día en que Fidel castro entró en la habana con su colum-
na, hablando desde la terraza del palacio presidencial a la muchedumbre que lo aclamaba,
aludió al problema del lugar donde establecer la sede del nuevo gobierno, en desacuerdo con
la idea de contar con un palacio presidencial. hugh thomas, Cuba: the Pursuit of Freedom (new
York: harper & row, 1971), 793.
15
mario coyula, “housing in cuba”, Designer/Builder (2000).
Quizá el ejemplo más significativo desde un perfil simbólico sea la va-

riación en el uso de la zona del Vedado en torno al hotel Hilton (que más
tarde se llamará Habana Libre): una isla impenetrable para negros y pobres
antes de 1959, que se transforma en centro neurálgico de la vida colectiva
de la ciudad. el Habana Libre, símbolo histórico de aquellos años, se abre a
la población:
el hotel se convierte en] el nuevo parque el nuevo centro de la vida so-

cial, que irradia su vitalidad a toda la zona aledaña hasta volverse símbolo
de la vida nocturna de toda la ciudad. […] la Calle 23 (la rampa) es el nuevo
eje estructural del ambiente recreativo, perdiendo el carácter semiburocráti-
co que antes poseía, no sólo gracias a la vida espontánea que allí surge, sino
también al incremento de las construcciones dirigidas a conferir un sentido
preciso a la dinámica humana: alternar la vida social que tiene lugar en los
hoteles y en la monumental heladería Coppelia, con la distracción de cines
y teatros, con las actividades culturales en galerías y pabellones para ex-
posiciones y con el contacto con la naturaleza, que se produce en ambos
extremos de la Calle 23: en dirección al mar con el malecón y hacia las áreas
verdes del parque urbano La Furnia16.
la elaboración de un nuevo lenguaje – segundo “momento” de la trans-

formación urbana – se concreta en el proyecto de tres obras de gran relieve:
la Unidad Vecinal de La Habana del Este; las Escuelas Nacionales de Arte y la
Ciudad Universitaria José Antonio Echeverría:
Mediante estas obras – escribe Segre – se afirmaron tres principios diversos

como hipótesis de desarrollo; tres metodologías diferentes; tres concepciones
de “signo” arquitectónico semánticamente expresivo de los nuevos conteni-
dos germinados en el proceso revolucionario. […] el carácter ideal de dichos
contenidos genera la matriz de la acción arquitectónica, y al mismo tiempo, la
libertad para una clara diferenciación formal de las tres obras realizadas en la
habana. […] el copiar la arquitectura del pasado, habría implicado un freno,
un retroceso, la limitación en el logro de una libertad creativa sin obstáculos;
habría operado una reducción esquemática del proceso arquitectónico, que
ya se ha constatado en otros países socialistas, y que nuevamente no se puede
repetir. Es entonces que se fijan los parámetros para traducir en arquitectura
los contenidos. los cuales constituyen las peculiaridades propias de la cultura
y su relación dialéctica con la vanguardia universal, la dinámica del proceso
social, los recursos técnicos y económicos17.
la Unidad Vecinal de La Habana del Este está considerada el primer ex-

perimento urbanístico que pone en práctica las líneas guías basadas en la
16
roberto segre, Diez años de Arquitectura en Cuba revolucionaria (la habana: unión de escri-
tores y artistas, 1970), 99.
17
ibíd., 79.
nueva visión del habitar. uno de los objetivos que se persigue es la sus-
titución de las viviendas precarias de los barrios insalubres y periféricos
de la habana, con un complejo de edificios residenciales que ocupa los
terrenos que en el pasado habían sido reservados para la construcción de
un lujoso centro residencial destinado a la alta burguesía. sin embargo,
en ello no sólo existe la finalidad de tipo funcional. como bien señalan
segre, coyula y scarpaci, las tres “unidades vecinales simbolizan la uto-
pía de la revolución cubana”18. la parte que probablemente reveste un
mayor significado es la Unidad 2, diseñada para cien mil habitantes. los
proyectistas fueron Fernando Salinas y Raúl González Romero, quienes
la conciben como una estructura residencial, concentrando su relevancia
simbólica y expresiva en los edificios públicos y en los espacios abiertos.
las estructuras curvilíneas y las áreas verdes se complementan con mo-
numentos que representan el símbolo de la búsqueda de un nuevo sig-
nificado en las relaciones humanas (la iglesia de “todas las religiones” y
el centro de reuniones), que constituyen una real centralidad dentro del
conjunto construido. el proyecto, bastante complejo y muy costoso, no
fue completamente terminado.
la segunda obra de relieve fueron las Escuelas Nacionales de Arte, las
cuales suponen el complejo arquitectónico más original y más cuestio-
nado en relación a otros proyectos realizados en la primera década de la
revolución19.
las Escuelas nacen con la idea de constituir un centro internacional de
enseñanza para artistas del tercer mundo. el proyecto tiene un valor sim-
bólico explícito, ya sea por la localización (ocupa uno de los panoramas
más bellos de la habana, donde con anterioridad estuviera el Country
Club), que por el contenido: la actividad artística como símbolo de la liber-
tad conquistada. recordando el modo original en que nace la idea de cons-
truir este complejo, John loomis comenta: “en una tarde de enero de 1961,
dos jugadores improbables de golf, Fidel castro y che Guevara, jugaban
un partido en el prado impecable de aquello que había sido el exclusivo
Country Club de la alta burguesía habanera. Y allí, planearon el futuro de
este lugar único para la nueva sociedad donde, en modo alguno, los coun-
try clubs habrían encontrado cabida”20.
para proyectar el complejo arquitectónico que ocupa una de las zonas
más fascinantes y extensas, aledañas a la ciudad, se escoge a un arquitecto
que hacía poco tiempo había regresado al país tras su exilio en Venezuela
18
segre, coyula y scarpaci. Habana, 190.
19
sobre las escuelas ver entre otros: John a. loomis, Revolutions of Forms. Cuba’s Forgotten Art
Schools (new York: princeton architectural press, 1999); hugo consuegra, “las escuelas nacio-
nales de arte”, Arquitectura Cuba 334 (1965); marylin Garbey, “entrevista al arquitecto roberto
Gottardi”, La gaceta de Cuba. Arquitectura cubana entre sociedad y la cultura 6 (2007), 7-9; ester Gia-
ni, Il riscatto del progetto. Vittorio Garatti e l’Ena dell’Avana (Roma: Officina Edizioni, 2007).
20
loomis, Revolutions, 19.
durante la dictadura de Batista: ricardo porro. a él se unen los italianos

Vittorio Garatti y Roberto Gottardi, también provenientes de Venezuela; el
primero se había licenciado en Milán con Rogers, y el segundo en Venezia
con scarpa. a los tres jóvenes arquitectos se les deja plena libertad, tanto en
cuanto al proyecto como en la elección del lugar donde ubicar cada escuela
(Música, Ballet, Danza, Teatro y Artes Plásticas). La única condición era no
hacer uso de materiales de importación21.
también el proceso de realización comporta métodos y etapas muy
originales. los proyectistas se instalan en el edificio, que antes de la
revolución había acogido a la administración del Country Club, y des-
de allí supervisan las obras de construción que marchan a la par de las
del proyecto. Junto a ellos participan en las labores los estudiantes de
la Facultad de arquitectura, durante las horas libres fuera de las clases
universitarias. al equipo de trabajo se une un catalán que vive en cuba,
Gumersindo, quien enseña a los trabajadores la técnica constructiva de la
bóveda catalana22.
durante la construcción de las escuelas, ocurre algo que impide terminar
el conjunto arquitectónico. en efecto, las escuelas, comenzadas en 1961, se in-
auguran, incompletas, en 1965. Y así quedarán hasta inicios del actual siglo,
cuando el gobierno cubano, movido por el empuje del debate internacional,
decidirá retomar las labores de construcción y restaurar las partes arruina-
das por la falta de mantenimiento en los precedentes cuarenta años23.
acerca de la interrupción de las obras, circulan interpretaciones con-
trastantes. la más verosímil es la que atribuye a motivos políticos la fallida
conclusión de las escuelas, como sostiene John loomis, que retiene la fuer-
te infuencia soviética sobre la política cultural del país el factor determi-
nante en el cambio de posición hacia el proyecto, con el consiguiente cierre
de las obras. de ser considerada “la escuela más bella del mundo”, como
afirmara castro al inicio de las obras, el conjunto, de repente, pasa a ser ob-
jeto de duras campañas denigrantes apoyadas por la prensa especializada
y por los arquitectos pertenecientes al ministerio de la construcción, que
escriben absurdas valoraciones. a todo el proyecto arquitectónico se le acu-
sa de representar “un espíritu contrarevolucionario”, y, por consiguiente,
21
sobre esto, roberto Gottardi recuerda: “[…] pudimos proyectar con absoluta libertad. se
nos dio un encargo y no tuvimos ninguna censura. […] Vivíamos en una atmósfera donde
todo parecía posible y no nos habían impuesto limitaciones de carácter económico”.
22
así se manifestó roberto Gottardi, en una entrevista concedida a la autora de este ensayo
en febrero de 2007, cuando tuvo ocasión de visitar el complejo junto al arquitecto. cfr. tam-
bién ester Giani, “las escuelas nacionales de arte: una utopia interrotta”, en Memoria Ascesi
Rivoluzione. Studi sulla rappresentazione simbolica in architettura, ed. Luciano Semerani (Venezia:
marsilio, 2006), 169-221; id., Il riscatto del progetto. Vittorio Garatti e l’Ena dell’Avana (2007).
23
actualmente los trabajos de restauración de las escuelas están en marcha. el gobierno cu-
bano, tras la inserción del complejo en la lista de los monumentos en peligro del “World mo-
nument Watch”, y movido por el animado debate en seno a la ii Bienal de arquitectura de la
habana de 1999, se ha hecho cargo de la restauración y terminación de todo el proyecto.
de ser expresión de una estética pequeño-burguesa. se cuestionan hasta

las soluciones funcionales de las diferentes escuelas y la ubicación de las
mismas, contraponiendo, con gran insensatez, a la estética de las escuelas
la “funcionalidad” de la arquitectura de prefabricado24. los mismos arqui-
tectos fueron objeto de ataques personales como en el peor estilo estalinis-
ta, a tal punto que dos de ellos se vieron obligados a abandonar el país.
El único que se quedó en Cuba fue Gottardi, mientras Porro se trasladó a
parís a mitad de los años sesenta, y Garatti regresó a italia en 1974. todo
ello a pesar de que el complejo fuera acogido con gran entusiasmo a ni-
vel internacional. el proyecto de las escuelas ha sido publicado en algunas
de las revistas de arquitectura más importantes como Architectural Forum,
L’Architecture d’Aujourd’hui, Architecture Formes-Fonctions, Architectural
Design, L’Architettura25.
la tercera obra de importancia realizada en los primeros años de la re-
volución es la ciudad universitaria “echeverría”. aunque inicialmente se
pensó en construir una verdadera ciudad universitaria, se llega a proyectar
solamente el plexo de la Facultad de tecnología, que se asienta en un área
cercana a una central azucarera, a doce kilómetros del centro de la habana.
La obra la inicia el arquitecto Humberto Alonso, la continúan Manuel Rubio,
José Fernández y Josefina montalván, bajo la dirección de Fernando salinas.
rechazada la tradicional ciudad universitaria compuesta de edificios aisla-
dos e independientes entre sí, con soluciones en formas autónomas carac-
terísticas – tipológica y simbólicamente –, cada Facultad escoge entre las
dos opciones que quedan, como observa segre: “la creación de un tejido ho-
mogéneo de funciones intercambiables, como aquélla de la universidad de
Berlín, o la total absorción de las funciones específicas en una única unidad
compacta, cerrada, como el scarborough college de toronto”26. se optó por
un esquema basado en una trama de modulación continua que permitiera
una respuesta a las exigencias funcionales planificadas, además de un creci-
miento y una evolución que no mellasen, en términos técnicos ni estéticos,
las construcciones ya existentes. por otra parte, considerando la apremiante
dinámica del proceso educativo en transformación se intenta obtener un in-
tercambio de las funciones en seno al tejido. por tanto, para los arquitectos se
trata de la posibilidad de concebir una forma abierta y de elaborar principios
estéticos “que consideren la forma no como una cristalización estática, sino
24
en la campaña contra las escuelas de arte estuvo involucrado roberto segre, uno de los
analistas más conocidos de la arquitectura del período revolucionario a nivel internacional. si
bien recientemente ha cambiado en parte su juicio, en aquel período fue uno de los exponen-
tes más sobresalientes en la campaña contra los tres arquitectos y sus trabajos. al proyecto de
las escuelas, segre contrapone el de la ciudad universitaria, tercera obra de la revolución, por
los métodos constructivos y por el diseño arquitectónico.
25
a nivel local la discusión se resuelve, esencialmente, en la revista arquitectura-cuba, don-
de se enfrentan las dos posiciones pro y contra el proyecto.
26
segre, Cuba.
como un fluir continuo, de experimentarlo existencialmente a través de los

valores contenidos en el proceso de transformación”27.
el análisis de los resultados alcanzados con estos proyectos va más
allá de la finalidad de este estudio. Sin embargo, es útil señalar cómo los
mismos surgen de una profunda reflexión y de un vasto debate sobre la
relación que deberían establecer los nuevos criterios constructivos y la
nueva planificación con la herencia del pasado. las cuestiones en torno a
las cuales gira la discusión en el mundo de arquitectos y urbanistas (de-
sarrollada, sobre todo, acerca de los criterios funcionales y estéticos de las
Escuelas Nacionales de Arte) son de gran interés, ya que están relacionadas
con la noción de “tradición” y el vínculo entre la herencia del pasado y
los valores de la nueva sociedad28. se trata entonces de un tema constan-
temente debatido en la cuba de después de 1959, especialmente en los
primeros años, los más complejos tanto desde el punto de vista político
como cultural.
4. Las primeras medidas revolucionarias: la nueva visión de la

planificación urbana y las soluciones para el problema de la vivienda
un momento significativo de este debate lo constituye el séptimo

congreso de la unión internacional de arquitectos, celebrado en la
habana en 196329. es el primero de la uia llevado a cabo en américa, y
en él se concentra la atención de más de dos mil arquitectos y urbanis-
tas provenientes de ochenta países. el tema del congreso está al orden
del día en la cuba post-revolucionaria: “architecture in the emerging
countries”30. Ya sea en los preparativos del evento que durante los tra-
bajos del convenio, se entablan discusiones avivadas – por primera vez
en un evento internacional – acerca de la nueva visión de la planifica-
ción urbana y sobre los instrumentos más idóneos para traducir las nue-
vas perspectivas teóricas dentro de una concreta mutación de lenguajes
y contenidos.
27
segre, Diez años, 82-83.
28
ricardo porro, uno de los arquitectos de las escuelas, afirma en una entrevista publicada
en Architecture d’Aujourd’hui: “traté de demostrar en la escuela de artes plásticas, la toma de
conciencia de mi país después de la revolución. por ello, busqué un elemento que se encon-
trara en todas las manifestaciones artísticas de cuba, individuándolo en una sensualidad par-
ticular que comparece, en mi opinión, de modo constante”. ricardo porro, “Écoles d’art à la
havane”, Architecture d’Aujourd’hui 119 (1965); id. “el espacio en la arquitectura traditional
cubana”, Arquitectura Cuba 332 (1961).
29
Ver entre otros, Segre, Arquitectura y urbanismo; segre, coyula y scarpaci, Habana; y el
reportaje sobre el VII Congreso de la Unión Internacional de Arquitectos, publicado en Ar-
quitectura Cuba 331 (1964).
30
entre los temas afrontados en las sesiones del congreso, aparecen: “national planning”,
“construction techniques”, “neighbourhood unit”, todas ellas cuestiones muy debatidas en
la cuba de estos años.
en relación a lo anterior, resulta significativo el discurso que ernesto

Guevara hiciera en la clausura del encuentro de profesores y estudiantes,
en el cual afirma, entre otras cosas:
en el ejercicio de la profesión que ustedes representan, se pone a prueba

el espíritu creador del hombre. está pleneado el problema por los materiales
que hay, por el servicio que deben prestar, pero la forma de solución es la
que nuestros profesionales deben dar. Y allí deben batirse como si se batie-
ran contra la naturaleza, contra medios externos a la voluntad del hombre,
para poder realizar de la mejor manera posible el anhelo de dar más a nues-
tro pueblo, y la satisfacción personal de construir con sus propias manos,
con su talento, con sus conocimientos, la nueva sociedad31.
las transformaciones funcionales de zonas enteras de la ciudad y los

proyectos relacionados con los asentamientos en las zonas este y oeste de
la habana se ubican en el escenario de políticas de alojamiento y de ges-
tión del territorio radicalmente innovadoras. las mismas pautas de la pla-
nificación urbana – que sustituyen al último plan regulador aprobado por
el gobierno de Batista y que afortunadamente quedó en papel32 – pueden
interpretarse correctamente si se colocan en dicho contexto. las primeras
intervenciones en este frente se deciden en las primeras semanas de 1959,
con la adopción de una serie de medidas legislativas que abren el camino
que modificará profundamente el orden del territorio y las dinámicas eco-
nómicas que lo determinan. el cese de los desahucios, la disminución de la
especulación de los terrenos33 y la disminución del coste de los alquileres,
constituyen las medidas más significativas en esta primera fase34.
31
Ernesto Guevara, “Discurso en la Clausura del Encuentro de Profesores y Estudiantes. VII
congreso de la unión internacional de arquitectos (uia)”, Arquitectura Cuba 331 (1964), 13-
14.
32
el plan regulador de 1958 preveía la destrucción de una parte considerable de la habana
Vieja y la construcción de nuevas torres residenciales, parecidas a las del Vedado, al lugar del
centro histórico. además, se había planificado la construcción de una isla en el mar, a lo largo
del malecón, donde establecer otras estructuras turísticas.
33
una vez eliminada la especulación de los terrenos, se pone en marcha la transformación de
los terrenos libres en áreas verdes, subiendo así el índice de área verde por cada habitante de
La Habana de uno y veintidós a ocho metros cuadrados. Ver entre otros: Segre, Diez años; leo
huberman y paul sweezy, Cuba. Anatomy of a Revolution (new York: monthly review, 1960).
34
las principales medidas son: la ley de la suspensión de los desahucios de las propiedades
urbanas destinadas exclusivamente a viviendas (26 enero 1959), con la cual se establece la
creación del instituto nacional del ahorro (ina), que transforma el lote en un mecanismo
para obtener fondos para resolver el problema de la vivienda. entre las tareas del instituto
se encuentra la construcción de alojamientos mínimos para los que no tienen casa. se prevé,
además, que “todos los apartamentos construidos pasarán a ser propiedad de los inquilinos
mediante el pago del importe del alquiler establecido […] dentro de un período de diez años”
(17 febrero). la ley de la disminución de los precios de los alquileres, con la cual se reducen
del 50% al 30% en proporción inversa a su valor (1 marzo). la ley de la venta obligatoria de
los terrenos libres, que serán utilizados en la construcción de nuevas viviendas. con esta ley
se establece además la “demolición de los edificios que no ofrezcan las condiciones suficientes
posteriormente, a través de la reforma agraria de mayo de 1959 y la

reforma urbana de octubre de 1960, se comienzan a sentar las bases que
sostendrán de modo estable el cambio urbanístico y territorial en los años
sucesivos. así mismo se pone marcha una nueva política de viviendas, me-
diante normas que transforman a los inquilinos en futuros propietarios de
la casa en que viven, sancionándose, así, el alquiler de los inmuebles urba-
nos35. se deroga, de facto, la renta inmobiliaria. con la reforma agraria se
elimina el latifundio y todas las propiedades de una cierta extensión – que
varía de caso a caso –, se confiscan y asignan a los campesinos y obreros
agrícolas sin tierra36.
estas medidas constituyen el soporte fundamental de una programa-
ción que permite a la ciudad de la habana cambiar rostro abriéndose al
cambio, aun manteniendo el carácter que la historia le ha consignado en
una síntesis muy original. realmente, no es una tarea fácil. Y de hecho, ha
tropezado con tales obstáculos que una parte de este complejo proyecto no
llega a término, o llega en condiciones bastante precarias. no es ésta la sede
para tomar en consideración las causas que impidieron la completa reali-
zación de los proyectos iniciales de la revolución. un objetivo que implica
la presencia de condiciones que van más allá de la situación específica de
la ciudad, e incluso de la isla, así como, en parte, de las estrategias de la di-
rección política y cultural del país. de mayor relevancia para el tema que se
afronta en esta sede es remarcar cómo las dificultades y el asedio (que ac-
tualmente resultan más que evidentes en muchos sectores) no cancelan los
esfuerzos y aspiraciones concentrados en primer orden en la construcción
de un lenguaje urbano que integre el legado del pasado con los procesos de
renovación en acto, incorporando en la vieja trama los signos de un texto
nuevo. se trata de un proceso que no ha tenido un desarrollo fácil, como
es bien sabido, y que ha contado con grandes dificultades. Basta pensar
solamente en uno de los aspectos que todavía hoy representa uno de los
problemas más serios para la completa realización de las estrategias pues-
de habitabilidad, higiene, duración y seguridad (7 abril). La ley que “declara de uso público
todas las playas y costas del territorio nacional, autorizando a todos a disfrutarlas libremen-
te”. Se declaran también de uso público e interés social las islas y cayos adyacentes a la isla
de cuba que forman parte del territorio nacional, que hayan sido transferidos en pasado a
privados (21 abril).
35
para la realización de dicho objetivo se prevén tres fases. en la primera fase, se entrega a
los inquilinos la propiedad de las viviendas ocupadas en enero de 1959, con una amortización
correspondiente al pago del alquiler por un período que varía de cinco a veinte años. en la
segunda fase (“Fase del futuro inmediato”) se programa “la construcción masiva de viviendas
que serán concedidas en usufructo permanente mediante el pago de un alquiler mensual que
no podrá superar el 10% del rédito familiar”. en la tercera fase (“Fase del futuro próximo”)
el estado, con sus propios recursos, construye las viviendas que cederá en usufructo perma-
nente y gratuito a cada familia. se establecen, finalmente, las normas que disciplinarán los
casos en que el Estado indemnizará a los propietarios, y aquéllos en que no será dado ningún
resarcimiento.
36
Ver Huberman y Sweezy, Cuba; thomas, Cuba.
tas en marcha a principios de los años sesenta: la escasez estructural de

viviendas. a menudo la carencia dramática de recursos financieros ha con-
llevado que en muchas zonas del casco histórico de la ciudad se consolide
la decadencia de las estructuras físicas heredadas del período precedente
al triunfo de la revolución. una decadencia que ya había señalado lynch a
principios de los años setenta:
en un período de estrechez económica, cuando sobre todo se proponía

eliminar las pasadas desigualdades de clases y geográficas, en La Habana
fueron suspendidas las inversiones en favor de la potenciación de la base
agrícola. […] en la ciudad ya no se construye, solamente en la zona del puer-
to o por servicios públicos realmente esenciales: escuelas, clínicas, fábricas o
sedes administrativas. la estructura física se está deteriorando lentamente.
[…] todavía en la ciudad no se ha pensado en racionalizar la conservación
de los inmuebles o de restaurar el patrimonio de las viviendas utilizables37.
a pesar de las enormes dificultades y los no pocos errores políticos y

económicos, en el tejido de La Habana aún hoy se percibe el significado de
la historia. la ciudad refleja la transformación de la cual es protagonista, y
todavía conserva las huellas que el pasar del tiempo ha dejado en el espa-
cio urbano.
como receptáculo de nuevas posibilidades sociales y espaciales, la ca-
pital de cuba parece poseer una apertura al tiempo que otras ciudades no
poseen en absoluto, por muy ‘globales’ que sean, y por mucho que dispon-
gan de recursos económicos infinitamente mayores. el hecho es que el teji-
do urbano habanero no sólo es testigo de “las comodidades y las injusticias
del pasado”38, sino que además se encarga de mostrar cómo los modelos
y lenguajes recibidos en herencia pueden mudar profundamente sin ser
destruidos. Hoy en día, aún podemos percibir la “flexibilidad” y “recep-
tividad” que Kevin lynch auspiciara, hace treinta años, al futuro de la
habana, como testigo del que hacer de una ciudad que, no obstante las di-
ficultades, quizá se empeña todavía en construir un nuevo horizonte sobre
las huellas de su rico pasado.
37
lynch, What Time, 41.
38
ibíd.
Fig. 7 - La Plars Vieja, La Habana (Foto por G. Paolucci).
R. Paloscia
Chapter 11
La Habana: formación y evolución del
patrimonio urbano 
la habana está constituida por un conjunto de ámbitos urbanos, mu-

chas veces de gran importancia arquitectónica, fuertemente caracterizados
por tipologías edilicias y modalidades de uso del suelo público que se han
formado y se han sucedido temporal y espacialmente sin continuidad.
una historia condicionada por su propia posición estratégica y, en ge-
neral, de la isla de la cual es la capital, que se define, desde el año 1500
hasta nuestros días, según parámetros geopolíticos diferenciados en fases
temporales.
el resultado es, por un lado, el más grande entre los antiguos centros
coloniales de América Latina: La Habana Vieja, hoy en día prácticamen-
te intacto, caracterizado por una arquitectura civil, militar y religiosa de
una alta y peculiar calidad formal. por otro lado, un conjunto de nudos
esenciales del tejido urbano, resultado de sucesivas fases de crecimiento
de la ciudad: desde las primeras expansiones extramuros de finales del si-
glo XVIII, hasta los ejes largos aporticados por columnas delgadas, con-
solidados en la centuria sucesiva, hasta la retícula de calles arboladas y
los opulentos boulevards (o avenidas), sitios de un variado eclecticismo del
siglo XX, hasta el amplio distrito de rascacielos funcionales, testigos de una
imitación de los modelos norteamericanos típica de la última temporada
pre-revolucionaria.
en cada una de estas fases de construcción se han sedimentado, en par-
tes diferentes de la capital cubana, funciones y lugares específicos de la vi-
da social, que mantienen todavía su propio atractivo a nivel metropolitano
y hacen de la habana una metrópolis multifacética, multiforme y natural-
mente policéntrica.

alexander von humboldt, Ensayo político sobre la isla de Cuba (alicante: alicante publi-
cación, 2003 [paris: 1826]), 55.
el presente ensayo recorre sintéticamente las etapas fundamentales de la

historia urbana de la ciudad hasta la revolución castrista. respecto a la tem-
porada siguiente, nos acercamos hacia nuestros días a través de resultados
de una investigación piloto específica, presentada en el estudio sucesivo so-
bre el patrimonio territorial de la habana del este: extenso municipio de los
quince que componen la gran habana actual, que figura entre los más ricos en
vestigios de la historia y la cultura arquitectónica y urbanística de la segunda
mitad del siglo XX, y en concreto de la fase anterior y sucesiva a la revolución.
1. Dónde y porqué
en correspondencia con el acceso septentrional al golfo de méjico, en

el que se cruzan rutas comerciales internacionales, se ubica el puerto de la
Habana, dotado por la naturaleza y por el hombre de múltiples obras de for-
tificación […]. Es en correspondencia con La Habana que el golfo del Méjico,
el Canal Viejo y el canal de la Bahía, se comunican entre ellos1.
esta posición estratégica, descrita con precisión por alexander von

humbolt en su Ensayo político sobre la isla de Cuba, ha determinado el des-
tino de la habana colonial, su afirmación como articulación nodal in-
sustituible, militar y comercial, de las corrientes de tráfico transoceánico
activadas por la corona española entre la madrepatria y las indias occiden-
tales. un protagonismo esencial, otorgado en el momento de la llegada de
colón a aquellas costas, que, si es verdad que el colonialismo empezó con
la conquista de américa por parte de españa en la primera parte del siglo
XVI (consolidada a través de la creación inmediata, entre 1530 y 1560, de
una vasta red urbana2), la convirtió en la más antigua de las grandes ciu-
dades coloniales. La más antigua y, según muchos, la más hermosa3, por
sus características naturales y por la riqueza del paisaje construido.
Nous entrons de grand matin dans cette rade de la Havane, qu’on dit la
plus belle rade fermée du monde. En effet, elle s’enfonce au pied des colli-
nes qui la dominent, et va tourner derrière la ville, présentant ainsi l’abri le
plus parfait qu’on puisse imaginer. ces collines sont verdoyantes, tapissées
de fleurs jaunes; en quelques endroits, des groupes de palmiers s’inclinent
sur leurs flancs. A droite, la ville s’étale avec ses maisons […] et ses quais
magnifiques […]. Le maisons blanches ou peintes en bleu, en vert, en rose,
en jaune, offrent un aspect bariolé qui étonne d’abord le regard, mais qui le
réjouit4.
1
alexander von humboldt, Ensayo político sobre la isla de Cuba (alicante: alicante publica-
ción, 2003 [paris: 1826]), 55.
2
paul Bairoch, De Jéricho à Mexico. Villes et économie dans l’histoire (paris: Gallimard, 1985), 490.
3
Como tal declarada en 1982 por la UNESCO “Patrimonio cultural de la humanidad”.
4
“entramos de mañana temprano en la rada de la habana, que se dice la más hermosa del
mundo. efectivamente esta se adentra en los pies de las colinas que dominan y curvan detrás
así, otro de los muchos viajeros del siglo XiX fascinados por la isla
describe estéticamente el fuerte impacto visivo que provoca la ciudad5 al
primer contacto, llegando desde el mar, y enumera los elementos que lo
determinan: la bahía, la arquitectura multicolor, las avenidas, la palma real
(planta del 1591-1601, p. 20)6.
2. La Llave del Nuevo Mundo
Fundada en 1519, después de dos intentos de asentamiento a lo largo

de la costa sur, por parte de los colonos originarios, san cristóbal de la
habana encontró su ubicación definitiva al norte, en la costa derecha de
la bahía ancha y honda, segura y controlable mediante el acceso de su
embocadura. un territorio en el que se asentaron los siboneyes, de origen
sudamericano, los cuales juntos a los Guanahatebeyes localizados más
al sur formaban dos de las etnias habitantes de la isla, compuestas por
recolectores poco evolucionados, ambos llevados en los siglos anteriores
hacia el extremo occidente por la avanzada de los taínos, tercera etnia
mucho más numerosa, de origen antillano, constituida por agricultores
culturalmente más avanzados que habitaban el oriente7. poblaciones des-
tinadas todas a una rápida y generalizada desaparición provocada por
el traumático impacto con los conquistadores. antes del final del siglo la
habana, a pesar de haber sufrido numerosos saqueos y derrotas corsa-
rias, tenía ya el estatus de ciudad y un ordenamiento urbano, regulari-
zado por las Ordenanzas municipales para la Villa de La Habana del 15748,
para recibir después, en 1634, el apellido altisonante de Llave del Nuevo
de la ciudad originando el mejor refugio que se pueda imaginar. las colinas son verdes, tapi-
zadas de flores amarillas; en unas esquinas grupos de palmeras se inclinan hacia un lado. en
la derecha la ciudad se expande con sus casas […] y sus malecones magníficos […]. las casas
blancas o pintadas de azul, de verde, de rosado, de amarillo ofrecen un espectáculo multicolor
que antes sorprende la mirada, después la alegran”. Jean Jacques ampère, Promenade en Amé-
rique. États-Unis Cuba Mexique (parís: michel levy Fréres, 1856), 169-171.
5
el mito de cuba y de su capital, muy vivo en los ambientes cultos de la primera mitad del
siglo XiX, pasaba también a través de la difusión en europa de publicaciones ricas de detalla-
das incisiones, como la Isla de Cuba Pintoresca de moreau y miahle, o la recogida en la litogra-
fía del gobierno Paseo pintoresco por la isla de Cuba, ambas editadas entre 1839 y 1842. reynaldo
Gonzáles, Cuba. Un’epopea meticcia (Florencia: Giunti, 1995), 9.
6
“una de las palmas más majestuosas entre todas las que se conocen, la palma real, otorga
al paisaje de los alrededores de la habana un inconfundible carácter”. humboldt, Ensayo, 60.
La Palma ha sido elegida como símbolo nacional de Cuba. Ver tambien Cristoforo Colombo e
l’apertura degli spazi (roma: istituto poligrafico dello stato, 1992).
7
Far, dirección política, Historia de Cuba (la habana: ciencias sociales, 1985). el elevado nivel
cultural y tecnológico del pueblo taíno se puso de manifiesto en una gran exposición organizada
en el museo del petit palais, en parís, en 1994. Jacques Kerchache, ed., L’art taïno (paris: paris-
musées, 1994); irving rouse, “les origines et le developpement de la culture taïno”, en ibíd.
8
Maria Victoria Zardoya, “Antecedentes históricos: La ley y el orden”, en Dirección Pro-
vincial de Planificación Física, Ciudad de La Habana (DPPF-CH) y Oficina del Historia-
dor de la Ciudad de La Habana (OHCH), El Vedado, Regulaciones Urbanísticas, (la habana:
union, 2007), 33.
Mundo y Antemural de las Indias Occidentales, que determinará la supre-

macía de su puerto en el ámbito de las Indias Occidentales. Un momento
crucial había sido la decisión de Felipe ii de contener los ataques corsa-
rios, extremadamente dañinos para las cajas de la corona, imponiendo
un organización rígida del transporte transoceánico de las mercancías,
el cual otorgaba a La Habana el papel de único punto de llegada desde
españa, de invernación y, una vez recogidos aquí los bienes procedentes
de todas las colonias americanas, de salida de la flota comercial hacia
la madre patria9. detrás de esta decisión se encontraba también un da-
to geográfico de extrema importancia: La Habana es el único puerto del
área que se encuentra con su embocadura a un kilómetro de la corriente
del Golfo, un verdadero río que corre tibio y rápido en el mar10, favore-
ciendo la navegación de todos los que logran controlar su recorrido. una
posición privilegiada entonces, que, por la larga estancia de los barcos
y de los equipajes, lleva la ciudad a la expansión que adquieren los ba-
rrios suburbanos: en la primera mitad del siglo XVII, 50.000 habitantes,
la mitad de toda la población de la isla11. una población ocupada en el
almacenamiento de las mercancías y en los trabajos de mantenimiento
y de construcción de los barcos12 (incrementada con la inauguración ofi-
cial del real arsenal en 1724), y también dedicada a actividades, legales
e ilegales, para la satisfacción de necesidades primarias y no primarias
(alimentos, hospedaje, servicios de todos tipo, recreo, sexo) de un enor-
me número de marineros para aquellos tiempos, estimado entre 6.000 y
9.00013, que vagabundeaban durante meses por las calles de la habana.
nace en este contexto inusual lo que hoy, lejos de poderse considerar
solamente un estereotipo, se consolidará pronto como uno de los elemen-
tos específicos de la identidad urbana: la habana ciudad del recreo y del
vicio, pervertida y acogedora, con la complicidad del clima caluroso, pe-
9
Sergio Baroni, “Venti anni di trasformazione del territorio”, Casabella 466 (1981), 37.
10
“la corriente del Golfo, la masa dorada, casi sólida pero fluida que se desplaza incon-
tenible de sur a norte […] un río dentro del mar, de noche una negrura misteriosa donde
brillaban los faroles de los pescadores del alto, de día un hábitat fascinante por los peces que
emergían de ella”. Guillermo cabrera infante, La Habana para un infante defunto (Barcelona:
plaza & Janes, 1986), 329.
11
Carmen Gavira, “Las ciudades en Cuba: fundación y desarrollo (siglo XVI)”, Ciudad y Te-
rritorio 3-4 (1983), 109. los datos numéricos sobre la población de la habana en la primera
parte del siglo XVII son inciertos: por ejemplo, Marrero habla, para ese mismo período, de
3.000 habitantes, refiriéndose probablemente a los residentes intramuros. leví marrero, Cuba:
Economía y Sociedad, tomo ii (madrid: playor, 1975), 53.
12
la construcción de barcos provocó la rápida deforestación en un amplia área alrededor de
la ciudad. “las astillerías de la habana eran tan estratégicas para la corona de españa, que
en un decreto real de 1620 se autorizaba el corte libre en toda cuba de los árboles destinados
a ellas”. roberto segre, mario coyula and John scarpaci, Havana: Two Faces of the Antillean
Metropolis (chichester: Wiley, 1997), 21.
13
carmen Gavira, “historia de un proceso de urbanización: cuba”, Ciudad y Territorio 1
(1976), 65.
ro agradable, de los trópicos, y la belleza y libertad de las costumbres de

la gente extrovertida, desde sus orígenes y colores más variados14.
La construcción, a partir desde la mitad del siglo XVI, de un imponente
sistema de defensa es corolario de las funciones estratégicas otorgadas a
la ciudad, y de ser hasta las puertas del siglo XiX el puerto más importan-
te del hemisferio occidental. inaugurado con el castillo de la real Fuerza
(primer ejemplo de fortaleza renacentista con planta de estrella construi-
da en el nuevo mundo, largamente considerada como una referencia ti-
pológica fundamental a nivel continental)15 este sistema fue ampliado y
modernizado en el curso de más de dos siglos por la persistencia de las
incursiones corsarias alimentadas por las nuevas potencias coloniales16. el
resultado ha sido una red de macizos edificios militares en piedra coloca-
dos a lo largo de la costa y en otros puntos estratégicos, los castillos o for-
talezas del morro, de la punta, de la chorrera, de cojímar, de la cabaña,
del príncipe, de atarés, y una multiplicación de muros urbanos compactos
de casi cinco kilómetros de ancho, la muralla, que hacen de la habana una
especie de catálogo de la arquitectura militar americana desde el siglo XVI
al siglo XVIII (fig. 10, p. 183, El castillo del Morro).
Excluyendo la Muralla, demolida casi por completo según el plano de
albear y lara de 1861, la ciudad se conserva todavía en buenas condicio-
nes, o al menos en condiciones recuperables; la mayoría del sistema cuenta
con elementos singulares que representan puntos fuertes de referencia es-
pacial. dada su posición la mayoría de las veces dominante y desvinculada
del esquema reticular urbano, dichos elementos constituyen, en muchos
casos, lugares de particular sujeción, muy amados por los habaneros, des-
de los cuales se puede disfrutar de vistas de conjunto del paisaje urbano;
recordemos, por ejemplo, la emocionante vista de La Habana Vieja desde
la fortaleza del morro y de la cabaña, ubicadas en el lado opuesto de la
embocadura de la bahía. la concentración, por un lado en obras continuas
de edificios militares, asignadas a proyectistas de gran profesionalidad17, y
en intensas actividades navales por el otro (llevadas a cabo por artesanos
cada vez más expertos), si en algunas fases han limitado las inversiones en
14
se trata de una constante cuyo desarrollo cíclico, con altos y bajos vinculados a las riquezas
de la corona española, a la evolución de la política y del comercio internacional y al más reciente
predominio del potente vecino de estados unidos. se provocará un momento de corte brutal
con el triunfo de la revolución castrista, portadora de valores inconciliables con la misma, para
regresar a la superficie en el nuevo contexto a causa de los cambios de los años noventa.
15
roberto segre, “significado de cuba en la evolución tipológica de las fortificaciones colo-
niales de américa”, Revista de la Biblioteca Nacional José Martí 2 (1968).
16
enrico Guidoni y angela marino, Storia dell’urbanistica. Il Seicento (roma-Bari: laterza,
1979), 465.
17
el más conocido es Giovanbattista antonelli, que opera en la habana; antonelli y otro ita-
liano, tiburzio spannocchi, serán protagonistas de las obras de fortificación militar española
a lo largo de las costas del atlántico y del pacífico. mario sartor, “la città latinoamericana tra
antecedenti precolombiani, leggi di fondazione e tradizione”, Zodiac 8 (1992), 39.
obras de carácter civil y religioso, también han determinado condiciones

positivas para la construcción de la ciudad en general, gracias a su alto
nivel arquitectónico. así, todas estas competencias fueron empleadas de
nuevo en el traspaso, llevado a cabo a finales del siglo XVI, de las comunes
casas rurales de origen autóctono, hechas de hojas, barro, madera y guano,
a un tejido de construcciones compuesto por edificios de madera, piedra y
ladrillo18.
un traspaso que evoluciona junto con el asentamiento en la ciudad de
una cuota creciente de habitantes, favorecido no sólo por el negocio marí-
timo, sino también por una relación más consolidada con el interior rural,
que estaba organizado según fines productivos gracias a la distribución
por parte de la corona de concesiones de propiedad, las mercedes, y al pa-
ralelo incremento del comercio de esclavos. dada la completa extinción de
los indígenas, dichos esclavos se dedicaban al trabajo de los campos culti-
vados sobre todo con caña de azúcar y tabaco. La ciudad había tomado una
forma desde el núcleo original, contiguo al castillo de la Real Fuerza, si-
guiendo de manera flexible las reglas del diseño de las ciudades del nuevo
mundo contenida en las Leyes de los Reinos de las Indias, ante todo un sis-
tema de parcelización reticular con la plaza principal en el centro19, con
adaptaciones a las irregularidades del terreno y a la áspera línea de costa.
las expansiones especificadas en el plan de cristóbal de roda de 1603 (el
primer plan director de la habana y quizá de américa latina)20 y concen-
tradas en el arco sur-occidental quedarán todas al interior de la muralla
hasta la mitad del siglo XVIII.
el tejido urbano que generan alterna, excepto en el caso de pocos cen-
tros del poder político, residencias y comercio con edificios religiosos, igle-
sias y complejos conventuales21, en cuyos interiores se hospedan escuelas y
albergues para pobres y enfermos, estructurándose progresivamente alre-
dedor de una serie de plazas que condensan valores simbólicos y funciones
diferenciadas: el poder del estado en la plaza de armas, la práctica religio-
18
ernesto Guglielminetti y cecilia massignan, La Habana: Llave del Nuevo Mundo y Antemural
de las Indias Occidentales (pisa: centro studi G. Guidi, 1997).
19
“[…] y cuando hagan la planta del lugar repártanlo por sus plazas, calles y solares a cordel
y regla, comenzando desde la plaza mayor y sacando desde ella las calles a las puertas y
caminos principales y dejando tanto compás abierto que aunque la población vaya en gran
crecimiento se pueda proseguir y dilatar en la misma forma”. De una orden de Carlos V, de
1526, citada en rafael manzano “prólogo” en Javier aguilera rocas y luis J. moreno rexach
(compiladores), Urbanismo Español en America (madrid: editora nacional, 1973), 12.
20
mario Gonzáles, “planos, esquemas y planes directores de la ciudad de la habana”, Arqui-
tectura y Urbanismo 2 (1993), 10.
21
llama la atención la secuencia de las edificaciones religiosas del período: “desde el final
del siglo XVI los discípulos de San Francisco y de San Domenico pusieron las bases para sus
templos; los discípulos de san agostino en 1608; el hospital de los hermanos de san Juan de
Dios se funda en 1602; el templo de Santa Catalina, en 1689; el Santo Cristo del Buen Viaje, en
1640; el santuario de monserrate, en 1690; el oratorio de san Filippo neri, en 1693; el hospital
de paula, nel 1665”. eusebio leal spengler, Detén el paso caminante (milano: electa, 1988), 31.
sa en la plaza del cristo y en la sucesiva plaza de la catedral, el comercio

interior en la Plaza Nueva (hoy Plaza Vieja) y con el extranjero en la Plaza
de San Francisco (fig. 8, p. 183, La Plaza Vieja en 1762)22.
A las macizas arquitecturas del siglo XVII, cuya austeridad se evidencia
por el uso de la piedra conchífera local, se añaden más tarde ejemplares de
finales de la centuria sucesiva, que terminarán en dos episodios de arquitec-
tura barroca civil y religiosa de mayor relieve para la ciudad, el palacio de los
capitanes Generales y la catedral. en esta temporada se afirma ese conjunto
de elementos tipológicos vivaces, morfológicos y decorativos, muchas veces
vinculados a la tradición mudéjar: las cortes y los patios ricos de vegetación,
los alfarjes, elaborados techos de madera entrecruzada y trabajada, los arcos
polilobatos y de medio punto, cerrados por vitrales de colores, los aleros, las re-
jas, las celosías, las persianas y otros componentes de madera funcionales para
el paso del aire y de la luz, los ladrillos decorativos de barro23, que han contri-
buido de manera neta a la elevada y peculiar calidad formal del ámbito urba-
no de La Habana, y en concreto de La Habana Vieja (Planta de 1742-1762)24.
3. La ciudad del azúcar
la ocupación por parte de los ingleses en 1762, que duró poco menos de
un año, constituye un punto de inflexión para la ciudad que, con la ruptura
del monopolio comercial español en las Indias Occidentales, asiste a la caí-
da de la importancia de su posición estratégica, pero que ve cómo se perfila
también la apertura de nuevas posibilidades de tráfico directo con otras colo-
nias americanas, en primer lugar las del norte, todas a punto de lograr la in-
dependencia. la habana deja de ser llave del nuevo mundo, para adquirir
una función diferente, identificándose cada vez más como capital del azúcar.
paralelamente con las otras dos actividades destacadas de la isla (el tabaco ya
desarrollado25 y el café de introducción más reciente), la industria azucarera
empieza su período de máximo desarrollo hacia finales del siglo XVIII, para
llegar a representar desde ese momento en adelante, y con continuidad hasta
nuestros días, el sector más importante para la economía cubana.
la habana, además, constituye el lugar privilegiado para la sacarocracia,
cuerpo central de la nueva burguesía criolla que maneja los cañaverales, in-
mensas cultivaciones de caña, y los ingenios, los centros de transformación,
empleando cuanto gana de los recursos de la isla26 para construir una ciudad
22
segre, coyula y scarpaci, Havana, 21. Ver tambien Carlos Venegas Fornias, “Plaza Vieja,
textos complementarios”, Arquitectura Cuba 355-356 (1983).
23
rachel carley, Cuba. 400 Años de Arquitectura (londres: cartago, 1997), 13.
24
leal spengler, Detén el paso caminante.
25
la industria del tabaco está presente en la habana con 150 molinos a partir de 1715. Gon-
záles, Cuba, 32.
26
en primer lugar, los inmensos bosques están sometidos a una intensa desforestación para
lograr áreas de cultivos y combustible para la elaboración del azúcar. Von Humboldt lamenta
a su imagen y semejanza; una ciudad vivida, cada vez más, con la llegada
del siglo XiX, como capital de un estado que parece existir de hecho, aunque
españa logrará retrasar su independencia durante mucho tiempo.
se violan las viejas murallas convertidas en el límite de una población de-
masiado aglomerada y socialmente indiferenciada, hasta llegar, en 1862, a la
autorización por parte del gobierno a su destrucción progresiva, para llevar a
cabo una urbanización que se expande rápidamente en los distritos, según los
esquemas de asentamiento que más corresponden, en este caso, a una jerar-
quía del censo y a nuevos modelos funcionales (fig. 9, p. 183, la habana en el
siglo XiX [deroy]).
la sacarocracia prefiere a los suntuosos palacios de La Habana Vieja, de
los cuales se realizan todavía algunos ejemplos de interés, las elegantes
quintas: residencias rodeadas por jardines tropicales que se suceden en el
reticulado de anchas avenidas de los nuevos barrios residenciales, plani-
ficados y realizados más allá de las inmediatas expansiones extramuros
hacia suroeste y oeste, como el cerro, primer asentamiento de élite de la
habana27, de la primera mitad del siglo XIX; y el Vedado28, de la segunda.
para muchos de dichos palacios empieza un proceso de abandono y
de degradación, que muchas veces se concluye después de decenas de
años de uso como barbacoas, a los cuales se alternan nuevas interven-
ciones especulativas de solares y ciudadelas29, tipologías diferentes, pero
todas correspondientes a los angostos y animados solares en alquiler en
los cuales se concentra la parte más pobre de la población libre habane-
ra. a lo largo de las arterias ortogonales que delimitan las manzanas de
extramuros del siglo XiX, se alternan edificios residenciales, destinados
fundamentalmente a franjas medio-bajas de la población, y a activida-
des comerciales y productivas. aquí se impone una tipología con portales
frontales continuos que, empleada por primera vez en uno de los lugares
más significativos de la ciudad amurallada, la Plaza Vieja, tendrá amplia
difusión en el curso del siglo XiX, dando como resultado ese recorrido
que desembocará en la imagen de la ciudad de las columnas30. un ape-
que “alrededor de la habana, en el anfiteatro de regla, estas palmas, que eran mi delicia, van
desapareciendo de año en año; desaparecidas las forestas de bambú de un tiempo, los estanques
y las lagunas, hoy secos, se cultivan […] en cuba, la tierra, ya despojada de su estrato vegetal,
ofrece hoy sólo una débil huella de su antigua abundancia selvática”. humboldt, Ensayo, 63.
27
Felicia chateloin, “colón, un territorio clave en el desarrollo habanero”, en El barrio de Co-
lón, ed. Gina rey (la habana: pònton caribe, 2005), 17.
28
El Vedado está destinado, en el curso de su progresiva edificación, a convertirse en un lugar
excelente y paradigmático durante la sucesión armoniosa de las diferentes tendencias de la
arquitectura habanera, acumulando “un rico patrimonio construido que abarca fundamen-
talmente al neoclasicismo, al eclecticismo, art decó y movimiento moderno […] con una
mezcla balanceada de unidad en la variedad que es la esencia eterna de la armonía”. mario
Coyula, “Más acá del río y bajo los árboles a la sombra de un Vedado que ya no es más”, en
DPPF-CH y OHCH, El Vedado, 62.
29
carley, Cuba, 86.
30
“[…] una de las más singulares constantes del estilo habanero: la increíble profusión de
lativo que expresa un elemento fuerte de la identidad urbana, destinado

a reproducirse en el tiempo de manera capilar, a través de la creación de
largas secuencias de pasajes porticados por sutiles columnas (fig. 13, p.
184, la calzada del monte).
los mismos capitales que redefinen la geografía residencial de la ciudad
concurren en su desarrollo en general. un desarrollo que aparece muchas
veces como vanguardia (no sólo respecto a la realidad hispanoamericana)31,
y que se concretiza físicamente en una serie de obras de construcción civil
de prestigio, iniciada a finales del siglo XVIII, en concreto con los gobiernos
de Fondesviela de la torre y de las casas, y que prosiguen durante toda la
centuria siguiente, con momentos de especial activismo bajo el gobierno de
tacón, ya en los años treinta. las articulaciones nodales del nuevo espacio
urbano, las plazas y las anchas avenidas están acompañadas por amplias
franjas verdes, arboledas continuas, jardines, áreas de recreo y de paseo (es
de este período el paseo habanero más famoso, en las afueras, cerca de las
murallas, el Prado, ahora Paseo Martí), en el cual se asoman un número
progresivamente creciente de edificios administrativos, mercados, bibliote-
cas, teatros, escuelas, asociaciones culturales, aduanas, estaciones de ferro-
carril y marítimas (fig. 12, p. 184, edificios en el paseo del prado).
el elemento unificador de los barrios residenciales, de los lugares del
comercio y de los centros administrativos es el estilo neoclásico de ins-
piración francesa y anglosajona, que caracteriza a la arquitectura y a los
espacios urbanos, nuevos o remodelados según los dictámenes de planes
y reglamentaciones edilicias de la época32. un estilo que evoca realidades
más adelantadas con el papel de representación simbólica de modernidad
y liberalismo, en contraposición con obsoletos modelos barrocos de im-
portación española33, y que, adaptados en clave local, constituye un sólido
momento de búsqueda de una identidad cultural habanera y cubana en
columnas, en una ciudad que es emporio de columnas, selva de columnas, columnata infinita,
última urbe en tener columnas en tal demasía”. Alejo Carpentier, La ciudad de las columnas (la
habana: letras cubanas, 1982), 26.
31
la habana ha sido un lugar de innovaciones en el pasado como, por ejemplo, en el caso de
la construcción del primer acueducto de las américas, la Zanja real (1592), hacia finales del si-
glo XVIII, y ha introducido precozmente muchos símbolos del progreso técnico: sistema postal
(1765), pavimentación de las calles (1780), barcos de vapor (1819), ferrocarril (1837), gas (1848),
telégrafo (1855), teléfono (1881), iluminación eléctrica (1890), cinematógrafo (1897); y ya en
nuestro siglo, el tranvía eléctrico (1901), la radio (1920), la televisión (1950). este elenco, excepto
algunos elementos extraídos de otras fuentes, aparece citado orgullosamente en una publica-
ción del Grupo para el desarrollo integral de la capital, Estrategia (la habana: Gdic, 1990), 10.
32
en concreto el plan de carrillo de albornoz, operativo entre 1830 y 1850, y el de albear y
lara, desde 1861.
33
La influencia de la cultura española se destaca todavía en el Plan del Vedado “[…] un pro-
yecto de vanguardia […] un exponente del inicio de la historia del planeamiento urbanístico
moderno […] inspirado en los ensanches europeos, particularmente el de Barcelona” de ilde-
fonso Cerdà. Gina Rey, “Prefacio”, en DPPF-CH y OHCH El Vedado, 25.
general34. una identidad que tiene que enfrentarse con la homologación

con los modelos norteamericanos, tal y como se pone de manifiesto, en el
campo de la construcción, en la difusión, sobre todo a lo largo de la costa,
de casas unifamiliares de madera prefabricadas, importadas desde estados
unidos y montadas directamente en el lugar, de las cuales nos habla con
comprensible sorpresa von humboldt35.
4. La capital
la habana inaugura el nuevo siglo como capital de un estado sobe-

rano, aún bajo la presión del control de Estados Unidos, país demasiado
cercano y capilarmente involucrado en el tejido económico de cuba, por no
decir que persigue su anexión. los recorridos y las modalidades de expan-
sión de la ciudad prosiguen con continuidad, según las líneas trazadas en
los años precedentes, pero con una fuerte aceleración en la fase post-bélica,
gracias al flujo vertiginoso de capitales36 procedentes del aumento del pre-
cio del azúcar en los mercados mundiales.
en las primeras décadas del siglo XX se produce una expansión urbana con
una rapidez nunca alcanzada antes. la habana “crece vertiginosamente en to-
do. en población, en extensión, en riqueza, en ostentación, en cultura”37.
en este período se multiplican las suntuosas quintas en los verdes ba-
rrios residenciales en rápida ampliación y, paralelamente se asiste al aleja-
miento de las clases medias del centro histórico, cada vez más abandonado,
con la excepción del área cercana al puerto, en la cual surgieron nuevos
edificios financieros y comerciales vinculados a las actividades de las com-
pañías navales, con funciones de residencia de bajo presupuesto, única al-
ternativa de vivienda para los estratos pobres a las “llega y pon”38.
en los centros de poder se produce un cambio decisivo. los distintos
dirigentes que se suceden en el gobierno apuntan a una representación del
nuevo papel de capital nacional de la ciudad, vinculada a su propio nom-
bre39, a pesar de encontrarse en un estado de clara sumisión, incluso estilís-
tica, a estados unidos. se edifican, en primer lugar, los símbolos canónicos
de la institución estatal, los monumentales palacio presidencial (1920) y
34
roberto segre, “continuità e rinnovamento nell’architettura cubana del XX secolo”, Casabe-
lla 466 (1981), 10.
35
“las casas […] construidas a lo largo de la bahía son verdaderamente elegantes, con una
arquitectura ligera. una vez trazada la planta estas se ordenaban desde los estados unidos
como si fueran muebles”. humboldt, Ensayo político, 63.
36
en la historiografía cubana esta fase se identifica con el nombre de “la danza de los millo-
nes”. Far, dirección política, Historia, 574.
37
sergio Baroni, Hacia una cultura del territorio (la habana: casablanca, 2003), 87.
38
Versión local de “villas-miseria”, compuesta por barracas de escombros, florecidas ilegal-
mente en las periferias no apetecibles de finales de los años Veinte. Julio Le Riverend Brusone,
La Habana, Espacio y Vida (madrid: mapfre, 1992), 218-219.
39
Gavira, “historia”, 67.
capitolio (1929), mientras que en pocos años se suceden tres propuestas de

plan director urbano: la de montoulieu de 1922, la de martínez inclán de
1925 y por último el más célebre Plan de Embellecimiento y Ampliación de
la habana, de Forestier, en 192640. De la visión de éste último (una ciudad
verde recorrida de avenidas de tipo hausmanniano, que unen polos de re-
ferencia espaciales, y dotada de un centro moderno y de amplios parques),
quedan las pocas intervenciones puntuales que permitirá la crisis del 29, en
concreto la reforma del área alrededor del capitolio, del paseo del prado y
de la avenida del puerto (fig. 15, p. 184, palacio presidencial y capitolio).
mientras tanto, la ciudad cambia de manera relevante los detalles ar-
quitectónicos de su paisaje urbano, que ya no se encontraba en condiciones
unificadas y homogéneas como en las edificaciones del siglo XiX, sino en
una situación muy diversificada en la sucesión de revivals y de revisiones
formales de lo más heterogéneo, que terminará en los años treinta en una
difusión de arquitecturas art decó41, segunda solamente a la de miami. un
eclecticismo que se propaga desde una élite en búsqueda de una repre-
sentación original de la propia riqueza, a través de códigos estéticos ya en
auge sobre todo en europa, penetrando en el fondo de la cultura local para
convertirse en un elemento generalmente compartido, “aquel eclecticismo
popular, modesto y digno el cual es el alma más visible y difundida de la
arquitectura habanera (fig. 16, p. 184, cine-teatro Fausto)”42.
un elemento fuerte de la identidad urbana, que encuentra su lugar por
antonomasia en el malecón, muy amado por los habaneros “que descubrie-
ron la maravilla de transitar junto a la inmensidad del mar”43, construido
por fases entre finales de siglo y 1930, desde el castillo de la punta hacia la
desembocadura del río almendares, límite tradicional de la ciudad (fig. 11,
p. 183, edificios en el malecón)44.
recorriéndolo ahora, y dejando de lado la aflicción causada por el de-
grado avanzado de muchas fachadas, la sensación es la de avanzar por un
alineado y vivido catálogo de arquitecturas de la época, de diferentes tipo-
logías y colores, unidas en una especie de cortina escenográfica de tonali-
dades que se modifican con el cambio de la luz intensa del mar del sur.
Y siempre en el malecón, en una área específica más al oeste delimitada
por el mismo (gracias al reflujo conspicuo de capital vinculado a hechos béli-
40
mario Gonzáles, “planos, esquemas y planes directores de la ciudad de la habana”, Arqui-
tectura y Urbanismo 2 (1993), 12-13.
41
resulta de notable interés la red de cines decó en el interior del centro urbano, “[…] el tem-
plo art decó que fueron los cines construidos en los finales de los años treinta”. cabrera infan-
te, La Habana, 23.
42
sergio Baroni, “rapporto dall’avana”, Zodiac 8 (1992), 181.
43
chateloin, “colón”, 20.
44
“7 km de fachada marítima, de muro de contención y de paseo que discurre entre […] dife-
rentes sectores urbanos cuyas caraterísticas diferenciales acompañan el devenir histórico del
desarrollo urbanístico de la ciudad”. programa malecón. españa + cuba, “el malecón de la
habana. un proceso de trasformación y de comperación”, Ciudadcity 3 (1998), 20.
cos europeos), podrán desplegarse libremente, en los años cuarenta y cincuen-

ta, los modelos norteamericanos, con la creación de un distrito de rascacielos
(el primero el gran “fuori scala” del edificio Focsa) del que se sentía muy orgu-
lloso el dictador Batista. en el centro de dicho distrito, la rampa45 se convirtió
en el nuevo centro cosmopolita de la habana en los años cincuenta.
posteriormente empieza la fase de la historia de la habana ligada a la
revolución castrista que, junto con el resto, mezclará completamente to-
das las cartas del juego urbano (fig. 14, hotel nacional y edificio Focsa).
45
“la rampa […] el tramo final della calle 23 […] termina en la intersección con el malecón
y la calzada de infanta, límite oeste de la ciudad central a principios del siglo XX. ese tramo
fue rellenado con edificaciones en menos de doce años a partir de 1947”. coyula, “más acá del
río”, 61.
8
10
Fig. 8 – La Plaza Vieja en 1762 (Venegas

Fornias, 1983).
Fig. 9 – La Habana en el siglo XIX (Deroy)
Museo Nacional de Bellas Artes, Habana.
Fig. 10 – El castillo del Morro.
11
Fig. 11 – Edificios en el Malecon.
12
13 14
15
Fig. 12 – Edificios en el paseo del Prado

(Foto por R. Paloscia).
Fig. 13 – La Calzada del Monte (Foto por
R. Paloscia).
Fig. 14 – Hotel Nacional y Edificio Focsa
Fig. 15 – Palacio Presidencialy Capitolio
Fig. 16 – Cine-teatro Fausto (Foto por R.
16
Paloscia).
L. Spitoni
Chapter 12
La Habana del Este: territorio y arquitectura
en la segunda mitad del siglo XX
Los resultados de una exhaustiva búsqueda capilar en el territorio de

la habana del este, uno de los grandes municipios de la capital cubana,
se encuentran en su parte más específicamente vinculada al patrimonio
arquitectónico. el objetivo es demostrar la riqueza de la producción ar-
quitectónica de la segunda mitad del s. XX. por supuesto, la habana del
este constituye el lugar probablemente más relevante dentro del comple-
jo de culturas de finales de siglo. sin embargo, un análisis más profundo
y que se extienda por todo el territorio metropolitano puede revelar la
existencia de un patrimonio contemporáneo de considerable valor.
1. El Atlas del patrimonio territorial
la historia arquitectónica de toda la provincia de ciudad habana po-

see una riqueza y una variedad que no se refieren solamente al período
colonial. el valor patrimonial de una gran cantidad de obras arquitectóni-
cas del siglo XX todavía no está oficialmente reconocida y, en la mayoría
de los casos, se entrecruza con valores que superan el simple contexto
arquitectónico formal. en la investigación llevada a cabo durante la ela-
boración del atlas del patrimonio territorial de la habana del este, estos
valores se han identificado no sólo a través de aspectos formales, estéticos
y espaciales, sino también a través de una gama más amplia de factores
que se pueden reconducir al concepto mismo de valor territorial, como la
significación artística intrínseca, el valor cultural y la calidad represen-
tativa de un momento específico y, por lo tanto, de la identidad local del
territorio. se incluyen también factores sociales de especial relevancia de-
bido a las dinámicas comunitarias del contexto en el que se desarrollan.
la revolución, sin embargo, no expresó sus mejores contenidos en térmi-
nos monumentales. en el área del municipio de la habana del este, se
han identificado como valores obras de la arquitectura escolar, que con-

trariamente con otras de una relevancia expresivo-monumental, intenta-
ron comunicar los símbolos de la sociedad y de su cultura, evidenciados
en las escuelas-monumento a la educación de las masas. más allá de este
tipo de arquitectura escolar, encontramos el caso evidente de los edificios
multifamiliares, modelos de prefabricación abierta, ligadas a decisiones
económicas y políticas, desafortunadamente a corto plazo. la necesidad
de construir casas, escuelas y hospitales con rápidez y con recursos míni-
mos, desembocó en una utilización creciente de elementos prefabricados,
con la uniformidad y monotonía consiguientes, en la reducción del nivel
estético, llevándolo hacia el formalismo y el tecnicismo. en este ámbito,
lo prioritario no es establecer la relación dialéctica entre proceso social y
plano formal, entre estética y técnica. el significado cultural de la arqui-
tectura no queda anulado, incluso cuando la rigidez formal y la ausencia
de valores simbólicos y expresivos caracterizan a determinados momen-
tos políticos y económicos específicos.
simplificando mucho, se pueden llegar a considerar las conclusiones de
este análisis (los valores arquitectónicos en primer lugar), como el resulta-
do de una ecuación en la que se trata de mantener la mayor cantidad de va-
riables posibles, haciendo referencia a los conceptos de estética y de forma
siempre en un plano histórico-social.
este breve ensayo sobre la investigación llevada a cabo en el municipio
de la habana del este se centra en los valores arquitectónicos que han ca-
racterizado la arquitectura cubana de la segunda mitad del siglo XX, a tra-
vés de una síntesis de las fases principales de la relación entre movimientos
sociales y culturales y las consecuencias que se han generado en el ámbito
arquitectónico. el desarrollo, los límites de las utopías y las consiguientes
respuestas arquitectónicas, la dificultad total en la elaboración de una iden-
tidad arquitectónica cubana, que se ha quedado congelada en una fase de
gestación que todavía no se ha concluido, y que hoy en día parece definiti-
vamente ser objeto de un nuevo destacado interés.
2. Arquitectura y territorio: Años 50
en todo el país el proceso de sustitución del repertorio ecléctico resul-

ta poco nítido y muy lento. la primera obra reconocida como moderna,
que aparece en el Vedado en los años treinta, es el edificio de apartamen-
tos y oficinas pedro martínez inclán, de Justo carrillo. a pesar de la gran
cantidad de modificaciones del estado actual, es posible imaginar el im-
pacto urbano que genera su expresividad, basada en la ausencia total de
la decoración y en los volúmenes puros de los balcones continuos. En una
misma línea obtiene mayor consenso la obra de rafael de cárdenas, que
culmina los años veinte construyendo mansiones eclécticas y comienza
los años treinta y cuarenta con un énfasis de modernidad que lo convierte
en la vanguardia del momento (fig. 21, p. 196). en este período se desa-

rrolla una especie de regionalismo moderno muy interesante, limitado al
tema residencial. se caracteriza por una particular integración de valores
definidos por el movimiento moderno con los valores locales estratifica-
dos de la tradición de siglos. en esta arquitectura racionalista cubana re-
aparecen los códigos de la casa colonial: la relación con la luz, los patios,
los portales, las persianas, los cristales de colores, los ladrillos y las tejas,
la cerámica y los azulejos. las obras más significativas de esta tenden-
cia fueron construidas por mario romañach, Frank martínez y nicolás
Quintana. Frank martínez, que en el sector santa maría del mar constru-
ye la casa de carlos estrada y la casa de ulises carbó, destaca desde sus
primeras obras por el acercamiento estético lecorbusiano, introduciendo
el recurrente paralelepípedo sobre pilotes, soluciones más cálidas y loca-
les, a través del uso de materiales a vista. sucesivamente abandona el uso
de los pilotes y de la planta libre y reconstruye una serie de residencias en
las cuales obtiene el mayor resultado del período en la búsqueda de una
identidad arquitectónica cubana. las soluciones espaciales propuestas
por martínez eliminan la diferencia entre externo e interno por medio de
acogedores patios centrales e interesantes soluciones para mejorar la ven-
tilación interna de los ambientes, como los desniveles de los entrepisos.
la otra figura destacada de la arquitectura cubana de los 50 es nicolás
Quintana, que adopta formas más universales y basa sus obras en la dife-
renciación volumétrica de sus partes. Frecuentemente introduce techos a
dos aguas para jerarquizar los espacios, enfatiza la necesidad de obtener
un ambiente cubano, y para ello reasume detalles tradicionales como las
celosías y las vidrieras de colores. muchas de sus obras más significativas
son realizadas en Varadero; en La Habana destacan la casa de Ramírez
corría y la casa de mardonio santiago. en el municipio de la habana
del este realiza la casa de eduardo rivero, en 1954, ubicada en el sector
Santa María del Mar. En los edificios públicos que se construyen en este
período ya es posible reencontrar las influencias del purismo miesiano
como, por ejemplo, en el instituto Edison de La Víbora; la adaptación de
las paredes continúa con la aplicación de los rompe soles lecorbusianos,
como en el Retiro Odontológico del Vedado de Antonio Quintana. Los
clubes sociales y los centros recreativos burgueses permitieron una cierta
experimentación formal en el uso de estructuras ligeras para la cobertu-
ra y la integración con el ambiente natural. es el caso del club médico
de Marcial E. González y Virgilio Chacón, en Santa María del Mar, o del
club Bancario nacional, hoy hotel atlántico (fig. 24, p. 196), de lanz y
del pozo, donde se pone de relieve la clara influencia de la arquitectura
de niemeyer.
el ejemplo más significativo dentro de esta temática data de 1951; se
trata del salón arcos de cristal del cabaret tropicana, de max Borges Jr.,
con una solución de cobertura a veces telescópica, cuya estructura se re-
duce a una cobertura ligera absorbida por el predominio de la vegetación

tropical. Esta búsqueda tecnológica del cálculo estructural en términos
expresivos reaparece en una de las primeras experiencias de prefabrica-
ción que se realiza en cuba: los laboratorios de la facultad de ingeniería
Eléctrica de la Universidad de Villanueva, llevada a cabo por Manuel
Gutiérrez en el municipio de playa. entre 1954 y 1956, se construye en el
Vedado el edificio Focsa (400 apartamentos y 28 pisos) de los arquitectos
ernesto Gómez sampara y martín domínguez. el Focsa marca una eta-
pa más urbana que arquitectónica: una ciudad dentro de la ciudad, un
hábitat burgués que elude la trama urbana de las grandes mansiones de
los años 20. este momento arquitectónico está marcado también por el
importante tema de la integración entre arquitectura, escultura y pintura.
en 1952 se promulga un decreto ley que establece que el 6% del coste de
los edificios públicos y el 3% de los privados sería dedicado a la reali-
zación de pinturas y esculturas de artistas cubanos. de hecho, la mayor
parte de los artistas de la vanguardia entre los años treinta y cincuenta
realizaron obras integradas con la arquitectura: mario romañach traba-
ja con roberto diago, nicolás Quintana con domingo ravanet, ricardo
porro con portocarrero, antonio Quintana con Wilfredo lam. en 1954
se levanta el museo nacional de Bellas artes, proyectado por alfonso
rodríguez, que todavía representa el complejo más significativo a nivel
nacional. la entrada al museo está jerarquizada por la escultura de rita
longa: Forma, espacio y luz.
La arquitectura de los hoteles es la última en insertarse en este tema de
integración plástica-arquitectura. en 1957 se construye el hotel habana
riviera proyectado por polevitzky, Jonson & associates, con obras de
López Duribe, Cundo Bermúdez, Hidalgo de Caviedes y Florencio
Gelabert, también autor de la escultura del hotel atlántico. en el hotel
habana hilton (actual habana libre) proyectado por Becket, alfonso
y Menéndez, trabajan Portocarrero, Carreño, Cundo, Bermúdez, Juan
David y Amelia, autor del mural de la entrada. La búsqueda de las fu-
siones entre pintura y arquitectura llega a formas plásticas en las cuales
el edificio en sí es tratado como una obra escultórica. más que construir,
el arquitecto modela. la obra de ricardo porro es tal vez la que más se
acerca a la totalidad de esta integración. su obra se extiende hasta prin-
cipios de los años sesenta, momento en el que produce una de las obras
más relevantes de toda la arquitectura cubana: las escuelas nacionales de
arte (fig. 22, p. 196). las escuelas nacionales de arte de cubanacán, de
1960-1963, son quizá la síntesis más avanzada de la arquitectura cubana:
los elementos que se integran en estas obras recogen una tradición que
parte del período colonial, a través de la herencia afro hasta alcanzar la
integración entre el arte y la arquitectura, y llega a formas plásticas en las
cuales los edificios mismos están modelados como materia escultórica.
el uso del ladrillo a vista o enlucidos en cal, las galerías de sombra, los
patios internos, las tramas de cerámica y madera cernedoras de luz y la

integración con la naturaleza alcanzaron una nueva dimensión formal y
espacial.
3. Arquitectura y territorio: Años 60
el final de los años cincuenta y los primeros años de los sesenta mar-
can el fin del movimiento moderno. la renovación de la obra de una ge-
neración de arquitectos como romañach, Quintana, max Borges, Frank
Martínez, Eugenio Batista, se puede resumir como la búsqueda de la ti-
picidad, del espíritu vernacular radicado en el clima y en las costumbres
locales. Fueron los únicos verdaderos innovadores e investigadores de
un nuevo estilo propio, a través de la reinterpretación de las soluciones
esenciales de la arquitectura tradicional cubana en un lenguaje moderno;
una investigación que, además de su carácter expresivo-artístico, era el
resultado de la adaptación a un determinado ambiente físico. los radi-
cales cambios políticos se reflejan intensamente en la arquitectura y en
su forma de producción. se produce la emigración en masa de los prin-
cipales protagonistas del movimiento moderno. entre 1959 y 1961, año
de la declaración del carácter socialista del nuevo gobierno, la prioridad
constructiva se traslada radicalmente a los proyectos de contenido social,
racionalizando la construcción privada de la burguesía local. en 1959 se
crea el INAV (Instituto Nacional de Ahorro y Vivienda) que establece la
base para los planos de realización de las viviendas populares y del sa-
neamiento de los barrios degradados.
se adoptan masivamente los sistemas prefabricados de cemento ar-
mado con elementos estructurales producidos a pie de obra, en los cua-
les se utiliza una tecnología muy simple, con elementos de dimensiones
reducidas para ser montadas manualmente. en 1963, en la habana, se
presenta la Unidad Vecinal N1, que posee una clara intención a todos
los niveles de sustituir el enfoque individual con el del grupo de traba-
jo, y la estética exclusivista con la función social. a partir de este mo-
mento comienza una larga etapa arquitectónica de ausencia de valores
simbólicos y expresivos en las construcciones en masa: la necesidad de
construir, en el menor tiempo posible y al mínimo coste, casas, escuelas
y hospitales genera una utilización cada vez más creciente de elementos
prefabricados, con la consiguiente uniformidad y monotonía que com-
porta, bajando el nivel estético hacia una gran rigidez formal y hacia el
tecnicismo; dicha aptitud se extenderá hasta la actualidad, a causa de las
difíciles condiciones políticas y económicas, sin anular por esta razón
su valor social: construir para el pueblo con los escasísimos recursos del
país. los parámetros en juego desde los primeros momentos de la arqui-
tectura de masa son la disponibilidad de mano de obra, la participación
del pueblo en la construcción, y la escasez de materiales. el camino hacia
la prefabricación pasa por la interpretación de los sistemas constructi-

vos de europa después de la segunda guerra mundial, como el sistema
Gran panel, que en cuba es adoptado con paneles más ligeros. desde el
principio resulta evidente que el sistema de prefabricación cerrado que
se utiliza para las urbanizaciones a gran escala, como la Unidad Vecinal
y la sucesiva alamar, no son suficientes para generar una diversificación
y una organización más compleja del conjunto paisajístico. todo ello en
un territorio que ha sufrido ya una parcelación fragmentada y monótona
bajo el mito de la residencia individual y del sweet home de los suburbios
jardín, “remasticada” en una variedad tipológica infinita y repetida en
serie en los repartos especulativos del municipio de la habana del este.
se llevan a cabo algunos intentos por salir de la rigidez de la prefabri-
cación por ejemplo con el sistema constructivo sandino, evolución del
sistema novoa que nace antes de la revolución como alternativa en la
construcción económica. como en el caso del novoa, la ventaja princi-
pal es la posibilidad de montar manualmente los distintos elementos:
las columnas y los paneles de alrededor de 70 kilos. los paneles tenían
un espesor de 6 cms y la cubierta de 10, con un consumo de materiales
muy bajo. el sistema sandino se presta a soluciones tecnológicas más
complejas y abiertas hacia la integración con los elementos artesanales.
en el municipio de la habana del este se encuentran todavía algunos
ejemplos en buen estado, entre los cuales hay que citar una casa de dos
plantas en la que resultan evidentes las posibilidades de diversificación
de las soluciones formales.
el proyecto de antonio Quintana y alberto rodríguez constituye una
atractiva experiencia para superar el reductivismo formal y espacial; se tra-
ta de un edificio experimental de 17 pisos, realizado en la zona del malecón,
en el Vedado. Es un prototipo de bloque alto construido con la tecnolo-
gía de moldes deslizantes (fig. 25, p. 196). la investigación de Quintana y
rodríguez se perfila como una interesante aproximación para lograr una
célula espacial unitaria de la vivienda. desafortunadamente, no tiene una
consecución adecuada en los sucesivos bloques altos realizados con el mis-
mo sistema constructivo, por ejemplo, en alamar. mientras la residencia
establece la continuidad con un hipotético colectivo, la necesidad de cons-
truir servicios básicos y la infraestructura se basan en las mismas premisas:
período corto y recursos mínimos.
en un momento en el cual la arquitectura atravesaba el período del
brutalismo de Kenzo Tange, en Cuba continúa la serie y tipificación de
los elementos que la componen. la prefabricación y los tentativos de salir
de la rigidez serán la constante de todo el proceso arquitectónico hasta
la actualidad. el elemento en el que se concentran los esfuerzos, el más
complejo y el más conspicuo de la construcción, es la cubierta. La bús-
queda de una cubierta ligera renueva el interés por las investigaciones
de la pasada década, y desemboca en soluciones interesantes como el
sistema folded-plates: parábolas prefabricadas de un espesor mínimo. en

1961 se realizan las cabañas del mégano, la taquilla de Bacuranao y las
de Guanabo. el modelo folded-plates se utiliza sobre todo en los centros
recreativos balnearios de todo el país. la ligereza de las semi bóvedas
de las cabañas y su curvatura contrapuestas a la vegetación se convier-
ten en un elemento identificador de los centros turísticos. estas cásca-
ras estructurales que determinan el espacio de la célula ya habían sido
experimentadas en algunas residencias privadas de los años 50. en la
Habana del Este persisten aún algunos ejemplos muy válidos de esta bús-
queda plástico-formal, como la casa de José Fernández tauler, la casa de
Sixto Navarro en Santa María, proyectada por Raúl Gutiérrez, y la ca-
sa de Fernando mimó, proyectada por evelio pina. a finales de los años
50, pina realiza también la iglesia templo de santa catarina labouré en
puentes Grandes, la habana. en la cubierta utiliza un cascarón generado
por la intersección de formas parabólicas e hiperbólicas que permite cu-
brir un área notable con un número reducido de soportes. La estructura
se apoya sobre cuatro pilares a 16 metros de distancia entre sí, que dejan
un voladizo externo de 8,5 metros por 16,5 metros sobre cada lado ex-
terno. el espesor de la cáscara es de sólo 6 cm, con acero como refuerzo
colocado en el centro.
en general la imagen expresiva lograda con los elementos prefabricados
es superior en algunas temáticas que permiten una mayor libertad plástica.
En 1966, el arquitecto Mario Girona realiza en el Vedado lo que se converti-
ría en un ícono de las estructuras: la heladería coppelia (fig. 19, p. 195), que
da lugar a una serie de mini copias que imitan esta imagen: una de ellas, el
mini coppelia, la encontramos en campo Florido.
4. Arquitectura y territorio: Años 70-80
[…] ahora, cuando millones de personas ya han mejorado sus condiciones

de vivienda, aparece la posibilidad de dedicar más atención a la calidad de
la construcción, la distribución más cómoda de los apartamentos, el aspec-
to de las viviendas, las calles y los edificios públicos. Nuestros arquitectos
pueden y deben acabar con la monotonía en la construcción, con la inex-
presividad de las construcciones arquitectónicas (leonid Brezhnev 1974).
la etapa de los años 70 y 80 está caracterizada principalmente por la

búsqueda de una solución a la demanda de casas, por el impulso hacia
la industrialización en la construcción, y por salir de la condición de
subdesarrollo. simultáneamente se comienza a desarrollar la participa-
ción popular y los mecanismos de autoconstrucción y de participación
que se iban definiendo en américa latina, y que generarán los meca-
nismos de autoconstrucción todavía empleados en cuba. la ayuda y la
influencia de la antigua unión soviética resulta evidente en la adopción
de los nuevos sistemas de prefabricado, que en cuba serán adaptados a

las condiciones climáticas locales, resultando más flexibles y económi-
cos. la tecnología del sistema Grandes paneles de los primeros grandes
bloques de edificios es superada por la eslava del sistema ims, consti-
tuido por nervaduras y columnas pre y post-tensadas. se crea una serie
de catálogos de componentes y plantas-polígonos como las de Guanajay
y de san José, dedicados exclusivamente a la producción de elemen-
tos del sistema ims. la misma posibilidad de flexibilidad aparece con
el sistema Gran panel 70, versión cubana de la tecnología escandinava
larne nielsen y con el sistema moldes deslizantes, ya experimentado
en La Habana en el edificio de 17 plantas de G y Malecón en el Vedado.
todos estos nuevos modelos permiten superar en productividad y en
empleo masivo a los sistemas novoa, sandino y e14 (fig. 18, p. 195). la
cuadrilla de proyectistas del Grupo Nacional de Viviendas realiza en
estos años más de treinta edificios altos de hasta veinte plantas, con el
objetivo de compactar la urbanización y elevar la densidad poblacio-
nal. Vivas formula la teoría de la estructura de las masas y la estructura
de la participación popular en la construcción: el sistema de la micro-
brigada. la participación está concebida no sólo como fuerza de tra-
bajo, sino como integración creativa entre proyectista y población. la
solución denominada plus-trabajo es la respuesta de los trabajadores a
los problemas implícitos en el desarrollo económico del país, la identifi-
cación con el sentido colectivista y con la desaparición de la propiedad
privada, que le cede su lugar a la casa concebida como servicio social
vinculado al centro de trabajo y al colectivo de trabajadores. la micro-
brigada es versátil, puede apoyarse en otras brigadas especializadas en
el caso de montaje de estructuras prefabricadas. a principios de 1971,
más de mil trabajadores participan en la construcción de 1154 unidades
habitables en las nuevas áreas de expansión de la ciudad: plaza de la
revolución, Boyeros, alamar, etc. en dos años se consolida una fuerza
de trabajo estable integrada por más de mil grupos. debido a la necesi-
dad existente, estos grupos realizan más de 25000 unidades habitables
y una notable cantidad de servicios y obras sociales. en los años 80 las
microbrigadas llegan a la gran urbanización del plan director: alamar
(130000 habitantes), altahabana (110000) y san agustín (35000), consa-
grándola como el principal y gigantesco recurso en el que se basa todo
el mecanismo constructivo estatal. el plan director de 1970 incorpora
un plan de desarrollo intenso del turismo, con el consiguiente incre-
mento de la capacidad de recepción de los hoteles. en 1980 comienzan
a funcionar más de 4000 habitaciones nuevas. las diversas soluciones
van del gran hotel urbano alto a los pequeños hoteles de playa de 70
habitaciones. el objetivo no es seguramente el de lograr el lujo o la mo-
numentalidad, sino la creación de arquitecturas de fácil construcción y
mantenimiento. así, se adoptan los mismos sistemas constructivos uti-
lizados para los bloques de viviendas, las escuelas y los hospitales. una
de las mayores realizaciones técnico-formales es sin duda el hotel mar
azul (fig. 20, p. 195) de santa maría del mar, proyectado con el sistema
Girón de Fernando pérez y mario Girona, autor del famoso disco vola-
dor de la heladería coppelia. en miramar, en el mismo período y con
el mismo sistema de moldes deslizantes utilizado en los edificios de
alamar, se erige el tritón, un hotel de 20 plantas. la técnica de cons-
trucción de los hoteles todavía estaba determinada por la necesidad de
levantar en tiempos breves y con recursos muy limitados un número
considerable de centros turísticos, en un período de grandísimas difi-
cultades económicas y de fuerte devaluación de la moneda, en el cual el
turismo constituía sin duda el recurso más consistente al que se podía
echar mano. menos significativo en términos conceptuales y formales
es el uso del repertorio llamado aborigen. la verdadera presencia de la
tradición Taina y Siboney es únicamente reconocible fragmentariamen-
te en las construcciones rurales espontáneas: los Bohíos (fig. 17, p. 195),
que conservan una forma constructiva originaria de la raza aborigen
desaparecida en los primeros años de la conquista española. sobre to-
do en este período la utilización de los materiales autóctonos como la
caña brava, el yarey o el tronco de la palma son aplicados a los temas
arquitectónicos recreativos de carácter turístico. contamos con diversos
ejemplos en el área de las playas del este. aunque la mayor parte de
las veces dichas arquitecturas acaban en el kitch folklórico por la au-
sencia de verdaderas ideas en los proyectos, al menos no contribuyen
a la cementificación. las instalaciones del parque nacional Baconao en
la provincia de santiago de cuba, realizadas por un grupo de jóvenes
arquitectos bajo la dirección de alberto arredondo, constituyen una in-
teresante experiencia arquitectónica de los años 80 en la que se logra in-
tegrar los valores espaciales con la utilización de los materiales locales,
todo ello con un impacto ambiental prácticamente nulo. La búsqueda de
contenidos expresivos en los elementos prefabricados y de alta tecnolo-
gía encuentra su momento más significativo en determinados proyectos
y obras del arquitecto antonio Quintana, ubicados en algunos casos en
la habana del este. en santa maría del mar, Quintana construye la casa
de eduardo rivero. entre 1972 y 1975 propone una serie de proyectos
visionarios de gran interés: el hotel las Brujas en santiago de cuba, el
proyecto del acuario de Guanabo en 1972 (que no se llevó a cabo), en
el que se planteaba la opción de mantener a los peces en su ambiente
natural y de permitir la observación a los visitantes, a través del uso de
un sistema de túneles transparentes. Desgraciadamente, los proyectos
de nicolás Quintana se concretizaron en pocas obras, entre las cuales
cabe destacar el palacio de las convenciones, realizado para la cumbre
de los países no alineados en 1979, y la casa de los cosmonautas de
Varadero. El tema del acuario de Guanabo es también lo aborda el ar-
quitecto Frank martínez, que realiza en santa maría del mar la casa
de carlos estrada. martínez, al igual que Quintana, utiliza la franja de
coral que se extiende delante de la ensenada natural de sibarimar, mo-
viendo al público con embarcaciones a través de unos cilindros vertica-
les de cemento. dichos cilindros están provistos de aperturas de cristal
que permiten admirar la barrera coralina en su dimensión natural.
Fig. 17 – La verdadera presencia de la tra-
dición Taina y Siboney es únicamente reco-
nocible fragmentariamente en las construc-
ciones rurales espontáneas: los Bohíos (Foto
por L. Spitoni).
Fig. 18 – Los nuevos modelos permiten su-
perar en productividad y en empleo masivo
a los sistemas Novoa, Sandino y E14 (Foto
por L. Spitoni).
Fig. 19 – En 1966, el arquitecto Mario Gi-
rona realiza en el Vedado la heladería Cop-
pelia (Foto por L. Spitoni).
Fig. 20 – El Hotel Mar Azul de Santa
María del mar, proyectado con el sistema
Girón de Fernando Pérez y Mario Girona
(Foto por L. Spitoni).
17 18
19 20
22
21 23
24 25
Fig. 21 – Obra de Rafael de Cárdenas, que culmina los años veinte construyendo mansiones
eclécticas y comienza los años treinta y cuarenta con un énfasis de modernidad que lo con-
vierte en la vanguardia del momento (Foto por L. Spitoni).
Figg. 22-23 – Las Escuelas Nacionales de Arte (Foto por L. Spitoni).
Fig. 24 – El Club Bancario Nacional, hoy Hotel Atlántico, de Lanz y Del Pozo, donde se
pone de relieve la clara influencia de la arquitectura de Niemeyer (Foto por L. Spitoni).
Fig. 25 – Edificio experimental de 17 pisos, realizado en la zona del Malecón, en el Vedado. Es un
prototipo de bloque alto construido con la tecnología de moldes deslizantes (Foto por L. Spitoni).
Part V
examples of the transnational

dimension of cuban culture:
a poet, a painter, some musicians
Fig. 26 – Julio Girona, black and white ink drawing on paper, no date (photo by I. Girona).
On the previous page – Julio Girona, abstract painting, oil on cardboard, late 1990’s (photo by I. Girona).
Part V
Examples of the Transnational Dimension of

Cuban Culture: a Poet, a Painter,
Some Musicians
this section offers a few examples of international complexity in cuban

cultural forms. rather than delving into transformations of cuban cul-
ture since the revolution of 1959 or trying to say anything new about José
martí, alejo carpentier, nicolás Guillén or other towering cuban intellec-
tual figures, or exploring new interpretations of canons of cuban arts and
culture1, this section looks at examples of tension between “pure” and “so-
cial” art in the context of cuban cultural history. in the 1920s and 1930s,
cuba became an effervescent workshop for ideas and actions related to
both aesthetic research and intellectual public commitment. determined
to build a national alternative to american cultural hegemony and impe-
rialism and at the same time fighting machado’s dictatorship, historians
emilio roig de leuchsenring and ramiro Guerra, social scientist Fernando
Ortiz, student leader Julio Antonio Mella and writers Alejo Carpentier,
nicolas Guillén and Juan marinello argued for the elevation of popular
consciousness from a variety of perspectives in what they perceived was
an already dying republic. By the 1930s, two opposite cultural trends had
clearly emerged: the search for a literature to represent social struggles in
order to uplift popular consciousness, and the pursuit of a new aesthet-
ic and refined poetical forms2. By the mid 1940s, the latter had led to the
founding of the magazine Orígenes around the poet, novelist and literary
critic José lezama lima. among the poets of that generation who aimed
1
For a synthesis of the historical forms of cuban culture from a variety of perspectives, see:
rafael rojas, “apuntes para una historia intellectual”; Françoise moulin-civil, “literatura”;
dolores Gonzáles-ripoll, “prensa y cine”; Zoila lapique Becali, “la arquitectura, las artes
plastic y la musica en la cultura cubana”, in Historia de Cuba, ed. Consuelo Naranjo Orovio
(madrid: dos calles, 2009), 393-474; anke Birkenmaier and roberto Gonzáles echevarría,
eds., Cuba: un siglo de literatura 1902-2002 (madrid: colibrí, 2004).
2
moulin-civil, “literatura”, in Historia de Cuba, ed. Orovio, 417.
at aesthetic renovation in their search for “pure” poetry was dulce maría
loynaz whose life and works are explored in coral García’s essay in this
section. Born at the same time as the cuban republic in 1902, loynaz trav-
eled extensively but never left cuba where she died in 1987. as García ar-
gues, loynaz’ poetry does not have any social or political content, yet the
soul of her beloved island of cuba is a pervasive presence from which ex-
udes an ideal cultural continuity with spain. almost belonging to loynaz’
generation, but not to her bourgeois background, the cuban painter Julio
Girona (1914-2002) took a different path. Girona lived in some of the most
stimulating artistic communities of paris, mexico city and new York city
from the 1930s to the 1950s and he spent most of his life abroad, yet his
works were shaped by cuban social and political content. as his daughter
ilse Girona recalls in this section, the cuban painter traveled regularly to
cuba and exulted in the triumph of the revolution of 1959. during the last
fifty years, both inside and outside cuba, the complexity of the island’s cul-
ture can perhaps be captured by two opposite interpretations: the cuban
past as a source of critical reflection on the present and the marketing of
the past as nostalgia. Broadly speaking, the old and never-fully-answered
question regarding the limits of artistic freedom has constantly generated
conflicts and tensions3, and the global commercialization of cuban music
reflects one of these tensions4. By centering on the bright and dark sides of
Wim Venders’ famous documentary film Buena Vista Social Club, Vittorio
perna’s essay offers fresh insights on the role that music has in conveying
multiple and contradictory images of cuba’s past and present.
3
in a often-quoted speech of 1961 Fidel castro synthesized the revolution’s attitudes to-
wards intellectual freedom. By making an explicit commitment to artistic freedom he also
warned that no citizen had the right to threaten the existence of the revolution: “Within the
revolution, everything; against the revolution, no rights at all”. Palabras a los intellectuales
(pamphlet), english translation available at Castro Speech Database on-line, lanic.utexas.edu/
la/cb/cuba/castro/1961/19610630. On the Revolution’s extraordinary impulse to make cultural
expressions accessible to the masses see: roberto Gonzáles echevarría, “criticism and litera-
ture in revolutionary cuba”, Cuban Studies/Estudios Cubanos 1 (1981): 1-17.
4
see: leonardo acosta, Otra visión de la música popular cubana (la habana: letras cubanas,
2004).
C. García
Chapter 13
Dulce María Loynaz, entre Cuba y España
la personalidad de dulce maría loynaz es atractiva precisamente

por ser escurridiza, por no ser fácil de encasillar, lo cual puede dar lugar
a interpretaciones parciales a las que aludiremos en esta sucinta recon-
strucción de la recepción de su obra literaria a ambos lados del Océano
atlántico.
nuestra poetisa nació en 1902 en la habana, y aunque viajó mucho
por el mundo, nunca abandonó la isla para irse al exilio; de hecho murió
en su residencia del Vedado en 1997. Tanto ella como sus hermanos
enrique, carlos manuel y Flor recibieron una educación privada y privi-
legiada en su propia casa. más tarde, por deseo expreso de su acaudalada
madre (que era pianista y pintora), dulce maría se licenció en derecho
por la universidad de la habana, profesión que ejerció durante más de
30 años (1927-1961), defendiendo, como quería su madre, los intereses de
la familia. desde muy jóvenes, los hermanos demuestran tener una ve-
na artística que desarrollarán individualmente, y organizan en casa unas
tertulias denominadas las “juevinas” (se celebraban los jueves), donde
parece ser que no abundaban los cubanos, aunque sí pasaron por allí
alejo carpentier y emilio Ballagas, a los que hay que añadir los nombres
de algunas de las personalidades españolas más relevantes de su tiempo:
Federico García lorca (que bautizó al lugar llamándolo “la casa encan-
tada”), Juan ramón Jiménez y su mujer Zenobia, luis cernuda en visita
a cuba desde su exilio americano o rafael alberti. recordemos también
que ese ambiente especial le sirvió de inspiración a carpentier para rec-
rear el mundo de su novela El siglo de las luces.
dulce maría loynaz se sentía orgullosa de ser hija de enrique loynaz
del castillo, general mambí del ejército libertador, que escribió la letra y
música del Himno Invasor, de valor patriótico para los cubanos. Formaba
parte, entonces, de lo que podríamos llamar, utilizando la terminología del
historiador manuel moreno Fraginals1, la oligarquía criolla, que al menos

originariamente no era independentista y que había asumido los valores
peninsulares. la pérdida de cuba, acaecida pocos años antes del nacimien-
to de dulce maría, dio lugar, como sabemos, a una crisis “traumática” en
españa, aunque las recientes teorías revisionistas concluyan que el desastre
de 1898 fue sobre todo un problema o incluso un invento de intelectuales2.
sobre la posición política de loynaz, sobre sus ideas religiosas o su
postura vista desde el versante feminista, también ha habido malentendi-
dos. no escribe poesía de contenido social, no demuestra estar interesada
por el contexto político de las dictaduras de cuba y españa. su vida trans-
curre entre libros y viajes, en un ambiente burgués del que nunca abdicará.
en 1937 se casa con un primo suyo que frecuentaba la casa: enrique de
Quesada loynaz, protagonista, entre otros, del poema san Miguel Arcángel,
prácticamente el único en el que se advierte una cierta carnalidad sin os-
tentaciones, ya que la obra de loynaz es tan etérea como un juego de agua.
un poema que al lector de poesía española podría recordarle el delicado y
sutil erotismo de la contemporánea concha méndez3 (exiliada primero en
cuba, con su marido manuel altolaguirre, después en méjico), o incluso
parecerle precursor de las composiciones, ya descaradamente carnales, de
la gaditana ana rossetti. no en vano, la cubana y la andaluza han nadado
en las aguas de la poesía española del Siglo de Oro.
Otro de los equívocos está relacionado con la fe religiosa, y parece hab-
erlo ocasionado ella misma, ya que se declara católica no practicante en un
documental de 1987, titulado Una mujer que no existe (dirigido por Vicente
González castro), pero pocos años después afirma que la confesión ha sido
algo ajeno a su carácter, y el ir a misa un ritual presente sólo mientras vivió
su segundo marido, llegando incluso a declararse atea. además, ha destaca-
do el carácter irreverente de la composición La novia de Lázaro, hasta el punto
de contar en el documental apenas mencionado una anécdota burlona en la
que su marido invita a comer a casa a tres obispos para pedirles su opinión
al respecto. después de la excelente comida, abundantemente regada con los
mejores vinos, recibe, por supuesto, la aprobación de la iglesia.
Según la interpretación que prevalezca a la hora de leer el Canto a la
mujer estéril, tendremos una loynaz más o menos ligada a los estereotipos
femeninos. Fina García marruz4 puso el dedo en la llaga al recordar que,
junto a la lectura de la ausencia de maternidad entendida como “maldi-
ción”, aparece otra en la que se pretende llegar a la “fundación de un nue-
1
manuel moreno Fraginals, Cuba/España, España/Cuba. Una historia común (Barcelona: crítica,
1995).
2
Véase a título de ejemplo el revelador estudio de Santos Julià, Historias de las dos Españas
(madrid: taurus, 2004).
3
Véanse los versos de cierre del poema “Te vi venir, presintiéndote”: Con el brillo de tu es-
pada / las sienes se me encendieron”, en c. méndez, Vida a vida (madrid: hiperión, 1995), 63.
4
Fina García marruz, Valoración múltiple (la habana: casa de las américas, 1991), 170.
Part V – Examples of the Transnational Dimension of Cuban Culture 203
vo linaje”. con los ojos del hoy, muy parciales hay que ser para no destacar
que la intención de la autora es ya, desde los primeros versos, destruir la
convención, para afirmar incluso orgullosamente su diferencia. el poema
parte, es cierto, con la constatación de que la esterilidad lleva a ser “madre
imposible: pozo cegado, ánfora rota, / catedral sumergida”, pero verso a
verso, se llega a la exaltación de la “unidad perfecta”, a ser “(estrella que
en la estrella se consume, / flor que en la flor se queda)”. la cuarta estrofa
reza así:
nada vendrá de ti. ni nada vino

de la montaña, y la montaña es bella.
Tú no serás camino de un instante
para que venga más tristeza al mundo;
tú no pondrás tu mano sobre un mundo
que no amas… Tú dejarás
que el fango siga fango y que la estrella
siga estrella…
Y reinarás
en tu reino. Y serás
unidad
perfecta que no necesita
reproducirse, como no
se reproduce el cielo,
ni el viento,
ni el mar…
su diferencia está marcada por su dedicación a la literatura, de ahí que

Juegos de agua sea una ofrenda a pablo Álvarez de cañas, “en vez del hijo
que él quería”5.
cómo no recordar entonces, entre otras, la diferente perspectiva adopta-
da por su contemporánea canaria, Josefina de la torre, que expresa su an-
gustia y frustración por la falta de descendencia en el poema “dentro de
las paredes de tu casa” (cuyo título nos lleva enseguida a pensar en Últimos
días de una casa), donde “la vida estéril” condena a la protagonista a una
vida difícil, “sin el techo seguro,/ sin el hijo ni el árbol”, a un vacío que ni
el éxito artístico puede compensar. con Josefina de la torre, dulce maría
comparte la necesidad y la exaltación del omnipresente mar. Y también con
la madrileña concha méndez, ya que, como podemos leer en Jardín, “las
niñas de tierra adentro sueñan con el mar”6.
dulce maría loynaz ha sido encasillada, además, en los manuales de
literatura, donde aparece bajo el epígrafe “poetisas del posmordernismo”o
5
dulce maría loynaz, Homenaje a Dulce María Loynaz. Premio Cervantes 1992 (miami: univer-
sal, 1993), 104.
6
dulce maría loynaz, Jardín. Novela lírica (la habana: letras cubanas, 1993 [madrid: 1991]), 34.
“posmodernismo intimista”, que, como señala selena millares de la

univ. autónoma de madrid (pero también otros, como pablo armando
Fernández) es una etiqueta errónea que de algún modo ha impedido re-
conocer el valor autónomo de su producción poética. sea como fuere, lo que
ya parece indiscutible es que, tras su recuperación por parte de la crítica, ha
pasado a formar parte de ese grupo reducido de grandes figuras de la liter-
atura femenina hispanoamericana, en el que figuran por supuesto delmira
agustini, Gabriela mistral, Juana de ibarbourou y alfonsina storni. pero
la cubana no ha admitido afinidades con ninguna de ellas, independiente-
mente de su relación de amistad con Gabriela mistral (empañada por algu-
nos roces) y de su inclinación confesada hacia delmira agustini.
La poesía de Loynaz sin duda tiene puntos en común con la de Juan
ramón Jiménez, y tal vez por eso mismo el andaluz incluyó su “retrato” en
Españoles de tres mundos7, aunque en un primer momento demostrara más
interés por la obra del hermano. pero es posible que esté más relacionada
en ciertos aspectos con leopoldo panero y luis rosales, a los que conoció
personalmente.
es hora de decirlo ya, dulce maría loynaz se sintió siempre muy ligada
a españa, a la que considera su segunda patria, el territorio del que le lle-
garon, como dice ella misma, siempre las mejores cosas de su vida. tras el
divorcio de su primer marido (entre otros motivos tal vez por la falta de
descendencia), en 1946 se volvió a casar con pablo Álvarez de cañas, un
canario que se había trasladado de una isla a otra para hacer las américas,
y que desde la nada había conseguido entrar a formar parte de la alta so-
ciedad habanera, convirtiéndose en su cronista por excelencia. tuvo que
cortejarla insistentemente y esperar durante años antes de poder casarse
con una mujer cuya familia rechazaba sus orígenes humildes8.
dulce maría loynaz da todos los méritos del reconocimiento de su obra a
la labor diplomática del marido. emprenden un viaje por españa, donde será
invitada a dar recitales y conferencias, pero sobre todo donde se publicarán
prácticamente todas sus obras, primero Versos (1920-1938) en canarias, y
sucesivamente, ya en madrid, Juegos de agua, en el que recopila poemas escri-
tos previamente con otros redactados en el hotel ritz de la capital. todo ello
en medio de un conflicto diplomático entre los gobiernos de cuba y españa,
a causa del voto negativo de la isla a la entrada de la Península en la ONU.
recordemos, claro está, que nos encontramos en pleno período franquista.
mientras tanto, dulce maría loynaz recibe muestras de aprecio por parte
de los autores de la generación del 27 que no habían abandonado el país y
que le dedican reseñas: en primer lugar, Gerardo Diego y Vicente Aleixandre,
7
Juan ramón Jiménez, Españoles de tres mundos (madrid: alianza, 1987 [Buenos aires: 1942]).
la semblanza en cuestión había aparecido en 1942 en la revista porteña Sur.
8
dicho sea de paso, este caso podría hacernos pensar que había dejado de estar vigente en
cuba la costumbre de casar a las hijas criollas con peninsulares.
pero también Adriano del Valle, José García Nieto, Antonio Oliver Belmás y
concha espina. no tengo constancia de que la poetisa cubana conociese la
poesía de pedro salinas, al que se recuerda de inmediato, al leer el poema de
ecos juanramonianos “Yo te fui desnudando”, casi una respuesta en femeni-
no al “perdóname por ir así buscándote” del madrileño:
Yo te fui desnudando de ti mismo,

de los “tús” superpuestos que la vida
te había ceñido…
te arranqué la corteza – entera y dura –

que se creía fruta, que tenía
la forma de fruta.
Y ante el asombro vago de tus ojos

surgiste con tus ojos aún velados
de tinieblas y asombros…
surgiste de ti mismo; de tu misma

sombra fecunda –intacto y desgarrado
en alma viva… –
en la capital española seguirán apareciendo otros títulos: en 1951, la

novela lírica Jardín, seguida dos años más tarde por “carta de amor al rey
tut-ank-amen” y Poemas sin nombre, cuyo éxito tuvo como colofón la orga-
nización de un homenaje por parte de varias escritoras, entre las que cabe
destacar a la poeta carmen conde, que catorce años después la incluirá
en su antología Once grandes poetisas americohispanas9. en 1955 se recopila
toda su poesía publicada hasta entonces en Obra Lírica, y en 1958 aparecen
Últimos días de una casa y Un viaje a Tenerife.
como se ve, los lazos con españa son muy fuertes, pero no lo son menos
las raíces que la ligan a la isla de cuba, que se hacen más o menos explícitas
en Los últimos días de una casa, poesía narrativa, y en Jardín, su novela lírica.
de todos modos, ambas obras se pueden relacionar con composiciones co-
mo “eternidad”, de Versos (1920-1938), “marinero de rostro oscuro”, “isla”
y “al almendares”, de Juegos de agua, o con el “Poema CXXIV”, de Poemas
sin nombre, que son composiciones en prosa:
Isla mía, ¡qué bella eres y qué dulce! […] Tu cielo es un cielo vivo, todavía
con un calor de ángel, con un envés de estrella.
Tú mar es el último refugio de los delfines antiguos y las sirenas de-
smaradas. Vértebras de cobre tienen tus serranías, y mágicos crepúsculos se
encienden bajo el fanal de tu aire.
9
Carmen Conde, Once grandes poetisas americohispanas (madrid: cultura hispánica, 1967).
descenso de gaviotas y petreles, avemaría de navegantes, antena de améri-

ca: hay en ti la ternura de las cosas pequeñas y el señorío de las grandes cosas.
sigues siendo la tierra más hermosa que ojos humanos contemplaron. sigues
siendo la novia de colón, la benjamina bien amada, el paraíso encontrado.
[…]
isla esbelta y juncal, yo te amaría aunque hubiera sido otra tierra mi tier-
ra, pues también te aman los que bajaron del septentrión brumoso, o del
vergel mediterráneo, o del lejano país del loto.
Isla mía, Isla fragante, flor de islas: tenme siempre, náceme siempre, de-
shoja una por una todas mis fugas.
Y guárdame la última, bajo un poco de arena soleada […] ¡A la orilla del

golfo donde todos los años hacen su misterioso nido los ciclones!
en todos los títulos mencionados antes estamos anclados en cuba, inde-

pendientemente de que aparezca citada de manera explícita o no. estamos
en las residencias en las que vivió la autora, y que al final parecen reducidas
a una sola en el recuerdo y en el espacio de la escritura. porque en la literatu-
ra se desdibujan las fronteras temporales y geográficas. la casa rodeada por
un jardín vallado, las rosas, el jardín y el mar, iluminados por una luna triste
que cae despedazada, como un espejo, soltando astillas, están ubicados en
cuba. por ese mar entrevisto desde la ventana que da a un jardín que amen-
azadoramente crece y trepa por las paredes, hay un marinero náufrago que
viene, desde otros mares, a salvarla, que incluso se atreve a acercarse y besar
su mano a través de una verja que impide ver el horizonte sin estrías. puede
ser que españa esté al final de ese viaje tan temido como soñado mediante
los libros. si son ciertas las conclusiones de antón arrufat, en Jardín se siente
el eco de los siguientes versos de antonio machado:
Y algo que es tierra en nuestra carne, siente

la humedad del jardín como un halago.
sin olvidar un fragmento crucial de El caballero inactual de azorín, que,

según el mismo crítico, será fuente de inspiración para esta peculiar novela
lírica:
muchas veces siente en el fondo de su organismo, a manera de un vio-

lento tirón, que una sensibilidad primitiva, ancestral, irrumpe, partida de
paisajes milenarios, a través de las inmensas cadenas de las generaciones.
una sensibilidad primigenia, sí, el antecesor milenario en la selva aborigen,
solo, la cabeza apoyada en el tronco de un árbol.
azorín, machado, pero también cervantes, Quevedo, san Juan de la

cruz… son nombres que se unen al extenso listado de escritores españoles
que acompañaron a loynaz en su formación y en su vida de lecturas, en
esa isla dentro de una isla que fue su casa y su poesía. Junto a ellos, por el
estanque, se mueven los célebres cisnes azules de rubén darío, los versos
encendidos de José martí o de Julián del casal, sin olvidar la poesía fran-
cesa y anglosajona… En una lectora insaciable como Loynaz, la búsqueda
de fuentes acabaría por llevarnos hasta la sequía propia de los desiertos.
lo que sí podemos afirmar es que ella se ha creado su isla de soledad
donde ser libre, aunque sea entre barrotes10. pero se trata de barrotes o
puertas cerradas que parece haberse impuesto ella sola, espacios privados
donde el anhelo del amor y el deseo de escapar encuentran siempre bar-
reras y obstáculos difíciles de sobrepasar: su jardín se erige en muro entre
la casa y el mar, el jardín mismo se cierra como una planta carnívora, la
convierte en planta, y por eso le nacen raíces que la atan a la tierra, que la
condenan a la inmovilidad. la insularidad hace gala de sí misma como car-
acterística enraizada en la sangre, como una herencia acumulada durante
generaciones de la que no se puede o no se quiere escapar. la libertad se
encuentra entonces ligada a la literatura, vista como un inmenso océano
por el que caminar siguiendo su propio rumbo:
en mi verso soy libre: él es mi mar.

mi mar ancho y desnudo de horizontes…
en mi verso yo ando sobre el mar,
camino sobre olas desdobladas
de otras olas y de otras olas… ando
en mi verso; respiro, vivo, crezco
en mi verso, y en él tienen mis pies
camino y mi camino rumbo y mis
manos qué sujetar y mi esperanza
qué esperar y mi vida su sentido.
Yo soy libre en mi verso y él es libre
como yo. nos amamos. nos tenemos.
Fuera de él soy pequeña y me arrodillo
ante la obra de mis manos, la
tierna arcilla amasada entre mis dedos…
dentro de él, me levanto y soy yo misma.
su país le concederá reconocimientos en cadena que culminan con la con-

cesión en españa del prestigioso premio cervantes en la fecha emblemática
de 1992, galardón para el que había sido propuesta, sin conseguirlo, en 1984
y en 198711. la noticia causó sorpresa, hasta el punto de que el mismo pablo
armando Fernández12 se hace eco de la pregunta que resonó entre el jurado:
10
aludo al título del ensayo de Juan ramón de la portilla, La mirada entre los barrotes (pinar
del río: loynaz, 2000).
11
en dichas ocasiones el premio fue a manos de ernesto sábato y carlos Fuentes, respectiva-
mente.
12
pablo armando Fernández, “el agua fina y alta”, en Sobre Dulce María Loynaz, eds. carmen
“¿Quién es esta dama cubana?”. la respuesta, como señalara el mismo pablo

armando, llegó de la voz de Francisco ayala, presidente del jurado: dulce
maría loynaz era una poetisa que conseguía eliminar “la desconexión, la in-
comunicación que puede existir entre países con la misma lengua”13.
tengamos en cuenta que se trata de la segunda mujer que lo recibe, de-
trás nada menos que de maría Zambrano14, a la que se le había otorgado
en 1988. sorprende sin duda la ausencia de referencias por parte de dulce
maría loynaz a la insigne filósofa y poeta española, que vivió durante diez
años en cuba, y cuya voz resultó tan especial para la joven alumna que era
entonces Fina García marruz.
Y surge sin pruebas la sospecha de que Zambrano se esconda detrás de
esa mujer del poema La extranjera:
adormecía con su voz lejana,

con sus palabras quietas
que caían sin ruido, semejantes
a escarcha ligera
de marzo en las primeras
rosas, sin deshojar
los pétalos…
alguien por retenerla

quiso hacer de toda su vida
un lazo… un solo lazo fuerte y duro…
ella
con sus frágiles manos rompió el lazo
que era lazo de vida…
(a veces, nieblas
de otro país pasaban por sus ojos…)
maría Zambrano, que estableció una relación epistolar con lezama

lima15, unidos ambos por el deseo desgarrado de encontrar un espa-
cio donde pudiese unirse la esencia de lo hispánico universal. maría
Zambrano, que se sintió tan arraigada en cuba que llegó a considerarla
Alemany Bay y Remedios Mataix Azuar (Madrid: Verbum-Universidad de Alicante, 2007).

13
Francisco ayala, El Mundo, 6 de novembre de1992.
14
maría Zambrano (1904-1991), reconocida como la mayor filósofa española del siglo XX,
discípula del célebre Ortega y Gasset. Su pensamiento plantea una interesante dicotomía en-
tre la actitud filosófica y la actitud poética (no en vano es también poetisa). sobre la relación
de Zambrano con cuba, véase García marruz, La espada intatta di María Zambrano (Venecia:
marietti, 2007).
15
Javier Fornieles ten, Correspondencia entre José Lezama Lima y María Zambrano y entre María
Zambrano y María Luisa Bautista (sevilla: espuela de plata, 2005). José lezama lima (1910-
1976): poeta hermético y ensayista cubano, cuya breve obra ha ejercido una notable influen-
cia en otros escritores posteriores de lengua española. de su poesía cito el poema Muerte de
Narciso (la habana: Úcar, García y cia, 1937). es autor de una novela, Paradiso (méxico: era,
1970), de gran repercusión internacional, que ha sido llevada al cine.
su patria pre-natal. maría Zambrano que afirmó que españa volvía a re-
cuperar su ser más auténtico al renunciar a sus ambiciones imperialistas.
maría Zambrano, ubicando en segovia la quintaesencia de lo castellano y
español. la meseta, tan admirada también por dulce maría loynaz, que
a la hora de evocar el lugar que más le había impresionado de españa, no
menciona la isla de tenerife a la que dedicó un libro entero, sino segovia.
después de años y años de intensa actividad cultural y poética, dulce
maría loynaz entra en una extensa etapa de silencio creativo que dudará
dos décadas. se ha dicho que fue un silencio voluntario, pero hay que
recordar que coincide con un período en el que su marido se exilia a las
canarias, marcado, además, por el luto en familia: mueren sus padres, y
poco después el hermano enrique. la vuelta de pablo Álvaro de cañas a
cuba en 1972, en tristes condiciones, terminará con su muerte dos años más
tarde, seguida por la desaparición del hermano menor, carlos manuel, en
1977. le quedará sólo su hermana pequeña Flor, pero morirá también antes
que ella, en 1985.
en los ochenta y noventa empiezan a llegar los reconocimientos por parte
del ministerio de cultura de cuba, unidos a la publicación de Bestiarium16 y
Poemas naúfragos17. el primero es una colección de poemas “zoológicos” es-
critos en los años 20 que, de haber aparecido en su momento, habrían sido
catalogados como poesía de vanguardia. en 1987 se le concedió el premio
nacional de literatura, ocasión en la que declara su emoción por tratarse
de un premio cubano, “y me lo ofrece mi país para demostrarme que aun
en medio de mi clausura voluntaria o involuntaria, no se me había olvida-
do […] el premio de cuba me da o me devuelve lo que di por perdido”.
así, dulce maría se desprenderá al fin del desencanto hacia su patria. a es-
te respecto, recordemos que en una carta fechada dos años antes y dirigida
a aldo martínez malo, loynaz afirmaba tajantemente tanto su condición
de burguesa como su deseo de quedarse en cuba, a pesar de no compar-
tir la ideología del régimen y a pesar de haber recibido propuestas para ir
a estados unidos y a españa, donde la invita, ofreciéndole casa y medios
de subsistencia, su editor aguilar. Y dice textualmente: “Yo estoy aquí por
mi voluntad y a todas sus consecuencias […] sucediera lo que sucediera,
preferiría quedarme y correr la misma suerte de mi país”. el final de la carta
resultó profético: “seguiré pues viviendo en cuba, espero que sin mayores
sustos, sin pedir nada a nadie y con un gobierno que aún sabiendo que no
comparto su ideología, creo que me lo agradece y hasta hace lo posible por
reparar los viejos errores que pudo tener conmigo” 18.
16
dulce maría loynaz, Bestiarium (la habana: ministerio de cultura y unión de escritores y
artistas de cuba, 1991).
17
dulce maría loynaz, Poemas náufragos (la habana: letras cubanas, 1991).
18
dulce maría loynaz, Cartas que no se extraviaron (Valladolid: Fundación Jorge Guillén – Fun-
dación hermanos loynaz, 1997), 171-172.
los poetas cubanos responden y se vuelcan en estudiar su obra:

Gastón Baquero, con un ensayo de título significativo, Acercamiento a
Dulce María Loynaz, en el que la define “poeta-fuente”19; pablo armando
Fernández, por su parte, establece relaciones entre su poesía y la de
emily dickinson20; Fina García marruz21 desentraña los hilos del Canto
a la mujer estéril; césar lópez22 realiza un exhaustivo ensayo sobre Los
últimos días de una casa, de su obra se ocupan también emilio Ballagas23,
eugenio Florit24, margara russotto25 y un largo etcétera.
reconciliada ya con su patria, y ante la insistencia de aldo martínez
malo26, dulce maría loynaz vuelve a coger la pluma para redactar Fe de
vida27, obra en prosa en la que se propone dejar constancia no tanto de
su propia vida, como de la del que fuera su marido, pablo Álvarez de
19
Gastón Baquero, Acercamiento a Dulce María Loynaz (madrid: cultura hispánica, 1993).
Gastón Baquero (1914-1997) fue uno de los prohombres intelectuales de la cuba de los años
cincuenta, antes de la revolución de Fidel castro, tras la cual se exilió en españa. acogido por
el régimen franquista, la intelectualidad antifranquista le volverá la espalda. son, evidente-
mente, motivos políticos los que impiden durante años el reconocimiento merecido de su
obra poética, que llegará más tarde de mano de poetas más jóvenes como Francisco Frines. de
Baquero cito, entre otros, su Memorial de un testigo (madrid: rialp, 1966) y sus Poemas invisibles
(Madrid: Verbum, 1991).
20
pablo armando Fernández, “el agua fina y alta”, en Sobre Dulce María Loynaz, eds. ale-
many Bay y mataix azuar, 32-39. Fernández (1930-) vivió en estados unidos, pero regresó
a cuba en 1959, donde ha desarrollado una intensa vida cultural. ha representado a cuba
como diplomático y como poeta (también ha escrito novela y teatro). entre sus obras, cito el
Libro de los héroes (la habana: casa de las américas, 1964). ha recibido el premio nacional
de literatura de su país.
21
García marruz, Valoración múltiple, 170. Fina García marruz (1923-). perteneció al grupo
de poetas de la revista Orígenes. Casada con el célebre poeta Cintio Vitier, alumna de
maría Zambrano, reconocida ensayista, es una de las poetisas cubanas más destacadas del
siglo XX. ha recibido el premio nacional de literatura de cuba y el iberoamericano de
poesía pablo neruda. entre sus obras cito Visitaciones (la habana: instituto cubano del
libro, 1970).
22
césar lópez (1933-), poeta, traductor, ensayista e intelectual, forma parte del grupo que
permanece en cuba. recibió el premio nacional de literatura de su país. es autor de Silencio
en voz de muerte (la habana: unión, 1963).
23
emilio Ballagas (1908-1954), poeta y profesor, fue uno de los primeros cubanos en abordar
la literatura afrocubana; de hecho publicó una Antología de la poesía negra Hispano Americana
(madrid: aguilar, 1935). entre sus obras más destacadas figura su Elegía sin nombre (la ha-
bana: [s.n.], 1936). Colaboró, con G. Baquero, E. Diego, F. García Marruz y C. Vitier en la
revista Clavileño.
24
eugenio Florit (1903-1999), poeta y diplomático cubano, nacido en madrid, amigo de poetas
españoles exiliados de la generación del 27 como Jorge Guillén, luis cernuda y pedro salinas,
a los que conoció en la universidad, en estados unidos. es autor de Doble acento (la habana:
ucacia, 1937), prologado por J.r. Jiménez.
25
Margara Russotto (1946-), de origen italiano, estudia en Venezuela y Brasil. Profesora uni-
versitaria, ensayista, se ocupa sobre todo de literatura femenina. como poetisa es autora,
entre otros, de El diario íntimo de Sor Juana (poemas apócrifos) (madrid: torremozas, 2002).
26 Aldo Martínez Malo, “Fe de vida: un libro escrito a través de una correspondencia”, en
Biblioteca Virtual Miguel de Cervantes on-line, www.cervantesvirtual.com/ bib_autor/loynaz/
fedevida.shtml.
27
dulce maría loynaz, Fe de vida (madrid: libertarias, 1999). se publica póstumamente, por
deseo de su autora.
cañas. la conclusión final, a pesar de los “trece años perfectos los que
pasé a su lado”, en los que “volcó en mi canastilla de bodas los días más
felices de mi vida, los días de españa” 28, adquiere tonos resignados al
llegar a la meta, porque “sé que los dos hemos vivido en vano”.Y enton-
ces “empieza a llover”29. dos años antes habían aparecido Las cartas que
no se extraviaron, publicadas en Valladolid. Ambos textos, como suele
ocurrir en estos casos, nos ofrecen pistas interesantes para entender de-
terminados acontecimientos de la vida de la autora, y para la compren-
sión de su producción poética.
en la madrugada del 27 de abril de 1997, dulce maría loynaz murió
en su casa. pocos días antes había recibido un homenaje del centro
cultural de la embajada de españa en cuba. en los años siguientes apa-
recen biografías sobre la autora como la de ana cabrera, titulada La voz
del silencio (2000), Amor sin alas, de aldo martínez malo (2001) o Dulce
María Loynaz, la agonía de un mito, de ileana Álvarez y Francis sánchez
(2001).
los homenajes se duplican tanto en cuba como en españa. el punto
final para nosotros se traslada al año 2002, en el que se celebran dos con-
gresos, uno a cada lado de las dos orillas: en noviembre, el seminario
organizado por el cemaB (centro de estudios iberoamericanos mario
Benedetti) de la Universidad de Alicante; y en diciembre el V evento
iberoamericano, en pinar del río, cuba. con la excusa de celebrar el
centenario del nacimiento de la autora, se nos ofrece una excelente pan-
orámica de toda la obra de la escritora cubana: la poesía, la prosa y sus
opiniones literarias 30. recordemos que la universidad de alicante ha
publicado las intervenciones de diversos estudiosos, entre los que de-
staca el ensayo de pablo armando Fernández (leído en pinar del río),
con otras contribuciones sin duda excepcionales de profesores de las
universidades de madrid y de alicante. además, un año antes se había
creado en el “cervantes virtual” la biblioteca de autor dulce maría
loynaz, donde se ha recopilado una serie de materiales críticos y audio-
visuales de consulta obligada para los que se interesen por la produc-
ción de nuestra poetisa31.
se han cumplido, por tanto, las conocidas y proféticas palabras del
poeta Ballagas, y más allá de parcialidades, loynaz ha entrado por la
puerta grande en la posteridad, en la “eternidad”, título de uno de sus
primeros poemas:
28
ibid., 293.
29
Íbid., 295.
30
dichos ensayos aparecen recopilados en Sobre Dulce María Loynaz, eds. alemany Bay y
mataix azuar.
31
Biblioteca Virtual Miguel de Cervantes on-line, www.cervantesvirtual.com/bib_autor/loynaz.
eternidad
No quiero, si es posible,
que mi beneficio desaparezca,
sino que viva y dure toda la vida de mi amigo.
seneca
en mi jardín hay rosas:

Yo no te quiero dar
las rosas que mañana…
mañana no tendrás.
en mi jardín hay pájaros

con cantos de cristal:
no te los doy, que tienen
alas para volar…
en mi jardín abejas
labran fino panal:
¡dulzura de un minuto…
no te la quiero dar!
Para ti lo infinito
o nada; lo inmortal
o esta muda tristeza
que no comprenderás…
la tristeza sin nombre

de no tener que dar
a quien lleva en la frente
algo de eternidad…
deja, deja el jardín…

no toques el rosal:
las cosas que se mueren
no se deben tocar.
I. Girona
Chapter 14
Julio Girona: A Cuban Painter
at Home and Abroad
my father grew up in the literary circles of his home town, manzanillo.

his father was a lawyer, but also a member of the “Grupo literario de
manzanillo”, which arose around the magazine Orto1. Young Julio was not,
it seems, a good pupil: he did not like mathematics, nor was he interested
in learning how to read or write. as far back as he could remember, he
loved to draw. he set up his “studio” under his parents’ bed, where he
would spend hours lying on the floor, escaping from the heat of Oriente
and from his numerous family, drawing on scrap paper given to him at the
typographer’s. his father, who in later years would become a teacher and a
volunteer in the public literacy campaign, despaired of his son’s lack of in-
terest in school. “all right”, he said to him. “You will be a painter. But you
will be an ignorant one”.
actually, although my father never made peace with mathematics (he
used to say, even as an elderly man, that numbers above ten confused him),
he learned to read on his own. a passionate viewer of silent films, he fell
in love with chaplin and William s. hart, the idealist cowboy who never
smiled. it irritated him not to be able to understand the subtitles of films, so
he gave in. this approach to learning, his love for cinema, and the contrast-
ing figures of chaplin and hart help to portray my father: never academic,
with an approach to art that was above all practical, inspired by values that
combined the idealism of the fighter hart with the humor of chaplin.
One day my grandfather decided to take his son to see an artist friend,
to ask, as is the custom, “if the boy had talent”. the artist was a caricaturist
1
Orto was a literary magazine founded in manzanillo in 1912. published for 45 years, its cir-
culation spread to various countries of the spanish-speaking world.
of international renown, conrado massaguer2. massaguer received the boy

as if he were a colleague. he presented him in the teatro manzanillo, dra-
wing caricatures together with him, live, on stage. he published the boy’s
drawings in the prestigious magazine Social, and introduced him to mem-
bers of the literary avant-garde in havana3. My father had his first show at
the age of twelve, exhibiting caricatures of politicians, writers, and other
personalities which he had drawn on silhouettes in wood. Thus, when
the entire Girona family moved to the capital in 1929, Julio was already at
home in the circles where illustrious cuban and foreign writers, such as
alejo carpentier and Federico García lorca, gathered.
One day I went to visit José Maria. We sat in the large rocking chairs on the
porch. After a little while, a man who looked Spanish came in through the gate
of the garden fence. he was wearing a white shirt with wide sleeves and no
tie. his hair was very black and his beard bluish, even though he appeared to
have shaved that morning. i thought he was a waiter in some café. i was intro-
duced to him, and with a firm voice he said, “Hello”. He didn’t sit down but
instead started talking, pacing from one end to the other of the ample porch,
as if he were on stage in a theater. i didn’t know who he was, but José maria
called him Federico. later i found out that it was Federico García lorca4.
in the early 1930s, havana entered a period marked by the great eco-
nomic crisis that followed the 1929 stock market crash, which affected poor
countries even more than rich ones. in cuba, these were the years of the
machado dictatorship, when the country was governed by the police and
the military. my father enrolled at the academia de san alejandro, where
he studied sculpture with Juan José sicre, known still today for his por-
traits of public figures and, in particular, for his colossal monument to José
martí in the plaza de la revolución5. however, with the intent of checking
social ferment, machado closed institutions of higher learning, including
the academy, considered hotbeds of revolt. sicre invited his pupil to con-
tinue studying in his private studio. he did portraits of well-known figures
such as Raúl Roa and Juan Marinello, he did death masks of historical fig-
ures, and he met the habitués of sicre’s studio, such as pablo de la torriente
Brau, who would die in 1936 in the spanish civil War.
2
conrado W. massaguer (1889-1965), cuban caricaturist and editor whose work was widely
published in europe and the united states, as well as in cuba.
3
Social was a monthly magazine of art and literature founded by massaguer in havana in
1916. it was published until 1938.
4
Julio Girona, Memorias sin título (la habana: letras cubanas, 1994), 59. alejo carpentier
(1904-80), cuban novelist, essayist, and musicologist. Federico García lorca (1898-1936), the
spanish poet and dramatist, was in cuba in the spring of 1930. José maria chacón y calvo
(1892-1969), cuban literary critic, essayist, and scholar.
5
Juan José sicre (1898-1974), cuban sculptor and professor of sculpture at the academy of
san alejandro.
After the fall of Machado, when they freed many revolutionaries and
others returned from exile, i did a number of portraits. i did a head of Juan
Marinello and also one of Raúl Roa and Ramón Guirao, the poet. They would
come by the studio in the afternoon. Emilio Roig de Leuchsenring, Pablo de
la torriente, and navarro luna gathered there, among others6.
in 1933, after the fall of machado, the mendieta government granted fifty
scholarships for study abroad “with the intention of sending ‘young trouble-
makers’ out of the country”7. my father received one of these scholarships,
to study something of which he did not know the meaning: “the pedagogi-
cal methods of teaching”. For this reason, in 1934, at the age of nineteen,
he left cuba, traveled around the mediterranean, spent some time in Berlin,
and settled down in paris, where, instead of pedagogy, he studied sculpture.
he attended the académie ranson, patronized by aristide maillol8, and the
académie de la Grande chaumière. his decision to leave cuba, like that of
many other artists and writers in the thirties, was conditioned not only by his
natural interest as a young man to see the world, but by the socio-political
situation, the impossibility of finding work, and poverty. even in a middle-
class family like his, poverty meant hunger and eviction for not paying the
rent. my father told heart-rending stories about how, as the oldest of seven
children, he would often go to pawn his father’s law books, in search of some
money for lunch, and would come back home ashamed at not having suc-
ceeded in obtaining more than a few insufficient cents.
although he found himself in a relatively rich country like France with
the privilege of having all his expenses paid, the young scholarship stu-
dent Julio did not forget his past nor lose his social consciousness. While
studying and living in paris, fascinated by the artists who regularly fre-
quented the cafés of montparnasse and Boulevard saint michel, he joined
the “Comité Iberoamericano para la Defensa de la República Española”, to-
gether with other latin american foreigners, such as carpentier, neruda9,
César Vallejo10 and anaïs nin11, and followed political events with increas-
ing anti-Fascist sentiment.
6
Girona, Memorias, 65. Raúl Roa García (1907-1982), essayist, journalist, and politician. Juan
Marinello Vidaurreta (1898-1977), Cuban essayist and poet. Pablo de la Torriente Brau (1901-
1936), cuban journalist and writer who went to spain in 1936 as a war correspondent and
died fighting in the defense of madrid. ramón Guirao (1908-1949), cuban journalist, essayist,
and poet. emilio roig de leuchsenring (1889-1964), cuban historian and journalist. manuel
navarro luna (1894-1966), cuban poet and journalist. member of the Grupo literario de
manzanillo.
7
ana suárez díaz, “andar y desandar hacia la verdad”, Revolución y Cultura 1 (1997), 32.
8
aristide maillol (1861-1944) French sculptor.
9
pablo neruda (1904-1973), chilean poet, assigned to the chilean consulate first in Barcelona
and then in madrid during the spanish civil War.
10
César Vallejo (1892-1938), Peruvian poet.
11
anaïs nin (1903-1977), French writer, daughter of the cuban-spanish musician-composer
Joaquin nin.
When the war broke out in spain, we latin americans organized a group to
support the spanish republic in its struggle against Fascism. We would meet in
a café, the dupont on [Boulevard] saint michel. We had our weekly meetings
in the basement, where they held banquets. The people who attended were,
among others, pablo neruda, his wife delia del carril, who they called La hor-
miguita, César Vallejo with Georgette, Alejo Carpentier, Félix Pita Rodríguez,
the mexicans andrés iduarte with his wife, Graciela, and renato leduc, the
poet-telegraphist of John reed’s reports during the revolution of Zapata and
Pancho Villa, in addition to some students from Central and South America.
On one occasion, we had to meet on Anaïs Nin’s barge, which was docked
on the banks of the seine, in front of notre dame12.
it is not surprising, therefore, that, after his scholarship, when he land-

ed in new York, attracted to the city’s cultural ferment but also looking
for work, he found a steady job as a political cartoonist for a spanish lan-
guage newspaper, La Voz, dedicated primarily to the cause of spain. thus,
from 1936 until the defeat of the republic in 1939, he published daily po-
litical cartoons. these drawings earned him recognition, for example from
the congress of american artists of 1937, which invited him as “Guest of
Honor” for his commitment as an “anti-Fascist artist”. One cartoon, in par-
ticular, even provoked a diplomatic incident, when the German and italian
diplomatic representatives in havana denounced the editor of Pueblo, a
cuban newspaper which had reprinted the cartoon from La Voz, for “of-
fending the dignity” of hitler and mussolini13.
in 1939 Julio returned to havana: “With the defeat of the republic, those of
us who had dreamed of a better world, the anti-Fascists, were left devastated.
it was the end of many illusions; and a million people had died. the civil War
ended; the republic fell; the newspaper closed, and i felt very depressed, so i
went home”.14 he worked as a political cartoonist for the newspaper Noticias
de Hoy. however, as he would explain, in that period in cuba, it was almost
impossible, especially for artists, considered idlers, to earn a living. sculptors,
like journalists, often had to cater to the powers that be, and graphic artists
could not find work, because all the graphic art – illustrations for books, post-
ers for the film industry – was imported from the united states. although his
drawings were published daily, my father was not able to earn a living. For this
reason, in 1940, he went to mexico, attracted by the social, political, and artistic
atmosphere there. he associated himself with the taller de Gráfica popular,
founded in 1936, the first publishing house in mexico to print political mate-
12
Girona, Memorias, 73.
13
an article in La Voz, a magazine published in new York, reproduces the political cartoon it-
self and reports on the legal action solicited by the German and italian diplomats. La Voz com-
ments: “The creative mind and sharp pencil of ‘our Girona’ are raising a storm in international
journalism.” La Voz, 21 February 1938, 5.
14
Girona, Memorias, 73.
rial (posters, flyers) as works of art for sale: “in very little time”, writes cuban
art critic Carmen Bermúdez, “[the Taller de Gráfica Popular] became a presti-
gious school of graphic techniques. […] mexican graphics was committed to
popular culture, social struggle, and social problems. as the semiologists have
said, signs have memory; thus, the socio-realistic memory of graphic art pen-
etrates Girona’s universe, giving his drawings force, civic-mindedness”15. he
was given a position selling prints on commission at the gallery of the taller,
but all the same, he suffered hunger – and what is more, he ended up in el
pocito jail, detained together with all the other members of the workshop on
the day after the first assassination attempt on trotsky. his stay in mexico,
nevertheless, had an important effect on his career, because there he met the
Mexican painter Pablo O’Higgins, one of the founders of the Taller, who of-
fered him hospitality and encouraged him to become a painter.
[…] [A]fter my stay in Mexico, I was convinced that although carica-

tures were published in the newspaper –it is true – three days later that
same newspaper would be used only to wrap fish, or something like that
[…] whereas a serious drawing, what I call ‘serious’ has permanent value.
perhaps it was pablo who made me start to think more as a painter than
as a caricaturist; because being a caricaturist presupposes looking for the
ideas one shares with others, while being a painter requires another mental-
ity, less public, more private, isolated, if you want.
For me it was a difficult decision […]16.
at that point, my father’s life developed in two separate directions.

returning to new York, he dedicated himself to his own, personal creative ac-
tivity. On the other hand, with the advance of Nazi-Fascism in Europe, he felt
that his convictions demanded that he contribute more than political cartoons.
When the united states entered World War ii, he decided, inspired by the
international Brigades, to enlist in the american army. “now, in retrospect, i
think that basically it bothered me that i had not gone to fight in spain”, he
confessed in an interview in 199717. it should be said, however, that the cause
of the spanish republic was felt with particular intensity by the cuban peo-
ple, who, in proportion to their population, provided the highest number of
volunteers among the 52 nations represented in the international Brigades.
Although I volunteered to fight, I was not a John Wayne in a Western

film. I was just an anti-Fascist.
We soldiers said goodbye to our girlfriends and wives on the long plat-
form of pensilvania [sic] station, in new York. the women cried, and the
15
Carmen Paula Bermúdez, “Apuntes de la guerra: Un estudio a los dibujos de Julio Girona”,
La Gaceta de Cuba (January/February 1999), 17.
16
suárez díaz, “andar y desandar”, 33.
17
ibid., 34.
soldiers, embracing them, would say, “don’t cry, honey. i will come back”.
the only woman who was not crying was ilse, my wife; i was the one with
tears rolling down my cheeks, and she was saying, “don’t worry, you’ll be
back”.
Hemingway, an imposing figure in a war correspondent’s uniform, was
standing next to us18.
For three years, from 1943 to 1946, he was a soldier in england, France,
and Belgium. But what he found in the army was very different from what
he had imagined.
undoubtedly, in World War ii, there were many american soldiers commit-
ted to the defeat of nazi-Fascism. But in the specific experience of my father, he
found himself among men who had been drafted against their will and who
were often very poorly educated and lacking in political consciousness. the
soldiers in his company ridiculed him for having volunteered for the service.
“Gentlemen”, announced louis, in one of the stories about the war that
my father would later write, “if you have never seen an idiot”, he said, turn-
ing Julio around as if he were a mannequin, “here you have one. take a look
at him from the front, from the side, and from the back”19. Years later, among
family and friends, we heard and savored so many anecdotes about this
world in which my father, as an idealistic but rather naïve soldier, would re-
mind us of his beloved chaplin. to begin with, since his english was so poor,
he would misunderstand what was said to him. they gave him a small pack-
age the size of a matchbox, containing a disinfectant powder. “to kill germs”,
said the sergeant. Julio understood “to kill Germans”. demonstrating how to
use it, the sergeant pressed the box a couple of times, “shooting out” a yellow
powder to a distance of about two feet. “it frightened me to think that the
fight would be at such close quarters”, my father would later comment20.
many of the accounts of these years as a cuban soldier in the united
states army – collected in 1990 in his first book, Seis horas y más, which
won the premio de la crítica of that year in cuba – although written in a
light vein, constitute a strong denunciation of war and of the absurdity of
life in the army. my father noticed from the start the total lack of reference
to anti-Fascism; it was not mentioned in their weekly political education
classes, nor did they speak about events leading up to the war or its causes.
instead, a typical subject for these classes was “the cowardice of negroes”.
in an episode of the book, a lieutenant explains:
“If they kill one of our boys in combat, we fight like tigers to retaliate
for his death. a negro doesn’t react in the same way. he doesn’t care about
anything. he has no principles. he’s slack, lazy, cowardly […]”.
18
Girona, Memorias, 74-75.
19
Julio Girona, Seis horas y más (la habana: letras cubanas, 1990), 31.
20
ibid., 74.
“sir”, i said, “i come from cuba. in the history of my country, we have

had true heroes, men who sacrificed their lives fighting for freedom. Maceo,
our general, was a mulatto, and many of those who fought for our indepen-
dence were negroes”.
“look, soldier”, the lieutenant replied. “i don’t know about those bastard
countries. i’m talking about our son-of-a-bitch niggers, who i know well”21.
Julio was given the nickname “nigger-lover” – an insult, it must be said,

which was quite common in that period in the united states and which re-
flected the fact that the army was still racially segregated. he noticed that
the language in the army generally expressed racism, even towards their
allies: the British were “lemons”, the French “frogs”.
“how come you talk so funny?” a soldier asked my father. “You don’t
talk like us”. he was referring to his accent.
Another soldier offered an explanation: “It’s because he comes from
cuba”.
“What does that have to do with it?”
“Well”, the second soldier added, “because in cuba they don’t have the
same name for things”.
The first soldier was amazed. He didn’t know that things could be called
by other names.
suspicious, not wanting to be duped, he asked: “are you telling me that
a house is not a house?…”
“Well”, my father answered, “house is casa”.
“You’re kidding”, said the soldier, surprised. “how about sky?”
“it’s called cielo”.
“snow?…”
“don’t be stupid”, the other soldier replied. “how could they have the
word ‘snow’ if it’s always hot in Cuba?”22.
looking back, he would later comment:
in this war, Fascism was defeated in europe, and i participated in its

defeat. But at the same time, in the army, i experienced acts of racism […];
injustice, privilege, inequality, violence, and abuse, among other things that
i would have preferred had not existed23.
in his backpack, the soldier Julio carried a pencil, india ink, and a note-
book, and, at moments of repose, he drew. the result was a collection of
portraits that in recent years have been the subject of exhibitions, publica-
tions, and critical commentary. the drawings form a social chronicle of the
21
ibid., 95.
22
ibid., 92-93.
23
ordinary figures that surrounded him: common soldiers, prisoners, women

in cafés, clochards, elderly people in the metró or on park benches. instead of
drawing an apocalyptic picture, he drew a human picture, “delicate”, “sub-
tly moving”, observes Carmen Bermúdez in an article in La Gaceta de Cuba24.
[…] [I]n the hallway, I saw my first German prisoner. I was relieved to see
his size. He was thin and not very tall. He didn’t resemble the ‘superman’
that we saw in the documentaries, the invincible soldier who had conquered
almost all of europe. he was a corporal and he wore a red and black medal
on his chest.
i took my sketch book out of my backpack. i told him to sit down so i could
draw him. he sat quietly, without saying a word. he seemed sad. While i
was drawing i thought that he should have been glad to be alive […]25.
From a purely aesthetic point of view, there are clear references to the
painters that my father admired: above all picasso and matisse, but also
modigliani and cézanne. there are also elements drawn from his experi-
ence as a caricaturist: his use of black and white, the importance of line,
the neutrality of the background, the economy of composition, an almost
implicit text.
after the war, when my father returned to his family in new York – he
had married ilse erythropel, his fellow sculpture student at san alejandro,
and he had a daughter, annie – he took advantage of the G.i. Bill, the
roosevelt program that paid veterans to study. he enrolled at the art
students league, where he studied with morris Kantor, a well-known ab-
stract painter out of whose classes came many of the painters of the new
York school26. in this period he was a member of the tenth street “club”, a
group of avant-garde artists animated by the critic harold rosenberg27.
[…] i was a member of the so-called tenth-street club, an informal circle of

abstract painters which brought together, in a building on tenth street in
Manhattan, the most famous painters in New York, artists like [de] Kooning,
motherwell, Klein [sic]28 […]. they would talk about painting, and i enjoyed
it because i saw that nobody had the truth in his hand. everyone had his
own way of seeing things. i never took an active part in the debates because
then, as now, I found it difficult to talk about art […]29.
24
Bermúdez, “Apuntes de la guerra”, 16.
25
Girona, Seis horas, 119.
26
the abstract expressionist movement in new York in the late 1940s and 1950s.
27
harold rosenberg (1906-1978), new York intellectual and art critic who played a major role
in the affirmation of the new York school painters.
28
Willem de Kooning (1904-1997), robert motherwell (1915-1991), and Franz Kline (1910-
1962) were among the most prominent artists of the new York school.
29
in 1953, in the context of what rosenberg defined as “action painting”30,

he had his first one-man show in new York, followed by regular exhibi-
tions at the Bertha schaefer Gallery, one of the most prestigious galleries on
57th street in those years. nevertheless, despite his position in the united
states art world, he always felt that he was a cuban painter, and as such he
was known. he traveled regularly to cuba, exhibited in havana, and took
his new York experience with him:
[…] i arrived in cuba enthusiastic about this experience; and i am very

pleased to read the comments about that period by the artist Fayad Jamis31,
with regard to the influence which this abstract painting of mine exerted
among the members of the then nascent ‘Grupo de los Once’32, in cuba.
Some painters confess to having seen in it a different path; it opened up new
possibilities of expression33.
he also maintained contact with fellow cuban painters and intellectu-

als who, like him, were outside their country – with nicolás Guillén34, for
example, whom he had known since the years when they would converse
afternoons at the Café El Lucero in Old Havana. Many years later, Raúl
roa35, referring to my father’s persevering “cuban-ness”, supposedly said:
“the Yankees have a piece of cuba at Guantánamo, but the cubans have a
piece of the united states at Julito’s house”.
in the 1950s, my father reached the peak of his career as a new York
painter, affirming himself in the difficult world of the art market. his
abstract oil paintings were acquired by museums in many parts of the
united states, latin america, europe, and Japan. he was invited to teach
in an art school in Germany, working two years at the Werkkunstschule
in Krefeld, where his spontaneous character, progressive ideas, and hu-
mor came as a surprise in the somewhat formal atmosphere of the school,
winning him a great deal of affection. his experience in Germany was
also important because, aside from introducing him into German avant-
garde art circles, it led to a friendship with the director of the school,
who was the person who convinced him to write down the stories with
which he had entertained students and teachers for the two years of his
teaching appointment. in fact, Seis horas y más is dedicated to professor
Fritz Winter.
30
harold rosenberg, “the american action painters”, Art News 8 (1952), 23-39.
31
Fayad Jamis (1930-1988), mexican-born cuban poet and painter.
32
The ‘Group of Eleven’ was composed of eleven Cuban painters and sculptors who exhibited
together in the 1950s, “understanding that the basis of art today is the total freedom of the
individual artist” and claiming that “the sculpture and the painting of today aspire to being
an object in its own right.” Pintores cubanos (la habana: ediciones r, 1962), 40.
33
34
nicolás Guillén, (1902-1989), cuban “national” poet.
35
roa was cuban Foreign minister from 1959 until 1976. see also note 9.
On 1 January 1959, when the “barbudos” entered Havana, my father

exulted. With our old short-wave radio, he listened continuously to the
news. he came to my elementary school to “explain” the revolution to
the children and teachers. however, tension between the united states and
cuba rose vertiginously. in 1961, eisenhower broke diplomatic relations;
the embargo, the Bay of pigs, and the missile crisis followed. cuba entered
a condition of economic isolation that has lasted until today, one of the
longest in world history. in 1963, under the trading With the enemy act,
Washington imposed heavy sanctions on united states citizens who trav-
eled to the island. it was only in 1968 that my father, who had acquired
united states citizenship as a veteran, was able to obtain permission from
the state department for one trip to cuba. From that year until his death in
2002, he went to cuba regularly.
in the last thirty-five years of his life, in cuba, in new York, he contin-
ued to paint. With ease, he would alternate figurative compositions, espe-
cially of women (“Julio Girona’s Women” was the title of an exhibition in
havana in 1995) with abstract compositions. sometimes he claimed that “a
good drawing or a good painting is always an abstraction”36. Other times
he would say, however, that he was not really an abstract painter, that in
his work “one could always discern female forms”37. at one of his exhibi-
tions, he relates in an article in Bohemia, “someone was looking at an image
that suggested a woman’s breasts, and he asked me, ‘Girona, do I see what
I see?’ I answered him directly, ‘Yes, you see what you see’”38.
after 1990, encouraged by the reception of Seis horas, he also dedi-
cated himself to writing. he put down on paper many episodes from his
vast repertoire of memories; he wrote his stories of contemporary life in
havana, new York, Florence, where he frequently came to visit. he pub-
lished Memorias sin título (1994), Café frente al mar (2000), and Páginas de mi
diario (2005, published posthumously). he started writing poems, which
appeared in his paintings, first as scattered words – “primavera”, “tarde”,
“noche”, “mañana” – then, one day, as a complete sentence: “ella, movi-
endo los brazos, como una araña, se quita la ropa”. From that moment on,
urged on by the poet and critic luis suardíaz, he came out with torrents of
poems. some of these were published in Música barroca (1992) and later in
La corbata roja (1996). his verses are fragments of images or memories that
have much in common with his paintings. indeed, according to the crit-
ic Orlando Hernández, Girona’s work contributes to the “confusion” that
should exist between art and poetry39.
36
37
Sahily Tabares, “No soy un pintor ‘abstracto’”, Bohemia.
38
ibid.
39
Orlando Hernández, “Otro piropo para Julio Girona”, Desde la ventanilla. Pinturas de Julio
Girona (la habana: centro cultural cinematográfico charles chaplin, 1990), 4.
all his life my father had cuba in his heart, but like many other cubans
who the journalists of other countries tend to forget, he left his country in
the difficult 1930s, in order to realize his dream of becoming an artist. he
claimed that today, differently, the cuba that is trying to create a society
with greater autonomy, dignity, and justice, although economically mod-
est, sustains its culture and its artists, young and old. he found that the
artists in revolutionary cuba are even privileged .
[…] (t)he revolution has given artists prestige, it has taken them into ac-
count, and today, more than ever, painters and sculptors develop their art
under favorable conditions, receiving moral and material encouragement.
Before, this wasn’t the case, just the opposite […]. today, a young painter,
not even 25 years old, has already had the opportunity to exhibit in a dozen
european capitals and in other parts of the world. and this gives him the
inspiration to continue working and all the freedom he needs to create40.
he too received a great deal of recognition, for his paintings as well

as for his writings. in 1986, the museo nacional de Bellas artes dedicated
a first large retrospective exhibition to his work41. in 1989, he was named
honorary member of uneac [unión de escritores y artistas de cuba]. in
1998, he received the premio nacional de las artes plásticas. i know he
was very pleased with the great honor that was awarded him; i also know
that he was very happy with the large turkey sent to him by the ministry
of culture42.
40
rudel Zaldívar, “Julio Girona: retrospectiva de un pintor”, La Nueva Gaceta (October/No-
vember 1986), 25.
41
a retrospective exhibition “Julio Girona: una historia personal” is currently on view at the
museo nacional de Bellas artes in havana. it opened on January 23, 2009.
42
this essay, now revised, was originally presented in italian with the title “l’opera artistica
e letteraria di Julio Girona” at the conference Cuba dentro e fuori, university of Florence, 6-8
may 2008.
Fig. 27 – Drawing of woman with yellow
background, 1970s(?); particular.
Fig. 28 – Profile of woman with hat. Black
and white ink drawing on paper, dated
1975.
Fig. 29 – Photo of Julio Girona, working
in his studio in Teaneck, New Jersey, ear-
ly 1960s(?).
28
29
V. Perna
Chapter 15
Recovering from the “Buena Vista Syndrome”.
Cuban Music on Film
People think because of Ry Cooder and Buena Vista that

Cuban music became better known.
That may be true, but it set us back 40 years. Now we are
fighting against the mythological vision of the old Cuba,
the Cuba of the Tropicana Club and old cars.
X alfonso, cuban rock musician1
today people around the world are probably aware of the existence of
cuba mainly because of its revolution and its music. cuban politics has in-
spired analyses, controversies, and mythologies for almost fifty years; and
cuban music has been central to both the island’s self-representation and
its international image for at least a century. in the last decade, the global
discourse on cuba has received a powerful boost from Wim Wenders’ docu-
mentary Buena Vista Social Club (Germany, 1999). since 1999, the film has gen-
erated an enormous attention in the international press and media, reviving
the fortunes of artists such as late compay segundo and ibrahim Ferrer and
putting cuba again on the international cultural map. By mixing images of
elderly musicians and havana’s architectural grandeur with a sense of musi-
cal intimacy and nostalgia, Buena Vista has offered international audiences
an intriguing, seductive portrayal of the caribbean island.
a critical assessment of the role of music in mediating the image of cuba,
however, requires looking beyond the charm of reminiscence and the depic-
tion of music as a natural vehicle for caribbean exuberance. in this article, i
discuss some recent foreign films on cuban music, reflecting on the contri-
bution of music – via the silver screen – to the construction of global repre-
sentations of cuba2. in the first part of the article, i look briefly at the history
1
Quoted in david e. thigpen, “hidden havana”, Time on-line, www.time.com, 15 september
2001.
2
in this article i will focus exclusively on Western film productions dealing with cuban mu-
sic. For an overview of post-1959 cuban cinema, see michael chanan, Cuban Cinema (minne-
apolis: university of minnesota press, 2004).
of the popularity of cuban music on the international arena and at its use by
hollywood. i then focus on the case of Buena Vista Social Club, analyzing how
the film has set an enormously influential discourse on cuba and its music.
in the final section, i examine two documentaries screened at the 2007 edi-
tion of Festival dei Popoli3, discussing them in the light of the social and artistic
changes that have taken place on the island during the período especial4.
this overview, i believe, emphasizes the central role played by music
in old and new cinematographic representations of cuba. it also shows
how recent foreign film production on cuban music seems to have shifted
from a distant, politically disengaged, neo-colonial angle to an increasing
incorporation of cubans’ views and perspectives. such shift, in a sense, has
been made possible by the very economic crisis, which has laid bare social
contradictions, given birth to new expressive forms, and tied the island to
Western economic and cultural markets, allowing foreign directors to ex-
plore everyday life and art on the island and engage in a dialogue with
contemporary cuban society.
1. The Music of Cuba on the Global Arena
the music of cuba has long enjoyed an exceptional international popu-

larity. after successfully exporting habanera to the us, latin america, and
europe in the second half of the 19th century, cuba made a wide interna-
tional impact in the first half of the 20th century with popular genres such
as danzón, son, bolero, and conga, and, after WWii, mambo, chachacha, and
later salsa. On another level Afro-Cuban jazz instigated cubop in the 1940s,
and influenced generations of us jazzmen5.
in the 1930s and 1940s, in particular, cuban music and dance became a main-
stay of US ‘Latin’ musicals and films produced by Broadway and Hollywood.
Often based on incoherent stories and responsible for the construction of the
frivolous/sensual/exotic latin american stereotype, those films proved none-
theless porous to the sounds of countries like argentina, Brasil, and cuba, and
played a crucial role in the popularization of latin music in the West6.
consider, for example, The Cuban Love Song, a 1931 mGm movie di-
rected by W.S. Van Dyke. The film was a story of love and adventure set
in an exotic cuba and constructed around “el manicero” (“the peanut’s
3
La Fabri_K – The Cuban Hip-Hop Factory (lisandro pérez-rey, 2004) and El telón de azúcar
(Camila Guzmán Urzúa, 2006). The Florentin Festival dei Popoli hosted a special section on
cuba during its 2007 edition.
4
the euphemistically-called período especial en tiempo de paz was proclaimed by Fidel castro in
1990. as castro announced his retirement from public office in early 2008, however, ordinary
cubans were still struggling with the same harsh economic reality of the previous decade.
5
John storm roberts, Latin Jazz. The First of the Fusions. 1880s to Today (new York: schirmer, 1999).
6
John storm roberts, The Latin Tinge. The Impact of Latin American Music in the United States
(Tivoli, NY: Original Music, 1985).
Vendor”), a Cuban song that had just achieved an extraordinary success

in the us. the film had its main characters played by us operatic singer
lawrence tibbett as the highbrow, sophisticated, white male american,
and Mexican actress Lupe Velez as the lowbrow, sensual, female Latin.
as Jonathan Greenberg observes, through its particular construction,
“Cuban Love Song becomes the fictional story of the genesis of ‘El manic-
ero’. in depicting this hit in a pre-commercial setting, and setting up its
popularity in the us, the movie creates a mythology about the migration
of cuban music into the north american market”7. in other words, by
drawing the story of an individual who brings the untamed tune to the
First World, the film uses cuban music to both celebrate and hide the
dominant/dominated relationship and the ‘epistemic violence’ of colonial
power8. such narrative would prove a recurring topos in subsequent rep-
resentations of cuban music.
Fig. 30 – Promotional brochure of the 1950s distributed by a New York club (from the
exhibit american sabor: latinos in u.s. popular music, ottobre 2007 – settembre 2008,
EMPSFM, Seattle, USA).
after WWii, the popularity of cuban music in the us was reinforced

by its resonance among latino communities, particularly in new York
city, where the fad of mambo spread in the late 1940s, followed by that
of chachacha in the mid-1950s. it was also there that in the 1960s latin
musicians produced the heady mix of cuban son, jazz and pan-latin
rhythms that became later known as salsa. in the 1950s, cuba became
also an important focus for us elite tourism, a tropical destination host-
ing international entertainment stars and renowned for its gambling
places, sex industry, and music9.
7
Jonathan Greenberg, “the performance of assimilation: power and commerce in The Cuban
Love Song”, paper presented at the 13th Biennial Conference of The International Association for the
Study of Popular Music, rome, 25-30 July 2005.
8
On the concept of ‘epistemic violence’, see Gayatri Spivak, “Can the Subaltern Speak?”, in
Marxism and the Interpretation of Culture, eds. cary nelson and lawrence Grossberg (chicago:
university of illinois press, 1988).
9
cristóbal díaz ayala, Música del areyto a la nueva trova (miami: universal, 1993).
the advent of the revolution had deep effects on the production and
consumption of music in cuba10, making an impact on the international
arena as well. On the one hand, US political hostility and embargo increas-
ingly marginalized music originating from the island. On the other hand,
the new cuban leadership proved scarcely enthusiastic about pursuing
cultural contacts with the West, leading to what one cuban author has de-
scribed as a “cultural self-blockade”11. With few and selected exceptions,
all this resulted in the virtual disappearance of music made on the island
from the Western scene for almost three decades12.
cuban music re-emerged on the international arena on a massive scale
only during the 1990s, and mainly as an indirect result of the economic
crisis produced on the island by the dissolution of the soviet union, which
forced the cuban government to open to tourism and foreign investors,
including foreign record labels. as it had already happened in the 1930s,
much of the responsibility for the renewed global interest in cuban music
and cuba fell on movies.
2. Enter Buena Vista Social Club
in fact, such responsibility virtually fell on a single film, a documen-

tary made by well-known German director Wim Wenders (b. 1945). Buena
Vista Social Club took its title from an album produced in 1997 by us rock
guitarist ry cooder for a small British independent label, and born from
an almost casual encounter with musicians who had never played togeth-
er before13. since, the impact of the film has largely redefined cuban mu-
sic at a global level, setting a new musical and narrative standard.
the film told the story of the recording of an album by a group of el-
derly cuban musicians and of their concerts abroad (in fact not the story
of the album with the same name, but of a subsequent one made by singer
ibrahim Ferrer with the same artists and producers). Both the film and the
cd were defined by a reference to the past contained not only in their title
10
the revolutionary government, for example, abolished gambling, established state control
over media and music venues, made it difficult for musicians to travel abroad, and obviously
influenced musical tastes. see robin moore, Music and Revolution. Cultural Change in Socialist
Cuba (Berkeley: university of california press, 2006).
11
leonardo acosta, “the problem of music and its dissemination in cuba”, in Essays on Cu-
ban Music, ed. peter manuel (lanham: university press of america, 1990).
12
the same, it must be noticed, was not true for the music made by cuban expatriates, which con-
tinued to enjoy international exposure and success. it was only in 1988 that the Berman amend-
ment to us embargo laws made cultural trade between the us and cuba possible again.
13
the film Buena Vista Social Club was produced in Germany in 1999. the cd, produced by
World circuit in 1997, won a Grammy and sold 7 million copies, a figure previously unthink-
able for a ‘world music’ album. Among the many exceptional factors surrounding the success
of Buena Vista, we could mention the absence of involvement of major record labels and in-
ternational stars, and the album’s stylistic remoteness from anglo-american pop in terms of
both sounds and language.
(the name of a long-disappeared recreational club in havana), but also in

their old-fashioned sounds, in the portraits of wrinkled faces and in the
bleached images of crumbling havana, offering multiple signs of an exer-
cise in the celebration of vintage music, people and places.
all those aspects point to a number of issues. First, the film did not
portray a pre-existing local band, but an outfit and an event created by the
interest of a handful of foreigners with a limited knowledge of cuba and
its music14. second, the music of the album and film did not offer a coher-
ent picture in terms of style and repertoire, but a collection of disparate art-
ists and genres from different periods, pasted together by Cooder’s ‘retro’
sound production. and third, the music and the artists featured had no
specific local audience: at the time most cubans considered them as passé
and irrelevant, and were listening to completely different sounds15.
By focusing on the artists’ old age and apparent naïveté, on the nostalgic
allure of the music, and on images of urban decay, however, Wenders’ film
was able to produce a captivating picture of cuba that appeared at the same
time intimate and epic. this image was reinforced by a narrative of discovery
of a “hidden musical treasure” in cuba that was central not only to the film,
but also to the subsequent interviews released by cooder and Wenders.
such narrative was taken for granted by most Western commenta-
tors, who bought the rhetoric of Buena Vista as ‘Cuban traditional music’
without questioning who discovered what, and what ‘traditional music’
meant16. Western journalists and audiences, thus, reacted enthusiastically to
cooder’s and Wenders’ feat. after the release of the film, english-language
publications released hundreds of articles proclaiming a ‘Latin invasion’
and a ‘Cuban musical revolution’17, and the uK press commented, “the al-
bum opened your ears-the film will touch your soul” (The Times), “a warm,
relaxed and colourful presentation of inspirational music makers” (Time
Out), “moving and uplifting” (The Guardian)18.
the joint success of the album and the film eventually transformed
its musicians into cultural and political icons, symbols of the resistance
14
Juan de marcos Gonzáles (artists & repertoire for Buena Vista Social Club), interview with
the author, london, november 1999.
15
the same can be said for latin american audiences, who were hardly impressed by Buena
Vista because they were already quite familiar with the sounds of bolero and son (Vincenzo
perna, “dancing the crisis, singing the past. musical dissonances in cuba during the Período
Especial”, Journal of Latin American Cultural Studies 2 (2002), 213-229.
16
See, for example, Italian TV reportage in the Italian tour of the I. Ferrer Orchestra: Dan-
iela tagliafico, “in viaggio con i supernonni”, tG2 dosssier, rai/italy, July 1999. the music
of Buena Vista did not reflect any national folk ‘tradition’, but assembled a series of popular
genres and styles from the 1930s, 1940s and 1950s that incorporated ample foreign influences
and were already mass-produced in their own time. think, for example, of the strong us jazz
influences found in the style of Buena Vista pianist rubén González (1919-2003).
17
Vincenzo Perna, Timba, the Sound of the Cuban Crisis (aldershot: ashgate, 2005).
18
the film received an academy award nomination, a Best documentaryaward from the
european Film awards, and various other prizes.
of cuba the david to the arrogance of the us Goliath. at the close of the
1990s, a Buena Vista big band offered a concert to un delegates at their
headquarters in new York, and the film was projected in the presence of
un secretary General Kofi annan. according to a document issued in 2000
by an International NGO, “[today] Americans are more open than ever to
Cuba […]. What some have called the ‘Buena Vista Social Club syndrome’
[…] is a desire by many americans to learn about cuba, to visit cuba, and
one day, to trade goods with cuba”19.
By bringing to the fore its lively viejitos, nonetheless, the success of
Buena Vista produced a distortion of historical perspective, deflecting in-
ternational attention towards cuban vintage sounds and artists and com-
pletely bypassing contemporary production.20 the international success of
Buena Vista, therefore, generated in the West a number of significant effects.
it essentialized and stereotyped specific segments of music of the past as
the only relevant type of Cuban music. Through its fairytale of ‘discovery’
and success abroad, it portrayed such music and its musicians from an an-
gle that was strikingly reminiscent of the narrative of old hollywood films.
it obliquely suggested that, on a musical/cultural level, nothing important
had happened in cuba after the revolution – except, perhaps, that socialism
had unwillingly preserved some ‘treasures of the past’. And, most disturb-
ingly, it offered a patronizing portrait of cuban artists as children and bon
sauvages, waiting in the shadow of history to be discovered by the world
(read: sold to the Western market). some critics of the film have noticed its
complete silence on the political confrontation us-cuba, the embargo and
the período especial21. the favourable reception of the film by both us liber-
als in new York and conservative cuban-americans in miami is, perhaps,
another indirect indicator of its political ambiguities22.
19
‘Epilogue: Trade Partners, not Trade Enemies’, in Oxfam America 2000, Going Against the
Grain, www.oxfamamerica.org.
20
the 1990s economic crisis, in fact, had produced a flourishing of live music bands in the
field of jazz, folklore, rap, and música bailable or timba (a variant of cuba dance music mixing
son, rumba and jazz), none of which was reflected by Buena Vista. timba’s eclecticism and ties
with tourism, in particular, had made it into a soundtrack for tourists’ dolce vita and a social
chronicle of the período especial. But they also made dance music appear as far more commer-
cial and contentious, and far less romantic than ‘traditional’ son as celebrated by Buena Vista.
as a result, timba was eventually censored by the cuban authorities and remained at the
margins of the international discourse on cuban music. see: perna, Timba.
21
For Wenders’ reply, see richard phillips, “the culture of independent film criticism has gone
down the drain”, World Socialist Web Site, www.wsws.org/articles/2000/jan2000/wwen-j10.shtml.
22
See Art Levine, “Viva Buena Vista Social Club”, Salon.com on-line, 9 march 1999, www.
salon.com. Buena Vista caused also considerable effects in cuba, generating controversies be-
tween ‘retro’ and ‘modern’ musicians and a delighted reaction by the state media (with a later
dismissal). It also made an obvious impact on the local presence and visibility of ‘traditional
music’: “In the tourist quarters of Old Havana it can seem at times as if every Cuban with a
guitar has come out to sing the songs that Buena Vista made famous. it’s as if you were to go
to liverpool and find bands singing Beatles songs on every street corner.” “now we make
politics”, The Economist on-line, 15 december 2006, www.economist.com.
3. What Kind of Music?
the success of Buena Vista paved the way to an exponential growth in

cinematographic portraits of cuban music. it is interesting to look here
briefly at Música cubana (cuba-Germany-Japan, 2004) and Havana Blues
(spain-France-cuba, 2005), two films that work on broadly similar narra-
tives, but produce significantly diverging representations.
Música cubana is a film produced by Wenders himself and directed by
argentine film-maker Germán Kral (b. 1968). the movie shows one of the
survivors of Buena Vista, singer pio leyva (1917-2006), in the process of put-
ting together a group of young musicians in havana and leading them to a
(fictional) success in Japan. in contrast to its antecedent, the film claims to
be presenting “this time, new cuban music” (italian brochure, 2004), and
does introduce some young cuban talents.
the outcome, however, is a sort of docu-fiction with a very thin story,
constructed around a permanent confusion between fiction and reality. the
characters are real musicians who perform as themselves in a fictional sto-
ry, play the fairytale of the happy ending, and have all their aspirations to
success resting with the condescending presence of leyva and two Japanese
tourists/entrepreneurs. in other words, young artists’ validation comes to de-
pend entirely on the old hero of Buena Vista. Wenders’ film therefore acts as
both a mythological and a real reference point for the new film: it supplies its
rhetorical structure (discovery, tour abroad, success); it is incorporated into
its discourse (leyva is popular in cuba because of his participation to Buena
Vista); it provides a justification and a central element in its marketing23.
Havana Blues, by contrast, is a fictional film made by Benito Zambrano
(b. 1964), a successful spanish director who studied film in cuba. the plot
sets off from the usual trials and tribulations of musicians: young cuban
rockers ruy and tito try to make a living out of their passion for music, and
one day are offered the chance of a recording contract and a tour abroad by
a spanish entrepreneur. But ruy’s marriage collapses: caught between con-
flicting loyalties, ruy rejects the offer and breaks the artistic project with
tito. during their farewell concert in havana, ruy has a glimpse of the
conclusion of the story, with tito leaving for spain with the rest of the band
and his family boarding on a boat for Florida.
despite a story derived from a variation on the familiar Fame structure,
the movie is well interpreted and offers credible characters. By keeping
away from retro clichés, it provides a sympathetic and realistic picture (if
anything, a bit rosy) of the life and troubles of contemporary cubans, pre-
senting a face of cuban music made of rock, funk, rap, and salsa that was
almost completely unknown to global audiences.
23
The Italian promotional brochure reads, “After Buena Vista Social Club, Wim Wenders
presents Música cubana”, describing Wenders as “the father of Música cubana” (2004).
interestingly, all three films discussed above employ loosely similar plots,
with obscure musicians facing new opportunities offered them by foreign-
ers. it is perhaps ironic that the most realistic portrait of music and life in
today’s cuba should emerge from the entirely fictional Habana Blues, which
manages to touch on themes very familiar to the cubans of the período espe-
cial, such as lack of money and perspectives, disintegration of family, exploi-
tation by dodgy foreigners, migration, and exile.
4. Filming a Different Cuba
Zambrano’s work takes us back to the present, reminding of two aspects

of life in cuba that are completely missing from Wenders’ and Kral’s mov-
ies: the fight (la lucha) of cuban people to keep afloat under the difficulties
of the período especial, and the new expressive urge emerged during such
period. in this sense, two documentaries screened in the Cuban Stories sec-
tion of the Festival dei Popoli of 2007 touch on different but central aspects of
the crisis, and complement each other.
El telón de azúcar (cuba-spain-France, 2006) is an autobiographical film
made by Chilean director Camila Guzmán Urzúa (b. 1971), who migrated
with her family to cuba after pinochet’s coup, and grew up there24. the
movie, whose title makes reference to both the iron curtain and sugar
(which was bartered for russian oil), is based on interviews with old school
mates and friends and evoke their years of childhood and adolescence.
By recalling a golden age of youth and optimism, those memories reflect
an era of collective confidence and hope that makes a sharp contrast with
present-day uncertainties and worries. the documentary thus becomes a
painful assessment of the broken dreams of cuban socialism and of the
disillusion of a whole generation, many of whose members have now left
the island. the result is an intriguing film that keeps away from explicit
political issues, but helps to understand the material and moral crisis of the
período especial (the past as a source of critical reflection vs the marketing of
the past as nostalgia in Buena Vista, one might say).
the film pays only a marginal attention to music, most notably in a scene
that shows the return concert of members of havana abierta, a cuban fu-
sion band of musicians in their 30s, who have lived several years abroad. Yet
their very presence, and the minimalist soundtrack provided by Omar Sosa
(a talented pianist and a rising star of cuban jazz, who now lives in spain),
become part of the reflection on the diaspora of post-1959 generations.
urzua’s exploration introduces us to another remarkable aspect of the
last two decades in cuba. against all economic odds, the período especial
has proved an extremely creative period, characterized, in particular, by an
24
she is the daughter of patricio Guzmán, a well-known chilean director who documented
the years of the allende government.
afro-cuban cultural renaissance encompassing religion, poetry, visual art,

dance, and music. indeed, one could say that most of the expressive forms
that have been coming out of cuba since the early 1990s – be they oral po-
etry, sacred drumming, rumba dancing, traditional son, afro-cuban jazz,
and timba – can be traced back to african origins.
Fig. 31 – habana Blues; poster of the Spanish edition of the movie.
Within such trend a special place has been occupied by cuban rap,
a movement emerged in havana in the early 1990s and now boasting a
national festival, hundreds of bands and a certain degree of institutional
support25. its popularity reflects both the recognition of us popular cul-
ture in cuba and the proximity between afro-cuban and us black ur-
ban culture26. proud of its own barrio origins, marginality and cultural
25
deborah pacini-hernandez and reebee Garofalo, “the emergence of rap cubano: an his-
torical perspective”, in Music, Space, and Place, ed. sheila Whiteley, andy Bennett and stan
Hawkins (Burlington, VT: Ashgate, 2004), 89-107.
26
music styles like rap and rumba, for example, originate from similar conditions of marginal-
ization, and are both based on verbal/physical dexterity and performed by voice on percussive
sounds (in its early days, in fact, cuban rap was accompanied by beating on wooden crates, just
like early rumba). Internationally, Cuban rap has acquired resonance with the Orishas’ album A lo
cubano (2000), and has generated a number of (mainly us) documentaries such as Cuban Hip Hop
All-Stars (Joshua Bee alafia, 2004); Cuban hip hop. Desde el principio (Vanessa & Larissa Diaz, 2006);
East of Havana (emilia menocal and Jauretsi saizarbitoria, 2006); and Guerrilla Radio (thomas nybo,
bricolage, cuban rap dismisses cultural nationalistic criticisms and in-

corporates afro-cuban themes, often commenting in local street slang on
issues such as social injustice and racial prejudice27.
in the documentary La Fabri_K – The Cuban Hip-Hop Factory (2004),
cuban-american director lisandro pérez-rey (b. 1975) employs a rapid,
music-video style to narrate the story of a project involving rap bands
Doble Filo and Obsesión – thus offering yet another variation on the theme
of musicians aspiring to tour the West. this time the tour was real and in-
volved young, mostly black cuban musicians, who managed to perform to
knowledgeable audiences (as opposed to the well-meaning, but generally
uninformed audiences of Buena Vista) in miami and new York city, where
they met personalities such as harry Belafonte and hip-hop luminaries like
Fab Five Freddy, the roots and afrika Bambaataa.
the film was commissioned by the miami light project, a non-profit us
cultural organization promoting live art in south Florida. although it is not
clear to what extent it documents a tour, or produces a tour in order to film
it, the documentary portrays cuban music as a dynamic practice, showing
musicians while preparing for the trip, rehearsing, and reflecting on the so-
cial and artistic circumstances of today’s cuba. it offers interesting views
on issues of creativity and daily life, crisis and blockade, freedom and cen-
sorship, black identity and discrimination in cuba. together with views of
miami politics and images of the commercialization of us hip-hop, the mov-
ie portrays the cultural shock experienced by the cubans in their first contact
with us multicultural society, and draws into the picture second-generation
cuban-americans (like pérez-rey himself), who appear to be far more curi-
ous and interested in dialogue with cuba than most of their parents.
5. Conclusions
music has proved crucial to the international image of cuba for at

least a century. in the 1930s and 1940s, cuban sounds and dance featured
generously in hollywood films that were built around narratives of dis-
covery and disclosure of ‘wild’ people and music, playing a decisive role
in stereotyping latin americans as sensual, passionate, but essentially
inferior individuals. Hollywood’s celebration of Cuba as a source of ‘hot’
music and people thus became strategic to a discourse that sought to nat-
uralize the asymmetry of power between the West and its peripheries.
a comparable narrative of musical revelation, migration to the West,
and success, has recently re-emerged with films like Buena Vista Social Club,
2007). despite being the expression of a fascinating subculture, however, local rap in cuba is today
certainly not as popular as reggaeton among street kids, or as timba among working-class adults.
27
Geoff Baker, “la habana que no conosces. cuban rap and the social construction of urban
space”, Ethnomusicology Forum 2 (2005), 215-246.
and their portrait of cuba as a backward, declining, romantic destination.

Following neo-colonial representations of First vs third World, Wenders’
movie offered world audiences a compassionate, yet patronizing and pa-
thetic picture of cuban musicians as disadvantaged, submissive others res-
cued by a benevolent self. in the film, music not only provided the main
focus for the story: through its own specific appeal, music helped to be-
stow persuasiveness to the plot, genuineness to the characters, and deep-
ness to their mythology, constructing a rhetorical model for a number of
subsequent films.
narratives of musicians’ progression from local obscurity to accom-
plishment abroad, however, have been employed by other directors to set
up quite different pictures of cuba. By following the preparation, us tour,
and return to the island of two cuban hip-hop bands, for instance, pérez-
rey offers with The Cuban Hip-Hop Factory a vision that eschews nostalgia
and escapist definitions of national culture. he chooses a perspective that
explores everyday life and raises a number of social and political issues,
questioning, for example, the absurdity of us embargo laws and the role of
black identity in modern cuba.
it could be objected that all cinematographic narrations examined here
have a common element, their reference to foreign audiences, their wish to
bring (and sell) cuban music abroad, both symbolically and literally. these
representations might echo a condescending attitude: but they also reflect an
obvious economic reality, cuba’s dramatic dependence on foreign capital in
the form of tourism, investment, loans, and family remittances. as El telón
de azúcar shows, the obsessive idea of going abroad, so widespread among
young cubans, is revealing of their necessity to reflect on their own past,
break the present sense of seclusion, and face the challenges of the future.
in a moment of rising global interest – and controversy – on cuba, (see,
for example, the June 2007 querelle on the italian leftist daily Liberazione)28,
breaking the island’s international isolation and trying to look sympatheti-
cally, yet realistically, at its society and culture becomes particularly impor-
tant. La Fabri_K and El telón de azúcar manage to avoid political polarization
and cultural stereotyping, offering a reflection on everyday life and issues
of identity, artistic freedom, self-empowerment and exile brought by young
foreign directors who speak the language, are familiar with cuba, and ex-
plore the island with an enquiring spirit. in this sense, the two documen-
taries should perhaps be seen not only, or not so much, as documents about
today’s cuba, but as acts of cultural militancy in favour of dialogue.
28
in June 2007, italian leftist daily Liberazione published a series of highly critical reportages on
present-day cuba, written by angela nocioni. the articles caused an outrage among many read-
ers of the paper, and were criticized by a cuban journalist’s website, which published an insult-
ing personal attack on nocioni (miguel del padrón, “la indecencia se sube hasta las conciencias.
los periódicos mafiosos e indignos de miami insultan al pueblo cubano y el italiano los imita”,
Unión de Periodistas de Cuba on-line, www.cubaperiodistas.cu/noticias/junio07/04/05.htm).
Fig. 32 – Commercial ad of Wim Wenders’ Buena Vista Social Club, published by a British magazine
in September 1999.
Part VI
cuba and the international scene

of the cold War: the african case
On the previous page – Ernesto Che Guevara in the Congo (anonimous author, Museo
Che Guevara, Centro de Estudio Che Guevara, La Habana, Cuba).
Part VI
Cuba and the International Scene

of the Cold War: the African Case
the Revolución immediately hurled cuba onto the world stage.

Objectively, Cuba became a model of revolutionary tactics for anti-colo-
nial movements, a thorn in the side of the united states, a highly-prized
ally for the soviet union and a model of development for post-colonial
states. subjectively, the young revolutionaries conceived of themselves as
part of a larger anti-imperialist movement in the so-called third World.
ernesto “che” Guevara’s invitation to world revolutionaries to create “two,
three, many Vietnams” was consistent with Cuba’s leading role among the
non-aligned countries, its position at the General assembly of the united
nations in support of national liberation movements in africa and asia, its
material support for latin american guerrilla movements and the creation
of the tricontinental conference (1966)1. Greater alignment with the soviet
union after the first half of the 1960s only partially smoothened cuba’s
active revolutionary internationalism. While che’s death in Bolivia (1967)
gave rise to the worship of the guerrillero heroico worldwide, it was his pre-
vious mission in Zaire (1965) that had brought cuba in close connection
with revolutionary and anti-colonial movements in africa. the strength of
such links emerged clearly a decade later in newly independent angola,
as discussed by candace sobers and maria stella rognoni, from different
standpoints, in their essays. in the wake of the fall of the portuguese em-
pire in 1975, civil strife broke out between the marxist Movimento Popular
de Libertação de Angola (mpla) and the competing União Nacional para a
Independência Total de Angola (unita) and Frente Nacional de Libertação de
Angola (Fnla) backed by the united states, Zaire, china and the apart-
1
Odd Arne Westad, The Global Cold War (cambridge: cambridge university press), 2004; Jef-
fry Frieden, Global Capitalism (new York: norton, 2006), pp. 334-337.
heid regime of south africa. heeding the mpla’s call for support, cuban
combat troops (with logistical support from the soviet union) quickly in-
tervened with Operacion Carlota and helped block a South African inva-
sion from the south2. this was the beginning of cuba’s longest and most
extensive military mission abroad, which lasted until the lusaka peace
accords of 1989 reached after cuba’s victory over south african troops
at cuito cuanavale following the largest field battle in africa since the
second World War (1987-1988). in terms of world history, cuba’s “african
odyssey” showed that the confrontation between the two superpowers is
far from having exhausted the spectrum of international relations in the
second half of the 20th century3. in fact, according to pablo arco pino’s es-
say, all that ended with the lusaka accords was cuba’s military projection
in africa, while the internationalist project still continued for years in the
form of medical and technical cooperation.
2
piero Gleijeses, “conflicting missions: havana, Washington, and africa, 1959-1976”, chapel
hill: university of north carolina press, 2002.
3
piero Gleijeses, “moscow’s proxy? cuba and africa 1975-1988”, Journal of Cold War Studies
2 (2006), 3-51.
P. Arco Pino
Chapter 16
La presencia cubana en África (1963-1989)
1. La excepcionalidad del caso cubano
desde su ascenso al poder en 1959, enfrentado a los difíciles obstáculos

que ha tenido que vencer tanto en el orden interno como externo, el gobier-
no de Fidel castro ha aplicado estrategias sociales muy ambiciosas que,
para muchos, convirtieron a cuba en un referente mundial de utopía polí-
tica1. en el plano de las relaciones internacionales este país subdesarrollado
alcanza, en varias ocasiones, durante las últimas décadas, proyecciones de
gran potencia, basta solo recordar el papel central que desempeñó durante
la “crisis de octubre” o “crisis del caribe”, considerada una de las situacio-
nes más álgidas y peligrosas de la “guerra fría”2, así como su excepcional
influencia dentro del movimiento de países no alineados. pero el prota-
gonismo más espectacular de la isla, a contrapelo de sus limitadas poten-
cialidades estratégicas y económicas, lo constituyó y constituye la ayuda
brindada a diversos pueblos especialmente a los del continente africano.
recordemos que entre los años 1961 y 1989 cerca de medio millón de
cubanos entre civiles y militares prestaron su ayuda solidaria en distintos
países africanos luchando contra las enfermedades, el neocolonialismo y
el apartheid3. ¿cómo puede explicarse que un país bloqueado y hostigado
1
Sergio Guerra Vilaboy y Maldonado Gallardo Alejo, Historia de la Revolución Cubana (Quito:
la tierra, 2005).
2
carlos lechuga, En el ojo de la tormenta. F. Castro, N. Jruschov. J. F. Kennedy y la crisis de los
misiles (la habana: si-mar, 1995); aleksandr Fursenko and timothy J. naftali, One Hell of a
Gamble: Khrushchev, Castro, and Kennedy, 1958-1964. The Secret History of the Cuban Missile Crisis
(new York: norton, 1998).
3
piero Gleijeses, Jorge risquet y Fernando ramírez, Cuba y África historia Común de lucha y
sangre (la habana: ciencias sociales, 2007); piero Gleijeses, “cuba and the independence of
namibia”, Cold War History 2 (2007), 285-303; William m. leogrande, Cuba’s Policy in Africa,
por la principal potencia mundial y situado a 90 millas de la misma, con

una población de apenas 10 millones de habitantes y con todo tipo de limi-
taciones materiales pudiera emprender y cumplimentar tamaña empresa?
la “odisea cubana en África”4 es un capítulo de la historia contemporá-
nea poco conocido en occidente, especialmente en el llamado “primer mun-
do”, donde la interpretación de los acontecimientos relacionados con la isla
se han visto tradicionalmente manipulados o silenciados por los grandes
medios de comunicación. a esto se han unido las limitaciones del “gran
público” en el conocimiento de la historia latinoamericana en general y cu-
bana en particular. en especial el apoyo militar a gobiernos y movimientos
progresistas africanos ejercieron un significativo impacto sobre la política
internacional de la época, sin embargo son escasas las investigaciones de
fondo dedicadas al tema.
2. Tradiciones de solidaridad latinoamericanas
para entender las verdaderas causas y el sentido del accionar cubano en

tan lejanos territorios hay que tomar en cuenta toda una serie de anteceden-
tes, circunstancias y fines. en primer término, se debe recordar que el fenó-
meno de la solidaridad internacional de que diera muestras la revolución
cubana a partir de la victoria de 1959 forma parte de una larga e impres-
cindible tradición latinoamericana practicada por unas u otras regiones de
este subcontinente durante las luchas independentistas contra el coloniaje
europeo. Luego, durante la primera mitad del siglo XX, fueron múltiples
los movimientos democráticos y antiimperialistas que recibieron y/o brin-
daron su apoyo solidario. tal fue el caso del movimiento protagonizado
por augusto césar sandino en la segovia nicaragüense, junto al cual com-
batieron revolucionarios de diversa procedencia como el venezolano carlos
aponte y el salvadoreño Farabundo martí5, el régimen presidencialista de
Lázaro Cárdenas en México, que junto al soviético constituyeron los úni-
cos apoyos gubernamentales recibidos por la república española en su lu-
cha contra el falangismo, así como el gobierno antioligárquico de Gustavo
Arbenz en Guatemala en 1954, apoyado por la opinión pública progresista
de toda américa, incluida la del joven médico argentino ernesto Guevara
1959-1980 (Berkeley: university of california press, 1980).

4
Cuba: An African Odyssey (Jihan el tahri, 2007) es un film documental sobre la presencia
cubana en África desde el arribo del che a territorio congolés en 1965, en compañía de un
grupo de combatientes, hasta la firma de los acuerdos de paz de lusaka entre los gobiernos
de Sudáfrica, Cuba y Angola en el marco de la Organización de las Naciones Unidas (ONU)
el 22 de diciembre de 1988.
5
carlos aponte se relacionó más tarde con el movimiento revolucionario de cuba y cayó
combatiendo contra tropas del ejército de este país junto al destacado dirigente cubano an-
tonio Guiteras holmes. por otra parte, el salvadoreño Farabundo martí devino bandera del
movimiento nacional liberador de su país que tomó su nombre.
Part VI – Cuba and the International Scene of the Cold War 243
de la serna, presente en aquel país cuando se produce el golpe de estado

que lo derrota, del cual muchos responsabilizan a la cia, por citar solo al-
gunos ejemplos.
en lo referido a la historia específica de cuba dichas tradiciones son no-
tables. muchos hijos de la mayor isla antillana, durante la época colonial,
brindaron su contribución y en ocasiones su sangre, participando en las
luchas anticolonialistas continentales. en reciprocidad, durante las guerras
de independencia cubanas, varios cientos de combatientes procedentes de
diversos países americanos y europeos se unieron a los “ejércitos mambi-
ses” en su enfrentamiento al yugo español.
sin embargo, el más importante exponente del internacionalismo revo-
lucionario cubano durante el siglo XiX lo constituyó la figura de José martí
quien fuera organizador y líder de la gesta emancipadora iniciada en 1895.
este hombre, de excepcional calibre intelectual y político, patentizó reitera-
damente en su obra literaria y en su acción un profundo sentimiento de her-
mandad y solidaridad con los pueblos oprimidos. algunas de sus máximas:
“patria es humanidad” y “con los pobres de la tierra quiero yo mi suerte
echar […]” resumen su estirpe ideológica. días antes de caer en combate, en
carta inconclusa a su entrañable amigo mexicano manuel mercado escribía:
Ya estoy todos los días en peligro de dar mi vida por mi país y por mi de-
ber, puesto que lo entiendo y tengo ánimos con que realizarlo – de impedir
a tiempo con la independencia de cuba que se extiendan por las antillas los
estados unidos y caigan, con esa fuerza más, sobre nuestras tierras de amé-
rica. cuanto hice hasta ahora y haré, es para eso […] viví en el monstruo, y
le conozco las entrañas: -y mi honda es la de david […]6.
este documento, considerado como su testamento político, devela el

profundo alineamiento latinoamericanista y la aguda percepción de los pe-
ligros que encerraba la creciente voracidad del “gran vecino del norte” por
parte del “mayor de los cubanos”.
3. Solidaridad durante la república y la revolución
después de la retirada de las tropas intervencionistas norteamericanas

(1902), durante los años de la llamada “república mediatizada”7, el pensa-
miento martiano constituyó un referente obligado para los movimientos
sociales, democráticos y anti imperialistas cubanos. no resulta extraño que
6
José martí, Obras Completas, tomo XX (la habana: editorial nacional de cuba, 1965), 161.
7
Calificativo asignado a la república que se funda tras la ocupación estadounidense de la isla
caracterizada por la corrupción y el latrocinio y la dependencia respecto a estatdos unidos.
Véase el alegato que constituye el trabajo de Emilio Roig de Leuchsenring, Males y vicios de
Cuba republicana sus causas y sus remedios (La Habana: Oficina del Historiador de la Habana,
1959).
tras el triunfo de la revolución soviética las ideas del internacionalismo so-

cialista promulgadas por ella, encontraran tierra abonada en cuba y que
durante la guerra civil en españa fuera la brigada cubana de combatientes
voluntarios a favor de la república, la mayor de cuantas se organizaron en
el continente americano8.
un ejemplo significativamente promisorio, aunque poco conocido, fue el
escenificado por el propio Fidel castro a la edad de 21 años, cuando siendo
estudiante del segundo año de la carrera de leyes en la universidad de la
habana se enroló en una fallida expedición organizada con el fin de derrotar
la sangrienta dictadura del General trujillo en la vecina isla dominicana9.
sin embargo las cotas más altas y extendidas de solidaridad internacio-
nal lo alcanza el pueblo cubano dentro del periodo revolucionario iniciado
en 1959. esto se debió, en primer término, al hecho de ser organizada y lle-
vada a cabo por un gobierno constituido, con mayoritario apoyo popular
y con una muy clara voluntad política, lo que le imprimió, desde un inicio,
un especial carácter y potencia.
aunque serían algunos países de américa latina, dirigidos por delez-
nables regímenes, los primeros en conocer del envío de pequeñas expe-
diciones militares, como señalamos anteriormente, fue en el continente
africano donde por primera vez esta actividad se hizo sentir de forma ma-
siva y plena.
4. Carácter y objetivos de la solidaridad
el primer envío de tropas cubanas al continente africano en 1963 tuvo co-

mo destino el territorio de la recién liberada república argelina invadida por
el ejército marroquí. las fuerzas cubanas, acompañadas de un equipo de per-
sonal médico y comandadas por el entonces comandante efigenio almejeiras,
constituyeron un importante elemento de disuasión frente a las tropas del
país vecino10. menos de un año y medio más tarde, a mediados de 1965, el co-
mandante ernesto Guevara, al frente de otro grupo de combatientes cubanos
inicia la lucha en el congo contra los aliados del poder colonial y los mercena-
rios blancos11. la campaña no brindó los frutos esperados y el che tuvo que
retirarse para reiniciar la lucha en Bolivia donde terminó siendo asesinado.
este periodo marcó también el inicio de la ayuda de los instructores cubanos,
en territorio congoleño a grupos de combatientes del mpla (movimiento pa-
ra la liberación de angola) dirigido por agostino neto12.
8
aurea matilde Fernández, Segunda República y Guerra Civil (la habana: ciencias sociales,
2004).
9
Volker Skierka, Fidel Castro: A Biography (new York: Wiley-Blackwell, 2004), 26.
10
luís Báes, Secretos de generales. Desclasificado (la habana: si-mar, 1996).
11
ernesto Guevara, Pasajes de la guerra revolucionaria: Congo (Barcelona: Grijalbo, 1999).
12
piero Gleijeses, Misiones en conflicto. La Habana, Washington y África 1959-1976 (la habana:
ciencias sociales, 2007).
la década del 70 conoció de un reforzamiento de la lucha por parte de

los movimientos de liberación nacional, especialmente en las posesiones
del debilitado imperio portugués. al calor de esta situación los vínculos
de Cuba con los movimientos independentistas en Angola, Cabo Verde y
mozambique, y más tarde con el gobierno etiope se fortalecieron13.
ahora bien, para el estudio del capítulo principal de la historia del in-
ternacionalismo cubano en África: su participación en la guerra de angola,
se impone esclarecer algunas cuestiones básicas. en opinión del gobierno
cubano, la importancia de la salvaguarda de la independencia de angola
no estaba determinado solo por la importancia de apoyar el derecho le-
gítimo de cualquier nación africana a defender la libertad alcanzada tras
décadas de lucha contra el colonialismo, sino, y quizás principalmente, por
el hecho de que era el gobierno racista de sudáfrica, apoyado en los grupos
contrarrevolucionarios de savimbi y holden roberto, quienes amenazaban
intervenir en aquel país con vistas a abortar su proceso independentista y
asi reforzar su influencia sobre todo el cono sur del continente. las amisto-
sas relaciones existentes entre el gobierno sudafricano y el norteamericano
constituían un incentivo complementario a la toma de partido junto al go-
bierno dirigido por neto, por parte de la dirigencia cubana.
en cuanto a la incidencia de las relaciones con la unión soviética sobre
la ejecutoria cubana en África, es bueno comenzar reconociendo que sin el
suministro de las armas que la gran potencia euroasiática había prestado du-
rante años a cuba, cualquier intento de ayuda nunca hubiera tenido la di-
mensión y eficacia que alcanzó. ahora bien, esto está muy lejos de significar
que el gobierno cubano actuara como un peón de la política soviética. por el
contrario, infinidad de documentos desclasificados en los estados unidos,
así como las opiniones vertidas por diversos políticos soviéticos y norteame-
ricanos que desempeñaron responsabilidades “de primera línea” durante
aquella época han corroborado, en entrevistas y publicaciones, el hecho de
que los cubanos actuaron, no solo independientemente de su “partenaire”
europeo, sino en ocasiones, en contra de sus designios. de hecho, casi todos
los envíos de personal militar cubano hacia África fueron dados a conocer al
gobierno soviético después de que estos partieran de la isla, y eran conside-
rados muchas veces, “a sotovoce”, por la dirigencia soviética, como decisio-
nes aventureras e irresponsables del gobierno de la habana14.
Otro aspecto objeto de debate es el referido al papel que correspondió
desempeñar al gobierno estadounidense en el conflicto angolano. durante
el periodo que va desde la llegada de los primeros contingentes de soldados
cubanos a Angola hasta la firma de los tratados de Paz en la ONU (1975-88)
13
charles Zorgbibe, Historia de las relaciones internacionales, tomo ii, Del sistema de Yalta hasta
nuestros días (madrid: alianza, 1997).
14
piero Gleijeses, “moscow´s proxy? cuba and africa, 1975-1988”, Journal of Cold War Studies
2 (2006), 3-51: 8.
los estados unidos conocieron de tres administraciones. la primera, encabe-

zada por Gerald Ford, tuvo un activo desempeño en cuanto a la problemá-
tica angolana. para algunos autores la influencia de su secretario de estado
henry Kissinger en el diseño de esta política fue clave. deseoso de recuperar
parte del prestigio perdido por su país tras la derrota en Viet Nam y concien-
te de la importancia estratégica que representaría para Washington un África
austral controlada por su aliado, el gobierno de minoría blanca sudafrica-
no, Kissinger decidió brindar apoyo a este último15. el momento era oportu-
no porque los soviéticos, interesados en no malograr las negociaciones que
mantenían con los estados unidos sobre el tratado salt ii, de seguro no
prestarían una ayuda seria al gobierno angolano.
el apoyo estadounidense a la oposición en angola indiscutiblemente
animó la actitud intervencionista de pretoria, independientemente del gra-
do de coincidencia política existente entre ambos gobiernos. la entrada de
fuerzas sudafricanas en territorio de aquella nación acarreó la respuesta cu-
bana, acordada con luanda, de desembarcar a varias decenas de miles de
combatientes a partir de noviembre de 1975. Por último y tras duros com-
bates en compañía de las Fuerzas armadas para la liberación de angola
(Fapla), las fuerzas sudafricanas fueron echadas de territorio angolano.
el subsiguiente mandato, el de Jimmy carter, se distanció un tanto de las
duras posiciones adoptadas por sus antecesores frente a cuba, decidiendo
“normalizar” las relaciones con la isla. uno de los requisitos que el nuevo
presidente exigió para ello, fue la retirada de las tropas cubanas de angola.
el gobierno cubano, dando muestras nuevamente de gran lealtad hacia sus
amigos en el “continente negro”, respondió que para cuba el tema africano
no era negociable y que en todo caso estados unidos de norteamérica ten-
dría que discutir el asunto con luanda y no con la habana16.
independientemente de otros factores, la negativa cubana contribuyó a
malograr un acercamiento que en términos económicos podían, según los
mediadores enviados por carter, haber proporcionado grandes beneficios
al estado cubano. en el fondo se trataba de que el gobierno cubano hiciera
dejación de un derecho elemental: el de ayudar a cualquier gobierno legal-
mente constituido y a cambio, la dirección norteamericana prometía aban-
donar algunos puntos de su tradicional política de bloqueo y agresiones
contra Cuba. Por último Castro no cedió.
5. El último golpe
durante el mandato de ronald reagan en el otoño de 1987, se produce

un ataque sorpresivo de tropas sudafricanas a angola. nuevamente el es-
15
Ver, por ejemplo, Jussi M. Hanhimäki, The Flawed Architect: Henry Kissinger and American
Foreign Policy (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2004), 401-10.
16
Gleijeses, “moscow´s proxy?”, 12.
tado cubano decide ayudar con todos sus medios al gobierno de aquella
nación sin avisar a los soviéticos, ocupados entonces en la instauración de
la “perestroika” y en su “política de distensión” con los estados unidos.
pero esta vez el objetivo que se planteó la dirigencia cubana fue el de propi-
nar una derrota definitiva a las fuerzas sudafricanas y dar un vuelco fun-
damental a la correlación de fuerzas en aquella zona de África. para ello
trasladó a territorio angolano a tropas élites de las fuerzas armadas cuban-
as acompañadas de una buena parte del mejor armamento con que contaba
la nación en momentos en que se hacía patente la creciente agresividad del
gobierno republicano estadounidense hacia la isla.
a pesar de la superioridad inicial de los invasores las tropas cubanas, en
unión con las Fapla, resistieron la ofensiva del enemigo combatiendo con
intensidad especialmente en puntos neurálgicos del territorio como fue el
caso de cuito cuanavale, pequeña aldea alrededor de la cual se enfren-
taron grandes contingentes y donde se decidió el desarrollo posterior de
los acontecimientos.
con las victorias de cuito cuanavale y la de cualueque se abrió la posi-
bilidad de avances en profundidad de las tropas cubanas hacia la frontera
con namibia, territorio colindante con sudáfrica. en tales circunstancias
al gobierno de pretoria no le quedó más remedio que sentarse en la mesa
de conversaciones junto a funcionarios estadounidenses y frente a la del-
egación cubano-angolana, para terminar aceptando las demandas formu-
ladas por el representante cubano: sudáfrica tendría que retirar sus tropas
de angola en el plazo de 30 días. cinco meses más tarde, en nueva York,
el enviado de sudáfrica firmaba los acuerdos de paz que incluían el re-
conocimiento de la independencia de namibia. era el comienzo del fin
del gobierno de minoría blanca en sudáfrica y con ello, del “apartheid”17.
Finalizada la contienda angolana los soldados cubanos desplegados en
África iniciaron el regreso a casa, a lo cual siguió el traslado de los restos de
2077 combatientes caídos en combate.
6. A manera de resumen
en lo referido al apoyo civil, en el continente se mantuvo y se ha incre-

mentado progresivamente hasta nuestros días la presencia de especialistas
que prestan su ayuda en diversas áreas socioeconómicas, especialmente en
la atención sanitaria y científico- técnica. en la actualidad la ayuda cubana
se extiende a 69 países de los cuatro continentes. En África el número de
colaboradores alcanza la cifra de 3,374, repartidos en 36 países18.
¿Que conclusiones pueden extraerse sobre la presencia cubana en
África? estas pueden ser muy variadas, su tónica dependerá, en primer
17
La paz de Cuito Canavale: Documentos de un proceso (la habana: editora política, 1989).
18
Ver el ensayo de Fernando Ramírez en Gleijeses, Risquet y Ramírez, Cuba y África, 112.
término, de la mentalidad y el grado de información de quien las formule.

para algunos fue una sangrienta aventura sin sentido, para otros uno de los
acontecimientos más inesperados e incomprensibles de la segunda mitad
del siglo pasado en el que una pequeña nación de escasos recursos pudiera
desplegar acciones armadas con tropas voluntarias de tal envergadura en
sitios tan distantes. para muchos la ayuda cubana a los pueblos de África
mostró y muestra, en primer término, la necesidad y las posibilidades de la
solidaridad entre las naciones pobres, que en aquella coyuntura histórica
asumieron determinadas formas, pero cuyos imperativos se mantienen con
igual o mayor urgencia en la actualidad.
C. Sobers
Chapter 17
Investigating Cuban Internationalism:
the First Angolan Intervention, 1975
historian Gaddis smith once characterized united states policy to-

ward latin america as “long periods of ignoring [the region] alternating
with moments of frantic obsession”1. smith was referring the long-stand-
ing american tradition of intervening militarily and economically in latin
american affairs. this statement seems broadly applicable to african af-
fairs as well. in the twentieth century it can seem as though every fifteen
years or so, an event on the african continent briefly captures Western
attention2. if this is the case, then the mid-1970s were one such moment.
caught up in the whirlwind of the cold War, the angolan crisis of 1975
brought together two “moments of frantic obsession”, one african and one
latin american. somehow, a localized war of national liberation escalated
sharply into an international incident.
during angola’s anticolonial struggle the liberation party leaders at-
tempted to “domesticate” the revolution – that is, link their specific vision of
development, modernity and nationhood to the particular racial and ethnic
circumstances of angolan society. in the period of intense armed resistance,
from 1961 to independence in 1975, the national Front for the liberation
of angola (Frente nacional de libertação de angola, Fnla), popular
movement for the liberation of angola (movimento popular de libertação
de angola, mpla) and national union for the total independence of
angola party (união nacional para a independência total de angola,
1
Gaddis smith, The Last Years of the Monroe Doctrine, 1945-1993 (new York: hill and Wang,
1994), 6.
2
For example, the so-called “scramble for africa” ushered in the twentieth century, followed
by the abyssinian [ethiopian]-italian crises of the 1920s and 1930s. post-1945 the general pro-
cess of decolonization saw several african crises, including the mau mau uprising in Kenya
(1952-60), and the congo crisis (1960 to roughly 1965).
unita), waged a dual struggle for the soul of the nation, competing as
much for internal legitimacy (from ethnically diverse angolans) as for ex-
ternal recognition (from the international community). simultaneously, at
the high point of the conflict, no less than six external powers provided
weapons and materiel: us support bolstered the portuguese metropole,
contiguous african states harboured competing revolutionaries, and great
and medium powers, including Zaïre (now the democratic republic of
congo), the people’s republic of china (prc), apartheid-era south africa,
the soviet union, and most surprisingly, cuba, provided weapons, combat
troops, and mercenaries to the three main liberation parties.
a generation after the historic first military intervention, the cuban
involvement in angolan crisis continues to fascinate historians and po-
litical scientists3. the cuban military intervention in angola was decisive,
and took the international community (even the soviet union) by surprise.
Yet upon reflection, it appears entirely in keeping with the nature of Fidel
castro’s cuba. the angolan intervention culminated a decade of interest
in african affairs, and was a prime example of cuban internationalism.
cuban internationalism denotes the duty of every cuban to support fel-
low revolutionary movements in latin america and beyond. it is virtually
impossible to view cuban foreign policy except through the prism of its
recent revolutionary past. this is not just a western conceit, born of the
fifty-year adversarial relationship between the cuba and the united states.
rather, the cuban government has explicitly historicized, conceptualized
and projected its image as that of a revolutionary state and, that most elu-
sive category, a revolutionary power4. necessary to the goal of being a rev-
olutionary power is an explicit commitment to the projection of power and
influence – military, economic, ideological – known in the cuban context as
‘internacionalismo’. It is largely this experience of Cuban internationalism
which catapulted angola into the international spotlight, confounded the
us and forced the soviet union to scramble to keep up.
angola was not cuba’s first foray into african politics, nor was it the last.
Other important interventions included Algeria, 1963, and Ethiopia, 19775. Yet
angola was undoubtedly the most successful, stabilizing the mpla until it
formed a government in luanda. recently cuban scholars have begun to res-
urrect la epopeya – “the epic feat” – adding the angolan intervention to the
canon of revolutionary triumph, in line with the 1953 raid on the moncada
3
cuban forces intervened in angola again in 1988 to support the communist armed Forces
for the liberation of angola (Forças Armadas Populares de Libertação de Angola, Fapla) against
a resurgent unita. the final withdrawal took place in 1991.
4
see louis a. peréz, Jr., “in the service of the revolution: two decades of cuban historiog-
raphy, 1959- 1979”, Hispanic American Historical Review 1 (1980), 83.
5
the cuban government also deployed military aid to congo-Brazzaville (1965) and Guinea
(1966).
Barracks and the 1961 Bay of pigs6. the cuban intervention in angola can
thus be seen as providing an informative case-study of cuban international-
ism. as such, it is worth investigating, not simply because it is a fascinating
story, but also because of what it suggests about the nature of cuban interna-
tionalism and cuba’s distinctive place in the history of the twentieth century.
1. Investigating Cuban Internationalism
certainly the cuban state has not been the only one to tie its existence to
the principle of revolutionary internationalism. the twentieth century man-
ifestation of socio-political revolution often takes internationalization as a
given – revolution is a political commodity to be exported7. however, cuba
remains the only small, third World nation, to explicitly project its military
and ideological influence outside of contiguous states. some form of inter-
nacionalismo had been present since the beginning of the revolution. in
February 1959 ernesto “che” Guevara established an informal “liberation
department” in havana. referencing orthodox marxist-leninism as well
as nineteenth century nationalists such as simón Bolívar, máximo Gómez
and José martí, in 1960 Guevara published the cuban variant of marxist-
leninist revolution, la Guerra de guerrillas. simplified, Guevara’s foco
principles were: that popular forces could defeat a conventional army; that
revolutions could, and should, be created by a dedicated vanguard; and
that rural latin america was the best battlefield for revolution8.
castro and Guevara split, and Guevara’s last point was entirely discredited
in the jungles of Bolivia. most cuban attempts to export the revolution failed:
the US convinced the Organization of American States (OAS) to expel Cuba
in 1962 and cuba’s policy of encouraging socialist revolutions among its latin
american neighbours culminated in the murder of Guevara in Bolivia in 1967
(though by this point che was acting largely independently). however, the
Bay of pigs and the cuban missile crisis – the latter of which infuriated castro
when the settlement was negotiated between us president John F. Kennedy
and soviet premier nikita Khrushchev without his input – highlighted
6
said one cuban author: “the history of europe’s imperialist and neocolonial pillage and
plunder of Africa, with the full support of the United States and NATO, as well as Cuba’s
heroic solidarity with its sister nations, have not been sufficiently known, if only as a well-
deserved reward for the hundreds of thousands of men and women who wrote that glorious
page, which, as an example for the present and future generations, should never be forgotten.
that does not negate the need to continue making it known”. rose ana dueñas, “cuba in
africa: internationalists tell their story”, Digital Granma Internaciónal on-line, www.granma.
cu/ingles/2007/junio/vier29/cuba-in-africa.html (cited 29 June 2007).
7
Fred halliday, “revolutionary internationalism and its perils”, in Revolution in the Making
of the Modern World: Social Identities, Globalization and Modernity, eds. John Foran, david lane
and andreja Zivkovic (london: routledge, 2008), 65.
8
Gerald m. houser, “us policy in southern africa”, in US Policy Toward Africa, ed. Frederick
s. arkhurst (new York: praeger, 1975), 18.
cuba’s insecurity. although the island aligned with the soviet union, tensions
emerged quickly in that relationship. never a member of the Warsaw pact,
cuba actively sought allies in the socialist brotherhood. strategically, the prin-
ciple of internationalism was in part an attempt to repair cuba’s hemispheric
isolation. supporting socialist states in africa became the cuban iteration of
norberto ceresole’s geopolitica de liberación pursued, as William leoGrande
noted, “on the fringes of the bipolar system”9. as scholar Jorge domínguez
asserted in 1989, “[t]he support of revolutionary movements, in cuba’s view,
is an effective means to combat the united states and its allies throughout the
world”10. in angola, cuba launched the largest military and economic inter-
vention in its history, successfully propping up the failing mpla. this inter-
nationalist act helped transform a localized war of national independence into
a key cold War battlefield, and arguably gave cuba its highest international
profile since the cuban missile crisis thirteen years earlier.
2. The International Context
the international dimensions of the angolan crisis - roughly from the

lisbon coup, on 24 april 1974, when a left-leaning military coup toppled
the portuguese government, to 1976 – and the cuban intervention should be
considered in reference to at least four interrelated global currents: us inter-
vention in latin america, postwar decolonization, cold War tensions and
the politics of détente.
the us has a long tradition of intervention in latin america, with numer-
ous ideological and geostrategic justifications. From the monroe doctrine
(1823) and the roosevelt (1904) and Wilson corollaries (1914), through the
platt amendment (1901), us attitudes shifted from “Big stick” through
“dollar diplomacy” to the “Good neighbor” policy. What remained more or
less constant was the idea that geography (or history or providence) had posi-
tioned latin america in the us’ “backyard”, and thus america had the right to
invade or intervene whenever necessary to keep its house (read: the Western
hemisphere) in order11. decolonization and socialism also upset the delicate
postwar balance of power. the 1960s had been a precarious decade – american
political analysts watched helplessly as one by one former colonies fell to com-
munism, beginning with the ‘loss’ of China in 1949. Communist insurgen-
cies quickly appeared in indonesia, malaya, Burma, indochina, thailand, the
philippines, and cuba. despite the “Year of africa” in 1960, when seventeen
africa nations achieved independence, the continent remained a low priority
9
Gerhard drekonja-Kornat, “review: understanding cuba’s presence in africa”, Journal of
Interamerican Studies 1 (1983), 127.
10
Jorge i. domínguez, To Make a World Safe for Revolution: Cuba’s Foreign Policy (cambridge,
ma: cambridge university press, 1989), 114.
11
see for example michael h. hunt, Ideology and US Foreign Policy (new haven: Yale univer-
sity press, 1987), 58-62.
for both the us and the soviet union. ironically, both sides excelled in spout-
ing anticolonial rhetoric and highlighting their own statuses as kindred free
states born of revolution – yet neither side committed human or financial re-
sources to actively aiding african anticolonial struggles.
the angolan crisis and the cuban intervention thus took place within
the backdrop of us intervention in latin america and preoccupation with
communist radicalization and hemispheric disorder. since castro seized
power in January 1959, us policymakers had devoted astonishing amounts
of resources to getting rid of him. in the understanding of many us poli-
cymakers, castro was not only a declared marxist with close ties to the
soviet union, but was also vociferously hostile to american intervention
in cuban affairs, having denounced capitalism and nationalized millions
in us assets. communist cuba’s geographical proximity to the us was par-
ticularly intolerable, and much was made of the security risks of having a
communist satellite “ninety miles from american shores”12.
the angolan crisis is also firmly situated in a cold War context. since
1968 the us and the soviet union had made significant efforts at dé-
tente, lessening the tensions and limiting the arms race13. however, dé-
tente’s parameters were never clearly articulated, particularly with respect
to interventions in the third World. While the public dialogue spoke of
rapprochement and cooperation, realistically the us-soviet adversarial re-
lationship remained. there was no specific treaty outlining the “rules” of
détente. the closest statement, the Basic principles agreement of 1972, was
a statement of intent rather than a binding contract14. While the us under-
stood the process to mean a halt on all global interventions, the soviets
likely conceived of the process with respect to the european continent.
neither side was prepared for cuban unilateralism.
3. The Case Study: Angola, 1975
though it shared some characteristics with other recently decolonized

african states, the angolan case is marked by the vehemence of its inter-par-
tite conflict and the unprecedented level of external intervention. the intrica-
cies of the liberation party politics are too complex to recount here. in brief,
12
smith, The Last Years, 4.
13
central intelligence agency, “implications for us-soviet relations of certain soviet ac-
tivities”, Interagency Intelligence Memorandum (NIO IIM 76-D30J), est. pub. date 1 June 1976
(declassified: 13 november 1997), 3.
14
the Basic principles of relations between the united states of america and the union of
soviet socialist republics was signed on 29 may 1972 on the last day of the moscow summit
meeting. historians debate the relative importance of the document. raymond Garthoff holds
that while Brezhnev held the agreement in high regard, particularly since it acknowledged
the soviet union’s need for “equal security”, nixon and Kissinger merely found it a useful
gesture of goodwill. raymond l. Garthoff, Détente and Confrontation: American-Soviet Relations
from Nixon to Reagan (Washington, dc: Brookings, 1994), 326-7 and 332-3.
the political development of the liberation parties reflected angola’s domes-

tic ethnic, social and ideological stratification. the mpla, led by committed
marxist dr. agostinho neto, received nominal military assistance from the
soviet union throughout the late 1960s. a 1976 cia memorandum noted that
soviet aid was halted in 1973 when it became apparent that the mpla had
made little progress toward an independent socialist angola15. the Fnla,
led from Kinshasa, Zaïre by holden roberto, was the first favourite of inter-
national backers, including the us. roberto was european-educated, seem-
ingly competent, and decidedly anticommunist. he had been on the central
intelligence agency’s (cia) payroll since 1961 in the wake of congolese
(Zaïrian) independence16. in 1966 Jonas savimbi’s unita entered the fray.
savimbi’s carefully calculated portrayal of unita as rural and populist ex-
ploited angola’s racial and ethnic tensions. By 1974 the three liberation parties
had been fighting each other and collecting external support for fifteen years.
it is generally held that angolan independence was contingent upon
portuguese collapse. perhaps europe’s weakest state, portugal was the least
willing to relinquish its colonies, and claimed its ultramar territories were es-
sential to its very existence as a nation. rejecting decolonization, portuguese
leader Dr. António de Oliviera Sálazar clung tightly to his overseas empire,
citing the same missão civilizadora arguments recently discredited in the
former european empires: that economic integration was essential to the
metropolitan economy, and that the african territories were underdevel-
oped and unfit for self-government, all tinged with thinly-veiled racism.
portugal’s colonial stranglehold differed from that of minority regimes in the
other african hot-spots, south africa and rhodesia (now Zimbabwe). While
all three advocated racial segregation, Smith’s Rhodesia and Vorster’s South
africa justified their racist rule by reasserting the white minority’s right to
rule as a settler people. portugal was the only case with blatantly indirect
rule, and as such was the focus for much of the region’s discontents and in-
ternational attention. nevertheless, between 1940 and 1970 the white settler
population in angola increased from 30,000 to 350,000. the programme of
massive immigration was designed to perpetuate the fiction of the african
colonies as overseas provinces of the portuguese metropole17.
Whereas earlier anti-colonial movements sought a modus vivendi and
the gradual replacement of a portuguese colonial élite with a black or na-
tive angolan élite, by the 1960s the emphasis was on revolution, not evolu-
tion18. in the early 1960s a wave of violent african uprisings upset sálazar’s
15
Central Intelligence Agency, Interagency Intelligence Memorandum (NIO IIM 76-004), “So-
viet and cuban aid to the mpla in angola from march through december 1975”, 24 January
1976, in central intelligence agency, Freedom of Information Act on-line, www.cia.foia.gov.
16
John stockwell, In Search of Enemies: A CIA Story (new York: norton, 1978), 67.
17
John a. marcum, The Angolan Revolution: Exile Politics and Guerrilla Warfare (1962-1976), vol.
2 (cambridge, ma: mit press, 1978), 2.
18
marcum, The Angolan Revolution, 38.
right-wing, authoritarian estado novo regime , already a weak state, was

forced to spend the next decade quelling unrest on the african continent.
the collapse of the sálazar successor-regime, led by prime minister marcelo
caetano, came as a surprise to most observers, though cleavages within
portuguese society had been apparent for several months19. according to
historian Gerald houser, by early 1974 portugal was forced to employ over
150,000 troops and commit over half of its annual budget to fighting its
three colonial insurrections, in mozambique, Guinea-Bissau and angola. in
the same year the portuguese military authority reported over 100,000 draft
dodgers, a sure sign of the unpopularity of the african wars20. On 24 April
1974, a military junta replaced caetano. the new portuguese government
ceased all hostilities with the angolan opposition in may 1974, and negoti-
ated official cease-fire agreements with unita in June and with the mpla
and Fnla four months later21. the new government recognized Guinea-
Bissau’s independence in September 1974, and reconciled with FRELIMO
for mozambican independence in June 197522. angola’s agony, complicated
by the largest white settler population, the most valuable natural resources
and the weakest liberation movements, would last for decades23.
despite historian piero Gleijeses’ impressive account, it remains diffi-
cult to reconstruct the early months of the Angolan crisis. On 25 January,
the signing of the alvor accord created a provisional tripartite government
and set a timeline for independence. despite the ceasefire, fighting erupted
within weeks24. as november closed in, fighting around the capital inten-
sified as each party vied for control of luanda before independence day,
11 november 1975. during several rounds of fighting, military supremacy
oscillated between the Fnla and the mpla25.
By this point, as Gleijeses notes, “pretoria and Washington had been en-
gaged in parallel covert operations in angola since July 1975 (codenamed
Operation IAFEATURE), first supplying weapons. Then, in late August,
south africa sent military instructors and the united states sent cia
advisers”26. With the combined weight of cia funds and the south african
defence Force (sadF) behind it, the Fnla advanced rapidly. under intense
pressure, in may the marxist mpla had placed a desperate call to the so-
19
indeed, one story which remains to be written in english is the history of portugal’s
Revolução dos Cravos (carnation revolution).
20
houser, “us policy”, 97-98.
21
Garthoff, Détente, 558.
22
piero Gleijeses, Conflicting Missions: Havana, Washington, and Africa, 1959-1976 (chapel hill:
university of north carolina press, 2002), 233.
23
ibid.
24
it is generally held that the Fnla broke the ceasefire.
25
unita combatants generally fought guerrilla campaigns in central and southern angola.
Gleijeses, Conflicting Missions, 257.
26
Piero Gleijeses, “Conflicting Versions: Cuba, the United States and Angola”, 120, in Instituto
Português de Relações Internationais on-line, www.ipri.pt/eventos/pdf/Flad05_pGleijeses.pdf.
cialist brotherhood. According to historian Vladislav Zubok, despite early

attempts to support “progressive” regimes in africa, by 1975 the Brezhnev
politburo had little stomach for angola. Brezhnev already faced three “visi-
ble international setbacks” – the collapse of the socialist government in chile
in 1973, egyptian president anwar sadat’s turn toward the West and the fail-
ure of a communist government to take root in portugal27. Brezhnev initially
refused to offer any soviet assistance to the mpla. surprisingly, cuba too
ignored neto’s first call for help. castro took over six months to reply, os-
tensibly concentrating on domestic matters such as the first congress of the
cuban communist party, scheduled for december 197528.
When cuba finally responded, however, the results were astonishing. in
early October 1975, Operación Carlota, the advance assault force of the Cuban
military mission (cmm), so named after the african slave who led the 1843
rebellion in matanzas province, confronted a combined sadF/Fnla/merce-
nary force (codenamed Operasie Savannah) en route to Luanda29. after four
months of brutal fighting, the sadF retreated across the south West african
border. in Washington, an incensed secretary of state henry Kissinger had
his plans for increased financial assistance to the Fnla frustrated by a
Vietnam-weary and increasingly angry Congress. In November 1974, exactly
the period of carlota, Kissinger requested $28 million in additional funds
for iaFeature, fearful of ceding territory and influence to the cubans30. in
response, congress enacted the clark-tunney amendments, which severe-
ly curtailed federal funds for overseas covert operations. in pretoria, news
of the defeat of the whites electrified the townships, shattering the myth of
white supremacy and shaking the very foundations of apartheid31:
in angola, Black troops – cubans and angolans – have defeated White

troops in military exchanges. Whether the bulk of the offensive was by Cu-
bans or angolans is immaterial in the color-conscious context of this war’s
battlefield, for the reality is that they won, are winning, and are not White;
and that psychological edge, that advantage the White man has enjoyed and
exploited over 300 years of colonialism and empire, is slipping away. White
elitism has suffered an exploited over 300 years of colonialism and empire,
is slipping away. White elitism has suffered an irreversible blow in Angola,
and Whites who have been there know it”32.
27
Vladislav M. Zubok, A Failed Empire: The Soviet Union in the Cold War from Stalin to Gorbachev
(chapel hill: university of north carolina press, 2007), 253.
28
Gleijeses, Conflicting Missions, 256.
29
mary alice Waters, ed., How Far We Slaves Have Come!: South Africa and Cuba in Today’s World
(new York: pathfinder, 1991), 8.
30
house of representatives, United States Policy on Angola: Hearing before the Committee on
International Relations, 94th congress, 2nd section, 26 January 1976, 5-6 and 11-12.
31
2 (2006), 9.
32
roger sargent, “commentary”, Rand Daily Mail, 17 February 1976, 10.
the immediate consequence of the cuban intervention was a series of

military victories, which enabled the mpla to take power and form the
government in luanda. neto became the first president; upon his death in
1979 he was succeeded by Jose eduardo dos santos, who remains presi-
dent to this day.
4. Consequences of Cuban Internationalism in Angola
Why had castro risked cuban prestige and credibility, not to mention
antagonizing both superpowers, on a risky operation in a low-priority
zone? What could be gained by a show of force 11,000 km away, on a con-
tinent that rarely figured in cold War calculations? the particular circum-
stances of angola in 1975 provide at least a partial response to the above
questions. historically, the legacy of the transatlantic slave trade gave
cuba a substantial african demographic, many of whom were from the re-
gion that became angola. more important, the mpla’s socialist credentials
were beyond reproach. leader agostinho neto was an established marxist
intellectual and poet, and a personal friend of the castro brothers.
there was also a formal-legal aspect to the cuban intervention. cuba’s
support bolstered a nationalist movement in defense of an established na-
tion-state, with inviolable boundaries and international recognition. the
Cuba action was approved by the Organization of Africa Unity (OAU, now
the african union). tactically, it appears that castro learned much from
Guevara’s failed congolese and Bolivian campaigns. in the angolan inter-
vention, cuban forces joined an existing armed liberation struggle, rather
than attempting to foment one from scratch. On a strategic level, Cuba’s
force projection into angola displayed its military and technical acumen
to the entire world, and especially to the us. though Brezhnev later au-
thorized soviet logistical assistance, cuba’s feat remains unparalleled. at
the international level, superpower détente provided a “permissive world-
context”33. With both the soviet union and the us preoccupied with arms
control and limiting each others freedom of movement, cuban actions–
while still scrutinized–were more difficult to contain.
perhaps most significantly, the cuban intervention came at the direct
request of neto, and was directed against a clear case of external aggres-
sion from the us and south africa. the arrival of the sadF and their re-
ported collusion with retreating portuguese troops, the cia and unita,
completely discredited the Fnla and unita and legitimized cuban inter-
vention in the eyes of most black african states34.
33
see for example James de Fronzo, Revolutions and Revolutionary Movements (Boulder: West-
view, 2007), 17.
34
With the notable exceptions of the former Belgian and French territories of Zaïre, senegal
and côte d’ivoire, and former British territory Zambia.
Yet another potential way to answer these questions is to address two

ways of characterizing cuban foreign policy, considering cuba both as a
state and cuba as an idea35. cuba as a state has similar foreign policy im-
peratives as any small country, especially one in close proximity to a hostile
power, namely security36. cuba as an idea, or indeed as an ideal, is posi-
tioned as a model of third World leadership, with a revolutionary ethos
that is both nationalist and internationalist. Both aspects are telling with
respect to the motives and nature of cuban internationalism.
the ideological consequences are almost more compelling than the
strategic ones. aspiring to third World leadership was not only a strategic
manoeuvre, it was also entirely in keeping with Fidel castro’s revolution-
ary ethos. since 1959 cuban rhetoric and policy reflected a strong commit-
ment to anticolonialism and antiracism, influenced largely by cuba’s own
experience of spanish colonisation and us imperialism. despite the vaga-
ries of the liberation parties, at its root the angolan crisis was an anticolo-
nial struggle of national liberation, made more acute by the collusion of
south africa and the cia and presence of the sadF on angolan territory.
cuba also had a socialist imperative to support the oppressed classes in
the spirit of marxist “proletarian internationalism”37. always ideologically
prepared to “export the revolution”, angola provided an excellent arena
for a multi-pronged activist internationalism. prominent african leaders,
including nelson mandela, drew a direct line from the cuban challenge,
via the soweto uprisings, to the end of apartheid38.
For the us, the angolan episode became a foreign policy crisis.
iaFeature was a complete failure, of policy and of intelligence. it neither
achieved the limited goal of bolstering the Fnla, nor the expanded goal
of driving out the soviet/cuban presence. association with the cia and
sadF irrevocably weakened unita and permanently damaged savimbi’s
credibility in africa, thereby neutralizing the other non-communist op-
tion. savimbi’s death in 2002 garnered little attention and unita faded
into obscurity.
in the wider cold War calculus, the soviet union and cuba emerged
with reputations as liberators intact (even though cuba really led the way)
35
For a recent photographic examination of this theme see alex harris, The Idea of Cuba (albu-
querque: university of new mexico press, 2007).
36
While scholars are still divided on Gleijeses’ interpretation of events, his key postulate
– that cuba acted independently, in keeping with castro’s revolutionary ethos and security
demands – is the most plausible. the “moscow’s proxy” argument, most popular in the 1980s,
has been largely discredited.
37
Wolf Grabendorff, “Cuba’s Involvement in Africa: An Interpretation of Objectives, Reac-
tions and limitations”, Journal of Interamerican Studies and World Affairs 1 (1980), 9.
38
despite an awkward period in the late 1980s and early 1990s, cuban-angolan relations
remain strong. a recent Toronto Star photograph depicted a frail but smiling Fidel castro in
reunion with dos santos. at the time, dos santos was the first foreign leader to meet with
castro in four months. see The Toronto Star, 24 september 2007.
while the us’ tacit collusion with south africa only reinforced its image as
a neo-imperialist hegemon. domestically, revelations about iaFeature
confirmed every negative assumption about the us intelligence commu-
nity and the policy of covert action. though angola stopped making head-
lines, the Ford administration never regained the public’s confidence.
castro emerged from his calculated risk in angola as the near-undis-
puted leader of the third World. no other power, revolutionary or other-
wise, could point to such a specific and successful instance of third World
solidarity. in 1976 the nonaligned movement (nam) unanimously elected
havana as the site of its next summit meeting39. despite being accused of
causing rifts in the nam, cuba’s aggressive action in angola was reward-
ed by the third World community.
One of the clearest iterations of the internationalist nature of Cuban for-
eign policy is castro’s speech of 4 February 1962, known as the second
declaration of havana. in it castro outlines a program for a revolutionary
foreign policy committed not only to revolution, but also to activist inter-
nationalism. said castro in 1962:
What is cuba’s history but that of latin america? What is the history of
Latin America but the history of Asia, Africa, and Oceania? And what is the
history of all these peoples but the history of the cruellest [sic] exploitation
of the world by imperialism? […] the duty of every revolutionary is to make
revolution. We know that in america and throughout the world the revo-
lution will be victorious. But revolutionaries cannot sit in the doorways of
their homes to watch the corpse of imperialism pass by. the role of Job does
not behoove a revolutionary40.
in 1991 castro’s rhetoric remained remarkably consistent:
We are internationalists, we are not narrow nationalists or chauvinists.

We have shed our blood in other parts of the world, such as latin ameri-
ca and africa. as mandela recalled, for each person who went on an inter-
nationalist mission, there were ten who volunteered to go. is there a more
noble people, a people more willing to express their solidarity, a more revo-
lutionary people? the blood of the angolans is our blood, the blood of the
Namibians is our blood, and the blood of the South Africans is our blood!
Humanity’s blood is our blood! Our ideas go beyond chauvinism or narrow
nationalism. Our ideas extend beyond all borders […]41.
39
h. michael erisman, Cuba’s Foreign Relations in a Post-Soviet World (Gainesville, Fl: univer-
sity press of Florida, 2000), 102.
40
Fidel castro, “second declaration of havana”, 4 February 1962, in Internet Modern His-
tory Sourcebook on-line, www.fordham.edu/halsall/mod/1962castro.html. also, domínguez,
To Make, 116.
41
Fidel castro, “We Will never return to the slave Barracks”, speech at rally on the thirty-
eighth anniversary of the raid on the moncada Barracks, matanzas province, cuba, 26 July
1991, in How Far, ed. Waters, 67.
5. Conclusion: on “Cuban Exceptionalism”?
a recent study presented a brief description of some cuban

singularities:
cuba is the only communist-ruled country where the local communist

party did not play a leading role in the seizure of power; where the soviet
union was not expecting, let alone directing, the takeover; and where the
ruling party was not even formally constituted until over a decade after the
revolution. it is the only communist-ruled country where the “class war”
was waged principally by means of the wholesale expulsion of the proper-
tied class to a neighbouring country (“externalizing” that class but leaving
it substantially intact). […] it is the only country in the world to have been
directly and continuously ruled by the same individual for over 46 years [49
by the time of castro’s retirement in early 2008]42.
cuban actions have always been enigmatic to outside observers; cuba’s

mere existence (and resilience) posed a challenge to the international sys-
tem. through its alliance (however tense) with the soviet union it intro-
duced a european power into the Western hemisphere thus challenging
the monroe doctrine and nearly a century of american dominance in the
region. most significantly, cuba has presented a different and apparently
successful model of modernity and development. cuban internationalism,
while addressing practical security needs of a small state, suggested the
viability of revolution as a tool of rapid political change. the angolan in-
tervention highlights both the strategic weight and ideological power of
cuban revolutionary internationalism. simply put, cuba is different. its
status as a revolutionary model is unparalleled in the twentieth century
world, for several reasons. First, cuba is small, with a limited popula-
tion and limited natural resources. second, it has managed to survive as a
marxist state despite the loss of its main benefactor and the continued hos-
tility of the most powerful nation in the world. third, though its explicit at-
tempts at exporting revolution were often tactical failures, cuba’s symbolic
influence as a revolutionary-internationalist state at times trumps its actual
foreign policy successes. the angolan intervention is one occasion where
the cuban leadership can point to a strategic, military and ideological suc-
cess – briefly transforming the cuban revolution into a global revolution.
42
Laurence Whitehead, “On Cuban Political Exceptionalism”, Debating Cuban Exceptionalism,
eds. Bert hoffman and laurence Whitehead (new York: palgrave macmillan, 2007), 3.
M.S. Rognoni
Chapter 18
Cuba and Angola in the 1970s: War,
Revolution and Nation-Building
the present essay raises and addresses questions about the roots and
consequences of cuba’s role in angola. Following a brief outline of the con-
ditions surrounding the angolan war for independence, the external atten-
tion attracted by the crisis, especially from the world’s superpowers, will
be considered in order to contextualize cuba’s position. the post-indepen-
dence phase will subsequently be examined and a set of issues advanced
– namely the domestic effects of the foreign involvement, in particular the
unresolved question of government legitimization and the nation-building
process – which deserve further analysis and debate1.
1. The Angolan Context
the 1970s marked the beginning of a post-colonial phase for most sub-
saharan african countries. development and economic growth were the
imperatives, and some results were actually achieved, though often at the
expense of initial expectations linked to the very idea of independence
like peace, democracy and social development. the colonies of portugal,
on the other hand, were just beginning their struggles for national libera-
tion against a repressive and obsolete colonial power2. this discrepancy
between the political evolution of portuguese african colonies and most
other european colonies could be traced back to the 1930s and would have
1
the present contribution is mainly based on primary sources available at the national ar-
chives and the national security archive in Washington d.c., as well as the most relevant litera-
ture. some of the subjects addressed here will be expanded during the next stage of this research
once new documentary evidence from the cuban and south african archives is obtained.
2
see Basil davidson, L’Angola nell’occhio del ciclone (torino: einaudi, 1975 [lonodn: 1972]),
157-158.
important consequences on the subsequent development of nationalist

movements within lusophone africa.
thanks to the relative openness introduced by the new republican gov-
ernment in lisbon, the political life of the restricted elite of african asimi-
lados3 in the angolan capital of luanda around 1910 was not too different
from that of their homologues in accra or Brazzaville4. however, with the
advent of the salazar regime and its colonial policy in the early 1930s, the
evolution of angolan nationalism became less predictable with respect to
that of other colonies5. at the same time, the consequences of the second
World War, so crucial for other african countries, barely touched portuguese
territories overseas. While london and paris had, willingly or not, accept-
ed the idea that a transformation of their empires was necessary during the
postwar period, lisbon remained attuned to the old refrain: “portugal há de
continuar a ser mestre e exemplo dos povos educadores de outros povos”6.
highlighting a gap that would soon become impossible to fill, all of
the poetry published in mensagem – the journal promoted from the 1940s
on by a group of asimilados in Luanda led by Viriato da Cruz – pointed
in a different direction. Building an angolan identity, they wrote, meant
re-africanizing oneself, getting back in touch with one’s roots – roots that
lay in the angolan bush, not in lisbon or even luanda7. something was
beginning to move in the angolan capital amid the difficulties caused by
portugal’s rigid control of its colony, echoed in the writings and debates
circulating within a small group of angolan expatriates in lisbon formed
by agostinho neto, mario de andrade, amilcar cabral, Francisco José
tenreiro and alda de espirito santo, among others8. there in 1951, they
managed to found a centre for african studies, where poetry was to be-
come, as in mensagem, a political instrument. however, as Basil davidson
explains, like other african nationalists, they were unable count on the
support of any portuguese political party except for the communist one,
which was, of course, banned and clandestine9.
3
christine messiant, “angola, les voies de l’ethnisation et de la decomposition”, Lusotopie
(1995), 159-167.
4
malyn newitt, “angola in historical context”, in Angola. The Weight of History, eds. patrick
Chabal and Nuno Vidal (New York: Columbia University Press, 2007), 71.
5
On Salazar’s colonial policy, see inter alia, malyn newitt, Portugal in Africa: The Last Hun-
dred Years (london: hurst, 1981); G. clarence-smith, The Third Portuguese Empire (manchester:
manchester university press, 1985); Fernando rosas, História de Portugal, vol. 7, O Estado Novo
(lisboa: estampa, 1998), 109-126.
6
m. da silva cunha, O Sistema Português de Politica Indigena (coimbra: lda, 1953), cited in
davidson, In the Eye, 159.
7
see inge Brinkman, “language, names, and War: the case of angola”, in African Studies
Review 3 (2004), 154-155.
8
On those formative years, see the personal recollection of Mário de Andrade in Mário de
andrade and christine messiant, “sur la première generation du mpla: 1948-1960. mário de
andrade, entretiens avec christine messiant (1982)”, Lusotopie 1 (1999), 185-221.
9
davidson, In the Eye, 167-168.
indeed, marxist ideas had an important impact on those few african in-
tellectuals in lisbon. Yet it soon became quite clear that in order to promote
change at home it would be essential to adapt those principles to a totally dif-
ferent context and, at the same time, to fill the immense gap between them-
selves, privileged but deracinés, and the rest of the population in angola. the
process of re-africanization as envisaged by the pioneers of pan-africanism
during the early 20th century required a complete reappraisal of african his-
tory and called upon the members of the continent’s diaspora throughout the
world along the slave trade route, especially in the americas10.
White exploitation based on racial discrimination11 was still strongly
perceived and suffered in 1950s angola, especially in the agricultural sec-
tor, which had long been the backbone of the colonial economy. as david
Birmingham makes clear, the anti-colonial war that started at the begin-
ning of the 1960s did not result from the actions of an intellectual avant-
garde but was instead mainly triggered by the grievances of exasperated
peasants in different parts of the country. Furthermore, the “virulence of
rivalry between different colonial peoples with different experiences of
exploitation”12 was at the roots of the division of the nationalist movement
itself. economic and social factors interlinked with the evolution of the co-
lonial system gave rise to a political divide expressed by the foundation of
three liberation movements, each with separate social, economic and cul-
tural backgrounds and distinct political agendas13. agostinho neto’s mpla
was basically an urban political movement rooted in the old14 and new
middle class of asimilados15, with its largest following composed of peo-
ple from the region around luanda, who defined themselves as mbundu.
holden roberto’s Fnla (initially the upa), the strongest of the three
movements from a military point of view and the best organized, had deep
10
See, for instance, the quotations from Viriato da Cruz’s poem, ibid., 165.
11
Franz-Wilhelm heimer, The Decolonisation Conflict in Angola, 1974-1976 (Geneva: institute
for international studies, 1979), 10-2. see also patrick chabal, “E Pluribus Unum: transitions in
angola”, in Angola, eds. Chabal and Vidal, 3.
12
david Birmingham, “angola”, in A History of Postcolonial Lusophone Africa, ed. patrick cha-
bal (london: hurst, 2002), 140-145; newitt, “angola”, 56-65; sousa Jamba, “the idea of an-
gola”, The Times Literary Supplement, 8 June 2001, 12.
13
there was also a fourth movement, the Flec (cabinda enclave liberation Front), which
aimed at the secession of the cabinda region and did not take part in the independence ne-
gotiations. For a thorough analysis of the revolution in angola before and immediately after
independence, see, among others, the classical two-volume text by John marcum, The Angolan
Revolution: the Anatomy of an Explosion (1950-1962) (cambridge, mass.: mit press, 1969); and id.,
The Angolan Revolution: Exile, Politics and Guerrilla Warfare (1962-1976) (cambridge, mass.: mit
press, 1978). see also W. martin James, A Political History of the Civil War in Angola, 1974-1990
(new Brunswick: transaction, 1992); patrick chabal, “angola e mozambico: il peso della storia”,
in Africa e Mediterraneo 1 (1998), 23; davide tramontano, “la decolonizzazione angolana: lotta
per l’indipendenza e Guerra civile”, in Il colore rosso dei jacaranda. A 30 anni dalle indipendenze delle
ex colonie portoghesi, eds. livia apa and mario Zamponi (san marino: aiep, 2005), 59-73.
14
newitt, “angola”, 19-37.
15
marcum, The Angolan Revolution: Exile, 18.
roots in the Bakongo in the north and strong links with mobutu’s Zaire.
and Jonas savimbi’s unita, the latest to come on the scene, gained con-
sensus mainly among the Ovimbundu16, the majority ethnic group in the
country, by emphasizing the differences between the urban sectors (closer
to the mpla) and the mass population of the countryside.
this tripartition, bound to survive the end of the colonial regime and
mark the political evolution of the country until recently, implied certain
domestic and international consequences17. at home, the harsh confronta-
tion between the three factions paralleled the anti-colonial struggle, creat-
ing splits that would encumber the subsequent nation-building process as
well as the chance of the final prevailing group, the mpla, of claiming ac-
tual legitimacy. in the international arena, the existence of three competing
movements initially not so easily distinguishable from ideological and po-
litical points of view, only contributed to the influence of ‘third’ powers18.
the international factor, i.e., the support of outside or third countries, took
on a primary role because of the overwhelming colonial repression of the
1960s and the difficulty maintaining domestic consensus, while at the same
time strongly influencing the prospects of each movement19.
another crucial issue was the bond between angola’s struggle for indepen-
dence and the anti-apartheid fight in south africa. What the leaders of each of
the angolan movements decided to do in this respect acquired a special rel-
evance. in particular, savimbi’s choice to accept military aid from south africa,
as wise as it might have seemed initially since it nearly led unita to prevail
in the autumn of 1975, eventually turned out to be counter-productive for two
main reasons. On the one hand, fearing a negative impact on public opinion,
in both africa and the global context, south african forces ended up retreating
from angola in march 197620. On the other hand, the ideological factor – i.e.
the idea that one should fight against the pretoria-backed unita just to avert
the south-africanization of angola – strengthened the international prestige
of the mpla and the steadfastness of its main supporter, cuba.
this brief outline is intended to reflect the complexity of the angolan
fight for independence in the 1960s and 1970s. the independence formally
gained in november 1975 posed new challenges to the emergent and frag-
ile angolan state. during the previous decade, Kwame nkrumah, the first
president of Ghana, had been able to make a plea for the “political king-
16
linda heywood, Contested Power in Angola, 1840s to the Present (rochester: university of
rochester press, 2000).
17
chabal, “angola e mozambico”.
18
Odd Arne Westad, The Global Cold War (new York: cambridge university press, 2005),
218-227.
19
chabal, “E Pluribus”, 4. see also the curious but significant quotations that open the volume
by daniel spikes, Angola and the Politics of Intervention (Jefferson: mcFarland, 1993).
20
2 (2006), 3-51.
dom”, which was the core, at least initially, of independence. more than
fifteen years later, however, that “political kingdom” had proven not to be
enough. Victory over colonial power would come to mean instead the ini-
tiation of real change and social revolution.
2. The International Context: Bipolar Confrontation during the 1970s
the 1970s marked a new step in the evolution of relations between the
world’s superpowers with the bipolar confrontation. technological devel-
opments and détente had allowed the us to shift from the “european bias”
to a more global approach, as epitomized by the nixon-Kissinger diploma-
cy. the ussr, on the other hand, while engaged in détente policy, showed
no will to abandon its leading role as the engine of the socialist revolution.
to the contrary, the contemporary evolution of china-us relations called
for more assertiveness wherever possible in order to counter the setbacks
in the pacific and the middle east21, and angola looked like a great oppor-
tunity22. nevertheless, as arne Westad points out, “soviet involvement in
africa was slow to come”, and it was not until late 1975, under cuban pres-
sure, that moscow “finally made a major investment in one of its southern
african alliances, and thereby made the mpla a regional ally second in
importance only to the south african anc”23.
On the field in Angola, after the collapse of the Alvor agreement24, the con-
flict that opposed the mpla to the other two national liberation movements,
the Fnla and unita, reached a climax between the summer and autumn
of 197525. secretary of state henry Kissinger, in his turn, saw the situation in
21
arthur Gavshon, Crisis in Africa. Battleground of East and West (Boulder: Westview, 1981),
223-257; see also Jay Klinghoffer, “the soviet union in angola”, in The Soviet Union in the
Third World: Successes and Failures, ed. robert h. donaldson (Boulder: Westview, 1981), 99-100
and 115-116; Westad, The Global, 214-215.
22
While this new african approach prevailed among moscow’s leaders, agostinho neto was
faced with a soviet offer of military and logistical assistance. showing a remarkable ability to read
between the lines of the sino-soviet split and make good use of it, he was ready to strengthen
the mpla’s commitment to the soviet union, considered “the party’s main international ally”.
though moscow’s support for the mpla declined during this period, until late 1975, neto’s
movement remained the “main angolan connection” of the soviets. see Westad, The Global, 217.
23
ibid., 218.
24
Following the “carnation revolution” in portugal, the destiny of portuguese colonies was
marked by the decision to grant independence as fast as possible. in the case of angola, after a
diplomatic mediation promoted by Kenya’s president Jomo Kenyatta in January 1975, an agree-
ment was reached at alvor by the portuguese and the three angolan liberation movements:
independence by 11 november and a coalition government. in the meantime, a transitional
government with representatives of the three movements was to work together with a portu-
guese high commissioner. the agreement collapsed a few weeks later as the result of the exter-
nal fuelling of the rival parties and their inability to reach a satisfactory compromise. see José
marques-rocha, A descolonização. 24 de abril de 1974 a 11 de novembro de 1975. Os mensageiros da
Guerra (Braga: Grafibraga, 2002), 289-294. see also Witney schneidman, Engaging Africa: Wash-
ington and the Fall of Portugal’s Colonial Empire (lanham, md: university press of america, 2004).
25
Westad, The Global, 228-241.
angola as an opportunity to demonstrate the ability and willingness of the

US government to meet the Soviet challenge not long after the Vietnamese
debacle. meanwhile, havana, with the rather reluctant but essential as-
sistance of moscow, was increasing its support for neto’s movement26. as
raymond Garthoff has observed, Kissinger’s formulation of american pol-
icy in angola implied a direct challenge to american prestige during a par-
ticularly delicate phase, in terms of both domestic consensus and relations
with moscow27. With two subsequent decisions, the first one taken shortly
after the signature of the alvor agreements, the second reached by mid-July
1975, the american secret intelligence and covert operations committee (the
“Forty committee”) approved secret funding for the Fnla. these decisions
marked an important contribution to excluding a political settlement while
giving a green light to the military option, which resulted in the massive
cuban and soviet intervention to support the mpla, as well as the involve-
ment of the south african government on the side of unita28.
Kissinger’s estimate turned out to be wrong, both militarily and politi-
cally. thanks to cuban military assistance, the mpla was already holding
the capital city of luanda, even if it did not control much of angolan ter-
ritory, by the time agostinho neto announced the constitution of the new
independent government of the people’s republic of angola (pra) on 11
november 1975. to crown his political defeat, Kissinger had to fully dis-
own his angolan policy29. two amendments – one made by John tunnel
to the department of defense appropriations bill and a second by dick
clark to the foreign aid bill, expanding on the first – were to reassert the
full responsibility of congress over fundamental foreign-policy choices.
american covert assistance to anti-communist forces in angola had there-
fore to terminate and could not be renewed30. soviet leadership, on the oth-
er hand, thanks to cuban mediation and advice, was able reap the rewards
26
see, in particular, state department, memorandum for the senate Foreign relations commit-
tee, “u.s. policy towards angola”, 16 december 1975, doc. 37, in South Africa and the United States:
The Declassified History, ed. Kenneth mokoena (new York: the new press, 1993), 220-225.
27
raymond Garthoff, Détente and Confrontation (Washington: Brookings, 1994), 574-582.
28
ibid., 560-565; see also house select committee on intelligence, “selection from the pike
report relating to angola”, February 1976, doc. 38, in South Africa, ed. mokoena, 226-227.
29
see Walter isaacson, Kissinger. A Biography (new York: simon & schuster, 1992), 673-85. com-
menting on the angolan issue, isaacson states: “angola was a paradigm of an unnecessary, self-
inflicted defeat” (p. 684). see also William Burr, ed., The Kissinger Transcripts: The Top-Secret Talks
with Beijing and Moscow (new York: the new press, 1999), 453, and national security archive
on-line, www.gwu.edu/~nsarchiv/nsa/publications/DOC_readers/kissinger/notes.htm.
30
robert d. Johnson, “the unintended consequences of congressional reform: the clark and
tunney amendments and u.s. policy towards angola”, Diplomatic History 2 (2003), 215-243; id.,
Congress and the Cold War (New York: Cambridge University Press, 2006). On the Ford Admin-
istration’s reactions to these amendments see also William Burr, ed., “launch on Warning: the
development of u.s. capabilities, 1959-1979”, in national security archive on-line, Electronic
Briefing Books, http://www.gwu.edu/~nsarchiv/nsaeBB/nsaeBB43/, in particular doc. 18 (min-
utes, national security council meeting, “salt (and angola)”, 22 december1975, top secret).
of an involvement initially marked by skepticism and cautiousness but ful-

ly endorsed at the proper time, when it was needed most.
Following the success of castro’s 1959 revolution in cuba, the issue of
a possible replication of a ‘Cuban-style’ revolution elsewhere was relevant
not just for subsequent cuban leaders and their friends but, even more so,
for their opponents. this relevance increased with the evolution of cuba’s
position within the bipolar confrontation. By the end of 1959, when rela-
tions between havana and Washington had rapidly deteriorated and castro
effectively turned to the soviet union for aid, cuba’s role as promoter of
new revolutions in latin america and elsewhere had become concrete31.
Both internal concerns and idealism were guiding cuba’s stance on export-
ing revolution, not only by example but also by direct cuban involvement.
assistance to various latin american insurgencies thus became a priority of
castro’s agenda. From 1961 onwards, he found a vivid ambassador in che
Guevara and the operational structure he needed in the General directorate
of intelligence within the ministry of the interior32. By the end of 1964, how-
ever, castro had become disillusioned with the latin american field and de-
cided to turn his attention towards a new theatre of intervention: africa33.
it is beyond the scope of this contribution to shed light on the political,
ideological and economical reasons behind this shift in cuba’s interests34.
suffice it to say that castro’s increased attention to the african context was
translated into a multifaceted presence, one that went from military aid to
technical and medical assistance in different countries over a long period,
from algeria in 1962 to angola until 1988, passing through Guinea Bissau,
Guinea conakry, congo Brazzaville, Benin and ethiopia. the scope and
results of this involvement varied greatly, depending on the local situation,
but it testifies to an attention to the political and social evolution of africa
that goes beyond cold War concerns (as much as they certainly still mat-
tered), proving the existence of other levels of commitment35.
among all the african countries that in one way or another received
cuban assistance from the mid-1960s onwards, angola stands out as a pe-
culiar case in terms of the duration of the intervention, its quality (mil-
itary and technical) and quantity (36,000 soldiers dispatched between
november 1975 and april 1976, growing to 52,000 by the peak of cuban
31
see Westad, The Global, 170-174; Olga Nazario and Juan F. Benemelis, “Cuba’s Relations
with Africa: An Overview”, in Cuba Internationalism in Sub-Saharan Africa, ed. sergio díaz-
Briquets (pittsburgh: duquesne university press, 1989), 12-15.
32
see Juan F. Benemelis, Castro, Subversión y Terrorismo en Africa (madrid: san martín, 1988),
207-210.
33
piero Gleijeses, Conflicting Missions. Havana, Washington and Africa, 1959-1976 (chapel hill:
university of north carolina press, 2002), 21-29.
34
On this issue, see, among others, Westad, The Global, 175-7; William ratliff, “cuban military
policy in sub-saharan africa”, in Cuba Internationalism, ed. díaz-Briquets, 30.
35
nazario and Benemelis, “cuba’s relations”, 18-20; ratliff, “cuban”, 33-34.
involvement in 1988)36. What was it about angola that made it so appealing

to castro, leading him to make it the expression of cuban international-
ism in africa? Was it just a matter of exploiting an opportunity at the right
time? Or was there a political design that Angola could fulfill better than
any other african country despite the high costs that implied?
3. The Nation-Building Process and Cuba’s Influence
the angolan crisis of 1975 has been studied in terms of a decolonization

process; a field of confrontation for the world’s superpowers; and, more
recently, from the point of view of competing socialist models. thanks to
recent historiographical contributions, we know that cuba did not play a
“simple” proxy role in angola but rather implemented its own agenda.
the establishment of this point has opened the way for new and impor-
tant lines of research and analysis in cold War studies. at the same time,
however, the consequences of cuba’s autonomous role in relation to the
angolan leadership have not yet been deeply explored. analyses of cuba’s
role in the angolan crisis that focus on havana’s motivations grasps cer-
tain important aspects of the issue but tends to underestimate others that
deserve further investigation, such as the crucial question of power legiti-
mization. the long years of the national-liberation fight had witnessed the
bitter antagonism of three major movements. When the mpla proclaimed
the new people’s republic of angola on 11 november 1975, thanks to
cuban and soviet military support37, the immediate reaction of its oppo-
nents, the Fnla and unita, was to proclaim an alternative government
of the democratic people’s republic of angola38. at this point, as marcum
has underlined, Neto was “clearly relying on the MPLA’s ‘international-
ist’ (rather than pan-african) orientation and alliances”39. Furthermore, in
the absence of solid, widespread internal support, he could benefit from
the diplomatic recognition of various socialist and non-socialist countries,
thereby acquiring an external legitimacy that the majority of african states
were not so eager to recognize40. however, it was precisely south africa’s
support of non-mpla forces that contributed to the rise of the reputation
of neto’s government even in the eyes of those african states that had criti-
cized the mpla’s strong reliance on the soviet union41.
36
Gleijeses, “moscow’s proxy”, 98.
37
see messiant, “angola”, 171.
38
see marcum , The Angolan Revolution: Exile, 276; Gleijeses, Conflicting Missions, 311.
39
marcum, The Angolan Revolution: Exile, 272.
40
see inge tvedten, Angola. Struggle for Peace and Reconstruction (Boulder: Westview, 1997),
68. On the issue of recognition see also, Abegunrin Olayiwola, “Angola and the Soviet Union
since 1975”, Journal of African Studies1 (1987), 26. On Kaunda’s position in favor of Savimbi,
see, inter alia, Gleijeses, Conflicting Missions, 285 and 297-298.
41
ibid., 273-299; Westad, The Global, 234 and 237.
While external recognition had represented a crucial step forward for the
pra’s image, one cannot forget that the civil war continued, as did internal
strife within the mpla. But from 11 november 1975 onwards, cuban com-
mitment aimed at preserving the newborn government in luanda against
both internal and external threats – a commitment that was presented as a
question of principle as well as a sound political choice. this issue can be
traced back to the mid-1960s when the mpla managed to win the compe-
tition for cuba’s exclusive attention to its own fight against portugal at the
expense of its rivals, the Fnla and unita. not surprisingly, these groups
started complaining that the “tricontinental [conference] gave the mpla a
platform from which to fabricate and distort facts”42. But this achievement
was possible because neto’s movement was able to assert itself as the most
credible third-world revolutionary force in angola long before 1975, thus
building personal connections that would count a great deal in the future43.
But castro’s choice does not come as a surprise if one considers the ori-
gins of the mpla leadership as described by christine messiant:
alors qu’ils rompent, en angola ou en europe, avec leur situation d’élite

privilégiée, ces militants qui dénoncent la domination raciale qu’est la colo-
nisation et les limites et les vices de la politique d’assimilação adoptent un
nationalisme progressiste et socialisant, mais qui est aussi un nationalisme
fondé sur des valeurs typiquement ‘créoles’, universalistes, nationales, mul-
tiraciales, et fortement influencé par des idéologies européennes, humani-
sme chrétien ou surtout marxisme44.
starting in november 1975, the main issue on the field was not only to
increase support to a movement that shared close cultural ties, but also to be-
come the determining factor in a confrontation that opposed socialist forces
with “imperialist forces”. the choice to sustain neto’s mpla would produce
major results for havana’s position in the international arena and in particu-
lar among third world countries. castro’s proud words on the occasion of
neto’s visit to cuba in July 1976 seem particularly significant in this respect:
This attitude of our country, willing to fight, to help, on one terrain or ano-
ther, is a good way to measure its maturity and its revolutionary conscience.
42
marcum, The Angolan Revolution: Exile, 225. On the Tricontinental Conference and the Cu-
ban attitude, see Benemelis, Castro, 211-219.
43
see Westad, The Global, 212-213.
44
messiant, “angola”, 162. the Fnla is in turn described as an ethno-nationalist movement
and its ideology is defined as “un nationalisme libéral mais africain radical car très opposé
non seulement au colonialisme mais aux colons et à l’imposition de la culture européenne”,
ibid., 163. Whereas UNITA “s’oppose comme le FNLA à l’‘aristocracie créole’ du MPLA vue
comme une ‘caste’, elle se définit face à celle-ci comme ‘africaine’ (et non comme ‘angolaise’),
valorise sa communautée culturelle, linguistique et raciale avec le peuple, et oppose à cette
caste sa propre supériorité, de ‘fils du peuple’”, ibid., 166.
that is why the imperialists always make mistakes with cuba; because they
have no equipment to measure this moral attitudes. They have no way of me-
asuring the spirit and morale of the people. they made a mistake at the Bay of
pigs. and now, when they planned the invasion of angola, they again made a
mistake […]. the most important thing about a country is not its wealth. the
imperialists have a lot of wealth, but they do not have moral spirit. the most
important thing about a country, a society, is its morale and its spirit45.
against this backdrop, it is easier to understand why, in spite of lo-

cal difficulties, a new leadership crisis and the continuation of a civil war,
cuba remained firmly in favor of neto’s government. the assumption of
being on the “right” side responded to concerns linked to a precise cuban
agenda. angolan events were perceived from the perspective of a relation-
ship that could cast havana in a peculiar role: the defender of the angolan
people and the promoter of a south-south collaboration rooted both in a
shared past of subjugation and in the present fight against minority rule in
southern africa and imperialist forces in the world arena46.
cuba’s role in angola raises several questions that have not yet been
fully addressed and could represent a fertile point of departure for the
present debate and future research projects. For one, did it make any dif-
ference to the leadership of the mpla that cuba had a prominent indepen-
dent role in angola? and what role, if any, did cuba play with respect to
the mpla’s evolution between 1976 and 1977, the year the party officially
adopted a marxist-leninist ideology for its First congress?
We know that castro showed sensitivity towards soviet concerns over
primacy within the socialist camp47 but, at the same time, he underlined
the importance of leaving the newborn angolan government with enough
freedom to develop its own path towards socialism. Was this a subtle way
of leaving room for the construction of a special relationship between two
developing countries? in other words, was there a “cuban model” exercis-
ing an influence on the field with the potential to open a special channel of
connections not only with angola but also with other developing african
countries? did the mpla leadership prefer to deal with cuba because of
its own revolutionary experience and its nature as a developing country?
Were there concerns over the necessity to maintain autonomy and keep a
certain distance from moscow through cuban mediation?
an analysis of the cuban-angolan relationship as it developed after the
pra took power seems to indicate that the essential goal for havana re-
mained the very survival of the mpla government throughout the period
of 1975-88. since independence did not mean the end of conflict but a new
45
Fidel castro, “speech on the 23rd anniversary of the assault on moncada Barracks”, 26 July
1976, castro speech database on-line, www1.lanic.utexas.edu/la/cb/cuba/castro.html.
46
ratliff, “cuban”, 30-33.
47
Gleijeses, Conflicting Missions, 372; Westad, The Global, 238-41.
phase of it, cuba’s military aid remained crucial throughout this period, even
if civilian support continued to mark an important aspect of the island’s as-
sistance to angola48. From a local perspective, however, the awareness of the
support granted by cuba, against not only external pressures but also inter-
nal threats, might have been the factor that prevented the development of an
open political debate among different currents within the mpla49, leaving
room for a centralization and personalization of power. three subsequent
crises, one internal and two external, while calling for a different kind of in-
volvement from cuba, seemed to push in this direction: the attempted coup
by nito alves in may 1977 and the two shaba crises of 1977 and 1978.
in may 1977, while discontent over the direction taken by the mpla’s
leadership spread among young people, some branches of the army and
the urban unemployed in particular, an attempted coup promoted by nito
Alves and José Van Dunem (both key members of the MPLA belonging to
the current of “internationalists”, the supposed soviet favorite)50 failed. the
prompt military response of cuban troops, who seized the radio station
that the insurgents had been unable to control, allowed neto himself and
most members of the government to survive (while other government and
military leaders were killed during the uprising). the situation was brought
back under control, but the abortive coup had heavy consequences. though
little evidence has surfaced regarding the post-coup phase, there is a general
agreement among scholars that the official reaction to the coup was not lim-
ited to hitting the insurgents but also inaugurated a period of massive repres-
sion of any form of dissent, thereby enforcing the divide between the power
elite and the population51. at the same time, the dissent brought dramatically
to the surface by the coup failed to be addressed in any form thereafter.
the two shaba crises erupted in march 1977 and may 1978 respectively
when guerrilla forces (Zairian exiles) calling themselves the Front de Libération
National Congolais attempted to invade the shaba province of Zaire from the
angolan territory. cuba denied any involvement, despite allegations from
the West52. nevertheless, a “side-effect” of both crises was a new increase in
48
sergio díaz-Briquets and Jorge pérez-lópez, “internationalist civilian assistance: the cu-
ban presence in sub-saharan africa”, in Cuba Internationalism, ed. díaz-Briquets, 48-77.
49
Birmingham, Portugal and Angola, 143 and 149.
50
For the roots of the coup and an accurate analysis of the ethnic and political background of
its promoters, see, in particular, messiant, “angola”, 172-3. see also Birmingham, Portugal and
Angola, 151-5; Westad, The Global, 239-240 and 244; lara pawson, “the 27 may in angola: a
View from Below”, in Relações Internacionais 14 (2007), 1-18.
51
regarding the evolution of the mpla’s leadership after the attempted coup, see messiant,
“angola”, 173-176. see also tvedten, Angola, 44.
52
at the outbreak of the first crisis, in march 1977, the us government adopted a cautious
position. see, for example, Z. Brzezinski to J. carter, 18 march 1977, secret, in Jimmy carter
library, atlanta (Jcl), Zbigniew Brzezinski collection, box 41, Wnsr 5. however, in may
1978, under pressure from Belgium and France, the us administration agreed to give logis-
tical support to their mission in shaba. this decision seemed to validate the unconfirmed
hypothesis that Katangans had been trained by cubans and that the whole operation against
cuban military presence in angola. Furthermore, the whole affair gave new
political strength to neto when he needed it most53, since the may 1977 coup
had revealed old but unresolved divisions among mpla ranks and notable
weaknesses within the angolan leadership, which could remain thus thanks
to the “external crisis”. consequently, as was long the case in the war against
unita54, shaba i and ii gave the government in luanda new arguments with
which to avoid facing the most crucial problems of the country, including se-
vere shortages in agricultural production, poor food distribution and a lack
of basic viable infrastructures55. after José edoardo dos santos’ appointment
as president following agostinho neto’s death in 1979, the concentration of
power increased and the government was formally subordinated to the party
until the constitutional changes of the early 1990s56. at the same time, rising
oil revenues allowed the regime not just to survive but to prosper unchecked
in terms of its legitimacy and accountability57.
4. Conclusions
despite the many expectations for the angolan independence that start-
ed in november 1975, the country did not enter a phase of peace and de-
mocracy. On the contrary, civil war continued in various forms for over
twenty-five years. the mpla government, which had managed to declare
the foundation of the people republic of angola amidst a ferocious inter-
nal fight for power, was unable to live up to its promises.
the consequences of a continuous civil war added to the already heavy
burden inherited from portuguese colonialism, creating a situation in
mobutu’s regime could not have been planned and organized without luanda and moscow’s
consent. New evidence produced by Gleijeses rules out any direct Cuban involvement. On
this issue and american reactions, see Garthoff, Détente and Confrontation, 686-695; Gleijeses,
“truth or credibility: castro, carter, and the invasions of shaba”, The International History Re-
view 1 (1996), 70-103; Birmingham, “angola”, in A History, ed. Chabal, 153-5. On the Angolan
and soviet points of view see also memo of conversation (loginov with luvualu), 27 June
1978, secret, in cold War international history project, Virtual Archive Collections on-line, “the
cold War in africa”, http://www.wilsoncenter.org/index.cfm?topic_id=1409&fuseaction=va2.
browse&sort=collection. For the new evidence on cuba’s role during both crises, see, in par-
ticular, Gleijeses, “moscow’s proxy”, 9-21.
53
the global repercussions of the two shaba crises were twofold. While mobutu’s regime was
spared, neto denied any involvement and managed to achieve significant diplomatic success
by receiving a commitment from mobutu to end all interference in angolan affairs, i.e. his
support for the Fnla and the Flec, in return for neto’s similar assurances to maintain peace
along the border.
54
On the absence of effective political and social dissent against the increasingly oppressive
nature of the mpla regime, messiant argues that this was a by-product of the prolonged civil
war in angola: christine messiant, “the mutation of hegemonic domination”, in Angola, eds.
Chabal and Vidal, 97.
55
see d. Birmingham, Portugal and Africa, 146-152.
56
messiant, “angola”, 175-176. see also tvedten, Angola, 46.
57
messiant, “the mutation”, 95-98.
which the centralization of power in the hands of a restricted elite seemed

to be the only solution to promote efficient economic policies that required
heavy investments and measures of austerity. From the 1977 party congress
onwards, angola was ruled by a single-party regime and the revolutionary
agenda was entirely absorbed by “war imperatives”58. the time for filling
in the gaps and mending the disarticulations of the country never came.
angola, like other african states, became a “gatekeeper state” able to sur-
vive mainly thanks to the exploitation of its natural resources, especially
oil59. against this backdrop, the role of cuba, not originally meant to be just
‘military’, seemed to adapt itself to this evolution and serve primarily as a
bastion in defense of a party-leadership that was not to be questioned.
Of course, one cannot underestimate, or forget, Nelson Mandela’s person-
al tribute to cuban internationalism and its “contribution to african indepen-
dence” during his first visit to cuba in 1991. regarding the results of cuba’s
involvement in angola, mandela’s judgment was very clear: “the decisive
defeat of the apartheid aggressors broke the myth of the invincibility of the
white oppressors!” He went further to stress that “Cuito Cuanavale has been
the turning point in the struggle to free the continent and our country from
the scourge of apartheid”60. cuba’s intervention in the angolan crisis, in de-
fense of a more just and equal order that would also contribute to the disap-
pearance of apartheid, is due above all to the cuban spirit and morale, and it
certainly needs to be recognized, as mandela believes61. however, a fair as-
sessment of the impact of that involvement should not be confined to the cel-
ebration of an unquestionable and crucial victory, thereby grasping only one
dimension of a multifaceted relationship, but should rather be widened to
explore all the social and political fall-outs on the african country as a whole.
according to patrick chabal, outside interference “fuelled rather than caused
internal divisions, violence and civil war” and “the foreign aspect is impor-
tant but it’s by no means unique to angola”. if we share this view and at the
same time look at angola’s internal affairs and developments, especially after
1977, the role of “outside interference” can be seen in a new light.
58
“By the early 1980s, as much as 50 per cent of the foreign exchange came to be used for
military purposes and another 20 per cent for food imports”, ibid., 72.
59
Jakkie cilliers and christian dietrich, eds., Angola’s War Economy: The Role of Oil and Dia-
monds (pretoria: iss, 2000); tony hodges, Angola from Afro-Stalinism to Petro-Diamond Capital-
ism (Oxford: James Currey, 2001); Philippe Le Billon, “Angola’s Political Economy of War: The
Role of Oil and Diamonds, 1975-2000”, African Affairs (2001), 55-80; messiant, “angola”, 176-8.
On the concept of “gatekeeper state” in post-colonial Africa, see Frederick Cooper, Africa Since
1940 (new York: cambridge university press, 2002), 156-189.
60
the battle of cuito cuanavale (1988) was a turning point in the angolan civil war. nelson
mandela and Fidel castro, How Far We Slaves Have Come (new York: pathfinder, 1991), 20.
61
it is also important to recall that domestic criticism of cuba’s involvement in angola in-
creased over the years. see, inter alia, Olga Nazario, “Cuba’s Angolan Operation”, in Cuba
Internationalism, ed Díaz-Briquets, 120-2. On the domestic impact of internationalism, see, in
particular, Juan m. del aguila, “the domestic attitude towards internationalism: evidence
from Émigre interviews”, ibid., 124-143.
Field research and multidisciplinary studies on the angolan political

process have shown that after 1977, in particular, the regime in luanda
was increasingly driven by an authoritarianism based on and fuelled by a
thorough party apparatus and a constant flux of oil revenues, at least un-
til the oil crisis of the mid-1980s, which forced some things to change62. in
fact, from 1977 onwards, nationalism was no longer the driving force of the
competition. new imperatives surfaced and the fight between the mpla
and unita looked increasingly like a zero-sum game for power63. at the
same time, with the reversal of american policy towards southern africa
during the reagan presidency in the 1980s and pretoria’s determination to
pursue SWAPO forces on Angolan territory, the prosecution of the conflict,
thanks again to the military presence of cuban forces and soviet assistance,
allowed edoardo dos santos a sort of legitimacy per se.
it is true that by the end of the decade, the settlement of the namibian
issue and the withdrawal of south african and cuban forces from angola,
along with economic and political changes imposed by internal and ex-
ternal pressures, could have represented a chance for a new start. Once
again, however, the weaknesses of the Bicesse agreement (1991) and the
short-lived lusaka peace phase (1994), followed by the resumption of war
from 1998 until the death of Jonas savimbi in 2002 justified the govern-
ment’s adoption of new emergency powers and more-refined techniques
of political and social control while cementing its hold of angolan wealth64.
Whereas the political transition of the 1990s caused ‘prominent casualties’
in neighboring countries, including that of angola’s eternal rival mobutu,
the american diplomatic recognition of 1993 and the increased importance
of angola as an oil-producing state65 not only spared the luanda regime
but also its consolidation. against this backdrop emerges a twofold un-
derstanding of cuba’s role in angola that deserves further analysis and
debate: the ‘epic’ one, confirmed by the moving words pronounced by
nelson mandela in santiago in 1991; and that which addresses the long-
term consequences of keeping in power a regime that was freed from ac-
countability and was therefore able to defer, sine die, issues crucial to a
more balanced economic and social development.
62
Nuno Vidal, “The Angolan Regime and the Move to Multiparty Politics”, cit., 131-143. See
also mathieu petithomme, “the instrumentalization of disorder in angola”, Human Security
Journal 4 (2007), 82-95.
63
chabal, “E Pluribus”, 6.
64
Nuno Vidal, “Post-Modern Patrimonialism in Africa”, in Community and the State in Luso-
phone Africa, eds. malyn newitt, patrick chabal and norrie macQueen (london: King’s col-
lege, 2003), 1-14. christine messiant, “angola: Why did Bicesse and lusaka Fail? a critical
analysis”, in south african regional poverty network on-line, www.sarpn.org.za/docu-
ments/d0001958/Bicesse_lusaka_2005.pdf; id., “angola: le retour à la guerre ou l’inavouable
faillite d’une intervention internationale”, L’Afrique Politique 1 (1994), 201-229.
65
Alex Vines et al., Angola. Drivers of Change: An Overview (london: chatham house, 2005).
Part VII
the contemporary scene: cuban

strategies for the 21st century
On the previous page – La Habana Vieja, Calle Obispo (photo by D. Basosi, 2007).
Part VII
The Contemporary Scene:

Cuban Strategies for the 21st Century
For cuba, the collapse of the soviet union and the disintegration of
the eastern bloc at the beginning of the 1990s implied a loss of more than
four fifths of its foreign markets. From 1990 to 1993, cuban Gdp fell by
one third. Years of shortages of virtually everything followed in what soon
came to be known as the período especial (the “special period”, which has
not formally ended yet in 2009). the hostile attitudes among us political
elites did not end, however, with the collapse of the soviet union. the us
congress passed two distinct acts – the torricelli act of 1992 and the helms
Burton act of 1996 – aimed at exploiting cuba’s dramatic economic cri-
sis in order to provoke a regime change on the island1. While most of the
scholarship from that same period anticipated the end of the revolution-
ary experience, such predictions did not come true and, by the early 21st
century, cuba seems to have recovered, at least in part, from the shock.
domestic economic recovery went hand-in-hand with the reconstruction
of diplomatic, political and economic international ties. One notable recent
development is the strengthening of cuba’s ties with its close neighbors
– particularly Hugo Chávez’s Venezuela – in an increasingly left-leaning
latin america. according to duccio Basosi’s essay, however, the origins of
such rapprochement date back to the second half of the 1980s when a well-
orchestrated diplomatic offensive brought Fidel castro to denounce the
“neoliberal” restructuring of latin america’s heavy foreign debts. many
1
richard Gott, cuba. A New History (new haven: Yale university press, 2004). different per-
spectives on cuban economy and society in the late 20th and early 21st century are in Jorge i.
Domínguez, Omar E. Pérez Villanueva and Lorena Barberia, eds., The Cuban Economy at the Start
of the Twenty-First Century (cambridge, ma: harvard university press, 2005); carlos mesa-lago
and Jorge F. pérez-lópez, Cuba’s Aborted Reform: Socioeconomic Effects, International Comparisons
and Transition Policies (Gainesville: university press of Florida, 2005).
challenges still face the cuban government on its way towards a renew-
al of socialism. its dual currency system in particular (introduced as an
emergency measure to earn hard currency in 1993, and kept in place since
then, notwithstanding the formal substitution of the us dollar with the pe-
so convertible) seems one of the hardest to overcome, as discussed in davide
Gualerzi’s essay. at the same time, as Filomena critelli maintains in her
essay on cuba’s resilience, the choices of the período especial (aimed at keep-
ing social expenditures high regardless of growing material constraints)
helped the cuban leadership maintain its legitimacy domestically while
also providing cuba with some highly-prized assets (knowledge, medical
doctors, teachers, technicians) to exchange for much-needed goods (ener-
gy, foodstuffs) in global and regional markets.
D. Basosi
Chapter 19
In the Shadow of the Washington Consensus:
Cuba’s Rapprochement with Latin America in
a World Going Unipolar, 1985-1996
the late 1980s and the early 1990s are often described as a period of
great loneliness for cuba. the retrenchment, and then the fall, of the soviet
union deprived the island of its main ally. the us government’s hostility
towards the Revolución remained unwavering. economically, the decline
and collapse of the eastern Bloc forced the cuban economy into a period
of adjustment that ended in the dramatic período especial. despite the seem-
ingly unstoppable advance of capitalism that marked those years, howev-
er, cuba did not follow in the footsteps of the former soviet union and the
other members of the eastern Bloc. the cuban government, led since 1959
by Fidel castro, confirmed instead its commitment to socialism1.
the cuban anomaly seemed particularly striking in the context of the pro-
cesses that had been taking place in the Western hemisphere from the early
1980s on. Faced with deep financial crises, the major latin american economies
took a drastic turn towards unfettered capitalism. the us treasury’s partici-
pation in the process, as well as its powerful influence in multilateral organi-
zations such as the international monetary Fund (imF) and the World Bank,
made the us government’s footprint on the economies of latin america so
heavy that the policies adopted by most governments in the region were soon
known worldwide as the policies of the “Washington consensus”2. however,
while the hegemonic role played by the united states in latin america in the
twilight and immediate aftermath of the cold War cannot be seriously ques-
1
On Cuba and the Cuban revolution: Richard Gott, Storia di Cuba (milano: mondadori, 2007
[New Haven: 2005]). Among the many biographies of Castro, see: Volker Skierka, Fidel: A
Biography (cambridge: polity, 2006).
2
John Williamson, “What Washington means by policy reform”, in Latin American Adjust-
ment: How Much Has Happened, ed. John Williamson (Washington dc: institute for interna-
tional economics, 1990), 7-20. also: Jorge F. pérez-lópez, “the cuban economy in the age
of hemispheric integration”, Journal of Interamerican Studies and World Affairs 3 (1997), 3-47.
tioned, this essay argues that the cuban government did not merely struggle
to survive in the changing international economic and political conditions, but
undertook a set of skilled diplomatic moves during the latin american debt
crisis and, somewhat surprisingly, managed to keep a certain degree of “soft
power” for the island even during the hardships of the período especial.
1. In the Twilight of the Cold War
cuba entered the 1980s with a certain political and economic dynamism,
but in virtual isolation from most of its close neighbors. politically, the cuban
government was playing an international role by acting as chair of the non-
aligned movement and by maintaining its extensive military commitments
to revolutionary movements in africa. as far as the Western hemisphere was
concerned, however, the continuing ban from the Organization of American
States (OAS) symbolized the solidity of the cordon sanitaire built by the US
around the island in the early 1960s. economically, the blockade established
by the united states, and endorsed by most latin american countries, was
still in place. With the virtually lone exception of mexico, no major latin
american country had substantial trade relations with the socialist island.
nevertheless, cuba still capitalized on its own strategic relevance in the
global context of the cold War, which had allowed it to gain from several
favorable trade agreements with the soviet union, including, in particular,
the exchanges of cuban sugar and soviet oil at subsidized prices. during
the first half of the 1980s, cuba’s economic performance was a striking ex-
ception in the latin american landscape. integration into the cmea (the
socialist camp’s council of mutual economic aid) had helped cuba reach
an average annual Gdp growth rate of 6.7% from 1981 to 19853. in the rest
of latin america, during those same years, the combination of large exter-
nal imbalances (often connected to the energy crisis of the early 1970s) and
the high interest rates imposed by the us Federal reserve on international
money markets had led instead to a virtual halt of economic growth4. latin
america’s total external debt, calculated at $30 billion in 1970, reached $331
billion in 1982 and grew to $410 billion by 1987 ($115 billion in Brazil, $105
billion in Mexico, $50 billion in Argentina, $34 billion in Venezuela and $20
billion in chile)5. With free-falling currencies, inflation sky-rocketed and
3
c. tablada, “les nouveaux agents économiques dans une societé socialiste (cuba)”, in Cuba,
quelle transition?, ed. aurelio alonso tejada (paris: l’harmattan, 2001), 27-49: 32.
4
latin american Gdp had grown at an average of 5.7% from 1961 to 1970 and 6.0% from 1971
to 1980: inter-american development Bank, Economic and Social Progress in Latin America: 1985
Report (Washington dc: idB, 1985). more generally: John Ward, Latin America: Conflict and
Development since 1945 (london: routledge, 1997), 13-20.
5
data reported in rudi dornbusch, “the latin american debt problem: anatomy and solu-
tions”, in Debt and Democracy, eds. Barbara stallings and robert Kaufman (Boulder: Westview,
1989), 7-22: 12.
Part VII – The Contemporary Scene 281
production fell. By the beginning of 1987, overall latin american Gdp was
6.5% below 1980 levels. in the same period, real consumption fell by 8% in
Brazil and mexico, 14% in peru and 17% in argentina and chile6.
the phrase “Washington consensus” did not simply hint at the us in-
volvement in the debt crisis but also indicated a discernible set of privatiz-
ing and laissez faire-oriented measures that latin american governments
had to undertake in order to enter new agreements for debt-financing and
debt-rescheduling with private creditors, foreign governments and inter-
national institutions7. such policies were extremely harmful from a social
standpoint. the costs of adjustment often weighed more on employed
workers than on other social groups, while the concluding sales of pub-
lic industries often provided comfortable profit opportunities to part of
the local elite and to foreign investors (at the same time, they guaranteed
the flow of repayments to foreign commercial banks and other lending
institutions)8. however, since it was consistent with classic liberal assump-
tions, it was officially assumed that, in the longer term, the “magic of the
marketplace” would provide a more efficient allocation of resources with
beneficial effects for the greater majority of the population9.
in most of the countries involved in the debt crisis, the early phase of
structural adjustment was managed by authoritarian regimes, who often as-
sisted in keeping opposition down10. even as new parliamentary regimes en-
tered the scene by the mid-1980s, little changed in government approaches
to debt negotiations. in countries where the transition towards parliamen-
tary democracy occurred under close military control (Brazil, argentina,
uruguay and chile), the civilian leaders that guided the transitional govern-
ments were often carefully selected from conservative technicians that would
not challenge the existing understandings between the outgoing military
elite and international financial centers11. But even when the transition al-
lowed wider room for political maneuvering, new leaders often campaigned
6
data reported in howard handelman and Werner Baer, “introduction: the economic and
political costs of austerity”, in Paying the Costs of Austerity in Latin America, eds. howard
handelman and Werner Baer (Boulder: Westview, 1989), 2-15.
7
For a critical approach, see: david harvey, A Brief History of Neoliberalism (New York: Oxford
university press, 2005).
8
the debate over the outcomes of such policies is analyzed in donald huddle, “post-1982 ef-
fects of Neoliberalism on Latin American Development and Poverty: Two Conflicting Views”,
Economic Development and Cultural Change 4 (1997), 881-97.
9
see, for example, president reagan’s remarks: “responses to Questions submitted by latin
american newspapers”, 30 november 1982, in university of california at santa Barbara, The
American Presidency Project on-line (app), www.presidency.ucsb.edu (cited 25 march 2008).
10
this was acknowledged in cia, national intelligence estimate, “Brazil: prospects for the re-
gime”, 25 april 1984, secret; cia, national intelligence estimate, “chile: prospects for a demo-
cratic transition”, 1 december 1985, secret. Both documents are in central intelligence agency,
Freedom of Information Act on-line (CIA-FOIA), www.cia.foia.gov (cited 25 March 2008).
11
For an in-depth appraisal of this point, see the contributions collected in: stallings and
Kaufman, eds., Debt and Democracy.
against the harsh conditions attached to the financial packages, only to end
up accepting them shortly after taking office. relative bargaining weakness,
a seeming lack of alternatives and true admiration for what then seemed the
miracle of “free market” policies in the us and some developing countries
(namely south Korea), often combined with the lures of tangible personal
advantages (which sometimes translated into sheer corruption) to determine
the new leaders’ adherence to the Washington consensus. in a complete re-
versal of the development strategies followed in previous decades, privatiz-
ing state-owned companies, reducing tariffs, eliminating controls on flows
of capital and limiting the bargaining power of unions all came to be seen as
the primary tools to re-launch exports and repay debts.
protests and revolts against the deteriorating living conditions did take
place in several countries. Vis-à-vis the creditors, the main Latin American
debtors also threatened to enhance their bargaining position by joining in
the “cartagena consensus” to denounce the political, and not simply eco-
nomic, nature of the debt problem12. the newly elected president of peru,
alan García, unilaterally declared that his country would limit debt repay-
ment until after the domestic recession had been overcome13. the catholic
church, an influential player on the latin american field, questioned the
morality of the policies of the Washington consensus14. however, where-
as there were minor changes in the modalities in which the us-sponsored
model of economic adjustment was promoted and applied, its basic phi-
losophy remained unchanged throughout the period15. Governments kept
divesting public sectors and cutting social expenditures, even though this
frequently meant selling off the most strategic industries (including the
water supply in Bolivia’s case) to (often foreign) private companies and
creating wide areas of poverty. according to World Bank data about the
region, apart from variations, inequality peaked, malnutrition grew and by
1996, a third of latin americans were living on less than two dollars a day
(from a mere 11% in 1969)16.
12
Judith teichman, “the World Bank and policy reform in mexico and argentina”, Latin
American Politics and Society 1 (2004), 39-74.
13
Eduardo Ferrero Costa, “Peruvian Foreign Policy: Current Trends, Constraints and Oppor-
tunities”, Journal of Interamerican Studies and World Affairs 2 (1987), 55-78.
14
pontifical Justice and peace commission, “an ethical approach to the international debt
Question”, Origins 34 (1987), 601-611.
15
in the early 1980s, in particular, the us government refused to commit federal resources to
debt-rescheduling plans, which not only forced latin american countries into faster adjust-
ment and a worse bargaining position but also made payments to creditor banks more dif-
ficult. eventually, with the so-called “Brady plan” of 1989 (from the name of then secretary of
the treasury William Brady) the us agreed to guarantee private loans to indebted countries.
What did not change throughout the years was the “tight conditionality” that was attached to
the financial packages. On this, see: Secretary of the Treasury Regan to Reagan, “Results of the
1983 WB/IMF Annual Meetings”, 6 October 1983, Confidential, Ronald Reagan Presidential
Library, Simi Valley, USA (RRL), Executive, Secretariat NSC, Subject File, box 42, IMF.
16
huddle, “post-1982”, 886-887.
2. The International Politics of the Debt Crisis: Cuba and Latin

America
Beneath the surface of Washington’s growing economic and political in-

fluence in latin america, the latin american debt crisis offered Fidel castro
the first serious opportunity in years to pull cuba out of regional isolation.
in march 1985, in an interview with the mexican newspaper excelsior, the
cuban leader began what would soon appear to be a relentless campaign
against the political implications of “orthodox” foreign debt management17.
castro invited latin america to unite and repeal the external debt. neither
of the two objectives could be deemed alien to “socialist internationalism”,
but both the regional focus and the arguments used seemed to mark a per-
ceivable shift in the form, if not the substance, of castro’s foreign policy.
the march interview was not just a one-off: castro made latin american
debt the main focus of his foreign policy speeches for months18. the cuban
leader outlined three sorts of reasons why it was “impossible” to pay the
debt. economically, the size of indebtedness was simply too large to be
offset so that, by analogy with what is prescribed in most domestic legal
codes, the burden of losses from bad investments should have been shared
between debtor and creditor. politically, it would have been impossible for
most governments to squeeze the living conditions of their citizens further
without provoking rebellions and revolts, which castro did not appear to
desire in that phase. morally, latin america had already paid enough to
the wealthy north, first through colonial exploitation and more recently
through “neo-colonialism”19. castro presented his solution in rather concil-
iatory terms, explaining that it would “not harm the international financial
system”. in order to avoid global financial collapse from the sudden repeal
of the debt, the líder máximo suggested that, rather than having the new
latin american democracies pay for the debts incurred by their authoritar-
ian predecessors the federal us government should cut its defense budget
and devote the amount saved to repay the creditor banks20.
castro’s reasoning was purposely provocative but far from improvised.
the cuban government prepared the campaign carefully by arriving quickly
at an agreement with its Western european creditors on its own outstanding
$2.9 billion debt to show that it was not acting out of any immediate self-in-
17
castro’s speeches and thoughts on the debt crisis are collected in: Fidel castro, La deuda
externa (La Habana: Editoria Politica, 1989). On the Cuban anti-debt campaign: Philip O’Brien,
“‘The Debt cannot Be Paid’: Castro and the Latin American Debt”, Bulletin of Latin American
Research 1 (1986), 41-63. more generally: Michael Kline, “Castro and ‘New Thinking’ in Latin
america”, Journal of Interamerican Studies and World Affairs 1 (1990), 83-118.
18
Joseph treaster, “castro’s modest proposal”, New York Times, 25 august 1985.
19
castro, La deuda externa, 46-58, 59-62 and 88-97.
20
Jim hoagland, “conversation with castro. marathon session: castro talks economics, not
revolution”, The Washington Post, 3 February 1985.
terest21. it also complemented the rhetoric offensive by hosting a large conti-

nental meeting “against the debt” in havana in august 1985. although only
a few governments sent official delegations, the success in terms of affecting
public opinion was huge. More than one-thousand delegates from NGOs,
workers unions, religious groups, political parties and even a few corpora-
tions arrived in the cuban capital from all over the continent at the expense
of the cuban government22. debt relief made its way into the discussions of
the latin american people, if not into those of their governments.
the lack of unity among latin american governments was abundantly
displayed by the poor coordination of the cartagena group23. some latin
american leaders even showed annoyance at castro’s campaign. Yet, diplo-
mats from the same countries that publicly criticized the cuban effort con-
fessed to reporters that most leaders were “privately delighted” by castro’s
stance, which improved their bargaining position with creditors (although
governments were interested in having better conditions for rescheduling,
rather than repealing the debt altogether)24. in the words of one reporter:
“emotionally they all agreed with castro”25.
as noted by the new York times columnist tad szulc in an article sig-
nificantly entitled “cuba’s emergence, america’s myopia”, the widespread
perception in the latin american public opinion was that president reagan
“did not care about their awesome economic crisis, [while] Fidel castro
did”26. the cuban anti-debt campaign did not go completely unheard in
Washington. indeed, some commentators have established a link between
the cuban diplomatic offensive and the need for the us administration to
present the so-called “Baker plan” in 1985, which recognized the global
nature of the debt problem and committed substantial amounts of fresh
money to the World Bank (an action the us government had previously re-
fused to take)27. From cuba’s standpoint, however, the only practical short-
term consequence of the campaign was the hardening of reagan’s resolve
to crush the island economically28.
21
roger lowenstein, “cuba is in Good standing With Bankers despite castro’s talk of can-
celing debt”, The Wall Street Journal, 30 July 1985.
22
Joseph treaster, “cuban meeting stokes emotions on latin debt”, New York Times, 1 august
1985.
23
us officials were well informed about the inner weakness and divergences in the cartagena
consensus even before they emerged publicly: (nsc staffer) mulford to interagency Group
on international debt, “a meeting of the iG”, 19 september 1984, confidential, rrl, executive
secretariat nsc, subject File, box 42, imF.
24
treaster, “cuban meeting”.
25
Joseph treaster, “castro Builds relations with south america”, New York Times, 19 may 1985.
26
tad szulc, “cuba’s emergence, america’s myopia”, New York Times, 5 may 1985.
27
catherine Gwin, US Relations with the World Bank 1945-92 (Washington dc: Brookings,
1994), 38-45.
28
see: national security decision directive no. 235, “strengthening us policy toward cuba”,
18 august 1986, secret, in Federation of america scientists, national security decision direc-
tives on-line, www.fas.org/irp/offdocs/nsdd/index.html (cited 25 march 2008).
it was in the longer run that the anti-debt offensive represented an

unprecedented opportunity for cuba, allowing it to slowly find new in-
terlocutors–some of them, such as the catholic church, inconceivable in
earlier times–and, most importantly, to regain a recognized position in
the community of the latin american states. castro’s struggle for debt
relief and regional cooperation coincided with the return to civilian rule
in most of the continent. in that context, cuba gained diplomatic recogni-
tion and reopened trade contacts with most of its latin american neigh-
bors after more than two decades. throughout 1985, león Febres-cordero
rivadeneira of ecuador was the first democratically elected president of
a Latin American country to visit Cuba, while Raúl Alfonsin, the centrist
president of argentina, and Julio maria sanguinetti, the conservative elect-
ed president of uruguay, reopened trade relations with cuba. Brazil fol-
lowed shortly thereafter in 198629. By 1989, all but three latin american
countries (chile, paraguay and colombia) maintained regular diplomatic
relations and incipient trade flows with cuba. it goes without saying that
these mutual openings did not constitute a reversal of policies and alli-
ances in the southern half of the hemisphere. certainly most of the latin
american leaders who reopened relations with cuba were staunch follow-
ers of the Washington consensus in their countries and could hardly be
depicted as supporters of the cuban government. nevertheless, cuba’s of-
fensive on debt did capitalize on the need that most governments had, in a
period of dramatic weakness, to show at least some independence from the
united states. as instrumental as the rapprochement might have been, it
was a major breakthrough for cuba’s diplomacy.
3. The International Politics of the Período Especial
although relatively immune to the economic turmoil of its neighbors,

cuba was extremely vulnerable due to its dependency on the eastern
Bloc. By 1986, trade with cmea countries had grown to cover an un-
precedented 85% of total cuban foreign trade: 98% of the fuel, 50% of
the calories and 57% of the proteins consumed in the country came from
cmea sources30. starting in 1985, however, the new general secretary of
the soviet communist party, mikhail Gorbachev, accelerated moves to re-
duce the “imperial” commitments undertaken by his predecessors, partly
in response to the challenging economic situation. more-realistic prices
were to be set for sugar imports from and oil exports to cuba, in line with
the tenets of perestroika. political considerations accompanied economic
ones. From moscow’s “new thinking”, which stressed complementing
29
Roger Lowenstein, “Cuba’s Castro Finds Friends in Region By Urging West to Pay Off Latin
debts”, The Wall Street Journal, 23 may 1985.
30
tablada, “les nouveaux”, 39.
rather than competing with the West, the caribbean island’s strategic
significance diminished significantly for the soviets31. Bilateral contracts
were renegotiated and eventually the flow of commodities came to a vir-
tual halt with the end of the soviet state. as Boris Yeltsin hauled the red
flag down from the Kremlin in december 1991, the new russian lead-
ership ended all relevant economic and political relations with socialist
cuba.
after his first meeting with Gorbachev in moscow in march 1986, Fidel
castro had been extremely critical of perestroika and declared that he did
not want to be involved in it32. however, given cuba’s dependency on
the soviet union, non-involvement was hardly possible. cuba’s economy
had to adjust. the first step was the “readdressing of mistakes” (politica
de rectificación de errores), which diverted investments from inefficient
sectors towards tourism, pharmaceutics and construction, while still aim-
ing to strengthen and rationalize the centrally-planned economy33. much
more radical changes would occur after castro’s second meeting with
Gorbachev, which took place in havana in april 1989, only seven months
before the fall of the Berlin Wall.
in January 1990, faced with the global retrenchment of the soviet
union, Fidel castro spoke of the need for cuba to enter a “special pe-
riod in peacetime”34. the months that followed formed the most dramatic
period for the cuban economy after the Revolución. Between 1990 and
1993, cuban foreign trade plummeted by 70%. since most of the imports
from cmea were in strategic raw materials and spare parts for indus-
trial plants, the resulting scarcity ignited a chain of economic shortages.
annual sugar production was halved, while the end of soviet subsidies
coincided with dropping prices in international markets. cuban Gdp
dropped by nearly 30% in three years35, energy consumption was cut by
half36 and by 1996 the cuban calorie intake had fallen 27% below the level
in 199037.
31
On perestroika and “new thinking” in Gorbachev’s foreign policy: Vladislav Zubok, A Failed
Empire. The Soviet Union in the Cold War from Stalin to Gorbachev (chapel hill: university of
north carolina press, 2007), 265-302; danuta paszyn, The Soviet Attitude To Political And Social
Change in Central America, 1979–1990 (new York: st. martin’s , 2000).
32
Bill Keller, “Gorbachev-Castro Face-Off: A Clash of Style and Policies”, New York Times, 2
april 1989.
33
tablada, “les nouveaux”, 36-38.
34
Gott, Storia, 335-349.
35
Jorge i. domínguez, “cuba’s economic transition: successes, deficiencies, and challeng-
es”, in The Cuban Economy at the Start of the Twenty-First Century, eds. Jorge i. domínguez,
Omar E. Pérez Villanueva and Lorena Barberia (Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press,
2005), 17-48: 19 and 20.
36
Omar E. Pérez Villanueva, “The Cuban Economy Today and Its Future Challenges”, in The
Cuban, eds. Domínguez, Pérez Villanueva and Barberia, 49-89: 65 and 76.
37
statistics of the havana-based Centro de Investigaciones de la Economía Mundial, cited in
domínguez, “cuba’s economic”, 43.
commentators wrote daily about the imminent collapse of cuban

socialism under the pressure of the dramatic economic crisis38. us intel-
ligence advanced their hypothesis that “the deterioration of the cuban
economy [would have] further undermined castro’s legitimacy” and that
there was “a better than even chance that Fidel castro’s government would
fall within the next few years”39. certain episodes were seen as confirma-
tion of such forecasts (for example, in august 1994 when disputes erupted
in havana’s harbor, forcing castro himself to engage in lengthy talks with
an angry crowd of youth who saw few opportunities on the island)40.
in this situation, the us government and congress actively sought to
exploit the economic crisis in order to put an end to the cuban anomaly.
under heavy lobbying from the cuban-american national Foundation,
the congress passed the cuban democracy act of 1992, also known as
the torricelli act, and the cuban liberty and democratic solidarity act of
1996, also known as the helms-Burton act, which limited family contacts,
virtually terminated all trade between the two shores of the Florida strait
and established before us courts the extra-territorial suitability of foreign
companies doing business in cuba41. Furthermore, Washington-based in-
ternational financial institutions denied loans to cuba42.
Given these conditions, an economist of the havana-based Centro de
Investigaciones de la Economia Mundial observed some years later in a dis-
play of the cuban sense of humor that, with virtually no access to foreign
credit, the socialist island had undergone, during the período especial, the
only true “classical” economic adjustment. international prices had in-
creased, the external deficit had soared and domestic consumption had
been curtailed to offset the loss in purchasing power43. however, the way
in which this adjustment was carried out radically distinguished cuba
from the rest of the continent.
38
the most-quoted incorrect prediction on the imminent collapse of cuban socialism is an-
drés Oppenheimer, Castro’s Final Hour (new York: touchstone, 1993).
39
respectively: national intelligence council, “soviet assistance to cuba: new estimates
for 1986-90 and Outlook”, 9 September 1991, secret; and CIA, National Intelligence Estimate,
“Cuba: The Outlook for Castro and Beyond”, 1 August 1993, secret. Both documents are in the
CIA-FOIA database. The only CID/Gallup poll carried out in Cuba during the período especial
found that, in 1994, roughly 69% of cubans considered themselves revolutionaries, socialists
or communists and 58% thought that the revolution had comparatively more achievements
than failures: peter roman, People’s Power: Cuba’s Experience with Representative Government
(lanham: rowman & littlefield, 2003), 144.
40
Geraldine lievesley, The Cuban Revolution: Past, Present and Future Perspectives (Gordons-
ville: palgrave, 2004), 161-6.
41
see: stephen lisio, “helms-Burton and the point of diminishing returns”, International Af-
fairs 4, The Americas: European Security (1996), 691-711; and Julia Sweig, “Fidel’s Final Victory”,
Foreign Affairs 1 (2007), 5-13.
42
Jorge i. domínguez, “u.s.-cuban relations: From the cold War to the colder War”, Journal
of Interamerican Studies and World Affairs 3 (1997), 49-75.
43
Osualdo Martínez Martinez, “Cuba dans le contexte de l’économie mondiale”, in Cuba, ed.
alonso tejada, 167-179: 174.
the cuban leadership sought to quickly work out a “socialist” way out
of the deep economic crisis. although tourism was immediately identified
as the most promising source of hard currency, the long-held suspicion
towards external partners and the objective lack of consolidated relations
with non-socialist countries initially led to an attempt to maintain the ex-
ternal balance by reducing consumption alone and concentrating the small
amount of hard currency available on strategic imports44.
additional radical measures were undertaken after 1993. carlos lage, a
former pediatrician who became cuba’s economic czar, legalized the own-
ership and use of the us dollar while seeking foreign investments in joint
public-private ventures (in tourism and other selected industries) where
the cuban state would hold at least 51% of the ownership. domestically,
lage moved on to diversifying agriculture and partially deregulating self-
employment for small-scale economic activities while allowing rural coop-
eratives to sell their surplus products in town markets. he also introduced
taxation, with a heavy emphasis on private activities45.
the development of these measures was a series of (sometimes con-
fusing) stops and gos that would last well into the first decade of the 21st
century, when many cuban economists – not to mention their foreign
counterparts – continued to debate the appropriate balance between pri-
vate, cooperative and public control over economic activity46. although it
was not conceived as a first step towards capitalism, nor as a way to change
the basic orientation of the cuban welfare-state system (even with all its
economic “inefficiencies”), this second wave of adjustment policies did im-
ply a larger degree of opening up to the once-abhorred market tools and a
greater shock to cuba’s social organization. though the economy did even-
tually rebound (Gdp growth averaged 3.6% between 1994 and 2001)47, the
44
cuban economists reported a 31% fall in consumption from 1990 to 1993, with a 7% decline
in social and government spending and a 39% drop in private spending. See: Viviana Togores
and anicia García, “consumption, markets, and monetary duality in cuba”, in The Cuban,
eds. Domínguez, Pérez Villanueva and Barberia, 245-295: 247.
45
domínguez, “cuba’s economic transition”, 25-30.
46
after the end of the cold War, debating the prospects of the cuban economy has been
a widely practiced activity outside cuba. Forecasting and prescribing, however, has largely
prevailed over analyzing and describing. a compendium of this type of work can be found
in carlos mesa-lago and Jorge F. pérez-lópez, Cuba’s Aborted Reform: Socioeconomic Effects,
International Comparisons and Transition Policies (Gainesville: university press of Florida, 2005).
in contrast, while during the 1990s most cuban economists shifted away from the ideologi-
cal marxism and statism of previous decades, their work did not abandon a basic orientation
towards an economic system based on social solidarity. see Fernando martínez heredia, “iz-
quierda y marxismo en cuba”, Alternatives Sud, 3 (1996); and anthony maingot, “epistemic
‘Organic Intellectuals’ and Cuba’s Battle of Ideas”, Florida International University, Cuban
research institute report no. 4, 26 may 2007 (available on-line at http://cubainfo.fiu.edu/cu-
bacontext/reports/maingot4.swf).
47
A complete set of data on Cuba’s recent economic performance is in Omar E. Pérez Villan-
ueva, “Economía y Nivel de Vida en Cuba: Avances y Retos”, paper presented at the confer-
ence Governance and Social Justice in Cuba: Past, Present and Future, mexico city, 21-22 april,
firmly egalitarian society of the 1960s and 1970s was deeply shaken by the
creation of tangible economic differences between those that could access
foreign currencies (through tourism and foreign remittances) and those
that could not48. at the same time, in a well-publicized report of the mid-
1990s, the un economic commission for latin america and the caribbean
(cepal) emphasized that “given the size of the external shock, the policies
of adjustment [in cuba] has been relatively low […] in comparison with
other latin american economies”, attributing such an outcome to the “ori-
entation towards solidarity” of the cuban social context49.
4. Concluding Remarks
the rapprochement with the latin american countries did not end
with the beginning of Cuba’s economic troubles. On the contrary, those
years saw the consolidation of the cuban government’s institutional links
with most latin american countries and ties with the progressive move-
ments of the continent. in 1987, eight latin american countries pushed
for Cuba’s re-admission into the Organization of American States for
the first time50. the attempt was unsuccessful, but in august 1989 the
latin american countries contributed to the election of cuba as a non-
permanent member of the un security council51. in 1991, notwithstand-
ing us critiques made to the mexican organizers, Fidel castro was the
uncontested star at the ibero-american summit, which brought together
the heads of state and government of all latin american countries, plus
spain and portugal52. precisely when us pressures for cuba’s domestic
change were intensifying, the latin american governments turned their
traditional abstentions into votes against the us blockade in the un
General assembly, causing total votes against the blockade to jump from
59 to 101 between 1992 and 1994. at the same time, the cuban way out of
the crisis, with virtually no budgetary cuts to health care, education and
social security, confirmed – or even increased – the country’s attractive-
2005 (available on-line at canadian Foundation for the americas, www.focal.ca/pdf/everleny.

pdf).
48
see, mayra e. prieto, “social effects of economic adjustment”, in The Cuban, eds. domín-
guez, Pérez Villanueva and Barberia, 209-43: 219 and 221. Nevertheless, in 2003, according to
a World Bank study, cuba remained the least unequal country in latin america by far: World
Bank, “inequality in latin america & caribbean: Breaking with history?”, 2003 (available on-
line at http://wbln0018.worldbank.org/lac/lac.nsf/ecadocByunid/4112F111).
49
cepal, La economia cubana. Reformas estructurales y desempeno en los noventa (santiago: ce-
pal, 1997), 15-6. cuba constantly ranked among the “high human development” countries
in the yearly publications of the united nations development program (undp): undp, Lo
sviluppo umano. Rapporto 2007-08 (torino: rosenberg & sellier, 2007), 287-95.
50
larry rohter, “8 latin chiefs urge cuba role in their region”, New York Times, 29 no-
vember 1987.
51
paul lewis, “cuba is elected to the un security council”, New York Times, 9 august 1989.
52
mark uhlig, “all eyes on cuba at ibero-american summit”, New York Times, 18 July 1991.
ness, especially in the latin american context, as a socio-economic model

different than the prevailing one. latin american leftist leaders renewed
their interest for the revolutionary island and often paid official visits to
havana53. all of this was not enough for cuba to avoid the hardships of
the período especial. Yet, the record of the period stretching from the half
of the 1980s to the half of the 1990s indicates that the cuban government
was able, for the first time since the Revolución, to enter a significant net-
work of regional relations right at the height of the policies and ideology
of the Washington consensus.
53
luiz ignacio “lula” da silva (elected Brazil’s president in 2002 and confirmed for a second
term in office in 2006) visited havana in 1989 as a union organizer and presidential candidate.
Hugo Chávez Frias (elected Venezuela’s President in 1998 and confirmed for new terms in of-
fice in 2000 and 2006) was welcomed in the cuban capital with military honors in 1994.
D. Gualerzi
Chapter 20
Cuba: Political Success and Economic
Failure?
the present essay attempts to clarify the question of cuba’s future by

examining the development and recent reform of its economy, which ul-
timately leads us to consider the profile of “21st-century socialism”, to use
the term coined by Venezuela’s president Hugo Chavez. In the spirit of
sparking further discussion, the purposefully provocative title stresses the
particular angle from which the issue of cuba’s economic reform is con-
sidered here. it will be addressed with respect not only to the success of
the island’s political stance in the international arena, especially its criti-
cism of neo-liberal policies in latin america, but also to the reality of an
economy that, despite overcoming the harsh período especial and showing
many signs of vitality, remains locked in a difficult process of integration
into the world market. these and other related issues are also addressed
in other essays of the present volume1. Opposite this integration process,
moreover, is the issue of cuba’s “dual economy” – formed by two markets
that are regulated by different currencies – and the two-tier society such
an economy has the potential to engender. this latter issue appears to be
vastly perceived by cubans and external observers alike as a very serious
problem. although it is a part of the “cambio en la vida quotidiana” that has
evolved since the end of the período especial, it also raises a number of ques-
tions. most of all, as the cohesive force of the revolutionary leadership and
the generation that lived through the triumph of the revolution fade away,
it threatens to break apart the consensus that the regime has managed to
maintain thus far.
1
see in particular the essays by duccio Basosi, maria stella rognoni and candace sobers in
this volume.
1. The Problem of Development: Industrializing and Diversifying
cuba is a strategic island for the caribbean, latin america and the
world for one simple reason: it is the site of an experiment with the poten-
tial for profound change. its interest and originality depends largely on the
way its economic development has been addressed since the revolution.
the challenge facing all developing countries is industrialization and the
development of an industrial structure that can integrate into or compete
in foreign markets. in order to produce the manufactured goods necessary
to promote development, a country must be able to sell in foreign market-
places in the first place. a country has to sell in order to have access to the
hard currency that allows it to buy foreign-produced goods. so a country
has to sell in order to buy, and it has to buy in order to develop. One of the
main issues, then, known in development literature as the “balance-of-pay-
ments constraint”, concerns the relationship between exports and imports2.
the faster a country develops, the faster its imports grow. if the country
cannot then match that rise with a corresponding rise in exports, it runs a
commercial deficit, which, given the structural and financial weaknesses of
a developing nation, poses a serious threat to the development process.
the more a country attempts to industrialize and ensure at least an initial
diversification of its growing industrial base, the stronger its need to buy. a
strong inter-industry structure and diversified output are among the distin-
guishing characteristics of developed economies. Only reasonably diversi-
fied economies can claim the status of being developed. the challenge, then,
is two-fold: to ensure rapid industrialization while also building an economic
structure that is both efficient and, if possible, diversified. But herein lies the
problem. a country with little industry and a relatively uniform economy
does not produce many of the goods it needs and therefore has to buy them
from foreign markets. however, according to the aforementioned process,
it has to sell in order to buy. the “reasonable” response, then, would be to
specialize in what is more likely to ensure a conspicuous stream of exports,
in order to pay for imports. in other words, in order to develop and diver-
sify, a country first has to do the opposite, that is, specialize. are developing
nations going to specialize in industrial or advanced-technology products,
which are already successfully produced by industrial economies? Of course
not. developing economies will typically specialize in their traditional in-
dustries and the goods they produce best or, as economic theory would sug-
gest, in what they can produce with a reasonably competitive advantage.
this is precisely what developing nations are told to do, specialize in what
they can rapidly export, and of course the items first on the list are agricultur-
al products and raw materials in general. this, then, is the trap, because when
2
John mccombie and mark roberts “the role of the Balance of payments in economic Growth”,
in The Economics of Demand-Led Growth, ed. mark setterfield (cheltenham: elgar, 2002).
a developing economy integrates into the world market as a supplier of raw

materials: a) it depends on the demand of the developed world and the prices
in foreign markets; b) it is exposed to the balance-of-payments constraint; and
c) the establishment of a vibrant, well-diversified economy becomes a sec-
ondary concern, entrusted to a long-term development strategy. indeed, the
experience of argentina suggests that a reasonably diversified economy can
even revert to the status of a raw-materials exporter.
to summarize: the integration of a relatively small developing nation into
the world economy by means of international trade and a flow of imports
and exports does offer the possibility of industrialization; however, the price
tag that comes with it, i.e. a subordinate position and stringent constraints,
makes it very uncertain that a developing economy could eventually break
out of such a position. integration is therefore both a blessing and a curse.
2. The Cuban Answer: Socialism on a Caribbean Island
For cubans, their victorious revolution also meant having to cope with
the problem of development, which gave rise to a caribbean socialist ex-
periment that was bound to face the same problems encountered by central-
ly-planned economies. this vast topic touches on the island’s variations on
the basic soviet model and the considerable debate that took place among
cuban leaders, as witnessed for example in the economic writings of ernesto
“che” Guevara. it is unnecessary to expand on the topic here. suffice it to
observe that socialism meant economic integration into the soviet bloc and a
system of exchanges with other socialist economies. For this reason, cubans
did not have to deal with the challenge of integrating into the international
market as an indispensable premise for their country’s development. they
did not have to sell (export) to import, since the development process could
be sustained via a transfer of technology and goods with administered prices
among socialist economies. it was still an exchange of manufactured goods
for agricultural products, i.e. sugar, but rather than productivity and prices,
it reflected a broader set of goals involved in a privileged relationship be-
tween cuba and the soviet union, cemented in the solidarity of the socialist
camp. While the solution had its problems, it did get around the suffocating
constraints imposed by the balance of trade and market prices.
admittedly, the cubans made good use of this privileged relationship.
Overall, the economic integration into the market constituted by the social-
ist economies – at least partially insulated from international prices – en-
sured the economic basis for the cuban government’s remarkable social
policy and the possibility of experimenting with industrial and development
policy. together with investments in health, education and social services
were attempts at industrial development and diversification. most impor-
tant, however, was the overall positive effect on cuban living standards. the
public provision of goods and services lessened the pressure on salaries that,
although relatively low by market economy standards, were sufficient to en-

sure acceptable living conditions for the great majority of cuban citizens.
in sum, integration into the socialist camp relieved the island’s econ-
omy from the urgency of industrializing under the discipline of interna-
tional-market integration, while at the same time allowing it to postpone
the major issue of diversifying and internally articulating its industrial
structure, at least until the post-1989 período especial. indeed, cuba mostly
paid for imports with sugar exports, confirming the specialization inher-
ited from the island’s colonially-integrated pre-socialist economy.
3. The Período Especial and Economic Reform
the collapse of the soviet union brought all of this to a rapid close. the
período especial that followed was therefore the manifestation of problems
that had been deferred by the previous “arrangement”, based on subsi-
dized prices for sugar and integration into a protected socialist market.
the dramatic effects on the economy and the standard of living, with a
decrease of national income and per capita consumption, were similar to
those of the debt crisis in latin america (mexico, Brazil, argentina) dur-
ing the early 1980s. the causes and consequences were, however, entirely
different. in the latin american case, it was precisely the integration into
foreign financial markets, and therefore a dependence on the monetary
policy of the us Federal reserve, that caused the problem, whereas in the
cuban case it was the end of a relative insulation from those markets. as
for the results, in the case of latin america, the crisis opened the way for
a firmer establishment of neo-liberalism, a turn in economic policy that
was to lead to the disaster best witnessed by the argentinean crisis at the
beginning of the 21st century. in cuba, it was instead the beginning of a
painful transition, one that brings the central issue discussed here into
focus.
cuba was now forced to face the problem of integrating its economy into
the international market, since doing otherwise would lead to economic col-
lapse and the consequent weakening of its socialist institutions. there was
no time to waste and every possible resource was needed, from economic
ones developed over thirty years of socialism to any international relations
that had survived the island’s isolation, all largely depending on the relent-
less hostility of the us and its ongoing embargo. in response to this unavoid-
able dilemma, cuba ended up accepting, and fostering the rise of, a “dual
economy”. the policy was less a choice than a necessity, but at least it made
room for more than one option. more resources would be allocated to those
industries that could conceivably achieve an acceptable level of productivity
and quality so as to become export sectors in a few years. their moderniza-
tion and capacity to sell in foreign markets, i.e. to be competitive, would go
on to mark the path and set the pace at which part of the cuban economy
would integrate into the international market3. these industries would earn
the hard currency badly needed for imports, in addition to that already en-
tering the cuban economy via industries like tourism, which traditionally
worked on the basis of hard currency and international prices, and remit-
tances from relatives living abroad, which had formerly been the primary
channel through which cubans had accessed hard currency.
the 1993 decision to legalize the circulation of the us dollar, aside from
the need to respond to the emergency created by the período especial, is part
of this same course of action. What had previously only been tolerated be-
came part of a determined effort to create a sector using the us dollar for
its transactions and therefore operating under international market condi-
tions. the “dollarization” of the cuban economy4, although manifesting all
the problems and risks implicit in a dual economy, was to be understood
as an indispensable and transitory step within the more general strategy of
integration into the world economy. indeed, one can appreciate the differ-
ence between this dual-economy approach and the adoption of the dollar
as the national currency – as done, for instance, in ecuador – by the fact
that a cuban currency soon took the place of the dollar: the peso convertible,
introduced around the same time that the us dollar became legal currency
in the mid-1990s, was in wide use by 2004.
When the dollar was banned from all domestic commercial transactions
on november 8 of that year, it became the regulating currency for interna-
tional transactions alone, under the control of the government. the peso
convertible, which exchanges for hard currency at a fixed rate and has main-
tained a fairly stable rate of exchange with the cuban peso over the years,
effectively became the domestic currency regulating the new modernizing
sector. in this sector, prices and salaries are now in convertible pesos, which
provide access to goods previously only bought using us dollars, thereby
creating the conditions for domestic demand as part of the effort to build
an internationally-integrated sector of the economy.
4. Market vs. “Social” Economy
avoiding dollarization means protecting the national economy and pre-

venting the us Federal reserve from effectively becoming the regulating
monetary authority. Yet the result of the island’s economic and currency re-
form has nonetheless been the establishment of a dual economy regulated
by two currencies existing within the same socio-economic system. indeed,
3
For an analysis of the evolution of cuban exports, see hiram marquetti, “cuba: importancia
actual del incremento de las exportaciónes”, in La economia cubana en el 2001, ceec-centro de
estudios de la economia cubana ed. (la habana: universidad de la habana, 2002).
4
Antonio Covi, Alessandra Lorini and Davide Gualerzi, “The ‘dollarization’ of the Cuban
economy: problems and prospects”, paper presented at the First conference Por el equilibrio
del mundo, la habana, 27-29 January 2003.
alongside the modernizing sector – which includes agro-industry, certain

manufacturing and hi-tech industries as well as those that have tradition-
ally earned hard currency like tourism – is the rest of the economy. Overall,
this latter part pays low, at times ridiculously low, salaries in cuban pesos.
the cuban peso gives exclusive access to domestic products that have no
relation to international standards of quality and productivity. the tradi-
tional cuban currency therefore regulates what is still a large part of the
economy. there is, furthermore, a third system of allocation: the libreta, a
rationing system that guarantees the availability of staple foods and other
basic items of consumption and is still important for the poorest cubans.
the resulting dilemma is that some people are increasingly being discrim-
inated against, or made unequal, by the access of others to the currency and
salaries of the modernizing sector, and in turn to the consumer items that are
coming to dominate these two separate standards of consumption and life-
style5. While one side reflects the country’s integration into the world econo-
my, and thus market-imposed conditions like higher standards of efficiency
and quality but also a rising social status and purchasing power, the other
reflects the traditional profile of a “social” economy directed at satisfying pri-
mary needs and maintaining social equality through access to social services
and education. But this very equality is called into question by a rising divide
in terms of access to goods and services bought and sold on the market.
When judged according to standard economic indicators, the overall
outcome of the economic reform appears to be positive. a series of encour-
aging data concerning the rate of economic growth, the improvement of
living standards, and an end to the most stringent bottlenecks in industrial
production and the availability of consumer goods shows that the cuban
economy has recovered from the período especial. a second such indicator
is the diversification of the industrial structure and a diminishing reliance
on sugar production as the main source of exports. thirdly, there is proof
in the relative political stability and social cohesion that have been retained
in the face of the difficulties of adjusting structurally to the new economic
conditions. despite tensions and opposition, the government has been able
to maintain a remarkable degree of consensus. Yet none of these indicators
take into account the social divide being created by the dual economy and
the potentially destabilizing effects this might have in the future. how long
can a social-economy model support itself in the face of the social differ-
entiation set in motion by market mechanisms? this issue is central to the
economic failure of the socialist experiment and the development pattern
that could potentially emerge from it.
5
it has been observed that at the beginning of the 21st century the life of the majority of the
population had become more “complex” and social differentiation more acute. see: ceec-
centro de estudios de la economia cubana, La economia cubana en el 2000 (la habana: univer-
sidad de la habana, 2001), 4.
5. Political Success and Economic Failure? Perspectives for the

Strategic Island
this very limited sketch is sufficient to drive home the main point.
though probably unavoidable, cuba’s economic reform has nevertheless
laid the groundwork for a differentiation that is bound to have an impact
on both the country’s social fabric and the prospects of further transforma-
tion of its economy. considering the economic results at the macro level,
speaking of a failure might appear excessively harsh. still, it is an intention-
ally provocative reminder of the fundamental issue. this failure belongs to
a socialist experiment that, deprived of external support, seems unable to
advance an alternative development strategy. From this point of view, the
dual economy signals a turning point: it could either be followed by an ac-
celeration down the path of growing inequality and wealth concentration
or by a rethinking of economic and social policy in the pursuit of a new
socialist model. however, it is striking how this problem contrasts with the
tremendous improvement of cuba’s image and political status in the inter-
national arena. Both the end of its political isolation from latin america
and, to a lesser extent, the rest of the world, as documented by Basosi in
this volume, as well as the growing prestige of the cuban leadership must
be seen in the context of the island’s rising criticism of neo-liberal doctrine
and policies. While only partially depending on the political stance of cuba
alone, and largely on the failure of these policies, this assessment has vin-
dicated cuban leaders’ long-standing criticism of capitalism and its effects
on the regional and world scales, giving a tremendous boost to the image
and political status of the strategic island. interestingly enough, this vindi-
cation and political success is occurring at a time when economic reform is
leading the island to a new and crucial phase of its development, as the rise
of the dual economy suggests.
One positive outcome of the reform would of course be a progressive
integration into the international market while maintaining the desirable
aspects of the social-economy model and, in particular, avoiding a mas-
sive rise in inequality. economic and social inequality is the main problem
facing progressive governments in latin america, which have profound-
ly changed the political landscape of the continent in the last few years.
although the social polarization so evident in most of latin america is
hard to imagine in cuba, the risk of a two-tier society is a distinct pos-
sibility contained within further development of the dual economy. the
country’s challenge lies in determining how to properly handle the grow-
ing social differentiation that arises from a progressive integration into the
world economy.
Younger generations in particular, who have not lived through the rev-
olutionary fervor and achievements of cuban socialism of the 1960s and
1970s, have much less incentive to look positively at the social economy,
whereas the modernizing sector appears to offer them a host of chances.

On the other hand, the more disadvantaged members of the population –
blue-collar workers, blacks and peasants – might feel increasingly thrust
into the social and psychological condition of losers. disenchantment with
their country could lead them to consider the socialist institutions irrel-
evant. it might not then be enough to recall, as external observers often do,
the remarkable features of cuban society, such as the provision of social
services, access to education and culture, and the overall level of equal-
ity and even income distribution, at least compared to much richer latin
american countries and, in general, developing nations.
as the cohesive forces of the revolution disappear, including the gen-
eration actually responsible for it, and the social economy becomes pri-
marily a support for the disadvantaged, cuba’s integration into the world
market may increasingly dictate the evolution of its economy and society.
it is therefore the task of the post-revolutionary leadership to guide the
country’s transition while at the same time retaining the inherited social-
ist achievements and aspirations to a fairer and more advanced society.
indeed, the “socialism of the 21st-century” that has been advocated as a
possible alternative to the neo-liberal development model has this as its
goal.
F.M. Critelli
Chapter 21
A Barrel of Oil for a Doctor: Resilient Cuba
ever since the cuban revolution triumphed in 1959, its imminent de-
mise has been predicted and eagerly awaited by various critics, especially
Washington and the cuban exile community. consistent efforts have been
made to hasten such demise in the more than four decades since. Yet, there
are numerous indicators that cuba is proving to be more durable than
imagined. a peaceful post-Fidel castro transition appears to be in progress.
cuba is reintegrating with latin america amid a resurgence of popularity
and support in latin america that has lead to innovative partnerships and
trade agreements. there are growing divisions regarding us policy toward
cuba within the united states and throughout the world1.
representations of cuba usually attribute its staying power to Fidel
castro’s authority, concentrating on economic and political deprivations.
they fail to capture cuba’s domestic and international sources of legitima-
cy, which have instead fostered its remarkable resilience. resilience, a term
referring to the ability of a system to cope with adversity and to recover
from or resist being affected by shocks or traumas is certainly applicable to
cuba. diverse social science disciplines have attempted to identify the fac-
tors and forces that enable some individuals or systems challenged by ad-
versity to make positive adaptations and in some case to emerge stronger,
with capacities that they may have not developed otherwise2. two articles in
1
Julia Sweig, “Fidel’s Final Victory”, in The Cuba Reader: History, Culture and Politics, eds. avi-
va chomsky, Barry carr and pamela m. smorkaloff (durham: duke university press, 2004),
235-243; Warren Hoge, “Cuba: UN Vote Reaffirms Opposition to US Embargo”, New York
Times, 31 October 2007; John McKinley, “For US Exporters in Cuba, Business Trumps Politics”,
New York Times, 12 november 2007; soraya castro mariño, “us-cuban relations during the
clinton administration”, Latin American Perspectives 4 (2002), 47-76.
2
margaret Waller, “resilience in ecosystemic context: evolution of the concept”, American
Journal of Orthopsychiatry 3 (2001), 290-297.
this volume, Basosi’s “in the shadow of the Washington consensus: cuba’s
rapprochement with latin america in a World Going unipolar, 1985-
1996”, and sobers’ ”investigating cuban internationalism: the First angolan
intervention, 1975”, although addressing differing aspects of aspects of
cuba’s history and development offer insight into these factors. Both articles
reveal characteristics that have enabled a small developing nation with lim-
ited resources not only to survive and adapt, but also develop in the face of
unrelenting hostility and “shocks” to its system, to even claim an influential
role in world affairs through its international actions. this theme is further
explored through the following comments on the Basosi and sobers articles.
1. Human Capital Development and Capacity Building
the foundation of cuba’s resilience is the priority the government has

placed on investing resources in its people. From the revolution’s outset,
the cuban state emphasized serving the poor underclass rather than ca-
tering to the elite, making public education and health services accessible
to the entire population. this produced tangible results as early as 1974,
whereby polyclinics were located throughout cuba including remote ru-
ral localities, the infant mortality rate that had dropped to 12 per 1000 live
births and a measurable rise in life expectancy was achieved. expansion to
a total of 16 medical schools produced a cuban doctor-patient ratio better
than that of the united states and the united Kingdom. By 1974, cuban lit-
eracy levels were determined by UNESCO to be among the highest in the
world, and even more exceptionally, cuba served as a model for the world
in its implementation of health promotion approach early on when it was
still being discussed as an objective at the World Health Organization3. By
the year 1982 cuba’s success in the health sphere was recognized by the
us as superior to those of other developing countries and rivaling that of
many developed countries4.
the significance of these achievements should not be underestimated.
For cuba, every nuance and component of us policy toward it has had pro-
found consequences. the gains were attained in spite of the near half-cen-
tury of attacks, economic siege and isolation and a sustained and restrictive
economic embargo blockade that endures today. declassified documents
have revealed numerous plots to assassinate castro and cia developed op-
erations which argued for “acts of sabotage, as well as a “a denial of money
and supplies to cuba, cutting real incomes and finance with the aim of caus-
ing hunger, desperation, and the overthrow of the Government”, a strategy
3
theodore macdonald, Third World Health Promotion and its Dependence on First World Wealth
(new York: mallen, 2001), 228-229.
4
Julie Feinsilver, Healing the Masses: Cuban Health Politics at Home and Abroad (san Francisco:
university of california press, 1993).
that has been pursued in various forms up to the present5.

the collective will to preserve national independence has been fortified
by the fractious history of us-cuban relations stemming back to the late
1800s. a majority of cubans are wary of any plans that involve a us-directed
political and economic system. most cubans also place high value not only
on their national sovereignty, but also on their social rights. after nearly fifty
years, most cubans have become accustomed to their social benefits such as
education and health care and are conscious that these social supports are
being curtailed through neoliberal policies in other nations6.
2. Economic Development and the Preservation of Social Gains
Basosi’s essay in this volume fully chronicles the events leading up to

the special period and cuba’s subsequent economic recovery. it should be
emphasized that the withdrawal of the soviet union and end of the special
trading relationship with eastern europe triggered a shock to the cuban
economy on the magnitude of a great depression. the opportunity was
seized to “bring the hammer down” on Fidel, as clinton proposed in the
1992 presidential campaign7. laws such as the 1992 cuban democracy act
(also known as the torricelli act) and the more punitive helms-Burton Bill
of 1996 created a “double-blockade” by further undermining trade and re-
ducing sources of foreign exchange or investment in the island8.
as Basosi depicts, the cuban economy, in spite of apocalyptic setbacks, not
only defied predictions that it would collapse within months of the fall of the
soviet union, but remarkably began to rebound. the unique manner in which
this was achieved captured the attention of the world and reflects the core of
cuba’s resilience. confronted with the need to become self-reliant, the cuban
government struggled to maintain its egalitarian ideals while it drew upon its
internal capacities. emphasis was placed upon preserving the social gains of
the revolution and the initiation of new economic strategies, most of which
were made possible by cuba’s accumulation of human capital and scientific
5
Edward Lansdale, “Operation Mongoose”, in The Cuba Reader, eds. chomsky, carr and
Smorkaloff, 540-544; Select Committee to Study Government Operations with Respect to In-
telligence Activities, “The Assassination Plots”, ibid., 552-557; Juan Tamayo, “One More As-
sassination Plot”, ibid., 666-670; Tim Anderson, “Contesting ‘Transition’. The US Plan for a
‘Free Cuba’”, Latin American Perspectives 6 (2005), 28-46.
6
ana maria Goicoechea-Balbona and enrique conill-mendoza, “international inclusiveness:
Publicizing Cuba’s Development of the ‘Good Life’”, International Social Work 43 (2000), 435-
451; Sweig, “Fidel’s Final Victory”, 235-243; Hans-Jurgen Burchardt, “Contours of the Future:
the new social dynamics in cuba”, Latin American Perspectives 6 (2002), 57-74; mao Xianglin,
“Cuban Reform and Economic Opening: Retrospective and Assessment”, Latin American Per-
spectives 6 (2007), 93-105; luis salazar. “cuba’s Foreign policy and the promise of alBa”,
NACLA Report on the Americas 4 (2006), 27-32.
7
Sweig, “Fidel’s Final Victory”, 235-243.
8
Anderson, “Contesting ‘Transition’”; Xianglin “Cuban Reform”.
knowledge9 and were bolstered by the strong political commitment of the ma-
jority of the population10. Facing critical scarcities of food, electricity and medi-
cal supplies and a debilitated transportation system, cuba fashioned its own
form of structural adjustment. it differed from the massive restructuring of
social services and public sectors experienced by other latin american nations
that reduced the capacity of their state health and welfare systems11 in con-
trast, cuba’s austerity measures emphasized the equalization of hardship and
priority on maintenance of the system of social guarantees, health standards,
and state regulation of labor relations. castro described this approach:
For us, the essential thing isn’t just to survive but also to develop […]
apart from the privations to which we may be subjected for an indeter-
minate length of time […] as a matter of principle [...] resources must be
shared amongst us all. [if workers are unemployed] we will guarantee a
large part of their wage. Nobody will be left without support.[Cuba has
been] deprived of more resources than any latin american country, but
we haven’t closed any schools, hospitals, polyclinics or medical services
at all, and we haven’t thrown anybody out of work with no pay12.
these austerity measures contributed to social stability and a safety net

for the population13. Based on the dual policy objectives of equity and prior-
ity for vulnerable groups, children, women, and the elderly were targeted
for protection from nutritional deficits through rationing, public health edu-
cation, workplace- and school-based feeding programs, and the promotion
of urban gardening. some initial deterioration in the population’s health sta-
tus occurred but it was short-lived and health indicators quickly improved14.
throughout this extraordinarily difficult period, cuba has maintained hu-
man development indicators that rank it among the most developed nations
of the world in spite of economic hardships and far fewer resources. life
expectancy at birth in cuba today is the same as for us citizens at 77 years
9
Ken cole, “cuba: the process of socialist development”, Latin American Perspectives 3 (2002), 40-
56; agustin davila, “cuba and the Knowledge economy: cuban Biotechnology”, Monthly Review
7 (2006), available at Monthly Review on-line, http://monthlyreview.org/1206lagedavila.htm.
10
miguel centeno, “the return of cuba to latin america”, Keynote speech given at the
Annual Conference of the Society for Latin American Studies, leiden, the netherlands, 2-4 april
2004, available at www.princeton.edu/~cenmiga/works/the%20return%20of%20cuba%20
to%20latin%20america.doc (cited 2 February 2008).
11
Carlos Muntaner et al., “Venezuela’s Barrio Adentro: An Alternative to Neoliberalism in
health care”, International Journal of Health Services 4 (2006), 803-11.
12
Quoted in tomás Borge, Face to Face with Fidel Castro (Melbourne: Ocean Press, 1993), 115-
116, emphasis added.
13
Miguel Centeno, “The Return”; Burchardt, “Contours”, 57-74; Pol DeVos, “‘No One Left
abandoned’: cuba’s national health system since the 1959 revolution”, International Journal
of Health Services 1 (2005), 189-207.
14
richard Garfield and sarah santana, “the impact of the economic crisis and the us em-
bargo on health in cuba”, American Journal of Public Health 1 (1997), 15-20.
and cuba’s infant mortality rate was 6 per 1000 live births, a figure less than
that of the united states, which was 7.0 per 1000 live births in 200715 cuba’s
patient-to-doctor ratio is still among the best in the world and significantly
better than those of the united states and canada16.
cuba spends 32% of its Gdp in social programs, the highest investment
in latin america which demonstrates the strong political will, the proactive
role of the state in social welfare and the commitment to universal accessibil-
ity17. the commitment of public spending on education means that cuban
children attend relatively well-funded and adequately equipped elementary
schools, where the student-teacher ratios are among the most favorable in
the world. Cuba is smaller than the state of Virginia, yet it contains 57 cen-
ters of higher education. this has resulted in an exceedingly highly educated
population where a 99.8%, the adult literacy rate, places cuba on a par with
the world’s most developed nations and averages 15 percentage points high-
er than the literacy rates found in other latin american countries18.
still, the health and education systems did not remain unscathed through-
out the austerity of the special period. school quality declined because of lack
of funds for cleaning materials and school supplies as well as the exodus of
teachers due to low salaries19. cuba’s model health program has been threat-
ened by serious shortages of medical supplies and the inability to replace
simple diagnostic equipment or purchase drugs due to lack of currency. the
infant mortality rate was not affected, but there was a increase in underweight
children and a decrease in their nutritional status. illnesses such as tuberculo-
sis, sexually transmitted and water-borne diseases have reappeared20.
the economic measures such as the expansion of tourism, expansion of
the private sector and the dollarization of the economy solved some of the
immediate problems but also generated new ones that have impacted cuban
society. the measures were embarked upon reluctantly for fear of unleashing
market mechanisms and were viewed as the only alternative for saving the
revolution21. the cuban government attempted to increase the flow of dol-
lars by legalizing their possession and by opening dollar stores for cubans
15
United Nations Development Program, “Human Development Report 2006/2007”, ac-
cessed at united nations development program on-line, http://hdrstats.undp.org/country_
fact_sheets/cty_fs_cuB.
16
ibid.
17
lorena Barberia, “poverty and inequality in cuba”, Hemisphere: A Magazine of the Americas
17 (2007), 20-29.
18
lavinia Gasperini, “the cuban education system: lessons and dilemmas”, World Bank
Country Studies, Education Reform and Management Publications Series 1 (2000), 1-28.
19
miren uriarte, “social impact of the economic measures”, in Reinventing the Revolution:A
Contemporary Reader, eds. philip Brenner at al. (lanham, md: rowman and littlefield, 2008),
285-291; Gasperini. “the cuban education”.
20
robin Williams, “in the shadow of plenty, cuba copes with a crippled health care system”,
in Reinventing the Revolution, eds. Brenner et al., 281-284; michele Barry, “effect of the us embargo
and economic decline on health in cuba”, Annals of Internal Medicine 132 (2000), 151-154.
21
uriarte, “social impact”.
to purchase imported goods in 1993. remittances from abroad became criti-

cal in enabling many cubans to get through the special period and became
a source of hard currency for the state. access to dollars increased for those
with family abroad and for those employed in new sectors of the economy
such as the tourist industry, creating a dual economy. a two-class system of
consumption has emerged, generating new bases of social inequalities and
a new materialism that departs from the income equity that existed prior to
the special period. previously, the highest paid workers, mainly profession-
als such as doctors and engineers, were paid only 4.5 times as much as the
lowest paid workers22. these social and economic changes had an undermin-
ing effect on socialist ideals of working for the good of society rather than
individual gain23. the so-called “inverted pyramid”, enables a waiter in a
tourist hotel to accrue a salary worth many more times than that of a top pro-
fessional working for the state which has contributed to some devaluation of
the status of education and professional preparation24. the superior work-
ing conditions and rewards for workers in the “new economy’ compared to
lower paying state jobs paid in pesos has contributed to a brain drain from
the professional and intellectual sector to the tourist industry25.
the impact on values as a result of the economic changes has been most
notable among youth who are generationally removed from the revolution
and never experienced the relatively prosperous times of the 1970s and 1980s.
exposure to international tourists has stirred material yearnings and has con-
tributed to a disengagement from the labor market among some youth26.
decline in the role of education as a priority in young people’s aspirations has
also been noted because other paths to higher earnings have become available,
including sexual tourism27. this has spurred the implementation of a num-
ber of social programs to incorporate disengaged youth into various work and
study alternatives, which have made some progress in reversing these trends28.
nevertheless, the cuban economy has continued to develop and has
changed radically since the special period in 1990. it has shifted from its
historical role as an exporter of sugar to a diversified economy. By the latter
half of the 1990s, tourism brought in greater profits than the sugar indus-
try. the earnings of emergent sectors such as tourism, biotechnology, and
oil have surpassed those of traditional activities29. cuba has been especially
22
ibid.
23
susan eckstein, “dollarization and its discontents: remittances and the remaking of cuba
in the post-soviet era”, Comparative Politics 36 (2004), 179-192.
24
ibid.; uriarte, “social impact”.
25
eckstein, “dollarization”.
26
maria isabel domínguez, “cuban Youth: aspirations, social perceptions and identity”, in
Reinventing the Revolution, eds. Brenner et al., 292-299; uriarte, “social impact”.
27
domínguez, “cuban Youth”.
28
ibid.
29
pedro monreal, “cuban development in the Bolivarian matrix”, NACLA Report on the Amer-
ica 4 (2006), 22-27; Xianglin “cuban reform”.
successful in mobilizing its substantial scientific infrastructure for the de-

velopment of a successful biotechnology industry that has effectively intro-
duced drugs and vaccines of its own, along with a nascent pharmaceutical
industry that has achieved considerable success in exports30. using a mod-
el radically unlike the technology parks that have been created in various
underdeveloped countries, cuba has developed artisanal biotechnology
centers on agricultural cooperatives, incorporating rural populations into
agriculture and providing training through both their labor as well as their
knowledge of traditional farming techniques and their active participation
in the generation of new technologies. since 2000 there has also been in-
creased investment in the information technology industry31.
cuba’s healthcare services have risen to the top of its export activities.
all this is made possible by the island’s wealth of human capital that is
being used extensively in the mutually beneficial agreements particular-
ly between Cuba and Venezuela32. a thriving medical tourism industry
was born as tourist establishments began housing medical patients from
Venezuela and other Latin American and Caribbean countries33. through
“Operation Miracle” Cuba has offered its state of the art treatments for eye
diseases, enabling some 20,000 persons to recover their sight34. By 2005 it
was estimated that earnings from these services exports have surpassed
gross traditional tourism earnings35. the revolution’s investment in human
capital has produced an overcapacity of professional and scientific talent
and has 10,000 current university students in its science and technology
programs. looking ahead, cuba’s challenge is to continue to develop its
economy to expand the job opportunities of its highly educated popula-
tion. this will enable cuba to position itself to take advantage of the global
economy and to compete with the upper ranks of developing nations36.
3. Foreign Policy: International Solidarity and Medical Diplomacy
One of the most remarkable aspects at the root of the Cuban

revolution’s longevity and resilience is its internationalist missions. the
cuban government has cultivated a multi-dimensional foreign policy that
enables it “to recalibrate the overwhelming asymmetry of power between
30
davila, “cuba and the Knowledge economy”.
31
ibid.; lynn mytelka, “pathways and policies to (Bio) pharmaceutical innovation systems in
developing countries”, Industry and Innovation 13 (2006), 415-435.
32
monreal, “cuban development”.
33
ibid.
34
salazar, “cuba’s Foreign policy”.
35
Sweig, “Fidel’s Final Victory”; Julie Feinsilver, “Cuban Medical Diplomacy: When the Left
Got it right”, in Council on Hemispheric Relations on-line, www.coha.org/2006/2006/10/30/cu-
ban-medical-diplomacy (cited 30 October 2006).
36
cuba and the united states”37. to this end, cuba has sent thousands of doc-
tors, teachers, and other personnel on humanitarian assignments to vari-
ous countries since the earliest years of the revolution38.
sobers’ article in this volume analyzes what is probably the most dra-
matic example of cuba’s international solidarity when it deployed more than
300,000 cubans in angola between 1975 and 1991, as well as serving in a va-
riety of civilian positions such as doctors and educators. they succeeded in
repelling south african invasions and contributed to the decisive defeat of the
south african armed forces at cuito cuanavale in the largest battle in africa
since World War ii39. sobers augments the compelling evidence that the cost-
ly and politically risky actions were an organic component of cuba’s foreign
policy, done in the service of the commitment to international solidarity, rather
than strategic ones or as a proxy of the soviet union. cuba’s actions placed the
country squarely in the center of the international discourse on racism and co-
lonialism, inspiring admiration and gratitude in many part of the world, espe-
cially africa. nelson mandela himself credited cuba with changing the course
of history in southern africa and contributing to the end of apartheid:
the cuban people hold a special place in the hearts of the people of africa.
the cuban internationalists have made a contribution to african independence,
freedom, and justice unparalleled for its principled and selfless character. We in
africa are used to being victims of countries wanting to carve up our territory
or subvert our sovereignty. it is unparalleled in african history to have another
people rise to the defense of one of us. the defeat of the apartheid army was
an inspiration to the struggling people in South Africa! The defeat of the racist
army at Cuito Cuanavale has made it possible for me to be here today!40
the actions in angola and other acts of international solidarity have

been a crucial element that has fostered the cuban revolution’s resilience,
perhaps serving as a more effective policy tool than traditional ones. cuba
is no longer able to afford to engage in missions such as angola and has
tapped into its reservoir of human capital to expand its medical diplomacy.
By the close of 2005, cuban medical personnel were collaborating in 68
countries around the globe, including continents outside the western hemi-
sphere such as africa and asia41. cuba’s highly developed expertise in di-
saster relief has led to medical missions in post-tsunami indonesia and
37
salazar, “cuba’s Foreign policy”; Feinsilver, “cuban medical diplomacy”.
38
h. michael erisman, “cuban development aid: south-south diversification and counterde-
pendency politics”, in Cuban Foreign Policy Confronts a New International Order, eds. h. michael
erisman and John Kirk (Boulder: lynne rienner, 1991), 139-165; Feinsilver, “healing the masses”.
39
isaac saney, “african stalingrad: the cuban revolution, internationalism, and the end of
apartheid”, Latin American Perspectives 5 (2006), 81-117.
40
nelson mandela, Nelson Mandela Speaks: Forging a Non-Racist South Africa (new York: path-
finder, 1993).
41
Feinsilver, “cuban medical diplomacy”.
post-earthquake pakistan, efforts that continue today42.

in addition to improving the health of millions through direct provision of
medical care and medical education and training programs, cuba has accu-
mulated considerable “symbolic capital” in the form of goodwill, prestige, in-
fluence, credit and power as a result of its international actions43. Furthermore,
cuba’s leadership and outspoken stance on issues such as the debt crisis (de-
scribed in detail in this volume by Basosi) also contributed to positive public
opinion. “symbolic capital” has been effectively converted into material cap-
ital in the form of bilateral and multilateral aid as well as trade, credit and
investment. equally important is the fact that cuba’s medical diplomacy con-
tributes to the positive views held by other governments, translating into vot-
ing results at the united nations on issues of particular importance to cuba44.
cuba’s diplomatic and economic relations have expanded regionally and glob-
ally due to the shift in the global and hemispheric political climate. as of 2007,
30 of 32 latin american governments maintained normalized ties with cuba
and a number of governments, particularly Venezuela, Canada, Spain, and
china, expanded trade agreements and commercial ventures with the island45.
the latin american medical school (elam) was created after hurricane
mitch in 1998 in order to insure the sustainability of cuba’s medical diplomacy
and demonstrates other positive adaptations that strengthen external relation-
ships and foster cuba’s resilience. elam offers a free six-year medical edu-
cation to over 10,000 students from rural and marginalized communities in
latin america, africa, asia, and even the united states who commit to return
to their countries to practice medicine in poor communities for at least five
years46. cuba’s medical programs in latin america and other parts of the de-
veloping world stand out as a viable and principled response to the neoliberal
reforms of healthcare services that have increased inequality and reduced ac-
cessibility, especially for the poorest social sectors in outlying areas47.
By far the largest cuban medical cooperation program ever attempted is
the present one with Venezuela. A highly creative and lucrative oil-for-doc-
tors trade agreement with Venezuela has established preferential pricing for
cuba’s exportation of professional services in exchange for oil, joint invest-
ments in strategically important sectors for both countries, and the provision
of credit48. in exchange, cuba provides medical services to unserved and un-
42
Pol De Vos et al., “Cuba’s International Cooperation in Health Care”, International Journal
of Health Services (2007), 761-776; aasim akhtar, “cuban doctors in pakistan: Why cuba still
inspires”, Monthy Review 7 (2006), 49-55; Feinsilver, “cuban medical diplomacy”.
43
44
Warren Hoge, “Cuba: UN Vote Reaffirms Opposition to US Embargo”, New York Times, 31
October 2007; Feinsilver, “Cuban Medical Diplomacy”.
45
46
robert huish and John Kirk, “cuban medical internationalism and the development of the
latin american school of medicine”, Latin American Perspectives 6 (2007), 77-92.
47
DeVos, “No One Left Abandoned”; Muntaner et al., “Venezuela’s Barrio Adentro”.
48
monreal, “cuban development”.
derserved communities through the Barrio adentro healthcare programs,

which have provided free medical attention to 17 million Venezuelans with
30,000 medical professionals and a network of 600 comprehensive health
clinics, 600 rehabilitation and physical therapy centers, 35 high technology
diagnostic centers and 100,000 ophthalmologic surgeries49. cuba also pro-
vides similar medical services in Bolivia on a smaller scale at Venezuela’s
expense. plans are in motion for the construction of another medical school
where Cuba will train doctors and healthcare workers in Venezuela and the
expansion of the latin american and caribbean region-wide ophthalmolog-
ic surgery program (Operation Miracle) to perform 600,000 eye operations
over ten years. Based upon cuba’s successful track record developing health
programs especially under difficult circumstances, profitable triangular co-
operation agreements have been established with donor countries. Germany,
France and Japan are providing financial support for cuban medical as-
sistance in third countries. multilateral agencies, such as the World health
Organization (WHO) and the Pan American Health Organization (PAHO)
also finance medical services provided by cuba for third countries50.
cuba demonstrates the essential characteristics of resilience in its pos-
itive adaptations in the face of challenges and its development of new
capacities. castro reflected on this in his remarks about cuba’s climbing
economic growth rate in 2006. he stated: “We should thank the blockade
because it forced us to grow and rise to the occasion”51.
cuba has developed numerous innovations that offer progressive alterna-
tives to the dominant policies of neoliberalism. at a time when health care ac-
cess and cost are being intensely debated in the united states, cuba’s model of
public health, which produces better key health indicators for a fraction of the
cost of that of the us, deserves closer examination. elam and cuba’s medical
diplomacy programs serve as models not only in public health, community
medicine and capacity building, but represent an alternative strategy for for-
eign policy that enhances human and national security, a central concern of na-
tions in the 21st century. agreements such as alBa (Bolivarian alternative for
the americas) and the more recent peoples’ trade agreement (tcp) between
Cuba, Venezuela and Bolivia offer a new vision of social welfare and mutual
cooperation through socially oriented agreements involving food production,
literacy, health care and trade as opposed to deregulated profit maximization
schemes. these approaches show promise for improving the cuban economy
but also fortifying the region from the types of economic shocks that occurred
in the past. and for all of these reasons, cuba continues to inspire.
49
salazar, “cuba’s Foreign policy”; Muntaner et al., “Venezuela’s Barrio Adentro”.
50
51
Fidel castro, speech on 1 may 2006, cited in larry Birns and adrienne nothnagel, “cuba
comes in from the cold”, Council on Hemispheric Affairs on-line, www.coha.org/2006/07/31/
(cited 31 July 2006).
List of
Contributors
Ronald Pruessen is the former chair of the university of toronto’s department of

history. his research and teaching focus on 20th century u.s. foreign policy and inter-
national relations. he has written on John Foster dulles (The Road to Power, 1888-1952)
and some of the key crises and issues of the earlier cold War period (e.g., the “German
Question” and the “Offshore Islands Crises”). Current interests include U.S.-China re-
lations in the post-1945 period, the early stages of u.s. involvement in indochina, and
the historical roots of “globalization”. he is currently editing (with soraya castro) a
volume marking the 50th anniversary of the cuban revolution: Cuba, the United States,
and the World Since 1959.
Rick Halpern is the chair of american studies and the principal of new college
at the university of toronto. his publications include Down on the Killing Floor: Black
and White Workers in Chicago’s Packing Houses, 1904-1954 (1997); Racializing Class,
Classifying Race: Labour and Difference in Britain, the USA and Africa (2000); The American
South and the Italian Mezzogiorno: Essays in Comparative History (2002); and Slavery and
Emancipation (2002). his research interests focus on race and labor in a number of na-
tional and transnational contexts.
Max Guderzo is full professor of history of international relations at the school of

political sciences, and the research coordinator of the machiavelli center for cold War
studies at the university of Florence. his publications include Madrid e l’arte della diplo-
mazia. L’incognita spagnola nella seconda Guerra mondiale (Firenze, 1995); and Interesse na-
zionale e responsabilità globale. Gli Stati Uniti, l’Alleanza Atlantica e l’integrazione europea
negli anni di Johnson, 1963-1969 (Firenze, 2000).
Ada Ferrer is associate professor of history at new York university. she is

the author of Insurgent Cuba: Race, Nation, and Revolution, 1868-1898 (university of
north carolina press, 1999), which was awarded the 2000 Berkshire Book prize for
the best first book written by a woman in any field of history. her current book in
progress is a study of the repercussions of the haitian revolution in cuba and the
atlantic World.
Irene Fattacciu is a doctoral student at the european university institute in

Florence. she graduated from the university of Florence with a thesis on the harvard
summer school for cuban teachers in 1900, focusing on racial and gender issues in
the history of cuban national identity. she has done research at Brown university,
harvard, in cuba and spain. she is currently working on the early modern spanish
world and colonial latin america; her phd project investigates forms of diffusion of
cacao in eighteenth-century spain.
Loredana Giolitto fue doctora contratada en el instituto de historia del

consejo superior de investigaciones científicas de madrid, en el Grupo de estudios
comparados del caribe y del mundo atlántico. doctora en historia contemporánea
por la universidad de Génova con una tesis por título “Participar por igual”. Il dibat-
tito sulla questione razziale a Cuba, 1898-1912. tiene publicados artículos en colombia,
Italia y República Checa, por ejemplo “Esclavitud y libertad en Cartagena de Indias.
reflexiones en torno a un caso de manumisión a finales del periodo colonial”; “il di-
battito sul razzismo nella cuba indipendente (1898-1912). interpretazioni a confron-
to”; “Nacionalidad y ciudadanía en la primera Constitución de la República cubana”.
Marta I. Blaquier Ascaño es doctor en derecho, actualmente profesor titular

adjunto del departamento de computación de la Facultad de matemática y
Computación de la Universidad de la Habana. Es Vicepresidenta de Computación de
la sociedad cubana de matemática y computación y vicepresidente de la sociedad
cubana de derecho e informática. unión nacional de Juristas de cuba; ha realizado
colaboración científica con el istituto per la documentazione Giuridica (idG) del cnr
italiano desde 1992 hasta el 2001; con el dipartamento di scienze della informazione
de la universidad de pisa, italia en el 2000; departamento de informática de la
universidad de la coruña, españa en el 2001. universidad estacio de sá, río de
Janeiro Brasil y profesor de dicha maestría. tiene numerosa publicaciones en revistas
internacionales en el ámbito de la ciencia de la computación.
Angelo Baracca is professor of physics at the university of Firenze. he has given

courses and performed investigations on several fields of physics, and has published
several textbooks and essays. his main interests in more recent times have turned
towards problems of peace and war, international relations and nuclear armaments,
and the history, methodology and critical analysis of science. in this context, he has
developed a scientific collaboration with the Faculty of physics of the university of
havana, cuba, and performed a comprehensive study on the history of the develop-
ment of physics in cuba.
Marial Iglesias Utset es profesora e investigadora de la Facultad de Filosofía e

historia de la universidad de la habana. Graduada como master of arts en Filosofía
en la Universidad Estatal de Moscú (1985) y Doctor en Ciencias Históricas por la
universidad de la habana (2001). es autora de varios ensayos y artículos sobre historia
social y cultural de cuba en el siglo XX publicados en libros y revistas cubanas e inter-
nacionales. su libro Las metáforas del cambio en la vida cotidiana: Cuba 1898-1902 (unión,
2003), obtuvo el premio de ensayo 2002 de la unión de escritores y artistas de cuba y
en el año 2004 el premio anual de la crítica otorgado por la academia de ciencias de
cuba y el instituto del libro a los mejores títulos a escala nacional publicados en ese
año. en el 2006 el libro recibió el premio clarence h. haring de la american historical
association al mejor libro de historia de américa latina publicado entre el 2000-2006.
Alessandra Lorini teaches history of inter-american relations at the university

of Florence. she holds a m.phil and ph.d in american history from columbia
university, has researched and published extensively on us public culture, atlantic
crossings of racial theories and national movements. she has organized international
workshops on us/cuban relations at new York university (2000) and the university
of Florence (2007, 2009), given many lectures and presented numerous papers at
american, canadian, German, French, spanish and cuban universities. her major
publications include: Rituals of Race: American Public Culture and the Search for Racial
Democracy (Virginia University Press, 1999); Ai confini della libertà. Saggi di storia ameri-
cana (donzelli, 2001); An Intimate and contested Relation. The United States and Cuba in the
Late 19th and Early 20th Centuries (Firenze university press, 2006); L’impero della libertà e
l’isola strategica. Gli Stati Uniti e Cuba tra Otto e Novecento (liguori, 2007).
Amparo Sánchez Cobos, es licenciada en Geografía e historia por la uned y

doctora en historia por la universidad Jaume i de castellón. Fue becaria predoctoral
del csic y actualmente es becaria postdoctoral en la university of Windsor, canadá.
es autora del libro Sembrando ideales. Anarquistas españoles en Cuba (1902-1925), (csic,
sevilla, 2008), así como de varios artículos publicados en revistas internacionales, entre
ellos “Extranjeros perniciosos. El orden público y la expulsión de anarquistas españoles
de cuba, 1900-1930” (Historia Social, n. 59, Valencia, 2007) e “Hispanofobia en tiempos
de paz. Animadversión hacia ‘lo español’ y su reflejo en las relaciones diplomáticas
entre españa y cuba, 1911-1912” (Op Cit, n. 15, puerto rico, 2003). además ha partici-
pado en varios congresos internacionales relacionados con la historia del caribe.
Michael Lima is a ph.d. candidate of history at the university of toronto. he

is recipient of the social humanities research council of canada (sshrc) award
for his current project titled: Rebel Youth: Socialist Transformation and State Legitimacy
in early Revolutionary Cuba, 1959-1962. he analyzes how cuban youth developed as
the principal focus of ideological transformation, and how youth support emerged
as a key source of regime legitimacy.
Gabriella Paolucci es profesora de sociología de la universidad de Florencia. sus

aáreas de investigación principales son: la sociología del tiempo, sociología urbana y
teorías sociológicas. desde hace años su mayor interés es la investigación empírica y
teórica de la estructura temporal de las sociedades contemporáneas, con particular re-
ferencia a los cambios en las estructuras urbanas espacio-temporales. está realizando
una investigación en cuba sobre la memoria de la revolución. ha curado la versión
italiana del escrito de sartre sobre la revolución cubana de 1959. sus publicaciones
más relevantes son: Il disagio del tempo (roma, 1986); Tempi postmoderni (milano, 1993);
La città macchina del tempo (milano, 1998); Jean Paul Sartre visita Cuba (Bolsena, 2005);
¨sartre´s humanism and the cuban revolution¨ (Theory and Society 36, 2007): Libri di pi-
etra. Città e memorie (napoli, 2007); Bourdieu dopo Bourdieu (torino, 2009).
Raffaele Paloscia enseña a la univesidad de Florencia, es director del

departamento de urbanistica y planeamento del territorio y professor catedratico
de urbanistica. es coordenador de: inura, sede de Florencia (International Network
for Urban Research and Action); labpsm (Laboratorio Città e territorio nel Sud del
Mondo); convenios culturales con las universidades de león (nicaragua); caracas
(Venezuela); Colima (Messico); Catolica Nordestana (Dominicana), Jadavpur-
Kolkata (india), Belgrado (serbia). es esperto de urbanistica y ordenamento
territorial, especificamente en los paises del sur, has coordenado muchas investiga-
ciones y proyectos de cooperación internacional, come habana ecopolis. ha publi-
cado libros y ensayes sobre ese subyecto en italia y al extranjero.
Luca Spitoni, arquitecto urbanista, es investigador del dipartimento di

urbanistica e pianificazione del territorio de la Facoltà di architettura di Firenze.
en el período 2005-2008 ha llevado a cabo una investigación sobre el patrimonio ter-
ritorial de la ciudad de la habana. se ocupa de proyectos, de desarrollo local y de
procesos de participación en la gestión y transformación del territorio.
Coral García Rodríguez. licenciada en Filología hispánica por la uam de

madrid, consigue el doctorado europeo en Filología por la uned de la misma ciu-
dad, recibiendo el premio extraordinario por la tesis doctoral. ha sido lectora de es-
pañol en Boston (tutfs university) y en la ciudad italiana de Údine; en la actualidad
trabaja en la universidad de Florencia. su labor investigadora se centra en la recep-
ción italiana de la poesía y el teatro del s. XX, en la traducción literaria y en la didácti-
ca de la lengua. ha publicado numerosos artículos y reseñas en revistas de prestigio,
diversos libros (entre los que destacan Il Gran Cid delle Spagne; Teatro español en Italia)
y traducciones de obras españolas e italianas (entre otras, Si mi voz muriera en tierra.
Breve antologia della generazione poetica del 27; J. munárriz, Per questo vivo nelle parole; J.
l. alonso de santos, Album familiare; m. luzi, Primicias del desierto).
Ilse Girona, daughter of cuban painter Julio Girona, studied fine arts and liter-
ature in the united states and italy, before receiving her ph.d. from the committee
on social thought at the university of chicago. she presently teaches english lan-
guage in the Faculty of letters of the university of Florence. in recent years, she has
exhibited her drawings and paintings locally.
Vincenzo Perna holds a degree in music from dams/university of Bologna

and a PhD in Ethnomusicology from the School of Oriental and African Studies,
uK. he has lectured at universities and conservatoires, participated in interna-
tional conferences and seminars, contributed to the report Music in Europe (EMO/
european commission 1996), edited and translated various books on popular mu-
sic, and written on popular and folk music for italian and international publica-
tions. his major books include Timba, the Sound of the Cuban Crisis (ashgate 2005),
which in 2006 was awarded an honourable mention by the alan merriam prize,
society for ethnomusicology, usa. he has contributed to Il Giornale della Musica
and other italian and foreign magazines, and has been a member of the editorial
Board of World Music Magazine. he is presently the secretary of the italian Branch of
the international association for the study of popular music, usa.
Pablo Arco Pino es profesor del departamento de historia de la Facultad de Filosofía

e historia de la universidad de la habana y especialista en historia contemporánea.
ha realizado trabajo de asesoría en los ministerios de educación y educación superior,
instituto cubano de radio y televisión y en el instituto cubano dearte e industria
cinematográfica, colaboración científica con la universidad de Quintana roo, en
méxico, y la universidad de castilla la mancha y el centro de estudios universitarios
de talavera de la reina en españa. ha participado en eventos realizados por centros
de educación superior o investigación regional en la urss, checoslovaquia, méxico,
España, Italia, Martinica, Venezuela. Es presidente del evento internacional anual
Dinámica de los Problemas del Mundo Contemporáneo (universidad de la habana).
Candace Sobers is a doctoral candidate at the university of toronto. she earned

her Ba (hons.) Bachelor of arts (honours) in history from Queen’s university, and
a masters of science in international relations and international history from the
london school of economics. she was managing editor of the Cold War History jour-
nal and has worked in international development in canada and the democratic
republic of congo. her doctoral dissertation considers united states foreign policy
towards revolutionary angola in the 1970s, with particular emphasis on revolu-
tionary transnationalism and ideas of modernity and development among us for-
eign policy elites.
Maria Stella Rognoni received a ph.d in history of international relations

from the Faculty of political science “cesare alfieri”, Florence. she teaches african
history at the university of Florence and history of international relations at the
university for Foreigners, perugia; she is a member of the teaching staff of the
machiavelli center for cold War studies. she has studied the bipolar confronta-
tion in India and Africa, the decolonisation process, and the role of NGOs in de-
velopment cooperation; she is a member of the teaching staff of the machiavelli
center for cold War studies. her publications include: Scacchiera congolese, mate-
rie prime, decolonizzazione e guerra fredda nell’Africa dei primi anni Sessanta (Firenze,
2003); Gandhi (Milano, 2004); “Opportune, importune, l’impegno di La Pira per la
pace in algeria”, in p.l. Ballini et al. (eds.), Giorgio La Pira e la Francia. Temi e percorsi
di ricerca, da Maritain a de Gaulle (Firenze, 2005).
Duccio Basosi holds a phd in history of international relations from the

university of Florence. he teaches north american history and history of
International Relations at the University of Venice. The author of several articles on
US foreign policy in the 1970s and 1980s, he won the SISSCO award by the Italian
society for the study of contemporary history for his monograph on the end of the
Bretton Woods monetary system (Il governo del dollaro, Firenze, 2006).
Davide Gualerzi holds a ph.d. from the new school for social research, new
York. he currently teaches political economy at the department of economic
sciences, university of padua, and had teaching experiences at the university of
pisa and Bard college (nY, usa). his most recent publication is the essay The com-
ing of Age of Information Technologies and the Path of Transformational Growth (london
2009). he has done research in the fields of political economy, macroeconomics,
Growth and structural change, urban and regional development; his most re-
cent interests are in development and industrial structure in latin america and
cuba. a consultant to italian and international institutions, including the european
commission and the italian ministry for Foreign affairs, he was twice in eritrea to
work on projects of the italian cooperation.
Filomena M. Critelli is an assistant professor at the university of Buffalo in the

school of social Work. she received a master in social Work from the university at
Buffalo and ph.d. from the university at albany in social Welfare where she teach-
es courses in social welfare policy, community social work and international social
work. her publications focus on u.s and transnational social policies as they impact
vulnerable groups such as women, children and immigrants. some recent publica-
tions include The Impact of September 11th on Immigrants in the United State; Caregiving
and Welfare Reform: Voices of Low-Income Foster Mothers and Beyond the Veil in Pakistan.
strumenti
per la didattica e la ricerca
1. Brunetto chiarelli, renzo Bigazzi, 15. simone Guercini, roberto pio-

luca sineo (a cura di), Alia: Antro- van, Schemi di negoziato e tecni-
pologia di una comunità dell’entroterra che di comunicazione per il tessile e
siciliano abbigliamento
2. Vincenzo Cavaliere, Dario Rosini, 16. antonio calvani, Technological in-
Da amministratore a manager. Il diri- novation and change in the university.
gente pubblico nella gestione del perso- Moving towards the Virtual University
nale: esperienze a confronto 17. paolo emilio pecorella, Tell Barri/Ka-
3. carlo Biagini, Information technology hat: la campagna del 2000. Relazione
ed automazione del progetto preliminare
4. cosimo chiarelli, Walter pasini (a 18. marta chevanne, Appunti di Patolo-
cura di), Paolo Mantegazza. Medico, gia Generale. Corso di laurea in Tecni-
antropologo, viaggiatore che di Radiologia Medica per Immagini
5. luca solari, Topics in Fluvial and La- e Radioterapia
goon Morphodynamics 19. Paolo Ventura, Città e stazione
6. salvatore cesario, chiara Fredia- ferroviaria
nelli, alessandro remorini, Un 20. nicola spinosi, Critica sociale e
pacchetto evidence based di tecniche co- individuazione
gnitivo-comportamentali sui generis 21. Roberto Ventura (a cura di), Dalla
7. marco masseti, Uomini e (non solo) misurazione dei servizi alla customer
topi. Gli animali domestici e la fauna satisfaction
antropocora 22. dimitra Babalis (a cura di), Ecolo-
8. simone margherini (a cura di), BIL gical Design for an Effective Urban
Bibliografia Informatizzata Leopardiana Regeneration
1815-1999: manuale d’uso ver. 1.0 23. massimo papini, debora tringali (a
9. paolo puma, Disegno dell’architettura. cura di), Il pupazzo di garza. L’espe-
Appunti per la didattica rienza della malattia potenzialmente
10. antonio calvani (a cura di), In- mortale nei bambini e negli adolescenti
novazione tecnologica e cambiamen- 24. manlio marchetta, La progettazione
to dell’università. Verso l’università della città portuale. Sperimentazioni di-
virtuale dattiche per una nuova Livorno
11. leonardo casini, enrico marone, 25. Fabrizio F.V. Arrigoni, Note su pro-
silvio menghini, La riforma della Po- getto e metropoli
litica Agricola Comunitaria e la filiera 26. leonardo casini, enrico marone,
olivicolo-olearia italiana silvio menghini, OCM seminativi:
12. salvatore cesario, L’ultima a dover tendenze evolutive e assetto territoriale
morire è la speranza. Tentativi di nar- 27. pecorella paolo emilio, raffaella pie-
rativa autobiografica e di “autobiografia robon Benoit, Tell Barri/Kahat: la cam-
assistita” pagna del 2001. Relazione preliminare
13. alessandro Bertirotti, L’uomo, il suo- 28. nicola spinosi, Wir Kinder. La que-
no e la musica stione del potere delle relazione adulti/
14. maria antonietta rovida, Palazzi se- bambini
nesi tra ‘600 e ‘700. Modelli abitativi e 29. stefano cordero di montezemolo, I
architettura tra tradizione e innovazione profili finanziari delle società vinicole
30. luca Bagnoli, maurizio catalano, cattolico nel secondo Novecento italiano
Il bilancio sociale degli enti non profit: 47. stefano alessandri, Sintesi e discus-
esperienze toscane sioni su temi di chimica generale
31. elena rotelli, Il capitolo della cattedra- 48. Gianni Galeota (a cura di), Traslocare,
le di Firenze dalle origini al XV secolo riaggregare, rifondare. Il caso della Bi-
32. leonardo trisciuzzi, Barbara San- blioteca di Scienze Sociali dell’Universi-
drucci, Tamara Zappaterra, Il recupero tà di Firenze
del sé attraverso l’autobiografia 49. Gianni cavallina, Nuove città antichi
33. nicola spinosi, Invito alla psicologia segni. Tre esperienze didattiche
sociale 50. Bruno Zanoni, Tecnologia alimentare
34. raffaele moschillo, Laboratorio di di- 1. La classe delle operazioni unitarie di
segno. Esercitazioni guidate al disegno disidratazione per la conservazione dei
di arredo prodotti alimentari
35. niccolò Bellanca, Le emergenze uma- 51. Gianfranco martiello, La tutela pena-
nitarie complesse. Un’introduzione le del capitale sociale nelle società per
36. Giovanni allegretti, Porto Alegre una azioni
biografia territoriale. Ricercando la qua- 52. salvatore cingari (a cura di), Cultu-
lità urbana a partire dal patrimonio ra democratica e istituzioni rappresen-
sociale tative. Due esempi a confronto: Italia e
37. riccardo passeri, leonardo Qua- Romania
gliotti, christian simoni, Procedure 53. laura leonardi (a cura di), Il distret-
concorsuali e governo dell’impresa arti- to delle donne
giana in Toscana 54. cristina delogu (a cura di), Tecnolo-
38. nicola spinosi, Un soffitto viola. Psi- gia per il web learning. Realtà e scenari
coterapia, formazione, autobiografia 55. luca Bagnoli (a cura di), La lettura dei
39. tommaso urso, Una biblioteca in di- bilanci delle Organizzazioni di Volonta-
venire. La biblioteca della Facoltà di Let- riato toscane nel biennio 2004-2005
tere dalla penna all’elaboratore. Seconda 56. lorenzo Grifone Baglioni (a cura di),
edizione rivista e accresciuta Una generazione che cambia. Civismo,
40. paolo emilio pecorella, raffaella pie- solidarietà e nuove incertezze dei giova-
robon Benoit, Tell Barri/Kahat: la cam- ni della provincia di Firenze
pagna del 2002. Relazione preliminare 57. monica Bolognesi, laura dona-
41. antonio pellicanò, Da Galileo Galilei ti, Gabriella Granatiero, Acque e ter-
a Cosimo Noferi: verso una nuova scien- ritorio. Progetti e regole per la qualità
za. Un inedito trattato galileiano di ar- dell’abitare
chitettura nella Firenze del 1650 58. carlo natali, daniela poli (a cura
42. aldo Burresi (a cura di), Il marke- di), Città e territori da vivere oggi e do-
ting della moda. Temi emergenti nel mani. Il contributo scientifico delle tesi
tessile-abbigliamento di laurea
43. curzio cipriani, Appunti di museolo- 59. riccardo passeri, Valutazioni impren-
gia naturalistica ditoriali per la successione nell’impresa
44. Fabrizio F.V. Arrigoni, Incipit. Eserci- familiare
zi di composizione architettonica 60. Brunetto chiarelli, alberto simo-
45. roberta Gentile, stefano mancuso, netta, Storia dei musei naturalistici
silvia martelli, simona rizzitelli, Il fiorentini
Giardino di Villa Corsini a Mezzomon- 61. Gianfranco Bettin lattes, marco
te. Descrizione dello stato di fatto e pro- Bontempi (a cura di), Generazione
posta di restauro conservativo Erasmus? L’identità europea tra vissuto
46. arnaldo nesti, alba scarpellini (a e istituzioni
cura di), Mondo democristiano, mondo 62. paolo emilio pecorella, raffaella
pierobon Benoit, Tell Barri / Kahat. La metropolitana fiorentina. Una lettura
campagna del 2003 dei bilanci d’esercizio delle cooperati-
63. Fabrizio F.V. Arrigoni, Il cervello delle ve sociali di Firenze, Pistoia e Prato nel
passioni. Dieci tesi di Adolfo Natalini quadriennio 2004-2007
64. saverio pisaniello, Esistenza minima. 78. lamberto ippolito, La villa del
Stanze, spazî della mente, reliquiario Novecento
65. maria antonietta rovida (a cura di), 79. cosimo di Bari, A passo di critica. Il
Fonti per la storia dell’architettura, del- modello di media education nell’opera
la città, del territorio di Umberto Eco
66. Ornella De Zordo, Saggi di anglistica 80. leonardo chiesi (a cura di), Identità
e americanistica. Temi e prospettive di sociale e territorio. Il Montalbano
ricerca 81. piero degl’innocenti, Cinquant’an-
67. chiara Favilli, maria paola mona- ni, cento chiese. L’edilizia di culto nel-
co, Materiali per lo studio del diritto le diocesi di Firenze, Prato e Fiesole
antidiscriminatorio (1946-2000)
68. paolo emilio pecorella, raffaella 82. Giancarlo paba, anna lisa peco-
pierobon Benoit, Tell Barri / Kahat. La riello, camilla perrone, Francesca
campagna del 2004 rispoli, Partecipazione in Toscana: in-
69. emanuela caldognetto magno, Fe- terpretazioni e racconti
derica cavicchio, Aspetti emotivi e re- 83. alberto magnaghi, sara Giacomozzi
lazionali nell’e-learning (a cura di), Un fiume per il territorio.
70. marco masseti, Uomini e (non solo) Indirizzi progettuali per il parco fluviale
topi (2a edizione) del Valdarno empolese
71. Giovanni nerli, marco pierini, Co- 84. dino costantini (a cura di), Multicul-
struzione di macchine turalismo alla francese?
72. Lorenzo Viviani, L’Europa dei partiti. 85. Alessandro Viviani (a cura di), Firms
Per una sociologia dei partiti politici nel and System Competitiveness in Italy
processo di integrazione europea 86. paolo Fabiani, The Philosophy of the
73 teresa crespellani, Terremoto e ricer- Imagination in Vico and Malebranche
ca. Un percorso scientifico condiviso per 87. carmelo calabrò, Liberalismo, demo-
la caratterizzazione del comportamento crazia, socialismo. L’itinerario di Carlo
sismico di alcuni depositi italiani Rosselli
74 Fabrizio F.V. Arrigoni, Cava. Archi- 88. david Fanfani (a cura di), Pianifica-
tettura in “ars marmoris” re tra città e campagna. Scenari, attori
75. ernesto tavoletti, Higher Education e progetti di nuova ruralità per il terri-
and Local Economic Development torio di Prato
76. carmelo calabrò, Liberalismo, demo- 89. massimo papini (a cura di), L’ultima
crazia, socialismo. L’itinerario di Carlo cura. I vissuti degli operatori in due re-
Rosselli (1917-1930) parti di oncologia pediatrica
77. luca Bagnoli, massimo cini (a cura 90. raffaella cerica, Cultura Organizzati-
di), La cooperazione sociale nell’area va e Performance economico-finanziarie
Finito di stampare presso
Grafiche Cappelli Srl – Osmannoro (FI)

Cuba in The World The World in Cuba

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Cuba in The World The World in Cuba

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Cuba in The World The World in Cuba

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

The volume approaches Cuba as a nation that hosts a convergence of extraor-

Cuba in the World, the World

alessandra lorini (Università di Firenze, Coordinatore)

Firenze university press

isBn 978-88-8453-971-7 (print)

progetto grafico di alberto pizarro Fernández

© 2009 Firenze university press

8. los anarquistas españoles y la formación de la clase trabajadora

this volume provides an introduction to an innovative collaborative

a long historical cycle in which colonialism and traditional imperialism

toronto and Florence, June 2009

although the revolution sanctioned the ideal of a free and indepen-

Florence, 9 June 2009

the making of the cuban republic:

The Making of the Cuban Republic:

in the 1830s, educated cubans had begun to question relationships between

at the end of the eighteenth-century, the island of cuba witnessed

as slavery and colonialism collapsed in the French colony, cuba under-

of slavery in cuba, which occurred precisely as the world’s foremost slave

1. An Unlikely Source, An Impossible Alliance

government of France. these forces came to be called the black auxiliaries;

2. The Circulation of Haitian News in Black Havana

3. Haiti and the Enslaved in Cuba

conspiracy and rebellion. When conspiracies were revealed or suspected,

black revolutionary leaders resounded among the population of color in

usually identified in the record as Juan Fransuá. conspirators thus drew

and forth about potential emissaries of christophe would have circulated

if we return to our original question of how the haitian revolution was

revolution? undoubtedly, the example of the haitian revolution gave lo-

princeton university press, 1985).

settlers8. meanwhile, the lack of labor in Fernando po became pressing and

1. The Problem of the Cuban Emancipados in the 19th Century

the problem of the emancipados and their use as a slave-labor or hard-

and instruction so they could be in the condition to earn a living. Emancipados

if those who have redeemed themselves from slavery by their honor, or

the evocation of the haitian revolution, often recalled by cuban rep-

2. Transferring Emancipados from Cuba to Fernando Po, 1862

3. The Experience of Emancipados on Fernando Po and the

the emancipados and the energetic direction of Governor lópez ayllón, in

4. Cuban Political Prisoners (1866-1869) and the Failure of Fernando

despite the problems aroused by the organization and realization of the

ber 1867, aGam, aG, box 672.

geoisie, including such distinguished cubans as carlos castillo, the direc-

as we have seen in the case of the relations between Fernando po and

in particular, the organization and realization of the 1862 expedition illus-

El 20 de mayo de 1902 nacía la república cubana, después de más de

de igualdad de muchos negros y mulatos.

con las exigencias de una economía dependiente que dispusiera de mano

1. Los años del silencio

En la república recién constituida muchas personas de color – intelectua-

bras oficiales sobre la igualdad racial, el discurso nacionalista hegemónico

periódicos que dirigieron y en otros escritos de aquellos años son exiguas

sociales, 1990), 23-33; helg, Our Rightful, 36-42 y 122.

fue elemento recurrente en sus escritos y marcó una discontinuidad no

[…] el proyecto de inmigración es atentatorio á [sic!] la vida nuestra, á [sic!]

Según la visión de Serra, los factores que obligaban a la población de

consciente de la imposibilidad de lograr igualdad y justicia en el con-

nueva república y para rechazar las injurias de quienes seguían declarando

el equilibrio precario entre cuestión racial y cuestión nacional acabó en